THE French chirurgery, or all the manual operations of chirurgery, with diverse, & sundry Figures, and amongst the rest, certain nuefownde Instruments, very necessary to all the operationes of chirurgery.  
Through jaqves Gvillemeau, of Orleans ordinary Chirurgiane to the King, and sworens in the City of Paris.  
And now truly translated out of Dutch into English by A.M.  
IMPRINTED At Dort by Isaac Canin. M.D.xcvij.    

  

TO THE MOST HIGH, MIGHTY, royal, and victorious Princess, the most Christian, and Virtuose defendresse, of the sincere, & true Christian Religione LADY ELISABETH By the grace of God, Queen of England, France, and Ireland. etc.  
MOst gracious Queen, your royal Mtye. is not ignorant (I trust) of the great services, which through, the hands, of expert chirurgeons, operating on Man's body, are offered as sweet smelling sacrifices, up into the nostrils, of the omnipotent, & Longevalle Emperioure of the Caelestialle influences. Whereof also all renoumnede, & providente Caesaristes, have diligently provided, and furnished themselves, when as they are wounded, by their means, and aid (next unto God) to be cured, and have of their health restauratione. I could not therefore (being also incitatede, and councelede thereunto by diverse and sundry of my friends, & wellwillers) omit this boocke, composed by the most expert, and very learned Chyrurgiane Mr. jaques Guillemeau, addicted Chirurgeon to the King of France, of the which (without doubt) the French natione, do reap great service, and commodity thereof, and therefore I have for the service and utility of your Renoumnede majesties subjects, & people, and also to the commodity of our country (being unitede in the bond of amity together) with all expeditione possible for me caused it to be translated both into English, and Lowdutch because that all younger, and junior chirurgeons, might herein behold, and view, (as in a resplendente Lookinge-glasse) the most part, and principal Instruments of Chyrurgerye also with a very excellent method, and doctrine, for all the especialle operations, which a Chyrurgiane (or any other man being in necessity) other by land, or by water, might have any use for. And seeing that there is no King, nor Prince on earth, which with such fervent desire, and fidelity endeavoureth by all means possible, to maytayne, and protect, the health and wealth, both of body and soul of their subjects, and people, as your (most Illustriouse Mtye.) doth for your peculiar inhabitants, being of God thereunto constituted, and ordaynede. The excellence of this boocke, hath therefore, incitatede, & as it wear compelled me to use this audacity (in sign of gratitude, for so many, & innumerable benefits, which next after God, of your Royal Mtye. through your continualle aid, & opitulatione we reap) humblelye to present, and dedicate this very necessary boocke, unto your most Magnificente Mtye. firmly trusting, & assuredly hoping, that your renoumnede Mtyes. subjects, not only within, but also far without your Mtyes. Realms, & dominiones, shall heerebye be greatly aydede, and thereof also reap great commodity. I have effected this work, partly to demonstrate the sincere love, & affectione wherewith (through the good acqvayntance of your Mtyes. Gentlemen, Captains, and valiant Soldiers, which your most Royal Mtye. hath vouchsafed so many years to send us) I affect your Mtye. as also to cause all men together with me gratefully to acknowledge, the ineffable mercy of God, which hath imbued, and adorned your renoumnede Mtye. with so many noble, worthy, and excellent virtues, and very miraculously hath defended, and protected, your Grace, against all the sly, and wily practices of your majesties enemies, by this means to continue, and by your hands to protect, not only your dominion, and other nations, your neightvours and unitede subjects (amongst the which we account ourselves, most bounden to your Mtye.). But also hereby to cause the flourishing of all spiritual, & corporal arts in the midst of your Realm, and Kingdom. Amongst which, the Art, and Science of Chirurgery is esteemede, & accoumptede (as the first, and most worthieste, and necessary part of Physic) whereof I here present your Mtye. one of the most exquisite, and perpolite boockes touching, and concerning the same. Most humbly in treating your Mtye. that it would vouchsafe your Highness not to miscontrue this my temerity, but take, and construe my audacity, which I have in this my dedication used, to no other end, then that with all my heart, and mind I endevoure to gratify your most renoumnede Mtye. & be at the command according to my bounden duty) of your most Royal Mtyes. subjects, as much as is possible for me. Thus fearing lest I might be some interruption, & hindrance unto your Highness, I heerwith, commit your Royal Mtye. into the divine protectione, and hands of the omnipotent King, and Father of Heaven, whom incessantly I pray, to give ominous, & fortunate event to your divine attempts, to the furtherance of his holy word, and reformed church, being congregated together under the shadow of your highness wings.  
Your Mtyes most humble, & wellwillinge subject, who in sign of gratitude addicteth himself whole to the service of your Highness and your subjects. Maximiliane Bouman Chirurgeon at Dort.   

TO THE KING  
MAn being allianced, both with Heaven, and earth, is through his corporal necessities constrained, to conterate, and spend the best time of his Life, in Sleep, & repose: notwithstanding being resuscitated, & erected out of a profound, & deep somniation, through the best part of himself, which is his Soul, he pursueth, only and favoureth very soberly, the most vile and abject things, the concupiscence, and appetite whereof, he communicateth, and participate the, with brute, and irrationalle beasts. For man is not only this mask or vizard, and this figurated and articulated Massa in certain members, which with our eyes we discover and behold, & with our fingers we may touch and sensibly feel: but is rather, the virtue, and internalle for me, which effectuateth life in him, vigour, agility, and temperature, the same being as it wear, a radiant beam a little sparkle, and parcel, of the Divinitye, transmitted, and descended out of the most glorious Empire of Heaven, to effectuate, and bring to pass in this wretched world, in our body, a short, and brief ligatione: For who is there which doubteth, that the Soul, remembering, and calling to mind her first original, would not address, and endevoure herself to learn, yea and if it wear possible to relerne, all those things, which be honourable unto her Creator, & might also be profitable to all other creatures? & for this cause it is, why we have not our countenances declined towards the earth as the brute beasts, but have them elevated towards Heaven, because through such contemplacione, and by reading of the true book of life, we might draw thereout, and practice on the order, and imitate, the constance which the celestial corpse, do observe, and one their perpetual, and profitable agitation thereof. Let us therefore consider on the Sun, which is as it wear a Prince, and moderatoure of all other celestial constellations: what doth she otherwise effect through her environing round of the earth, then light us, calefye, and warm us, vivisye, & administre life unto us? but what commodity, and profit is it unto us to search the sun on high have we not the earth it self which with our feet we inculcate, and tread one, and accuse the same to be brute, & insensible, doth she refuse, to receive, and conceive, and again continually, and without cessation superfluously procreate, and liberally impart unto us, all that which is necessary, unto our vesture aliment, and nurture? It wear also indeed great shame, perfidiousness, and execrable disloyalty, and treason for us, whom God hath adorned with so lively, vigorous, and fruitful a spirit, that as all things which are inanimate, doc travail, and labour for our profit, we should show ourselves stupidouse, and involuntary to help the one the other in all things possible and advance them: for as the wise, and sage men heretofore have said, that even as all the mundayne, and terrestrialle things, are created for man, and his use, in like sort also are men created for God, and the one man for the other. This consideration most illustrious, & mighty King, hath urged, and impelled me, after that I next unto your majesty, have discharged my duty, and function, which I was owinge unto your Highness, and that especially in curing of my Lord, the Earl, of Montpensier and my Lords of Buhy, & of Montigny, to peruse, & revolve certain rescriptiones, and memorials, which I had compiled, and collected together, when I served the diseased King, as well touching the manual operations, as also the comparison, and conference of the ancient instruments of Chyrurgerye, with the nue invented, because through the discourse & rehearsal of the same, and by the discriptione and defiguratione of the foresaid instruments, to demonstrate, what commodity we might hope, and reap out of the one more than out of the other: All which, having according to my possibillirye, & as much as this pitiful time would permit & allow of finished, I have embouldened myself, to consecrate, and dedicate the same unto your most renoumned Majesty: whom supliantlye & with all humility I desire, request, and entreat, benignly to receive it, as a gift, or present, which is not disagreeing unto the present time, neither will be discommodious to your highness. For because this Kingdom of France, is blinded with rage, & error, through the fatal censure of the most fearful God, doth ruinated itself, into his own spoil, of what art I pray (seeing that all other arts do decrease, under this fear of wars) might it rather implore comfort & secourse, than of Physic or Chyrurgerye? And what is more royal, & more magnifical here on earth, yea and more divine, then to recreate the afflicted, to relevate, & consort the depressed, & humbled, and to restore health to all men, without which all dulcor, & pleasantness of our life is nothing else then amaritude, and Gaul? Wherefore most magnificent, and renoumned King, permits pray and humbly entreat your highness, that under your Heroical name, this Pamphlet may be published, because through the same, as also through your most illustrious acts, of the which the posterity, perpetually shall not be silent, may be revealed, and known, how fain your Highness saw this poor Kingdom of France flourish again: which now seemeth to respire, and in short time exsperateth to have an ominous and happy end of her miseries, and calamities, through the prudence wherewith your Majestical valour, and vigilant valiance is accompanied, and associated. From Paris, the 15. of Septembre, 1594.  
your most humble, and most obedient subject, and servitoure GVILLEMEAV.   

The Epistle to the benevolent Reader.  
THere is a common saying, & is now taken for a common proverb: that all things have their time, their place, and their sayson: by which occasion diverse, & sundry enterprises, which indeed of themselves are good, do lose their grace, and decorum, only because in their condecent time they wear not practised, & put in ure. But it is not so with the utility, which the common wealth expecteth, through our industry, principally, & especially, through the studies of good arts: such fruits are never importune, neither at any time out of season, neither abortive: but are at all times very welcome, & profitable, on what time soever, on what manner, or of whom they might be brought: In which fact, the maxim, or proverb may very truly be spoken of Maximo Fabio, who saide, that all intentions, which to the publiqve profit of the commonewealthe wear assayed, & intended is always well hoped of, to have a good event, & is esteemede to be a happy intent, or praemeditatione: And contrarily those are esteemede infeliciouse, & unfortunate, & are of a funestalle, and sorrowful event, which are intended, and attended, unto the damage of the commone wealth.  
Wherefore I need not doubt, of that which I pretend to maintain, and publish into light, shall of any one whatsoever, be taken in bad part, because I have conceavede, and published the same in time of jars, and wars: For what time might I have elected more convenient, & proper, & more profitable to meditate one this Chyrurgerye, which compraehendeth her operatione, & proper Instruments, then at this time, France being in all qvarters, & in all parts, armed, & in weapons? & animated against her own entrails, & we having our own minds exulcerated as it wear, and hardened the one against the other, by which occasione we to our great grief, and sorrow, must behold, at all hours, so many poor wounded, & mutilated persons, their corpse being wounded through the rage, and malevolence of their foes, on the which we are constrained to employ our hands, & instruments to reduce again the same to their former, and accustomed health again? Or what might they otherwise hope, and expect of me, then that which is according, and agreeing unto my vocatione, & calling▪ For as the Poëte sayeth▪ 
The Neptunist of winds, of storms, and of tempest  
Discoursinnge on the shore, to his mates can talk best;  
The Cerialist, of Oxen, Horse, and Ploughs  
The cruel Martialist, of wounds, and of his blows.   
Therefore having seen, and also with my own hands practised the space of twenty years the operation of Chyrurgerye, in most of the famous, & renoumned Cities, of France, & the Low Countries, as well one great, as small persons, and that with such diligence, and method, that I coupling, and comparing, the use of the ancient chirurgeons, with the practice of the modern, and latter chirurgeons, I then endeavoured myself, as much as the disease, & the Patient also would permit me, to temperate, the rigour, and severity of the first Operatours, or chirurgeons, through the supple, and gentle or sweet dexterity of those which followed, to assimilate them the one with the other, supplying in the counterchang, of that which was wanting in the one, through the dexterity, and industrious curiosity of the other, reducing the same unto the best form of being, & also the writings, or scriptions, of the most expertest Chyrurgians, of this present time, with the writings & judgement of the whole, through the controulinge of the writings of the one & of the other: So that I have intended to make a collection: in form of a Manual for myself, to opitulate, & address my memory, in time of need, and promptly to effectuate, any manual, and not vulgar operatione: but the liberality through the which I am so voluntary, to communicate the same unto certain of my good friends, who are studious, & desiruose of Chyrurgerye, hath precipitated me into this present prodigality, of the which I suddenly retired & drew myself backward, blushing & as it wear ashamed, considering the meanness thereof, as being unworthy to come into light (although notwithstanding every one hath a vain imaginatione, & affectione, unto the same which is proceeded from him) so that I omit the hardiness which I might have had, to publish the same unto the print, I could very difficultly contain my desirous, & covetuous hands, of that which I with great labour, diligence, and through long experience had collected together, to have in one moment abolished the same, if I had not purposed to reserve the same for my own particular, and peculiar commodity. But my foresaid friends debellating against my timorous & fearful defensions, through certain experience of time passed: to wit, that my book of the diseases of the eyes, after certain days he was committed to the press, was unto all Chirurgeons very necessary, & profitable: and that my first, & second Tables of anatomy, had administered unto all men such great service, and promptitude of the Anatomy, and cognisance of the parts of man's body: They have in the end resolved me of my doubtful fear of prodigality, adding also thereby that this fear of prodigality, could be damageable unto no man then unto me, and that it could make no breach into my credit at all.  
Through these foresaid remonstrations being convicted, & persvaded, under the pretext of great furtherance, which younger chirurgeons might hereby reap, and not being possible for me any longer to resist, the importunity of certain sprouts, & beginners of Chyrurgerye, who wear of opinion, that this present piece of work, with all the deformities thereof, might be profitable for them, and being certified, that if by any means they could attain them into their hands, they would commit the same to the print even such as it wear. So that I am constrained to employ myself certain hours of the day, in correcting of the same and a little more imbellishe, and adorn, the same, with 4 portrayctures of man's body because the same entering into the world, might be effected with more favour, & credit, whereof the two first, do demonstrate all external parts, as well anteriorlye, as posteriorlye, & in the other two, all the superficial Veins, are evidently laid open unto us, which as little rivers do run through the face & through all other external parts of the body extend themselves as well behind as before, because the same being of the young chirurgeons noted, they with less danger might open any of them.  
Farther I have enriched this work, with diverse defigurations of Instruments, not of all Instruments, but of those only, which I esteemed to be most necessary: For even as the sage, prudent, and wise Nature, hath instituted such an order, to man's body, that she with few parts, can accomplish, many great and excellent actions, In like sort must the Chyrurgiane, an imitatoure, and administre of Nature, endevoure, and constraygne himself, with few Instruments to execute, and effect, many, & great Operations. And to speak the plain truth all this great company and treasure house of Engines, Molitiones, and of other v Instruments, are more for curiousity, & oftentatione, then for any necessity, and use. I am also very certain of that which our Hypocrates sayeth, to wit, that we ought not to constraygne, or restrain, the liberty of our corpse, and the Operations, unto the penury, and deficience of Instruments: but much more amplify, and enrich the same, unto the commodity of the body, and ease of the Operations: but I would rather exoptate, and desire, that this vanity, & superstitious bravadinge of Instruments, wear ruled with more religious mediocritye.  
Also I have made, a great & ample Table, or Index, in the end of the Boock, wherein through Alphabetical order I have illustrated, the most notablest, & difficultest things, which in the inqvisitione might be an impediment, unto the unexpert in the art of Chyrurgerye, in seeking of their farther commodity. And if so be any man object unto me, that this my discourse, is only compiled together of certain rapsodyes of the antiqve chirurgeons: I willingly here confess, & acknowledge, that in this Treatise, there is very little, or nothing at all of mine own Inventione: For I am not the man which liveth by an other mans mutuated supellectilles and I rather publiqvely confess, that I have collected all this out of ancient chirurgeons, being great shame for me to be repraehended, and surprised, of a secret theft. For what noveltyes are under the Sun? as the wise man sayeth: And as the Comicus sayeth, what should we now adays say, which hath not before been spoken? But I may at all times with verity say, that I am not entered into this matter to sow, and feminate the same in an infertille ground: For I have added thereunto great amendment, and have eradicated, & weeded out all spinosities, & thistles, whereof they wear replenished with great difficulties, seqvestringe on the one side malevolent herbs, which choacked the good fruits of the truth, composinge all things in good order, to add thereunto clearness, and facility: through the which excellent, modern, & ancient Authors may be understood of those, which can attain to the klowledge of no strange langvages. Nether have such Personages, out of which I have taken any of their operationes, observed in all their treatises one order, perfectly, and one manner of operatione, but one diverse places, and in diverse Books they have described them: wherefore they are not to be reprehended, who with a conseqvence, have redacted them together, because they might the easier be compraehended, and understood. And although those which heretofore have written of Instruments have contented themselves only with the representation, of the simple Figures: In have here endeavoured to present dimensions, and proportiones, their longitude, and crassitude, and so naturally, that neither the Chyrurgiane, nor the Smithe which we cause to compose the same might have any occasione of hesitation, or doubt, neither fall into any error, of their commensuratione appropriating unto everye one of them his name in Greecke, Latin, & French, & report also his own opportunity, and usage thereof.  
name in Greecke, Latin, and French, and report also his own opportunity, & usage thereof▪  
I know right well, that in this work their will be some operations of Chyrurgerye wanting, and that it is not whole perfect: But I assure myself, that every man of a good spirit, & judgement, will acknowledge, that I of purpose have omitted the same, and that especially because certain operations, thereof are not now a days in use, & practise: as is the manner of inscisione of the skin of the Head, which the Greeks call Pericuphismos: Also the extirpatione of woman's breasts which hang toe long: of the Cauterizinge of the Liver, and of the Mil●e: of the extraction of a stone out of the blather, because I myself am not therein instructed: All which operations, I permit to practise the right worshipful Mon sr. Collo Chyrurgiane at Paris, a parsonage so rare therein that all France hath not his like, with all dexterity to effectuate such an operatione: In like sort also Mr. Pineau, also Chyrurgiane at Paris, which is the resplendente star of Light unto all the Anatomists of these times. Nether do I doubt, that he which diligently searcheth this work, that he shall find any diffaulte therein: for I doubt whether that any curious people should accomplish, the same, seeing the Author himself could not sufficiently accomplish the same: But I hope, to receive of the benevolent Reader, some excuse, he noting, and considering, that such operations which are very titillouse can not at one time be begun, and also at the same time finished, and that it is sufficient, with great difficulty rightly to imprint the same. Wherefore if this enterprise seem alienate, and strange unto any body, and they mocked therewith, I certify unto them, that I envy no man, which can meliorize the same: And as touching those which seem not to be in the world for any other use, then to censure, & repraehende others without willing yea and being able to effectuate aught themselves, let them iovise, & joy themselves, of their privileadge, as long as pleaseth them, wherewith I do not much molest myself. Otherwise, I have written only for the junior, & younger chirurgeons, and not for those, which are whole and completlye edoctrinized, and search for nothing else then for a perfection of all things: I have not exalted my heart so hight, as those severe censurers would require, and I suffice myself with my accustomed manner, & with the behouldinge of the commodity of the French iunioritye, of that which my small wit, could set forth: I only desire this one thing of them, that they would vouchsafe to meliorize the same, as I certainly know they well can, and do not retain their own commodity thereof. And it will be a great joy, and peasure unto me that therein they surpass me: & I shall very well know to apply the same to my profit, and commodity, which they through their great labour, and industry, have brought forth, neither will I conceal that which of them I shall have learned.  
And although it be the opinion of the Sages that we ought not to lightly, thereveale secrets, of Physic, unto the common, & vulgar people treating of such matters, in their maternal, & motherly language, because it might be esteemed of little worth, & be of all men little accounted of: And although I could easily, have uttered, and expressed my intent, in latin, yet I rather published the same in our French language: And that first of all, because all annciente Learned men, whether they be Greeks, Arabers, or Latinistes, have written all their doctrine, and experience in the maternal language. The primates, and princes of Physic, Hippopocrates, and his faithful, and fidele interpreter, & commitatoure Galen, Paulus Aegineta & Oribasius do witness of the same. Avicenna, and Averro, have also done the same, writing in the Arabiane Language. Celsus and Plinius, the first and they which have only written in Latin, have also done their endevoure, and have also desired to imbellishe, and eternize, their Latin language, & country, through the terms, and theorems of Physic. furthermore also, by how much the more a thing is more common so much the more is it better, and by so much the more may this science of all men be known, lauded, and extolled. The Physic of Hypocrates, and of Galen, the philosophy, of Plato, and of Aristotle, are they therefore obscured or less esteemed of, because they wear writtene of the ancients in Latin, and Arabic language? And those which of our time, have written, in French Dutch & Italiane, as many renoumnede men have done, who in all sorts have endeavoured, to do some service to the common wealth, had they here in committed any thing worthy of repraehension? they which write in unknown langvages, besides that they are profitable unto strangers, and to their onre native soil discommodious, are assimilated and resembled unto farmers, which would rather till, an other man's field, than their own proper ground, to the great dishonour, shame, & detriment, of their country, and inhabitants.  
Wherefore I most humblely entreat, and obsecrate all men, to receive gratefully, & thank fully this my labour, and divine desire, which I have to see the junior chirurgeons, with all their minds industriously labouring to follow & imitate me: & if so be it pleased & that any more learned man than I am vouchsafed to perlegate with pleasure, & employ a small of their time in the reading, of my scriptsons, and writings, I most courtiouslye desire them, that they would more with good will, then with a spirit, which to narrowlye espieth, to repraehende the faults, vue & circumsplectlye note the defaults which might be therein: Lest that through to great curiosity, and to serious subtlety, that same happen to me, as in times passed, happened to the Philosopher Theodosio, who turning over the precepts of philosophy with his right hand from his Anditors, they who with their left hand could also reach him, through malice, and impurity of spirit, turned, & misconstrued the same in bad sort. Which if so by any means I can attain unto, and know that this my work, (published through the importunity of the iunioure chirurgeons) shallbe aggreeable, and acceptable, unto many, it will then administre courage, unto me, to pursue, and address the remanent of my studies, wherein I am entered: that is, to medidate, and to publish for the younger chirurgeons, all those things, whereby God's honour might be increased, and be profitable, for the common wealth.  

Candidus imperti meliora, vel utere nostris:  
Carpere vel noli nostra, vel ede tua.   

Some men do read, to reap some good thereof,  
Others to mock, and howled thereof a soffe,  
It is more ease herein to reprehend,  
Then any thing therein, for to amend.    

To the gentle, & curtiouse Reader.  
SOmetimes with myself considering, & in the balance of my cogitations weighinge, how perilous, & dangerous an attempt it is (most benevolence, benign, & curtiouse Reader) in these times, and ages, I omit either to write, or divulgate any work, but to translate it out of one language into an other. Yet I would not, nor indeed could not partly to satisfy the great importunity of certain wellwillers of the English natione, and people, but especially of my reverente master, who although no English man, yet I assure thee one who through certain acqvayntance of English Captains in these Lowcountryes, doth affect all English men, & would hereby show himself grateful not only unto them, but to the whole society of our majesties subjects, by incitatinge, & as it wear compelling me his poor servant here unto, obiecting unto me my inconstant levity, who having receavede so many, & so great benefits of the people, & students in England would not impart this excellent, exquisite, and perpolite piece of work unto them, seeing that also the Printer, was so willing to incitate me here unto, here by also expressing his affectionated good will both to our most renoumnede Majesty (whom God long praeserve) and her subjects. I standing in a dump, & being with these objections mute, Nesciens quid agerem, aut quo me verterem, not knowing where to hide myself, at the last as one being erected, and suscitatede out of a swoon, I feeblely made this answer, that it fitted not neither was agreeing to my harsh, rude, and illiterate style to begin such a piece, of work, and I being no English man borne might chance (as without doubt I have) to take Sissiphus his labour on me, in not writing good English. And which is more, lest I should attribute any occasion of offence to my most reverend brother who being a Doctor of Physic, & I but an illiterate, & ignorant youth applying my mind unto Chyrurgerye, might suppose me to be so pratchante, & high-minded that I sought to equal myself with him who through his affectione he beareth to England hath also translated an excellent book of Physic. But at the last I being fully resolved of my doubts, & of them persuaded, that it would of all men be taken, & construed to a good end, I could not any longer resist their importunate assaults on the imbicille walls of my answers, but they having therein made a breach I was constrained to yield myself a captive, & acknowledge them victors in consenting to their requests, by taking this labour of Atlas on my shoulders. Therefore I would not willingelye, have that this light inconstancy should be objected against me, for not imparting unto thee (most gentle Reader) these my obliterate lines of this expert, excellent, and perpolite Chyrurgiane jaqves Gvillaemeau, whom for his excellenty of his manuale operations I assure thee such a one hath never in English been translated: Behold now therefore to show myself greatefulle for those benefits which whilom I have receavede in this flourishing, & blessed country of England, both in the Vniversitye, and in the other Cities thereof, I here humblelye present unto thee this my first attempt, who although indeed no Englisheman borne, yet bearing a true English man's heart unto our Majesty endevouringe continually to show myself grateful unto her, & her subjects. And although it be more gross, & impolite, then decent, & convenient, to answer the fine, & scoffing heads, & wits of these times who almost can do nothing else then scoff, mock, & flout, at other men's industryes, and labours, yet I pray the (gentle Reader) not to eesteeme them all vain, indecent, and inutile, for Non cuivis homini contingit adire Corinthum, every man can not have a nose like a shoeing horn, that is every one hath not such a fertile wit as they have for I acknowledge myself to have but a barrane, & unfrictefulle ground & that there doth nothing then Filix innascere agris meis, and how is it possible then to reap good Fruits thereof? And know (curtiouse Reader that I take it to be a godly thing to publish such a piece of work for the aid, & succour of all young chirurgeons to operate, & work on man's body, for what more praeciouse thing is there on earth then man: and if then we endeavour to praeserve, the health of our bodies it is then necessary to have such boockes out of which we may learn the means whereby we might do it, & I have the more willingly translated the same into the vulgar & English tongue because every one hath not the gift of langvages, & although it be not so exqvisitelye done as it wear convenient it should, tamen est laudanda voluntas, I have done my best indevoure thereunto, for there where ability lacketh, my goodwill notwithstanding is to be receavede, and not to be repugned, & rejected. Nether shalt thou here (gentle Reader) have any exquisite method, nor the flowing style of Demostlenes, and eloquence of Cicero, but a plain common, and vulgar style for it was not of the Author composed in the first for such men as are expert in these operations, but for the commonaltye, and younger chirurgeons, that they heerbye might learn the true operations of Chyrurgerye. If my bold audacity, or audacious boldness shall administer occasione of offence to any man, I recurre to that common refuge, which promiseth remissione to him which giveth his first assault. Wherefore if the learned will vouchsafe to read this my first beginning without envy, or malice against me, I shall think my industry very wellimployede & not to have bestowed all my labour in vain: but if through the harshness of my illiterate & rude style they are caused to lay it out of their hands, & sight, yet I humblely request them to take him up again not for my sake, but for his own, who although defiled, & polluted with my impolitede style, yet they may gather in the garden of his exqvisite works, as fragrant gillowfers of Chyrugicall operations (I dare avouch) as any ever wear in English. And if there be any of Momus his partakers, which do revile, scoff, & flout me, who are so scrupulous, & praeiudicialle, that with no Physic they can be cured of their critical disease, tell them I pray thee (gentle Reader) from me, that it is far easier for them to repraehende, then to correct or meliorize, and that they dare not for the best cap they have take such a thing in hand, lest they peradventure should fall into the pit which for other they had made, for there is an old, and inveterate proverb as I remember in Latin Quod tibi fieri non vis, alterine feceris, let them (I say) read this proverb & I trust it will be a purgation for them. What shall I say more? for indeed I can say nothing as the Comicus sayeth quod non fit dictum prius, If therebe any which with their Argus eyes, will vue, & so narrowlye princke, and look, for faults in this my labour without doubt they shall find faults sufficient, but I would request them to leave their eyes at home with Lamia, when they loock for any faults here in, & spit in a box, the spittle of quips, & quiddityes, & cast them behind some chest of oblivione that they never may any more be spoken of, and let them not despise this my poor farthing, for it may be hereafter shall find myself doing with some other piece of work more excellent. If therefore (benevolent Reader) we find this work to be acceptable unto thee, my master shall think his motion to have been blessed and happy, the Printer his irritatione commodious, and I my labours, and industryes well bestowede, and it shall be as it wear a Calcar unto me thereafter to employ myself with the translation of some other excellent piece of work. If not I would friendly desire such as scoff heerat, to read, & diligently consider these two verses which the Author reciteth, and are these.  
Candidus imperti meliora, vel utere nostris:  
Carpere vel noli nostra, vel ede tua.  
Thus being loath to interrupt thee any longer with vain, & illiterate speeches I commit thee to the tuition of God thy Creator, & his son Ihesu Christ who with his effused blooredeemed thee, and of the holy ghost, who inspireth thee with his spirit, continually wishinge increase of all virtues, and long life unto thee.  
Thine as his own, or else not worthy of vital breath. A. M.   

THE THESAURARYE, OR STOREHOUSE of Chyrurgerye: whereby are also added Four figures, or portrayctures of man's body: Two of the which do demonstrate unto us, all the external parts of the same: and the other two, the most visiblest veins fit for phlebotomye, which lie dispearced under the skin Through jaqves Gvillemean of Orleans, Ordinatede Chyrurgiane to the King, and sworn in his Chastelet at Paris.  

The preface.  
WE say in France for an ancient, & verified proverb: That it is not sufficient enough that we do any thing, but that we do the same exquisitlye, & profitablelye. Which can not with any convenience be executed or accomplished, without knowledge of the causes, which do lead, and conduct us, to the perfectione of the effect: So that according to the sayings of the Philosophers, Science is nothing else, than the knowledge of that, 
What Science i●  which we have in hands, through his proper causes. Unto the which all Artificers must endevoure to attain: through the which Chyrurgerye, although notwithstanding, we can not attain to the knowledge, & cognisance of the present subject, & the accidents thereof, through such occasions as we have discribede, the same being as it wear an inferior science, and depending, on the Naturalle, and Physical sciences: we ought notwithstanding to know at the least this point, and to observe, and follow the same, and that through the most sensible, and apparent causes, which are Materialle, and Instrumentalle.  
Which hath moved me to represent, 
Wherefore the Author hath collocated the Instruments in the forefrontutes of his book.  and as it wear evidently unto all men's eyes demonstrate, not only the materialle, and formalle principles, whereof our subject, of man's body, is created, and compiled together, but the Instrumentalles, through the which we as by such means maintain the same in his natural health, as long as there is any health afore hands, and also again restore the same, being imbecillede, & debilitated, through the combat which we have against the disease, or sickness.  
Nether to speak truth is it a thing convenient, and seemly, that any great, or worthy Capitayne, should assail his enemy, before he apparently know him, and have for his own commodity, and advantage made electione, and choice of the place, & field of combat, hath ordrede and also armed his soldiers: Noah less also, must he besiege any strong, 
The office, & duty of a good Capitayne.  and fortified City, without first having advertisement, & knowledge, of the most feeblest place of the same, & where in storming his soldiers may least of all be endamaged, he having sufficient admunitione, to make a breach.  
In like sort also wear it great temerity, and rashness, for any Chyrurgiane, to take in hand any operatione, of Chyrurgerye, without first of all considering one the subject, 
The office of a good Chirurgiane.  one the which he intendeth, and purposeth to operate, or work, conveniently to situate, and collocate the same, and being fournishede of all his Instruments convenient for such an operatione, thereby to attain unto his pretended intent. I humbly reqveste, the most benevolent, and gentle Reader, to have me excused, although I have not collocatede, them in such numbered, as I willingelye could wish and desire I had, having notwithstanding caused the same to be represented: but through the injuries of this most disturbed, & molested time, there are some of the Plates (unto my great molestation, and sorrow,) lost, and could not by any means possible so suddenly be again pourtrayctede, & engraved: the which notwithstanding in the next editione I hope to collocate them.   


Explication of the Characters which are contained in the first figure of man's body: wherein G. signifieth a Greecke word, and L. a Latin word.  
That which from A, to a 10, is contained, is called the Head, in Greecke Cephale, & in Latin Caput. And that part which is noted with, A, is in G, called Bregma, and in L, Synciput: In this place the future's Sagittale, & Coronale do assemble themselves: on which place we may conveniently apply the Cauteryes.  
The forehead, G, Metopon, Episcynion L, Frons, that which from the B, to a 10. is called the face G, Prosopon, L, Fancies, Vultus.  
The Temples, G, Corcai, Cortaphai, L, Tempora, & that which standeth besides the same, G, louli, L, Lanugo, that which is contained, betwixt, 2, 5, D, & E, is called the Eye, G, Omina, Ophthalmos, L, Oculus, the concavity of the same G, Pyelis, L, Oculi pelvis, the white of the Eye, G, Legas, L, Albedo oculi, the Apple, G, Core, L, Pupilla, the Circle, or compass of the Eye, G, Iris, L, Iris, the Corners of the Eyes, G, Canthi, L, Hirci, Oculorun anguli: The great corners of the Eye close to the Nose, noted with D, in G, Ranteres, L, Magnus angulus, The lesser corner, finitimating the Temples, E, in G, Poropias', L, Parvus angulus. The Brows, G, Blepharon, L, Palpebra, the external part of the Brows, G, Chelas Entricomata, Tarsos, L, Palpebrarun crepido, The edges of the Eye lids, G, Blepharides; L, Cilia: that part above the brows, G, Tyloiophryes, Episcynia Latin supercilia, that separation, which is between the brows, noted with this figure 3, G, Mesophryon, L, Glabella, Intercilium.  
The Apple of the Eye, G, Melon, L, Malum.  
The concavitye of the Face.  
The Cheeckes, G, Gnathos, L, Bucca.  
The Nose, G, Rhis, Nyctor, L, Nasus, the end of the Nose, G, Sphairion, L, Globulus, that which hangeth one the end thereof, G, Chiron, L, Columna: The Nostrils, G, Pterygia, L, Alae, Pinuloe, the separation between the nostrils, G, Isthmion, Stylis, L, Nates. The little gutture under the nose in the upper lip, G, Philtron, L, Lacuna, Amatorium.  
The Ear, G, Ous, L, Auris, the whole, G, Cyrtoeides, L, Cubiformis, the superioure part thereof noted with this figure 6, G, Pterygia, L, Pina, The inferior part of the Ear Tendron, noted with this figure 7, G, Lobos, L, Fibra, Ansa Auriculae, the reduplicatede semicircle, G. Elix, Coclia, L, Capreolus, The concavitye of the Ear, noted with the figure 8, G, Conc●e, L, Concha, Cavum auriculae, the eminence by the Temples, G, Tragos, L, Antehircum. The auditory apertion, G, Acoe, L, Meatus auris, The circumvolutions which are therein, G, Camara, L, Testudo. The Mouth, G, Stoma Logeion, L, Os, the Corners of the Mouth, G, Chalmus, L, Chalmus, The Lip, G, Cheilos, L, Labrum, Labium the upper part of the Lip, G, Proscheila, L, Prolabra: The Place where the Lips join themselves, G, Prostomione that place where the moustaches begin, G, Mystax. The Chin, G, Anthereon, L, Mentum, the concavitye which is thereon, G, Typos, Nympha, L, Nympha:  
Λ, All that which is comprehended between the K, and the a, Λ, is the Neck, G, Tracheloes.  
Collum the foremost part thereof is called the thro' te, G, Hypodeins, L, Rumen, the nodation of the gorge, or throat, or Adam's bit, G, Branches, Larynx, L, Guttur, the Windepipe, G, Sphage, L, jugulatio.  
L, G, Leucama, L, Ingulis, proximum cavum.  
M, G, Cleides, Ligulae, that which is contained from M, N, Q, is the Breast, G, Thorax, L, Pectus.  
N, The Breasts, G, Mastoi, Tittoi, L, Mammae, Vbera, the dug, G, Thele L, Papilla, the circumtacent place of the dugs, G, Phos, L, Areolae.  
The Brestbone, G, Sternon, L, Os pectoris.  
P, The situatione of the Heart, G, Procardion, L, Antecardium.  
The concavitye, or pit of the Stomach, G, Stomachoilis, L, Os ventriculi.  
The little Brestebone in the pit of the same, under the thorax, G. Xyphoides, L. Ensifornis, Malungranatum, that which is comprehended between Q, and Z, is the Belly, G, Gaster, L, Venture.  
The superior part of the Belly, G, Epigastrion, L, Superventrale, under the which, is situated, the inferior orifice of the stomach, as is the entrance thereof under the fift rib, of the Breast.  
S, The sides, G, Hypochondria, L, Praecordia, under the which in the right side is situated the Liver, and in the left side the stomach.  
The Naule, G, Omphalos, L, Vmbilicus, of some Vmbilicus castratus the midst of the same, G, Mesomphalon, L, Cavum, that which is rimpeled, G, Graia, Vetula, L, Vetula, here under is situated, the great revolution of the gut jeiunum, and this is the Centrum of the body.  
V, The Loins, or Lungs, G, Cholago, above the which, the Kidneys, are situated, and inferiourly in the right side, the gut Caecum, & in the left, the revolution of the gut Colon.  
The inferior part of the Belly, G, Hypogastrion, L, Abdomen, Sumen: under the which is situated, the great circumvolution of the gut Ileon, the Blather, the Womb, and the Longanum.  
Y, The superioure part of the Hip, or Flanks, G, Lagonas, L, Ilia: under the which is situated a part of the gut Ileon, the Testicles, or Horns, of the Womb, & the spermaticall vessels of the women, when they are gravide with Child, and the Vreteres.  
The bone pubis, G, Epiction, L, Pecten, Pubes.  
Δ, The Flanks, G, Bubones, L, Ingvina: they are also called the Emunctoryes of the Liver, and therefore Areteus calleth them Loimodes, Bubones, L, Soboles jecoris.  
The yard, or virile member, G, Caulos, L, Coals, Penis, Mentula, Virga: The Head, G, Lalanos, L, Glans, the concavitye of the yard, G, Ourita, L, Vrinarum iter: the top thereof, G, Posthi, L, Praeputium, the end of the top, G, Acoposthion, L Summum praeputij. The purse, or bag of the testicles, G, Oscheos, L, Scrotum, or Scortum: that suture, or seam which passeth a long the viritilye and maketh a separatione in the Koddes or Scrotum, G, Ralph, L, Sutura, and from thence towards the fundament, G. Taurus, that which is one both sides of this suture is called, G, Perineon Femen.  
a, The shoulder, G, Omos, L, Humerus, the superior part of the shoulder, G, Epomis, L, Humeri summitas: that which is compraehended from a, unto a, o, is called, G, Cheir, L, Manus, and from a, unto a, b, is called the lesser Arm, G, Brachion, L, Brachium. The Arm pit, G, Maschale, L, Ala, Axilla.  
〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉  
Declaratione of all the parts of man's body  
This conseqventlye ensueth on the second leaf.  
The Elbow, G. Olecranon, L Cubitus. All the rotundity of the left Arm, from a, to a, dis called, G. Brae●onos, L Humeri rotunditas: In the right Arm, d, demonstrateth, the end, and the Tendone, of the Mascle Delthoide,  
The muscle of the Arm, G. Ancon, L. Lacertus.  
Π, The place on the Arms where we apply the Fontanelles.  
The bending of the Arm: That which is collocated between the foresaid, f unto a, g, is called the forearm, G. Olenos, L. cubitus, & the superioure part of the arm, G. Cercis, L. Radius, the inferior part of the same, G. Pechys, L, Cubitus.  
The fist, G Carpos, L. Brachiale.  
The foremost part of the fist, G. Metacarpion, L. Postbrachiale, wherein the palm of the hand is called G. Do●on, L. Palma: The fingers G. Dactylos, L. Digiti.  
The Thumb, G. M●gas, L. Pollex.  
l, Tenar, L. Hypotenar.  
The Insignitoure, or forefinger, G. Lichanos, L. Index. Salutaris.  
The middle finger, or as we commonly say the fools finger, G Melos, L, Medius, Impudicus, Infamis, Verpes': the row of the fingers are called, G. Phalages, L. Ordines.  
The Medicinalle finger, or Ring finger, between the little finger, & the middle finger, G. Paramesos, L Annularis, Medicus.  
The little or ear finger, G. Micros otitis, L, Minimus Auricularis. The joynctes of the fingers, are sometimes called, G. Phalanges, L, Digitorum internodia.  
The end of the finger, close unto the Nail, G. Coryphe, L, Coryphe, the Nail, G, Onyx, L, Vngvis, the beginning of the same, G, Anatole, L, Vngvis exortus, those little white spots which at some times are one the Nails, G, Nephelion, L, Nebecula.  
s, That which is comprehended between these two letters is the thigh, G, Meros', L, Femur.  
14, The superior part of the leg, G, Epigonides, L, Geniculares.  
r, The internalle part of the Hip, G, Paramyria, L, Femina.  
Π, The flatness of the same, whereon we apply the boxes, to suscitate the menstrualles of women, G, Mesometria. L. Interfemina.  
s, The knees, G, Gonies, L, Genu, that which is rotundelye elevated, is called Rotula or the shive of the Knee, G, Epimy●s, Epigonatis, Myli, L, Patella, Mola. t, The shin, G, Anticnimion, Chrea, L, Chrea.  
v, The instepp of the foot G, Tarsos, L, Tarsus all that which is compraehended between, v, unto a. s, c, is the leg, G, Cneme, L, Tibia, the remanent of the soot called, G, Acropos, L, Extremus pes.  
The superioure part of the foot, G, Metatarsos, L, Metatarsus whereunto the toes are adjoining.  
z, The Ankles, G, Sphyra, L, Malleoli.   

The Declaration of the Characters which are compraehended one the posteriore, part of the body.  
The superior part of the head, G, Coryphe, Mesocranion, L, Vertex.  
The hinder part of the head, G, Inion, L, Occiput Occipitium.  
The place where we apply the Cauteryes against surdity, towards the mamillare productions.  
The Nape of the Neck, on which place also we apply the Cauteryes, that which is compraehended between the foresaid, D, unto a H, is called the Backbone, G, Rachis, L, Spina dorsi.  
*, The Neck, G, Auchyn, Deires, Opisthocranion, L, Cervix, It is the place, wherein we apply the Seton, or in the place thereof two Cauteryes.  
E, The place whereon we apply the boxes, G, Epomis, L, Summitas humeri: the superioure part of the shouldre.  
F, That which is collocatede between these two letters, is called the Back, G, Metaphrenon, Noton, L, Dorsum, Tergum.  
That which is comprised, between the lasté F, & a, G, Osphis, Ixis, L, Lumbi.  
The bone Sacrum, G, Hieron, Platy, L, Os Magnum, Sacrum, Latum, which is contained, between I, and a, H.  
The Cropion, or Rump, G, Coccyx, L, Cauda.  
k, The Shouldre blade, G. Homoplata, L, Spatula.  
L, The right situatione, and collocatione of the Kidneys.  
M, The beginning of the Muscle Delthoide.  
H, That which is compraehendede betwixt these two letters, is called the forearm, G, Olenos, L, Cubitus.  
The Elbow, G, Olecranon, L, Cubitus.  
Q, The fist, which is contained between these two letters, G, Carpos, L, Brachiale.  
R, The fore most part of the fist, which is compraehendede between these two characters, G, Metacarpion, L, Postbrachiale.  
S, The Haunches, or Hips, G, Ischia, L, Coxoe: On this place is the right combination, & the collocatione, of the head of the bone in the Hip, whereon we must apply the remedies against the Sciàtica.  
*, The Buttocks, G, Gloutoi, L, Nates.  
L, The crassitude of the Hip, L, Femen  
V, The externalle parr, where the membranous muscle is collocatede.  
X, The Hockes, G, Ignya, L, Poplex, where we open the Popleticalle Vain.  
Y, The Calf of the leg, G, Castrocnemion, L, Sura.  
Z, The great Tendone of the Heel.  
ω, The Heel, G, Pterna, L, Calx.  
Π, The plant, or sole of the Foot, G, Pedion, L, Planta pedis, the concavity thereof, G, Coilon podos, Vola pedis.   

Declaratione of the Characters contained in the first, and second figure, of the externalle Veins, which we use to Phlebotomize.  
Demonstratethe the Vain in the Forehead.  
In the second figure, the Vain Pupis.  
The Temporalle Vain in each figure.  
The Ear vain.  
The Eye, or ocullare vain.  
The jugulare, or organicke vain, of the Arabians called Guides.  
f, In the 1, and 2, figure, the Cephalic shouldre vain.  
g, In the first, & second figure, the Basilica, Hepatica, the liver vain.  
i, L, 4, The Mediane: but the right median is that which is noted, with, L, and 4.  
5, In the first, and second figure, the Head, or ocular Vain.  
6, The Salvatella, of the Arabians Seynale, or Syelen.  
The Mediane, or Black Vain.  
Q, The Iliaqve vain, or Titillatis in Latin.  
n, In the second figure, the Popliticalle vain, V, V, p, p, The Saphena.  
T, q, q, The Sciaticke Vain.  
R, The Crutalle, which maketh the Saphena, noted with R, in the second figure.  
The Sciaticalle vain, which also noteth the Sciaticalle vain, in the externalle ankle.  
P, A, A, Demonstrate the internalle ankle vain.  
O, B, B, The externalle ankle vain, * f, * f, The Heel.  
〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉  
Demonstration of all the externalle veins   

Declaratione of the Characters contained in the Table of Instruments, where with we extract, and draw out the Bullets, and all other unnaturalle, and alienate things, forth of the body.  
Demonstratethe such an Instrument, which considering the figure, & similutude, is in Latinne called Rostrum Lacerti: it is very necessary, to extract, a bullet out of the body, when they lie therein plettered, or else to draw out of the wound any small pieces of bones. The foresayed A, noteth only unto us the Pipe thereof.  
The vice, or means, whereby this foresaid Instrument, is opened, & shut again, as much, and as little as pleaseth the Chyrurgiane.  
The little Iron rod, which openeth, & shutteth the foresayed Efts bill: for we drawing the same towards us, it shutteth, and thrusting the same from us, it openeth,  
D, The Dilatorye, behoulder, or Enlarger, in Latin Dilatorium or Speculum: This Instrument is internally concavouse, & dentified, or toothed, to retain, & hold that fast which shallbe there between: it may be used for two purposes: first of all to dilate, & enlarge the wound, whether it be either to vue the bottom thereof, or else to bring any other Instrument therein, wherewith we would draw any thing out of a wound: secondly it is also of it self commodious to draw any alienate thing out of a wound.  
The chained bullet.  
A little Chain.  
c, Certain parcels of Mail dubbletes.  
E, The Crane's bill, In Latin, Rostrum Gruinum.  
The springe to Keep open the same, least that the Chirurgeon might be hindered in the opening thereof: & because he should always be prepared to shut the same, as soon as we perceive any thing to be between the same.  
The Bullete which must be drawn out.  
H, The Gander's bill, In Latin, Rostrum anserinun: It is also callend Rostrum latum, the broad bill: the extremity, & end thereof, is also dentified & toothed, because he should the surer, retain the Bullet. The bullet which is between the teeth.  
The sounding Iron, or Esprovette: which may be used also for a Needle to make a Seton: & is very convenient to sound, & search for bullets, and all other alienate things in a wound: as also we may make therewith any Seton, the same being needefulle: some there are which are made of two pieces, because it should so be more portable. This foresaid searching Iron is called in Latin, Astilla tentoria, Radiolus, Explorator: & in G, it is called meal: Galen calleth it Thaumatiche, meal, and Hypocrates, Ischyri,  
The Bulletdrawer or Ground drawer, without his canulle: This Ground drawer is very acute on his end, because the bullet might stick fast therone: it is called in Latin, Terebellum simplex.  
The vice, wherewith he is fastened in the pipe, or canulle, & wherewith he is boarede into the bulette, without any great violence, or force.  
The Pipe, or Canulle, with the handefastening there of. In Latin Canula simplex.  
The handle through the which we thrust the Ground drawer.  
The Bullet drawer, with his canulle, on whose end the bullet is fastened, to be drawn out. We use this Instrument, when the bullet is fastened in any bone, & when the same with violence must be drawn thereout: & is in Latin called Terebellum torculatum cum Canula.  
The vice, which entereth into her case, noted with Π.  
The vice which is in ternallye occulted.  
another Bulletdrawer, the end whereof is noted with R, which causeth it to be so called, the bullet drawer with the ring, or with the spoon, must be hoaled, to give place unto the bullet: and the other end, is recurved, & broad, & also somewhat concavouse, with small teeth, to retain, & hold the faster all alienate things, which we intent to draw out, without escaping thereout.  
The bullet drawer with the ring, or with the perforated spoon: this bullet drawer is very convenient, & necessary, because the bullet is the one half therein included, & is also by that means held steadfastly fast, without sterring thereout: And is called in Latin, Globulitraha annulate, or Cocleare.  
The Croockede bullet drawer, in L, Globulitraha connexum: This bullet drawer is also very necessary, because he is dentified, because the bullet being there in, it should not glibber thereout, but may be therein retained.  
another bullet drawer, which through one of his ends, as through the superioure noted with V, he is also hoockishe, & recurvated: & at the other end noted with X, he is like unto a hoock, which is acute, & sharp, notwithstanding in such sort, that in no wise they may wound, whether it wear Synnue, Vain, or Artery in the drawing out of any thige: these extremities, or ends may serve to draw any Linen out of a wound or any such like thing as Cotten, Woolle, or any mails, which might remain fast stitckinge in the Wound.  
it is a recurved, & crooked bullet drawer, called in L. Hamulus recinus, Latus, Obtusus.  
The bullet drawer with two crochetes, or hoockes, called in L, Hamulus bifidus obtusus: And are called in G, Vncinos, & of the Latinistes, Vncus: and in French Croc, or Crotchet, or Hams crochus, a Hoocke.  
There is no Chyrurgiane, which hath any bullet drawer of his fashone, or manner wherewith he contenteth himself: but I have here placed, & collocatede, those which are fitteste for use, omitting, and letting pass many other fashions, to prevent, and evite all confusions whatsoever.  
〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉  
Sundry Instruments to draw out Bullets   

Declaration of the Characters contained in the Table, of the Instruments of the Head.  
Demonstrateth, an extractor, or drawer out, with three feet, the one whereof is very thin, and small, noted with this figure, 1, the second is a little grosser, and thicker, noted in this sort, 2, the third of a greater crassitude defigurede with this mark, 3, to accommodate them according to the convenientnes of the fractures, or depressiones. We may take him, for the Instrument, which Hypocrates calleth Tripanon Periterion, and we in English the Percer. Avicenna, and Albucasis, have not only therewith contented, and suffisede themselves to elevate, the depressed bones, but have also therewith perforated the Cranium, and Trepanede it, wherefore they account this Instrument for a species of a Trepane.  
The Handle, of the small Instruments of the Head, unto the which every of these Instruments are accommodated, and fitting. And is in Latin called Manubriolum.  
The perforation, or hole through the which, the vises of the foresaid Instruments are thrust.  
The small, and little Saw, In Latin Serrula, which only serveth, to saw through the bones of the Head.  
F, H, Do demonstrate unto us, the Raspes or scrapers, called in Latin, Radulae, or Scalpta rasoria, In Greecke Xytera. There are diverse, and sundry figures hereof: that which is noted with E, is round, that which is marked with F, is acute and poynctede. And that which is broad, & dilateth itself, is called in Latin, Scalper excisorius Lunatus, being not dislike unto a half Moon: and called in Greeck Cliscos', because it is like unto a semicircle: The Ancient, and Antiqve chirurgeons have trepanede with these Instruments, but we now a days have far more convenient instruments, and we do only help ourselves therewith in searching whether the fracture do penetrate both the Tables of the Head or not.  
The vice which is thrust into the hole of the handle noted with C.  
The Depressor, of the Membrane, which we use immediately after trepaning, therewith to depress the Membrane, to espy whether there be nothing situated, and collocatede between the Membrane, and the Cranium.  
The end of the foresaede Depressor, which is flat, as a smooth Head, of a well pollishede Nail.  
Scalper Lenticulatus, G, Phacotous, It is an Instrument like unto a little chisel in form of a penknife: so called, because in steed of a point it hath a round, and flat thing like unto a Vetche, least we chanced to hurt the membrane when we therewith would plain the edges of the trepanede perforarione being very sharp.  
The little Vetch which is at the end of the forsayede Instrument.  
A certain Kind of Elevatorye, very necessary, called in Latin Elevatorium, Vectis, G, Ostraga, The pillar, or branch of the Elevatorium, which is quadranglede.  
The end thereof which must be situated, on the sound and firm bone.  
The Crotchet, or hoocke, which descending, elevateth itself, and recollocateth as much as is needefulle.  
The point which is flattye, because it might be thrust into the dilaniation, or fissure of the Cranium. A lesser hoocke, or crochete.  
Inscisive, or cutting pincers, or tongues, to cut of any, pieces, or splinters of bone.  
O, The Rostrum lacerti, which is very convenient. to draw out any splinters of bone, G. Anthetous, and Eistethois eccopeas.  
The Raven's bill, in Latin called, Rostrun corvinun.  
another Kind of elevatorye, and is in Latin called Elevatorium bifidum.  
This demonstrateth to us, that which we must lay one the firm bone.  
That which must entre into the split, or else between the depressed bones, to the elevatione of the same.  
another Kind of Elevatorye, which at one end is toothed, and at the other end formede, like unto a half Moon.  
A rescindente Instrument, the one end whereof servethe for a rasore, to cut through therwithe the musculous skin of the Head, and also the Pericranium: which end is noted with X, and on the other end is it blunt, which is very convenient, to scrape the Pericranium, the same cleaving to fast unto the Cranium: the which end is noted with V, the Greeks call it, Hypospathisma, Spation, or Spatomele.  
A sounding, or searching iron, to feel whether there be any fracture in the Cranium, the end whereof is round, and politely polished, and being of a reasonable crassitude defigurede with Z, and on the other end a little elevatorye noted with a, Demonstrateth a part of the Head, which is greatly broken and hurt, as we may behold, out of the which it wear needful to have a great piece of the Cranium taken away.  
c, c, The circumference, and magnitude, which we purpose to take away, which conveniently may be done through three places, which must be trepanede, to administre place to the saw.  
d, d, The three places which we must trepane: by this means to take away directly from Line, to Line the corrupted, and rotten bone, noted, with c, c, c, c, c, which with the saw must be done. Some there are which use this form of trepaning, but it is tedious, and troublesome, and in thus doing is there a great qvantitye of bone taken away.  
I have here endevourede, to present, the most convenienteste sorts of Elevatoryes, which now a days are most in use, in such magnitude, & greatness of form, as might be most convenient for the Chyrurgiane, considering all other small instruments or ferramentes of the Head, as are the Raspers', which of set purpose I omitted, lest I should cloy the Chyrurgiane with to many Instruments, because by those in place of others he might content and suffice himself, because that such an infinite, numbered of instruments do serve more for ostentation, and pride then for any necessary use.  
〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉  
divers Instruments for the Head   

Declaratione of the Characters contained in the portrayctures of sundry, and diverse sorts of Trepanes, and nipinge tongues.  
A, A, A, Demonstrate the whole Trepane in his form, and fashone.  
The coverture, or cap of the Handle.  
D, That which properly is called the Trepane, G. Trepanon Chynicida, or Chenition & Priona characton: which we must so understand, when the same is without coverture: In latin it is called, Terebellum, Trepanum striatum Serateres, & of Celso, Modiolus, and when the coverture is thereby, which is noted with E, it is then G, called Abaptiston, & in Latin Trepanum securitatis, because it can entre no deeper than the arrest, will suffer.  
G, The Pyramid which passeth clean through the Trepane, which must a little excel the trepane because in the turning of the Trepane it might stand stedye, and having her circle, may be taken out, closing that end which is noted, with G.  
The Perforative Trepane, wherewith we only note the place, where we intend to set the Pyramid.  
The little vice which we wind into the coverture of the Trepane, to assure the same, that it may stand stedefastlye,  
another Kind of Trepane which is a little larger in her basis, then in the beginning thereof: & is in latin called Terebellum alatum, & such a Trepane can not sink inwards.  
The wings of the Trepane, which delicately and easily cut.  
N, The Pyramid which passeth clean through which we must remove the Trepane having made his circle.  
another Kind of Trepane, which only cutteth the flesh: & is very necessary when we must suddenly trepane, because we fear any great fluxions of blood. It cutteth and perforateth through the musculous flesh of the Head the same being first with a potentialle Cauterye cauterizede.  
The circle, or circuit which must cut as well as a Kinfe, neither must it be toothed.  
The Pyramid as is in the other fore rehearsed.  
another Kind of Trepane, to perforate the bone, which is not dislike unto a thimble, & is also alatede, and delicately cutting, as well above, as one the sides.  
The little point, which servethe in steed of the Pyramid, least that she should stir out of her place, which must as long be used therein until the Trepane, be rightly settled, & fastened therein.  
The little point being taken away.  
The handle of the Trepane.  
The quoyse, or cap which turneth.  
The vice which fastenethe the Trepane assuredly.  
The hole wherein the foresaid vice must be turned.  
The trepane being taken in pieces, without cap or Pyramid.  
The Cap.  
The vice which holdeth fast the cap, the which is scruede into that hole, noted with. Π.  
The Pyramid being alone.  
The hole or apertion, whereout the Pyramid sticketh A little eminence by the which the Pyramid is steadefastlye held fast, in the Trepane.  
The end of the Pyramid, which must entre through the hole of the trepane noted with 1  
6, The exfoliative trepane.  
7, Round pincers, or tenacles, very necessary to take away the trepanede percelle of bone.   

The Declaration of the Characters contained in the capitalle Instruments, or Pincers.  
Demonstrate the pincers, which are called parates bills, L, Rostrum Psitaci.  
B, The opened parrates bill,  
That part which rescindentlye is removed up, & down,  
on the end thereof noted with, D.  
The other end which holdeth fast, which is also rescindente.  
The vice which openeth the saide bill, & again shuttethe the same.  
G, The little Glysorye, or Glidere up and down.  
H, The recludede Parrates bill.  
b, A little pincette.   

Declaration of the Characters, which are contained in the Trepanes with vises.  
R, The trepane with vises being taken a sunder. P, The vice.  
The end, or extremity which shutteth in the quoyfe, or cap.  
The Cap in the which is a vice.  
The trepane with the vice, being ready.  
The quoyfe, or cap.  
The trepane.  
i, The vice which is on the end.  
m. The Pyramid, which passeth clean through.   

Declaration of the Characters, which in the Cranio are contained, being in two places Trepanede.  
P, The Cranium, which demonstrateth the two bones, to wit the Forehead, and the Parietale, noted with a, a.  
b, b, The fissure, or fracture which crossethe the suture.  
c, c, The Coronalle Suture.  
d, The two holes, wherewith these two bones we are boarede, and pearcede through.  
e, The two round parcels of bone which are taken out of the holes.  
V, A ground drawer with three feet, or branches, the first whereof is noted with V, & serveth for a sounding iron, to know how * deep we have pearcede the bone.  
A little Elevatorye, therewith to move the bone, & mark whether it be almost through.  
The ground drawer, to sublevate out of the hole, the Trepanede bone.  
〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉  
The portrayctures of divers sorts of Trepanes, and tongues   

Explicatione of the Characters contained in the figure of the Hare mouth.  
A, Demonstrate unto us both the cloven lips, as they are separated the one from the other.  
B, The distance which is between them.  
C, Both these places which with the needle must be percede, & must be far distant the one from the other because the stitches do not breacke through.  
The defiguratione, or portraycture of the Haremouth.  
E, Both the ends of the Needle.  
F, Both the inscisions which are semilunare, or half moon wise, & must only be made in the skin without penetratione of the mouth, because the superior skin may stretch when we draw the same towards us.  
G, Both the ends of the cloven Hare mouth the same being aegallye combine the together.  
H, The thread which is involved round about the Needle.   

Explanatione of the Characters noted on the side of the throat, in the portraycture of the Haremouth: which demonstrate unto us, a wound receavede in the Ingulare Vain: and the means also how to circumligate the same.  
e, Show the magnitude of the wound.  
f, The superficies of the jugulare Vain which is discidede.  
Demonstrate the second puncture of the Needle, which is done, internally in the Wound, on the side of the jugulare Vain.  
The first prick or stitch of the needle, which hath his originalle one the skin, on the other side of the saide jugulare.  
A little compression, which must be collocatede between both the stitches, a little more inferior than the letter f, to knit, the knot therone, least that the thread should to suddenly cut through the skin.  
l, Both the ends of the thread, wherewith the jugulare Vain is overthwartelye tyede, with a little compression which is noted with i   

Declaration of the Characters, which are contained in the dry Suture, or stitchinges.  
The portraycture one the which the dry suture is applyede.  
L, The longitude of the wound which is in the cheek.  
M, Two Linen clouts, which are glued on the face.  
*, *, *; The threads which pass through the Linen clouts, thereby to be drawn, joinede, and knitted together.  
N, Both the pieces of Linen cloth which are separated the one from the other.  
*, *, *, The threads which are pass de through both the ends.   

The Declaration of the Characters which are contained in the Instruments of a little portable case.  
Demonstrateth unto us a thick, concavouse sounder, at the greatest part, as easily we may perceive by the one star, * unto the other *, such a concavity receiveth the point of a croockede Lancette, to make an inscisione because we might contain the same without entering to deep, whether she glide this way or that way, the end hereof is recurvatede, and explaned to purify therewith the circumiacente places of the wound, it may also be taken for that which Celsus calleth Speculun Latum, G. Plateie Mele.  
A little pincet, in Latin Volsellae: the Superior end thereof may be taken for that which the ancient Greeks called Spatomele, like unto half a Spatula. This little Instrument, is very necessary, as well to purify the circumiacente places of the wound externally, as internally with the pincet.  
The scraper, therewith to scrape a corrupted, cariede, and putrifyede bone.  
A Spatula of the Greeks called Amphimelon, & L, Spatula, the end being thin, & may be used in place of a privet, or sounder, having a little button on the end, & is then called Pyrin meals, which signifieth the button of the privet, as the same is noted with a and the same being hoockewijse, it is then called Agrimeles, as that is which is noted b, and when it is concavouse like one are picker it is then called Cyatisire Meles, the fame is c, noted with c, c.  
A little sounder, which we may also use the same in the ligatione of the fistles in the fundament, and is then called of Hypocrates Scorodou Physinga: to conclude it is a sounder, with two ends, whereof the one is perforated in form of a Needle, and the other round like unto a button.  
A little stone drawer being superiorlye hollow, like an earepicker, and inferiorlye like unto a hoocke this Instrument may be used, to draw out a bullet, a needle, or any other alienate thing being in the wound.   

Explanation of the Characters contained in the Description of the Needle pipes, cases or Canons.  
Indicateth the Needle case,, wherein we may stick thredede Needles, & also wind thread thereon.  
The coverture, or opercle of the saide case.  
X, Y, Little round plates of the largeness of a french crown, which are perforated, wherein the Needles are reserved, and Kept.  
The extremity, or end of the saide needlecase, which is cleft, there through to let the thread the easier pass through, when as we therewith would sow.  
Z, The two Needles, the one to combine, & stitch the wound together, which is quadranglede, and the other round to sow together all the rollers of the dressinges.  
The case only with the inferior part turned upwards, profitable for the sutures of the face, when the same must be done close by the Nose, & in more other places where the extended, & rectifyede pipe can not be used.  
The split which is one the end.  
The recurvede Needle for the sutures of the face, & other parts, where the right needle can not be used.  
The rectifyede, or extend the case or pipe.  
The split which is one the end.  
The Needle for wounds, which at her acuitye, or point is triangulate and rescindente because by that means she might the easier entre: for in thru sting she inscideth with her edges.  
The Needle to sow together all clouts, and roulers to dress withal.  
〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉  
Declaration of the Dry suture  
Portraycture of the Haremouthe  
Canons and Needles  
Instruments for a little case   

Explicatione of the Characters contained in the table of these Instruments which are proper and necessary to the extirpatione of membres.  
A, Indicateth the Knife wherewith on the suddayn, we may cut the skin, and the muscles to the bone when we desire to extirpate any mortifyede joint, or member. And is of the Latinistes called Coulter excisorius lunatus, in English a semilunare cuttinge-Knife: it is in this form composed because it might the easier comprehend all the flesh in the circuit,  
Demonstrateth the superioure part of the back, which after a sort ought to be somwhate acute, & sharp, to scrape therewith the Periostium from the bone, which at the first time could not all at once be cut through,  
The persoratione, or hole which is beneath in the blade, which yieldeth backwards in to the handle and there occulteth itself there by to contain the knife steadye.  
A hole which is in the handle, wherein is a little iron bar, which passeth clean through wherwithe the blade is fastened.  
The end of the foresaid blade, through the which he is impedited to stir backwards in effectuating of the operation. Some there are which content themselves with a common razor, which behind they involve with linen, least that it should revolute backwards, and are of opinion that it would better be done with a razor having an eminent belly, then with a semilunare knife: and for confirmatione hereof they take example of the Laniators, or Bouchers, and of Coockes, which much rather take a knife with an eminente belly, and in manner, and form of a razor, then of such an one which representeth a half moon.  
E, E, Demonstrate the Saw which is whole amounted, with the, Bow, Blade, and handle, and is in Latin called Serra, she is not here placed in her magnitude, because the place, can not here be so great, which must notwithstanding be a good foot, and two inches of length in her blade, & the handle four, or five inches long.  
A little peg of Iron, which holdeth together the two pieces of the Bow.  
another iron screw, which combineth the blade, & the bow together.  
H, Two branches of the Bow.  
A vice.  
The separated Handle.  
The Blade alone separated.  
The end of the Bow, which is cleft, in the which, the end of the blade with the hole thereof is put.  
The hole, or perforation, which is in the blade.  
The screw, which must have his penetratione clean through the bow, and the blade, as plainly we may behold the same noted with G,  
Signifieth the vice which is occultede in the end of the handle, which attaineth to the end of the blade noted with O, by that means to draw in the same, and fasten the saide blade.  
The end of the blade, where there is a screw to receive the vice.  
A split, which is in the blade, to receive therein a screw noted with the figure 4.  
The screw, which is thrust clean through the bow thereby to hold fast the blade.  
The end of the said Bow, which is receavede of the end of the handle, in the which is a split, through the which the blade passeth, when we desire to prepare the saws.  
2, 3, Demonstrate certain little screws, to use the same in time of necessity.  
A dentifiede, or toothed Crows bill to clench the veins, and take hold thereon, the joint being extirpated, and we desire to religate the saide veins, it is in Latin called Rostrum Corvinum.  
A resort, or springe because it might always be apart.  
The bill of the same, which on his end is round, and toothed because the thread might with the more facillitye glide therover with out being in any place stayed.  
The Needle, wherewith we conveniently may stitch, when we desire to religate a Vain and is in Latin called Acus.  
A hollow knife L, Coulter fistularis, G, Syringotome this Instrument occludeth itself in the pipe.  
The puncture, or point of the same, under the which a little bullet of wax is fastened, or some other plaster, lest that the point should hurt some other places when as we intrude the same in any fistle, thrusting as it wear in any found flesh, vain, arterye, or sinnue, with this Instrument in a short time we may descide through a great qvantitye of flesh, there are some also which with this knife at one time can cut of a great quantity of flesh.  
Rescindente, instruments to cut of fingers: L, Forceps excisoria, this instrument must be great, and strong.  
The Finger which is spoylede, and corrupted.   

How we ought restrain the blood after the extirpatione of a joint, without using any hot Iron, only through ligature, which is of two sorts, either with the Crowesbille, or with the Needle.  
a, Signify a hip from the which the leg is extirpated.  
b, The Veins & Arteries by the which the blood exsulteth, and springeth out.  
c Both the ends of the Crowesbille, wherewith the Veins are compraehendede, by that means to tie them.  
The Crowesbille.  
e, Both the focilles of the Leg.  
The springe, or resort of the Crows bill.  
g, The Arm the fist whereof is extirpated.  
The orifices, or mouth of the Veins, out of the which issueth blood.  
The situatione of the Vain.  
The place where the first stitch must he placed on the one side of the Vain: and here is to be noted, that we must first thrust, in the skin of the Arm, without whole drawing through the thread.  
The event of the second stitch, which must, be begun one the other side of the Vain internally in the Arm, and must pierce through the skin. The little compression, which must be intersituatede between the stitches, as towards the letter a & then knitting, thereon both the ends of the thread reasonable stiffelye: this little compress, preventeth the cutting through of the thread, and causeth no pain.  
〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉  
Instruments fit for the extirpatione of any joynete   

Declaratione of the Characters contained in the Instruments, which are apt to open any Apostemations.  
A, A, Indicate unto us three copper, or silver plates, of the magnitude of a crown, or like acounter, in the middest whereof there is fastened the acuitye of a Lancett, noted with B.  
The use of those saide plates, is only to hallucionate, & deceive, those, which will not permit an apertione to be made in their Apostemationes, and are to timorous, & fearfulle of the hand, or lancet of the Chyrurgiane, as commonly are women, & little children: & to open the Apostemation beside their expectation, and intelligence: you must have in preparation your Caraplasma, and before the application thereof you must have in a readiness a plaster of Diapalma, or some such like, which must be somewhat larger than your plate, on the which plaster you must apply the plate, which in like sort also, with the acuity thereof must be covered with the salve Basilicon, which being finshed, you must apply this plaster being in this sort prepared, on the place, where you conjecture the foresaid Apostematione must be opened, & therone the Cataplasma, on the which you must then stiflye crush, and by that means make and apertione at one crushing in the Apostematione, through the point of the Lancette, which is one the plate fastened, into the concavitye whereof the matter as then will issue out: I myself have oftentimes usede this same manner of apertione, which although it seem to be but a simple shift, it is notwithstanding an hallucionatione which oftentimes is very necessary.  
B, B, The three points of diverse magnitude, according to the Apostematione which we desire to open, which must either be great or small according to the Apostematione which we would open without intelligence of the Patient.  
C, Demonstrate the Rings, wherein are occultede certain crooked Lancettes, wherewith we secretly can open an Apostematione without the perceavinge of the patient.  
The Croockede Lancette, being opened, & erected.  
The Ring wherein the foresaid Lancette is occultede and hidden, as a razor in his handle. This lancet erecteth itself through a little eminence, or hoocke noted with *, *.  
*, The little eminence, or hoocke.  
F, The rectifyede Lancette, wherewith we open an Apostemation, wherein we make incisiones, & scarifications: the Latinistes call it Scalprum Chirurgicum, the Grecians Smiles, & also Smilion or Pterigotomon.  
G, A little Razor,  
The point of the same, which cutteth on both sides.  
A Flammette, which is very necessary to scarify, & sometimes also the phlebotomize, or to open any small Apostematione.  
The Acute point which cutteth one both sides.  
The Lancet to phlebotomize called in Latin Scalpellus.  
The cased Lancette.  
The blade of the Lancette.  
A little croockede Lancet L, Falx incisotia, Coulter fistularis, & of Celsus, Spatumen curvum, because it is recurved, and semilunare.  
O, The acuitye or point which cutteth one both sides,  
The crooked lancet which is occluded in her case. Q, A Cauterye which is very necessary to open the Viceration Ranula which is situated under the tongue.  
The eminence, or button, which is as well commodious, to retain the hot iron e, as also to bestayede through the hole.  
S, The plate to lay in the mouth, because we should neither burn the tongue, nor the mouth.  
The hold which we must situate on that place where we purpose to make the apertione, and place the Cauterye.  
The Empijqve Cauterye, very necessary to open the ulcerations, or Apostemations of the Breast, called Empiemata.  
The point which must be flat, and rescindente.  
The holes wherein we thrust an Iron peg, to penetrate, as deep, & as shallo we as we please.  
The little pin.  
The croockede plate, which must be religatede thwarte over the body: the perforation whereof is noted with 3, which must be collocated, on that place where we desire to make an apertione.  
4, 4, 4, Little Ligamentes, which hold fast the plate on that place, & must be tyede on the body. A proper Instrument to lance the fisties from the one hole to the other, & make a great inscisione.  
The recurvede Lancet.  
The arrest wherewith it is restraynede, & held fast.  
The extremity, & point which is croockede, to receive the Provet.  
The Provet, or sowndinge iron.  
The use of this foresaid Instrument is this: to wit, that in those fistles in the which are two apertions, as in those in the which is made a counter apertione: and where it is necessary, & requisite, to make of these, two, holes or orifices one apertion it is first of all reqvitede, that we sound the depth of the fistle, with this sounding iron which is here defigurede unto you: which at the one end hath a little button, & at the other end is pearcede, & eyed like a Needle, where with we make our Seton: which being thrust from the one apertione to the f, other, as from the one f, to the other f, according to the magnitude of the fistle: which being done, we must thrust the little hoocke of the croockede lancet into the eye of the privete, & then draw the same unto the button: conducinge the foresaid lancette with the other hand: and although it wear the crassitude of two fingers, you shall not otherwise choose, but cut through the same, if so be at the least the foresay decroockede lancet be but reasonable sharp.  
〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉  
divers Instruments to open Apostemationes   

Declaration of the Charcters, which are contained in the Speculo oris, Matricis, & other more Instruments for the Mouth.  
A, showeth unto us the Speculum oris, G, Glossocatoptron.  
The plate which is layede in the mouth, to Keep down, & suppress the tongue.  
C, The Branches which we impose under the chin, others, use only the plate, without the branches.  
G, The Instrument, wherewith we religate the palate of the mouth, the same being to long, & is in Latin called Vinculum Gargateonis.  
H, Both the branches which are placed in the mouth.  
The Knottede thread, in which knot the palate must be layede, if so be we desire to abbreviate the same.  
The vice, whereon we must impose the handle of the Instrument the same being of two pieces because it might be the more portable.  
The handle,  
The little iron bar, round about the which we must circumvolute the thread, it must be in two places perforated, to let the thread pass there through.  
The Key which turneth about the little bar.  
O, O, O, The miroure, or behouldre of the Womb, L, Speculum matricis, G, Mycrocatoptron or Dioptron: It is very necessary to open the entrance, or neck of the matrice by that means to apply any remedies unto the ulcerationes, & other bad dispositions of the Womb.  
P, P, The branches which must be 7, or 8, finger's breadth long.  
The vice which closeth, and disclosethe.  
R, The handle which causeth the vice to turn.  
A very necessary Instrument to Cauterize the palate of the mouth the same excelling his natural longitude, & crassitude, called in Greecke, Staphylocoston.  
A little spoon, wherein may be layede any caustic powder, or aquafortis, therein to madefy the saide palate or Wula: It is right true that we ought to cover the tongue, least there fall any thing there one. Others in steed of any caustics, or Aqua fortis, use Pepper, and Saulte, being together mixed, wherewith they touch the pendente palate with this spoon, in the which they impose a little of this powder.  
Little Pincettes convenient to apprehend the foresaid palate, & turn about the same called in Greecke Staphylagra, which if they wear rescindente, they are then called Staphylotomon.  
A Dilatory of the mouth, which with a vice is turned about, & is very necessary therewith to dilate, and open the mouth, when the teeth are closely shut together, as it commonly, happeneth in the convulsions, wherein are little furrows, because the teeth may be fastened thereon without gliding thereof.  
The one leaf of the foresaid Dilatorye, which joineth itself with the other leaf noted with Z. which also in the externalle side thereof is lined.  
Herein entereth the vice which is fastened in the inferior plate.  
m, The vice.  
b, Little thin, & long pincetes to draw all manner of little things out of the throat called in Latin Spinarum eductorium, G, Acantabola.  
c, c, c, An artificialle golden roof of the mouth, which is a golden plate, as thin, as a french crown, L, Palatum, it is composed, to retain therewith the breath, from the roof of the mouth, thereby to evite the speaking through the Nose.  
There are some which can not very well suffice themselves with this plate, by reason that the gold smith can not so conveniently make the same, that it aequallye of all sides do touch the palate of the Mouth, so that in stead thereof they use, a tent made of lint, or of Sponge, to the which intent there are diverse which are provided of them, because that if the one fell out, they incontinently have an other in a readiness, & preparation to put therein, because otherwise they should speak through the Nose.  
Demonstrateth that side which must lie next to the tongue.  
A little plate, wherewith the great plate is fastened which is on the other side, which is thrust into the hole of the roof, noted with h, to this end that it there might as it wear suspend: There are some of the Greeks which call this Instrument Hyperoe.  
The extremity of the said Plate, which in the second Plate is noted with h, which is thrust into the hole of the roof of the mouth.  
The superior planitude, of the Plate, which, sticketh fast to the roof of the mouth, as if it wear glued thereon.  
The little plate which is turned upside down, & thrust into the hole of the roof.  
m, An artificialle tooth, which is composed, and made of Ivorye, or some other bone, which is fastened, through some certain gold wire.  
n, Three artificialle teeth which are combined together, & fastened the one to the other with some aureate filament, or gold wire, unto the other teeth one both sides.  
These artificialle teeth are sometimes made of Ivorye but because Ivorye by reason of the spittle waxeth immediately yellow, and fulvide, they are more fit to make of any other bone, the same being very hard, and thick and dence, or solyde, as is the bone of a fish which in French we call Rovart. furthermore any body by at may make teeth of white wax which being melted, & liquefactede with as much gum Elemni, or a little Mastic, white Coralle, and prepared pearls & there of a paste being made, of the which we may form as many teeth as we please. This paste is also very commodious to replenish therewith a hollow tooth, because there might no viands remain therein, through which the teeth do more corrupt, and more intolerable pain is here buy suscitatede.  
〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉  
The Speculum of the Mouthte, and Womb   

Declaration of the Characters which are contained in the figures of the Hoockes, and Knives which are necessary, and convenient, to draw forth a dead Child out of the Mother's belly: also of the Pessaryes, Plates and of other things necessary to the Ligatione of the fistles of the fundament.  
Demonstrateth the Crotchet with a double hoocke which must not be sharp, but blunt, least that internally they chance to vulnerate the Womb, by which means the woman might be in great peril, and danger of her life.  
The hole through the which must be thrust some certain string, to tie thereunto a Naptkinne because there might two at once pull when it is needful.  
The second hoocke which is flat and blunt.  
C, A little croockede knife which is very acute, & sharp convenient to inscide the Head, and belly of a dead Child, internally in the Womb, because the water, & aqvositye might heerbye have his issue.  
I have diverse and sundry times been sent for, to diverse Women, which wear in difficult labour & Childebearth, notwithstanding I never usede any hoockes, or other ferrealle Instruments thereto, for which occasion I also council all chirurgians, to use none of them, then in extreme necessity, for if so be there happen any other accident there unto, as excoriatione, or any effluxion of blood, we must then attribute the same unto the Instrument, which the Chyrurgiane usede thereunto: Nevertheless I have here caused them to be set down unto you, to use them in the extreameste necessity: and here is to be noted, that the Insculptor, or Ingravere to adorn, & imbellishe his labours, hath participated some proper, and perpolite fashone to the handle, which indeed is thereon inutile, and needless, because it is better, that they be plain, & smooth because they fasten themselves on nothing. The Pessarye in form of an Apple which is made of Cork, and is circumvestede with white wax: this pessary preventeth the descending, and sinckinge out of the Matrix. The Greeks call it Pesson, and the Latinistes Pessarium. There are some also made after an Ovale figure, round, and somewhat prologatinge like an Egg, and of diverse magnitudes: but quotidiane experience hath taught us, that they are not so necessary, and commodious, as those which are of this form, because they are to slippery, and cannot be hold so fast in the entrance, or neck of the womb, so that oftentimes they sink theroute, and in like sort also the womb, which notwithstanding reqvireth to be continually therein contained.  
The first which I have seen use such manner of Pessaryes, was the right worshipfulle Mr. Rousset, on of the Kings chirurgeons, and of the Lady of Nemours, which hath learnedly, and excellently written, of diverse sorts of the women's parturion, where this form of Pissaryes are defigurede, and the manner also of his use.  
The hole which is in the midst, which serveth to draw thereby the pessary out of the womb, we thrusting our finger in the hole.  
*, The lint wherone the Pessarye is fastened round about the body of the woman.  
An argentealle plate being semilunare, & somewhat reflecting inwardelye, toward the internalle part being noted with G.  
This plate, or this invention hath oftentimes been usede, of Mr. Girart Raber Chirurgeon at Paris, which was a very inventive, & perquiringe man, in searching out of Chyrurgicalle Instruments, and also the most expertest practitionere of his time.  
the knot which is layede above the silver bar.  
H, The argentealle, or silver bar, or peg.  
I, I, The little ringles, wherewith the little bar is fastened, when she passeth therthroughe: this bar may be turned as much and as little as we please. The Privet, or Needle to religate the fistles Hypocrates calleth it Scorodou Physinga, we may also make their point blunt, to use the same the fistle being whole apparent, and may easily be seen: but if she lie occult, and invisible, and that we must necessarily perforate any membrane, she must then conseqventlye be acute, and sharp. She must also be of silver, and very weak, because she may be supple to bend at our pleasure.   

Explanation of the Characters contained in the figures of the Instruments to draw, break, and cut of teeth.  
L, Demonstrate the tongues, which are very convenient, to cut of all superfluous teeth or at the least those which are to long: they are internally inflected, by that means the better to fasten on the teeth.  
A superfluous tooth which is half of.  
The Polycampe, L, Polycampus, G, Odontagra, and Odontagegon. It is an Instrument with diverse branches, which are all of them intruded in one handle, through a little serve.  
The screw which is on the Instrument.  
One of the branches of the Polycampe.  
An other extended branch.  
The third branch.  
The vice being taken out:  
S, Demonstrate the Instrument, called the Patretesbille: L, Denticeps, Dentiducum Celsus calleth it Forfex: G, Rhixan.  
The tooth which is held fast between the teeth of the Instrument.  
An Instrument which loosenethe the gums from the teeth, called in Latin Dentiscalpium, G, Pericharacter.  
The expulser, or thruster out L, Pulsatorium, G, Oterion.  
X, The Root drawer, G, Rixagra, It is an Instrument very necessary to draw out any root of a tooth, which remaineth in the chaw when the tooth is broken, or corrupted, and rotten.  
〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉  
divers Instruments to draw and cut of Teeth  
Haeckes to drane forth a Child   

The Declaration of the Characters which are contained in the table of the actualle Cauteryes.  
Defigurate the a Cauterye unto us, which hath a point like unto a Raper, and is called in Latin Ensis, which is partly on both sides rescindente.  
The point which must be of the crassitude of this letter, because it might the longher Keep hot.  
Is the handle, which is smaller than it is needful, and must be four, or five inches long, and in like sort also all the other handles of the other Cauteryes, which are here noted unto you.  
It is a backede Cauterye, which hath a back like unto a knife, which cutteth but one, the one side, and for that occasione hath a thick back, because it should continue the longer hot, and effectuate his operatione so much the better.  
The rescindente side.  
Π, The back which must be very thick.  
The point which must be four good fingers breadth long  
This Cauterye is rotund concavouse, & rescindente: we use it to cauterize the skin of the Head, when as suddenly we would trepane the same, as being in any compagnye, and in cutting we fear any great fluxion of blood, to the end to give, or make place to the Trepane.  
The circle, which is round, and on his end is rescindente.  
The point.  
The punctual Cautery, which is quadrangulede, and acute, it is necessary to open any Apostemations.  
The point of the Cautery which is almost fourcornerede.  
This Cauterye may almost be called the Olive Cauterye, because it is almost like unto an olive: It is a little hebede, and flat on his end: We use this Cautery, to cauterize the Head even unto the Skull, or Cranium: Alechampe calleth it Pyrinoides.  
The Olive button.  
A Plateformede Cauterye: we use it after the extirpatione of a member, to cauterize the bone, & the flesh, and the whole pat also, which might in any sort be aulterede by the corruption, or Gangrene.  
The crassitude of the saide Cauterye, because it might the longer continue hot.  
△, The perforations, or holes which are in the plate, because heerebye the smoke might exhalate, which through the cauterizatione is made.  
The Cauterye with the button, which is very profitable to sing the skin in any place there to make a fontanelle, in stead of a potentialle cautery. Hypocrates calleth this kind of Cauterye Falacra, L. Calvata, because they are smooth and even, like unto the baldness of a man's head.  
The even, & smooth button of the Cauterye.  
The plate which we employ lest we should burn any other thing, but that which we cauterize.  
The hole through the which we thrust the end of the Cauterye.  
2, 3, 4, The little ribbons, which are necessary to rye the plate one the Arm, Hip, or any other part of the body, when we would cauterize the same, least that in the operatione it should glide away.  
A Cauterye which is very necessary to cauterize the palate of the mouth, called in Greecke Staphylocauston.  
The end of the same which is rescindente.  
The canule, or pipe, which is very necessary, to conduct the Cauterye into the mouth, when we desire to cauterize the palate of the mouth, or any other part.  
*, The little window, or apertione, wherein the palate of the mouth must be receavede, therein either to be cauterized, or extirpated.  
The place through the which the Cauterye is applyede.  
The ring of the canule, by the which we hold the same, because the pipe being fervefyed the Chirurgiane chauncede not to burn his fingers, in executing his operatione, by the which his work might be interrupted.  
The hole of the ring, through the which we may thrust our finger, to hold fast the foresaid canulle.  
Another Cauterye, which hath a round plate, and is very necessary to be used after an extirpatione, therewith to correct the corruption which is as yet remanente: it is also necessary to abolish, all great corruption of the bone, it is of the Greeks called Mylinon, because it is not mislike unto a Millstone.  
The crassitude, whereby the Cautery is long continued hot.  
The place where the holes are, through which the smoocke, & the moisture, of the adustion may evaporate, as before we have said in the Cauterye with the plate.  
another Kind of Cautery with a sharp button, necessary to restrain all fluxions of blood, whether it be out of an Arterye, or out of a vain cut a sunder, we collocatinge the same above one the apertione: It may also be used after the extirpatione of any joint.  
The smooth button, which is somewhate acute.  
A rotund Cauterye according to the longitude thereof, which is very necessary, against all carries of the bones.  
The rotundity of the foresaid Cauterye.  
another flat Cautery, which is also very commodious to correct the carries of the bone.  
The one side of the Cauterye.  
That which must only touch, the carries of the bone: We may also herewith suffice ourselves in the Cauterisinge of the orifices of any veins, or Arteries, which are situated between the bones of the arm, or of the Leg.  
The handle, which is somewhat shorter, and thinner than it ought to be, because of the little qvantitye of place.  
It is impossible for the Chyrurgiane to present in this place all the figures, & portraitures of the Cauteryes, wherewith he must content himself: for he must sometimes cause them to be forged according to the reqviringe of the Operatione, & the part, where on he intendeth to use the same, wherefore I in this place have done my endeavour to place & collocate together such Cauteryes as are most necessary, & nowadays in use, wherein I only have considered, & observed their magnitude, & crassitud: And as concerning their branches, & the handles of the same, have only been observed in two, which are noted with A, h, the Exsculptor having ingravene the same, somewhat shorter, & smaller than he ought: I most commonly use such Cauteryes which be reasonable short, because those which are of to great a longitude, & bigness, do affrighte the Patient, as also those which are too long can not so easily be conducted, & ruled, because they do most commonly vacillate, & turn this way, & that way in the hand.  
〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉  
The figures of divers Actualle Cauteryes.   

The Declaratione of the Characters which are contained in the Table of those Instruments which are proper, and convenient, to the executione of all manual operations which in the Eyes may be by any means usede.  
Although that I in this Chyrurgerye have not discribede the manual operation, which may be used in the infirmities of the Eyes: Yet notwithstanding I would not, neither indeed could omit in this storehouse and treasury of all Chyrurgicalle Instruments, the portrayctures, and figures of those Instruments, which are necessary, & commodious unto such an effect of deliberate, & set purpose omitting the operations of the Eyes, because at large I have discribede, & amplely set forth, every severalle operation, in my treatise of the Infirmities, and diseases of the Eyes, which I committed to the Press in the year M.D. Lxxxu. to the which I commit the gentle Reader, there to behold the practice, & severalle use of all operations of the Eyes.  
Demonstrateth a trianglede Cauterye, to apply therewith a Seton, which both prickethe, & cuttethe: the which Cauterye is applyede clean through the perforate tongue, ortenacle, wherewith the skin of the Neck is apprehended, for the Seton to pass through.  
The Needle for the Seton, or transforatione.  
another Needle for the same intent, and purpose, wherewith we transforate the skin without the tenacles, or tongues.  
C, The tongues for the Seton, which are pearcede, to thrust there through the Seton.  
D, Two holes, which must adjoin unto the reflectione, which is noted with n,  
The reflectione which is noted, & which is made because the hot Cauterye, should not chance to touch the skin of the Neck.  
The Needle to remove the Cataracts, and pearls of the Eyes: And is in Latin called Acus ocularis.  
The same Needle being taken out of the Case.  
The handle of the Needle.  
The Needle being whole takene out of her case.  
The Coverture of the Needle.  
The perforation out of the which the Needle issueth.  
f, Demonstrate certain little pincers, which are very necessary to void, & take a way any fithines out of the Eyes, or if the same cleave therein, where of the g, is like unto a little, smooth, & plain Earepicker, to relevate the same out of the Eye: And f, demonstrateth a little pincer which is flat, & smooth, to draw any thing thereout, if so be it cleft therein, as a thorn, or some such like thing. They are also very necessary to pluck out the hair of the Eyliddes, It is of the Greeks called Madisterion tricolavis.  
The portraycture of an Eye, wherein is presented a Staphylome, L. Vua, noted with 2.  
The Vua, or Staphylome.  
4, 5, 6, The threads passing clean through the Staphyme which must be connected together, where of the 3, & the 5. must be connected the one with the other & the 4. and the 6. also together, because every stitch might be tied apart the on from the other.  
A Dilatorye of the eyelids, or the Speculun of the Eye, when we endevoure to take any alienate thing thereout, or else when we desite to tie the Staphylome, or else cut of an Vngula: It is in Latin called Speculum oculi, Palpebrarum detentor, G Blepharocatocos.  
On this place the miroure of the Eye openeth it self, according to the magnitude of the Eye.  
The discriptione of an Eye, in the which is on Vngula.  
The filament which passeth clean through the Vngula, to elevate the same, and by that means the easier to cut it of.  
An artificialle Eye of Gould, which is engraven, & under hollow.  
A form of an Eye, wherein is defigurede an Ectropion, with the externalle and internalle incision which is required to the curatione of the same.  
The externalle inscisione, which is made according to the length thereof.  
P, An internal inscisione, which is also made in the length thereof, right over against the externalle.  
Q, Both the fydelong, or contradictory Inscisions.  
A little hoocke to elevate the Zebel.  
The Needle for the thread to pass under the Zebel.  
A little Cautery for the eyelids when the little hairs thereof turn inwards.  
The Aegilopicke Cauterye, to cauterize the bone, of the great corner of the Eye.  
The Plate to lay one the Eye lest we should chance to hurt the same,  
The hole which is in the Plate, to thrust the Cauterye there through, which perforation must be layede right on the Fistle.  
A little canulle, or pipe for an other Cauterye.  
We must here note, that this pipe, or canulle, must have a little ringle, where by we might hold fast the same, for if so be with a button we hold it, we might then chance to burn our fingers, because the cauterye internally passing through the same, it should not so completlye be effected, as it ought to be.  
The Cauterye.  
The handle.  
The holes to thrust therein a little peg, least we should penetrate to deep therewith, & may thereby be somewhat retaynede.  
The little iron pin, or peg.  
〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉  
Sundry Instruments necessary for the Eyes   

The Declaration of the Characters, contained in the Figure, which demonstratethe unto us the means how we ought, and should make a restauratione of a humeralle dislocation, by the means of an Instrument called Glossocomium, which Hypocrates calleth Ambi.  
A, The extended Arm, on the Glossocome, or Ambi.  
The Ear of the Ambi, which holdeth fast shut the superioure part of the shoulder, because she should not stir.  
C, C, The Ligatures, which firmly contain the Arm, least that he should glide from the Instrument.  
D, The pilare whereon the Instrument Ambi rests, and playeth, when we lift the same up, and down.  
E, E, Three feet, of the foot of the Instrument, to cause the Instrument one a board to stand steadefastlye without motion.  
The screws, or vises which fasten the feet.   

Declaratione of the Characters contained in the Glossocome, or Ambi, the same being taken a sunder.  
The Instrument Ambi, being disamountede, & taken a sunder.  
H, The Ears between the which, the superioure part of the Arm is situated.  
The end of the foresaid Instrument.  
The eminence of The Instrument Ambi, which must be collocatede in the Pillare.  
The split, or cleft of the Pillare.  
The pegg which fastenethe the Instrument, in the pillare.  
The pillar.  
O, O, The three feet, of the standard.  
The hole which is in one foot.  
The serve, or 'vise which is thrust therein, to cause cause the foot to be held fast, against a board.   

Declaratione of the Characters contained in the Cassolle, or Case necessary to lay a brockene leg therein.  
A, The occluded case.  
The shutting of the saide case, wherein the heel is layede, least he should bear to much weight.  
C, C, C, The wings of the case, or canal, which through little joints do, revolve, & open, & shut themselves.  
E, The little wings which do also open, & shut through little hinges.  
D, The separations which are in the wings being of two pieces.  
*, *, *, The jointures which are one the wings.  
F, F, The latches, which pass through the Ears.  
G, G, The ears through the which the latches pass  
H, H, The Buckles through which the latches pass  
I, T, T, The foot of the Cassole, or Canal.  
M, The extremity of the saide foot, which passeth through two little mortayses.  
The morrayces, or joints.  
O, O, The aperre, or open case, or canal.  
A place wherein the heel is situated.  
Q, Q, Q, The Wings.  
R, The place of separatione in two pieces.  
*, *, *, *, *, The joints through the which the foresaid wings, do revolve, open, & shut themselves.  
S, The foot.  
The bottom on the which the afflicted foot taketh his repose.  
X, The wings, of the saide foot.  
Y, The end, or extremity thereof, which passeth through little mortayses, which are on the wings.   

Declaration of the Characters, which are contained, in the brokene leg, with the bandages there of.  
a, Demonstrate the brokene Legge.  
The vulneratione of the bullet, which hath brokene the Leg.  
c, Apettione which through the bullet was made, on the other side in the issue thereof.  
*, *, *, *, *, A ligature three times double.  
1, 1, 1, 1, 1, The first double, being devidede in three.  
2, 2, 2, 2, 2, The second double, cut in three.  
3, 3, 3, 3, 3, The third double ligature parted in three,  
All these foresaid double Ligatures, are revolutede, first the one, & then the other, smoothly and evenly situainge of the same: and then they are each apart, with the point of a needle fastened, according to the situatione, or collocatione of the Leg.  
The end of the four portrayctures of man's body, and of the Veins, which are most commonly phlebotomizede: and also of the the saurarye, or storehouse of the Instruments of Chirurgery.  
〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉 〈◊〉  
Canalle which is open and shut     

The summary of the principallest, and most especialle points, which are cotaynede, and spoken of in the operationes of Chyrurgerye.  

The Preface of the Chyrurgerye. Containing four Chapters. 

Definitione, and originalle of Chyrurgerye, with the operatione of the same. Chapter. 1.  
The prognostication, & judgement of wounds. Ch. 2  
Signs to know whate parts of the body are hurt. Chap 3  
Adverticement to give assured report before the justiciaryes. Chap 4    
The first Treatise, of the Operations of chirurgery, wherein is discoursed, the means to draw out all strange, and alienate things out of the body. Containing five Chapters. 

The vitilitye, & necessity of drawing out all strange, and alienate things. Chap 1  
How that the Chirurgeon with all dexterity to draw forth a bullet, must consider on the differences thereof, and on the nature of the part, wherein the bullet is contained. Chap 2  
The bullets, & all other alienate things, must in the first dressing be drawn out of the body, if it be possible, and the means which we must therein use. Chap 3  
How we ought to draw out the bullets if they stick fast in the bone. Chap 4  
The Chyrurgiane ought not to be to curious in extracting the bullets. Chap 5    
The second Treatise of the operatione of Chyrurgerye, wherein is discoursed the means, to Trepane the pan, or Cranium of the Head. Containing six chapters. 

The signs by which we may discern the fractures of the skull. Chap 1  
The Countrefissure of the bones of the Head. Chap 2  
What fractures we ought to trepane. Chap 3  
How long we ought to defer the trepaning. Ch. 4  
What quantity of bones we ought to take away. Ch. 5  
The method, and manner of trepaning. Chap 6    
The third Treatise, of the Operations of Chyrurgerye, of the sutures, and sowing of wounds. Containing six chapters. 

What suture, or stitching is, & the utility there of. Ch. 1  
What we ought in stitching of a wound, to consider. Chap 2  
What is necessary unto suture, & the manner of doing of the same. Chap 3  
The Species, & differences of suture, & how long we must suffer them to continue without resectione thereof. Chap 4  
The means to thrust in again the guts, & the Epiploon hanging out of the belly. Chap 5  
The Gastroraphia, or suture of the inferior part of the Belly. Chap 6    
The fourth Treatise of the Operations of Chyrurgerye, wherein is discoursed of the apertione of Apostemations. Containing five Chapters. 

Of the general apertion of all Apostemations. Chap 1  
Of the ulcerations, Ateromata, Steatomata, and Melicerides. Chap 2  
The means how to cauterize, & inscide the Empiemata. Chap 3  
The manner of doing the Paracentese, & to draw out the water of the dropsy. Chap 4  
The means to cure the Hernia aquosan. Chap 5    
The fift Treatise of the Operations of Chyrurgerye, of the diseases of the Nose, and Mouth containing seven Chapters. 

Of the Polypus, Chap 1  
The Haremouthe, or cloven Lips. Chap 2  
The tumefaction, & superfluous flesh of the gums, called Paroulis, or Epoulis. Chap 3  
The retraction of the tongue, called of the Greece Kes Anchyloglosson, & of the tumefaction Batrachos. Ch. 4.  
Means to tie the palate of the mouth, and to cut of the same. Chap 5  
The tumour of the Almonds, and the Apostemations thereof. Chap 6  
How to draw, break, & cut of teeth. Chap 7    
The sixth Treatise of the operations of Chyrurgerye, containing nine Chapters. 

What we ought to consider, before phlebotomye. Chap 1  
How we shall conveniently open a vain. Chap 2  
What we ought to consider the vain being opened: and the blood issuing out. Chap 3  
The numbered of the veins, and Arteries, which are commonly phlebotomizede. Chap 4  
Of the apertion of the Arteries, or Arteryonomye. Ch. 5  
The Aneurisma, & the manner how to ligate, and inscide the same. Chap 6  
The Cirsotomye, which is the manner how to inscide the Varices. Chap 7  
Horseleeches, & their use, and manner of applicatione. Chap 8  
Of boxes, and applicatione thereof. Chap 9    
The seventh Treatise of the Operations of Chyrurgerye, containing six chapters. 

Of carries, and corruption of the bones. Chap 1  
The fistle of the fundament. Chap 2  
How we should draw out the children out of their mother's body, which can not of themselves be borne. Chap 3  
Why we ought to extirpate Arms, & Legs whate and place we ought te to make choice of. Chap 4  
The executinge of the extirpation, and means to restrain the fluxion of blood, the patient being situated. Chap 5  
The extirpatione of the corrupted, and superfluous fingers, & the separation of those which are joinede, and combined together. Chap 6    
The eight treatise of the operations of Chyrurgerye, touching the Cauteryes: containing five Chapters. 

What a Cauterye is, the species, & differences thereof. Chap 1  
The inventione, & use of the Cauteryes, and on whate parts, & diseases they must be applyede. Chap 2  
The potentialle Cauteryes, and means to make them. Chap 3  
The applicatione of the Cauteryes. Chap 4  
Of the Seton, and applicatione thereof. Chap 5    
The ninth Treatise of the Operations of chirurgery, of the bandages, or Ligatures, containing six Chapters. 

What a Ligament is, matter, quallitye, form, & quantity thereof. Chap 1  
Difference, and kinds of Ligamentes. Chap 2  
Generalle rules to be considered, in all bandages, or Ligatures. Chap 3  
How we should solve, & dissolve a Ligament. Ch. 4  
The manner to involve, a broken Arm, Leg, or thigh. Chap 5  
The situation, and collocatione of those parts, whereon these operationes must be effected. Chap 6  
apology for the chirurgeons, wherein is evidently demonstrated, which be the occasions of death, to certain wounded People, although their wounds are small: where the Chyrurgians are defended from all calumnies, which oftentimes injuriously they are sclaundrede with.  
The treatise of the Dysenteria, or Bloodyeflixe.     
Deo sit Laus.   

THE FRENCH CHIRURGERYE OUT OF ALL the ancient professors of Physic, and chirurgery collected, and compacted together, with sundry, and divers figures of instruments, very necessary to the operatione or work of Chyrurgerye.  
Through jaques Guillemeau of Orleans, public Chyrurgiane to the king, and sworene in his Chastelet at Paris.  
The preface. To the Chyrurgerye, containing four Chapters.  

The discriptione, and originalle of Chirurgery, and what the operatione of chirurgery is. Cap. 1.  
Of the prognostication, or foreknowledge, and of the judgement of the wounds. Cap. 2.  
Of the tokens and signs, how to know, what parts of the body are hurt or wounded. Cap. 3.  
Of the instruction how to give assured demonstratione, of all manner of wounds whatsoever, before the iusticiaryes. Cap. 4.   

❧ The discriptione, and originalle of Chyrurgerye, and what the operatione of Chyrurgerye is. Cap. 1.  
Having with myself resolved, 
The invention of sciences.  and purposed to describe the operation of Chyrurgerye, first of all it seemed expedient unto me to observe these three necessary things. Namely and especially, what Chyrurgerye is. secondly, how, and from whence, she hath participated and taken her original, and beginning. thirdly what the operatione of Chyrurgerye is. Concerning therefore her beginning & original, unto all men is it apparent and we rightwell know, that the inventione, and finding out of all arts, and sciences whatsoever, hath been by all men in such great esteem, and admiratione (which Hypocrates in his boocke of ancient Physic witnesseth) that the inventors or authors of the same, have been extolled even unto the clouds, by the which is witnessed, and testified, this inventione te have been so perpolite, that it was adiudgede to be a thing impossible to be discovered and brought into light, by any other, than through some God, or at the least, by such a person which hath been infused, with divine inspiratione: In so much therefore, 
Chyrurgerye is ancienter than Physic.  if this may be testyfyede of any arts with aeqvitye and right, it may truly and boldly be said of this art of Chyrurgerye, the inventors, and authors of the which, have been canonised, esteemede and extellod as Gods, as for example there hath been Apollo, Aesculapius, and Hypocrates, who have had divine honour and reverence of all men. The two first of these authors, have allonelye leerned, that part of Physic, which through externalle medicamentes, and by inscisions cured the infirmities, and diseasses of men's bodies. By the which plainly is to be understood and judged, that Physic at those times was not as then invented created, or found out, when that Chyrurgerye, was sufficiently practised and known in all places: the which Homer testifieth and witnesseth unto us in the second book of his Iliads, where he affirmeth that the sons of Aesculapius, Podalyrus, and Machaon, in the besieging of Troy have with their hands handelede and cured many and divers wounded people without molestinge or troubling of themselves with any internalle diseasses or sicknesses, as with agues, or with the plague, the which notwithstanding praedominatede and vexed sore the whole host or camp of the Greeks: and consequently Physic and the use thereof being known, and in practice, chirurgery was very confusedly handled amongst Physic. But for as much that it is very difficult & a hard thing to excel in diverse, and sundry arts, and because it is impossible, the work of Physic, Chyrurgerye, and Apothecarye for one man to do, therefore the art of Chyrurgerye is secluded and separated from the other two, having also her own professors and practitioners. The which because that it may berightlye understood, it is to be noted and observed, that in the old and ancient times, by Chyrurgerye, the third part Therapeuticae was not understood, even as we in these times take it, & as consequently shallbe showed: 
Divers misconstrvinges of this word Chirurgery.  But they understood by this word Chyrurgerye nothing else, then that only, which through the operatione of the hands is finished and brought to pass wherefore it is yet manifestly written by the ancient professors, that by chirurgeons was nothing else understood then certain servants, which in those times wear called chirurgeons, not because they had the perfect science, or knowledge of Chyrurgerye, but because they earned there sustenance and living through the worckinge of their hands. Now to conceive aright what Chyrurgerye is, it is expedient and necessary, that we ascend somewhat higher, and industriously search & try what Physic is seeing manifestly that Chyrurgerye is thereof separated and secluded.  

Descriptione of Physic.  Physic therefore is nothing else (as Hypocrates in his book De art witnessethe) than a knowledge, or science, which teacheth, how to cure any sicknesses to frustraete, and annihilaete there impregnable forces, because of themselves they are incurable.  

Parts of Physic.  This Physic again hath sundry parts, of the which the first is Physiologia, which handelethe and treatethe, of the structure and situatione of man's body, wherein is to be regarded and noted on the seven unnaturalle things. The secòde is Hygiena, that is a Nurse, and fosterer, or praeserver, of our health, which instructeth, how we showlde continually preserve our present health, & keep the sound body liber, and free from all diseasses, & sicknesses: and this consisteth in six unnaturalle things. The third is Pathologia, which treatethe of the cause, and occasione of the sicknesses & of the accidents unto the same, the which three things are against nature. The fourth is called, Simiotica, and treateth of the demonstratinge signs or tokens, not only of that which is all ready passed, but also of that which is as yet to come, in respect as well of sickness, as of health. The fifth is Therapeutica, that is the curing or sanable part of Physic, which instructeth, & learneth, how to compel and cure sicknesses, and diseases, 
The parts of Therapeutica  & restore again to former health: This praenominated Therapeutica is redivided and again dealt in three parts, the first whereof is called, Dietetica, which teacheth, how to observe a sober & good diet: The second part, Pharmacia, which instructed us, how to compownde our medicaments. And the third part is called Chirurgia, which cureth or helpeth the affected patients through manual or handlye operation for Chirurgia hath his derivatione of a Greecke word, and is compownded of Cheir which signifieth a hand, and Ergon which betokeneth operatione: neither may we by this word Chirurgia not on lie understand, all operations which are only effected by the hands, but most of all and especially, all that is done, or may be done one man's body toward the curing of all external diseases.  
And as concerning this word operatione, 
What this word operatione signifieth.  it is nothing else, than an artificialle and normaticke applicatione, which is brought to pass, and wrought by the hands, one man's body, wherewith the decayed health is reiterated, and again restored. And if we wear desirous to know what the office, & duty of a true chyrurgiane is, or what his operations are, how and in what manner he must work, & effect them, and what conditions are expected, at a chirurgeons hands, I have described them fully, & at large in my general table, and discriptione of chirurgery, wherefore I will make in this place no more mentione of them.   

❧ Of the prognostication or judgement of wounds Chap. 2.  
IT is certain that the praedictione, or judgement of wounds, 
The use of judgement.  yea also the general knowledge of all diseases, is a thing most necessary and expedient for a good Chyrurgiane: therefore Hypocrates also esteemed it very convenient, & profitable, that a Chyrurgiane must excel in the fore knowledge of things, and be apt & ready to give judgement and his opinion of all diseases, because by that he may attain, and at chive unto great credit, and fidelity by all men, and having on this manner set forth, and published his knowledge shallbe irrepraehendable, and of all men admired, & so much the safer, &, with more providence finish his work, & the boulder illustraete the operatione of his art, and give judgement there of without any scoff, or check, and be able to give a true report, when that by the authority of some learned chyrurgiane, or by the authority of some Potentate, he shallbe therein imployede, & ordained to report his opinion, either of the wounded persons life, ordeath, haultnes or criplenes. Even as also the foresaid Hypocrates sayeth in his Porrhet that the Chirurgiane must end voure himself to have a wise & grave gesture, 
Hippocratesin his Porrhet.  because that if it so chance as he adjudged it should, he might reap honour, & goodwill, not only of the patiented, but also of all the circumstants, and beholders: contrarily if that otherwise it happened or chanced than he said, and judged it should, and that his judgement fail him, he shall not only of all men be hated but also be esteemed as an ignorant, & sottish fellow. Beyond all this Galenus sayeth, and testifieth unto us, that by our upright, and sincere judgement, by the friends & Kindrede of the patiente, although he come to die, we shallbe liberated, & freed from all bad reports & slanders, because that through the death which consequently followed, nothing shallbe alleagede against us.  

What a Chyrurgiane ought to know in giving judgement  And for the giving of such a perfect, and complete judgement, it is necessary for the chyrurgianes not to be ignorant, which parts of the body being wounded, easylye, or difficultly may be cured, which of them are present death, and in fine, the tokens how to know what parts are wounded or hurt, because that out of their natures, quallityes, & dispositions, we may certainly hope, or mistrust of their health, and safety.  
Such judgement therefore aught to be taken, out of the very being, and substance, or essence of the wounded part, also of the use, the actione, and situatione of the same, there must also be noted, the proportione, and figure of the same wound, and the accidents or other chances, which are incident unto her, considering also the complexione and temperature of the body, the sex, the age, on his handling, and trafiqve, manner of living, the country, the constitutione of the time then present, and one the time and season of the year.  

All great vyoundes are dangerous,  To conclude, all men that have received a great wound, are either in danger of death or in danger of being mutilate. We eesteme and account the wound to be large, for three occasions: 
A great wound is taken three manner of ways.  The first whereof is, because that through her latitude, or wideness, & circumiacente places, she hath a threefoulde survayinge and measuring to wit, in length, brédthe, and debthe, as some there are which be deep & broadly carved: or right overthwarte or cross wise whole percinge through the principal muscles of any part, by the which also sometimes the bones are hewed & cut quite through, & broken, wherefore some times they must be stitchte, bound and ligated together: or because that the veins, the arteries, or the sinneus themselves, come to be squeezed and plettered. The second, concerning the worthiness of the wounded part, for although the wound be but little, in her meatinge yet notwithstanding we esteem her to be great, because that the strength and actione, of the wounded part or member, is very necessary for the whole body ' and for the whole life of man, which part having left his natural use and actione, it consequently followeth that the person, must immediately disease & die, as we may by experience see that daily chanceth in the wounds of the Brains, of the Heart, and in the wounds of the Liver.  
thirdly, because that some wounds are of a worse nature, & dispositione, as being venoumede, rebellious, and intermingled with some bad and dolorous accidents, which sometimes far surpass & excel the wound itself, as it is evidently & planlye to be seen in the wounds of the joynctes, which immediately, may fall into a very exceeding bad estate, because that those parts and places are circumligatede or clothed with very small store of flesh, being only decked & co verede with the Tendones, with sinnues, with Ligaments, & that very tender, and sensible pellicle Perioflium, by the which these parts or members are in more danger of falling into a convulsion of sinnues, into Phrensye, pain, and inquietude, as much as a far more greater wound in any other part of the body.  
Those wounds are accounted incurable which do happen in the Brains, 
Wounds which are esteemed incurable.  or in the ventricle of the same, in the Heart, entrance of the stomach, in the Vena Cava, the entrance of the Liver, the back bone, quite through the Lungs, in the small guts, or entrails, the stomach, the Kidneys, or in any great veins, or arteries about the throat. 
Wounds that be difficult to cure,  But these wounds which will difficultly be cured are they by the which the longs, the Liver, the membrane of the Brains the milt, the Matrix, or womb, the blather, any of the great guts, or the Middelriefe, are wounded with very small wound. Alsoe are those wounds dangerous, whereas the great veins, 
Wounds that are dangerous.  & Arteries, under the Emunctoria or arm pits, & in the Hockes or bending of the knees are wounded: and indeed all wounds are suspicious, in all places wheraboute any great Veins, or Arteries are situated & placed, because that through their effusione of bloede, the wounded person is bereft of all his ability & forces: the wounds of the Secret parts or privityes, and the wounds of the Testicles are also by this reason very perilous & dangerous, as also are these which happen and chance to light between the fingers.  

The figure or form of the wounds  There is also great heed to be taken one the manner & form of the wound: for those wounds which chance, or come by crushing, or pletteringe, are far worse, than those, which are only hewede, so that it is much better to be wounded with a sharp edged or cutting sword, then with any other blunt weapone which is not sharp.  
The round or circle wounds are worst & difficultest to be cured, but the certayneste & easyeste to be cured, are those which pass by the lenngth of the fibres right like a linye or line.  
The wounds of the Hip, which are received in the membranous muscle, 
What the wounds of the hip are,  are very exceeding dangerous, & especially if it be a thrust or stab, or else when the apertione of the same is very small, & hath no issue, but it is so much the worse if it so chance there be any fracture or separatione of bones, it be where it will in any place of the hip: & so far forth as if the wound be in any internalle part of the Hip, about the great veins, than the wound is passing & exceeding dangerous, for there ensuethe out of hand some great inflammatione there unto, & consequently thereafter a Gangraena, or mortificatione: he that happeneth to receive a wound in the foremost part of his arm, is also subject unto the same danger of inflammatione, and mortificatione, and causeth great pain & trouble, because that those wounds most commonly are present death.  

What we ought to judge out of the accidents of wounds.  Now as much as belongeth unto the judgement & opinion, which is to be considered & noted out of the accidents of all wounds, Hypocrates teace us: in so much as in the great & bad wounds, as are the wounds of the Sinews, of the Tendones, of the joynctes, & of the bones, little or no swelling or inflammatione at all apperareth, & illustratethe itself it is a very evil and bad sign, for why, it signifieth unto us that those humours which considering the pain should have assembled, & packed themselves that way & have circumcinglede themselves round about the wounded part, have retracted themselves into some principal & especial part of the body.  

Accidents of a the swelling.  Those wounds in the which there appeareth any swelling, or tumefactione very selden or never fall into any Phrensye, or into convulsion of Sinnues, because that the venomous humours, which might, ascend & draw toward the Brains or into the sinuishe parts of the boddye, have congregate and gathered themselves together about the wound: but if that one the sudden the swelling without any evident reason, as in example, in the applying of any remedies, through purgations, or through phlebotomisinge or blood letting, came to depart & with draw itself into some other place and that in such, as are wounded behind in there back bone, that person is troubled with convulsion of synnues, through the with drawing of the matter, into the sinnuishe parts of the backbone: and the wound being in the foremost parts of the body, and the matter of the swelling, ascending upwards, through the great veins, toward the Brains, the patiented strayghtway falleth into a madness & Phrenesye: or if so be that the matter draw toward the breast, than there ensue great & intolerable stitches, or Apostemations, because that those bad humours can not by any means possible be consumed or wastede, but descend & sink down into the concavitye of the breast. And if that the swelling now departing be of a very high & red coloured, & that therwas store of blood therein, which is descended & sunk down toward the guts, than it necessarylye & consequently felloweth that the patient falleth into the bloody flix, or Dysenterye.  
As far forth therefore as there proceedeth any convulsion of synnues out of a wound, 
The convulsion in wounds is very dangerous.  & especially from any great inflammatione, that is a sign of death, for thereby we may plainly, note, & mark that the synnuishe parts of the body, must needs be hurt, and that the Brains are in some, or other passione.  
If that into any wounds, which have fierce bled any Spasmus happen, that is a bad sign.  
All thrusts of the sinnues, and Tendones, 
Thrusts in the synnues are very dangerous.  are very dangerous, and especially, when as the skin and the flesh chance to shut together, for therein engenderethe a sharp & corroding matter, which resuscitatethe and causeth great & intolerable pain, because she can not by any meanness get issue, out of the which proceedeth & followeth convulsion of synnues, inflammatione, and a Gangraene, or mortificatione. 
The Organicke parts, which are whole cut of can no more be restored again.  In so much as any especial and principal, or Organicke part, or any instrumentalle part, totally & wholly is hewed of, and sequestered and separated from the body, it can not by any means be restored and cured, because that the blood, and the vitalle Spirits are whole exhalated, through the great veins, which are clean a sunder, and that by the which the cure must be done, and the foregoing health again restored.  
The temperature of the boddye, the time of the year, the age the handling and traffic, and the manner of the patients living, the knowledge of the country are a great help & aid for the prognostication of wounds: a child, or a yongeman, which as yet is inhis growth will better and with more ease be healed or cured, than an aged person: and a strong man, a great deal sooner than a feeble, and debile person. A lean and slender person, will be curedewith more facility, than a thick, and gross lived man. And a sound body far sooner, than a sick and corrupt body. That man which laboureth, easier, than a stillsittinge and idle person. A soberman, far sooner, than a bancketter, and one that haunt the hoores. The most convenient time of the year, to cure & heal a wound, is in the fore summere or Vernal time of the year, or at the least in such a time, in the which it is neither to hot nor too could, because that extreme heat, or extreme could, are the enymyes of all wounds, and especially the changing of heat, & of could, wherefore also the fore winter or Autunnus, is very unprofitable for the same. In some regions and countries, 
Other considerations to be his in prognosticatinge.  the wounds are either easier, or difficulter to becurede: for at Rome, the wounds of the head are difficulter to be cured, than the wounds of the Legs, the which notwithstanding at Avignon we find clean contarye.  
As far as the wounded person keep and continue his perfect Sense, and memory neither gettethe any agues, we may then assure ourselves, that the wound will quickly and easily be cured. We ought not thetfore to discourage the patient, although, he have an ague by the great wound, as long as the inflammatione is yet before hand, and as long as there engenderethe any matter. But an ague is very dangerous, 
Signs to the contrary.  when she issuethe from a small wound and especially, when she hath long continuance, after the inflammatione, and supuratione, or when she incitateth the patiented unto Phrenesye. When the patiented parbrakethe against his will, green gall, or immediately when he hath received the blow, or at the time while the inflammatione is as yet during, that is also a bad sign, especially in these which are wounded in a synnue, or in any sinnuishe place: But the parbrakinge, or vomiting, which cometh by the frewil of the patient. is nothing suspicious, especially in those, which are used to vomiting, if that a man praesentlye after meals, or after that the inflammatione is come, or the wound being in the head, 
Consideration for the wonds of the head.  do not come to vomit. The Chyrurgiane must use great foresight, in giving judgement of the wounds of the Head, for the ancient chirurgeons, have always esteemed them doubtfulle & suspect, because of other bad accidents until the Fifteenth day, and the modern and, young professors, until the hundred the day.  
The jurists, or lawyers, have constituted and ordained fifteen days, for the judgement of the wounds of the Head, to know of a certainty, whether the patiented by occasione of that wound came to die or not or by reason of his own fault, or by any other occasione. Because therefore, that the younger Chyrurgiane, shall not be over rash, in giving of his judgement, least he come te glide and fall into any bad reports, or in any repraehensione. As much as appertaineth unto me, I have known some, which have continued in a very good estate unto the thirteenth, fourteenth, or until the fifteenth day, and then have fallen into agues, and many other accidents, by the which they in the end chanced to die. We must also note, that all naughty and bad, accidents most of all publish themselves, at the full Moon, more than at other times, because as then all manner of moisture groweth and increaseth more, then in the decreasinge of the Moon, & also more in the summer, then in the Winter.  
The signs and tokens of the deadly fractures of the skull, are agues in the Winter, 
The signs of the deadly fractures of the skull.  before the fourteenthe day, and in the summer before the seaventhe day: Item, a naughty and bad colour of the wound: little matter of the same: mortificatione of that which is inflamed: slimy or viscouse consistence of that which is corrupted: drieth aridity in the skin of the head, as it is in a piece of pouldrede flesh, with a brouwne, leadishe, and black colour, which signifieth the beginning of the corrupting and putrifyinge of the skull, which then waxeth raw, as we may see, when it is rotten, and grown black: whereas before it was even and smooth. finally we see therein, a pale, and yellowishe colour, to wit when the foresaid bone is whole corrupted & rotten, through the purulent matter, which was sunk to the ground of the wound, and was there gathered together.  
The patiented beginneth to rage, he hath little pimples one his tongue, he getteth also convulsion of synnues, one the contrary side of the wound: some fall inte an Apoplexia whereon follewethe death. The Practitioners of our times, have observed in all wounds, whether allreadye therein wear a Paralisis, or else thereafter happened thereunto: and onethe contrary side a Convulsione, or sometimes also in the wounded part a Convulsione, and in the other side a Paralisis, sometimes also in both the parts, either a Convulsione, or Paralisis, and sometimes one each side either a Convulsione, or a Paralisis, without the contrary side being in any sort therewith infected. The good signs of healing, in the fractures of the Head, after that it is trepanede, or else after that the broken parcels of bones, are taken out of the Head, are these namely when that the Membrane of the Brains hath her natural colour, and her natural motion & stirring: when the engendringe and growing Flesh is red. When that the patient may easily turn about his Neck, and also easily wag his lower chaw bone. But in somuch as the Membrana hath no stirring, 
Bad signs.  and is black, leadishcolourede, & lividouse or with any other bad colour tainted & defylede: Then the patiented ragethe, vomiteth exceedingly, falleth into a Paralysis, or in Spasmo, if that the Flesh of the wound be leadishe coloured the neck & the chawebone both of them stand stiff all these are very bad signs. And when the wound, is at a good estate, them beginneth the flesh of the Membrane, or of the skull to grow, and to wax double, and filleth all the void places with flesh, that have been open between the bones, yea & sometimes covereth even as it wear with pomegranate Kernels the skull itself.   

❧ The tokens how to know which parts of the body are wounded Cap, 3.  
TTe wounds most commonly are known by their first aspect, also sometimes the place of the wound certifyeth unto us, what parts are internally wounded: But seeing that it often times chauncethe, that these wounds ', which to our estimatione be not profound or deep, penetrate unto the internal parts, we will here therefore recite the signs, by the which we may know, what internal parts, within the body aré wounded, because there by we may know, whether the patiente may be cured of them or not.  

Signs when the brains are hurt.  If so be that the Brains or else there Membrane is wounded, them there issueth blood out of their Noses, with some also out at there Ears & commonly there followeth a vomiting of choler: some lie almost out of the memory & beside themselves that although you call & cry unto them, they give no answer: others seen in their faces as if they wear affrighted & feared: some turn and wind there eyes, this way and that way, as if they wear touched & stricken by God's hand, the third or the fifth day most commonly they fall into madness & frenzy: other get the Spasmun, before they die: some there are which pluck the medicamentes from there Heads, so that the wound cometh to lie bare, & waxeth could.  
When as the back bone is hurt, 
Signs when the back bone is hurt.  or wounded, them beginneth the patiented to be feéble & lame in his sins, or else he getteth convulsion of sinews, which is called Spasmus: loseth the sense of feeling, sometimes the patient can neither retain his urine, Sperma, or Stole, but of itself departeth from him.  
If the Heart be wounded, 
Signs when the heart is wounded.  there issueth out of the wound, great store of black, dence, or thick blood, & especially when the right side of the Heart is hurt: But when the left side of the Heart is hurt, then issuethe out of the wound fine & subtle red blood the pulse of the patiented is very debile & feeble, & variable, & is very pale coloured in his face: The could sweat in all his body bursteth out, and hath a very unsaverye smell, even as we may note in other sicknesses of long continuance. His hands and feet begin to be could, out of the which present death ensueth.  
When the Lungs are hurt, them breatheth the patiented with great difficultye, 
The wounds of the Lungs.  & diverse times reiterateth, & draweth anew his breath as if he there by sought & endeavoured to do himself some solace & comfort: he voideth of ten times through his mouth frothy blood, & through the wound fair, red, & vitalle blood, with peeping & hissing breath: he endeavoureth for the most part to lie one his wounded side: others often times erect them in their bed with out any occasione: Some lying one the wounded side, can speak, but turning themselves one their sound side are quite deprived of there speech: sometimis they are bloesinge in their faces, & sometime clean pale, and at the last issueth out of the mouth of the wound great quantity of filthy matter,  
The signs of a wounded Liver are these; 
The Liver being hurt.  nanlye that out of there right side they avoid a great quantity of blood: Both sides of the body, are as it wear plucked toward the back bone: The patiented is very pale in his face as if he wear half dead: His eyes are fallen inwards, and hath intolerable pain, being ignorant through his impatientie what he shall do: he ist best at ease when he lie th'one his belly: he hath a very pricking & stinging pain, which draweth toward his breast, and also toewarde the sides of the same. Heavinge and contracting his shoulders together must he breath, and sometimes through, parbrakinge he avoydethe choler. Hath a very violent, & fervent pulse, he is easily incensed to ire, & sorrow: sometimes he hath an ash coloured face, his urine also sometimes very bloody: his stoels like matter, and die most commonly, with the Hickcoughe.  
When the kidneys are hurt, then descendeth & as it wear by degrees cometh the pain into the flanks, 
Of the wounds of the kidneys.  and so forward unto the testicles: the patient can very difficultly be released of his urine, he pisseth blood, or at the least his water is bloody. Sometimes his urine is quite retaynede, by the which occasione, the patiente being extreamlye swollene dieth.  

The milt being hurt.  If the milt be hurt or wounded, than the blood issueth out of the left side of the patient, & is black of colour. The same side, & also the stomach begin to be indurated, & hard: the patiented waxeth thirsty & the pain retracteth itself towards the breast, as in the wounds of the Liver.  

The womb being hurt.  Now the Womb being hurt the woman hath great pain in her flanks, in her Haunches, & in her hips: she avoideth blood partly through the wound, and partly through her privityes, after the which sometimes followeth a parbrakinge of Cholera Others can not speak: some lie out of memory others which do not rage, say that they are troubled with great pain in there sinnues, & in their Eyes: & when they draw toward death, they are troubled with the same accidents, which we have recited of the Heart.  

The Middle reefe,  When the middle reefe or Diaphragma is wounded, them are the sides of the patiented drawn, & shrunk upwards: they have exceeding great & violent pain, internally in the back bone: they have very retardate breath, and there issueth out of the wound frothy blood.  

The entrance of the stomach,  The entrance of the stomach being hurt the patient beginnethe to have the hick up, & avoideth choler: when as he eateth or drinketh, he casteth it straight way from him again: he hath a small, feeble, & obscure pulse: he getteth a little could sweat, with a cooling of all externalle parts.  

The stomach & the guts,  The stomach, & that gut jeiunum, have both of them one manner of token, because that there meat & drink issueth out of the mouth of the wound sometimes being half digested, and altered in Chylum: they feel a pain, as if a man would rent & tear there Harte out of there bodies: they get hardness in their sides, sometimes also parbraketh the patiented Cholera, upwards through the mouth, & his spittle is bloody: betveen these two is no other difference, then that the gut jeiunum hath his place & situatione somewhat lower then the stomach.  
The bladder being hurt, we feel pain, 
Hurts of the bladder,  in the flanks: that part of his belly a little above his privityes extendethe & stretchete itself: in stead of urine the patiented pisseth blood, or else the urine issueth forth of the wound: the entrance of the stomach is perturbed & out of order, wherefore the wounded vomit Cholera, or at the least are afflicted with the hick cough: they begin to wax could in hands & feet, and consequently ensueth death.   

❧ Instructione, how to give a certain report of all wounds whatsoever before the magistrates. Cap. 4.  
ALl such which before any magistrates, 
Codsideratione to be had before the giving of report,  of any wounded or sick person, will & are disposed to give report & instruction, shallby no means intrude themselfves, before that of the magistraete they shallbe requested thereto, & sent for, seeing that most commonly proferede witness is repraehendable: & he that taketh such a thing in hand ought first of all to visit and see the patiented, because he might ripely and dilligentlye consider of all things, namely & especially one the greatness of the disease, one the situatione, & place of the same, not only, as then may give good instru●one, but also, one all occasions, & on the praedictione & fore saying of the wounds, without having unadvisedlye therein hasted himself: for it is a hard and difficult matter, to give a perfect & complete judgement of the end of all wounds, or other sick personnes, because of the accidents which might chance thereunto, for those wounds, which we do not esteem of sometimes are occasione of death, & contrarylye those of the which we expected nothing but death, are yet notwithstanding cured. We know, that some there are cured & healed, notwithstanding although they wear wounded in the Membrane or pellicle of the Brains yea & some which wear hewede in the substance of there Brains: as I also remember some to have been cured, which wear hurt in the luges, in the Middlereefe, in the Liver, in the small guts or entrailss, the Bladder, the Kidneys, or in the Matrix or womb. Although we according to the judgement & reason of the ancient professors, esteem such wounds to be deadly & incurable. contrarily we see some men men die of small and undiepe wounds: we must therefore in such things make a distinction among the wounded for some there are which are of so good a temperature, and state of body, that of a great and large wound which in any other man's body wear present day the, they are cured: contralye there are others which being wounded in any externalle parts, which are nothing nocente or dangerous to the life of the patiented, without any penetratione, of the which, notwithstanding they chance to die, either of the bad constellatione, or constitutione of the time, or by the refluxione of any bad humours unto the wounded part.  

Some men die of a small wound.  Although therefore, that some wounds are curable, and also of a good constitution & dispositione, without any bad or contrary sign therein to be marked, but for all that we may not give any absolute judgement or report of the same, but must only say that the wound is curable, so far forth as there be nothing praetermittede, which consisteth and belongeth as well in the patiented as unto the Chyrurgiane which hath him inhandes, it belongeth also unto the circumstantes, and unto other external things.  

The judgement must be provident lie given.  We must therefore suspend our judgement, and keep it in secret for a season, without giving any absolute report the first day, because that the good or bad signs can not so soon reveal and disclose themselves: we must also consider that all wounds must have their original, there increasing, and there estate, and during this time, seek by all means possible to repress the untemperatenes, which is fallen into the wounded part, through the blow, through the external air, which striveth with nature, against the which nature strengthenethe and fortyfyeth herself, to expel and drive away the foresaid untemperateness, during the which time, we can not certainly know, which of them shall obtain the victory, them only some time thereafter, whenas the foresaid untemperateness maketh herself known, through any signs which she revealeth in the concurringhe humours because nature, through certain signs, doth demonstrate that she hath obtained victory, and is become the mistress of that untemperatenesse. These signs and tokens are especially known, by the matter afore hand: and because that the purulence or matter, is not engendered the first day, it necessarily followeth that on the first day, we give not any absolute report of a wound, but must first consider, whether it is bend, because that nature one the days of Crisis demonstrateth herself, by the which we may judge of the end of the sickness. The first, and certanest day of the Crisis is, the seventh, for the fourth, is not indeed the day of the Crisis, but well the demonstratinge day of the seventh, which is the upright and true day of the Crisis. After the seventh, followeth the eleventh, of the which the seventh is the demonstratinge day, than the fourteenth day followeth, after that the twentithe, and then the last is the fortithe: For if that before the fortieth day, we perceive no bad signs, it is then evident and plain enough, that the wound will be easily cured.  
It is best therefore that we do not report or give any judgement before the seventh day be passed by, in which time, 
When that the report must be done.  the accidents begin to reveal thence 〈◊〉 ●her on as then we must have a special 〈◊〉 ●de and care, whether there be more good, then bad accidents afore hands, or the contrary, we must consider one these signs, three manner of ways: For they reveal themselves either in the quality of the body, of the wounded part, or in the living, and vitalle in the animaele, or natural actions: Or in the excrements, which are common, or in the whole body, also in the particular excrements, which the wounds reject and repel from them. The signs which reveal themselves in the qvalitye of the body, are considered, when we regard on the figure, and one her colour: the animaele, and spirituale actions, consist in the stirring, in feeling, and in reason. The vital, or the living actions, consist in the pulse: and the natural actions, consist, in the appetite, in the digesting, and in the expelling and driving forth of the excrements. The common excrements of the whole body are the filthiness of the Nose, the tears out of the Eyes, spittle out of the mouth, or the substance and filthy matter of the guts, the urine, or that which we opwards parbrake: The particular excrements, are filth, matter, and the blood: in which excrements, we must mark and note the quantity, the consistence, colour, smell, and sometimes also one the taste: seeing that if there be more good, that is so much the better: we must also note, that through the actions we may best judge of the forces. Having thus therefore together considered and noted all these things, the Chyrurgiane shall be able to give his sentence and report certainly, either of life, or of death, of lamnes or criplenes.    

THE first TREATISE OF THE OPERATIon of Chyrurgerye, wherein is discoursed and handelede of the means and way how te extract and draw forth any alienate thing out of the body containing five Chapters;  

Of the profit, and necessity that cometh to draw all alienate things out of the body. Chap. 1.  
How the Chyrurgiane, conveniently and fitly extracting and drawing forth the bullet, aught to consider & mark their diversityes, and in what parts or places they lodgeor are collocated. Chap. 2.  
We ought to extract and draw forth the pellet, or any other things, if it by any means, be possible, at the first dressing. And praemeditate, one the means, how we should best and convenientest effect the same. Chap. 3.  
After what manner we shall draw forth those bullets, which stick fast in the bones. Chap. 4,  
That the Chyrurgiane ought not to be too curious, in extracting or drawing forth of the bullet. Chap. 4.   

❧ Of the necessity, and utility, of the extractione or drawing forth of all strange things. Cap. 1.  

The excellenty of Chyrurgerye.  amongst all operations of chirurgery, the ancient chirurgeons of old times, have especially considered, one the handle, where with all we most conveniently, and aptly, drew forth out of man's body all manner of strange & alienate things, as are Bullets, Arrows, and all other sorts of weapons, or all pieces of brokene bones, and many other such like things as being most necessary, for this foresaid operatione.  
It is a Chyrurgiane full of craft,  
That out of the body can pluck shaft.  

An excellent similitude.  And even as in the warlike affairs, those Captains are esteemed to be most courageous and valiant, which one the sudden can best discern and know their enemies. and allure and as it wear draw them, forth to their own furtherance, to battle: oras in chasinge, those hunters are esteemed fittest and expertest, which suddaynelye can discover, or disclose, the harbour of the persecuted dear, and knoweth how he may with all foresight chase the same: Even so have the Physicians also, had those chirurgeons in great estimation, which first of all, have found out that part of man's body, in the which the bullets, or Arrows, or any other alienate things have been hidden and lodged, and which have had knowledge & science fitly & conveniently to draw them thereout: considering that through there continuance in the same, above all things they are clean contrary unto us & unsufferable, as that which is dead, & living: so it is a hindrance unto us, and especialye to that part, wherein the foresaid weapon, stickethe, and that as well of itself because that it whole, hinderethe the curing of the wound, or else because it bringeth together many & heavy accidents, the which is cause of lamnesse or criplenesse in the wounded part: or else causeth the health which we suppose to have gotten not to be perfect, and sure, but is subject unto a far worse return & renueinge of the same. Yet for all that I know some which are cured, 
Some men are cured containing the bullet in the body.  in the which the bullets as yet tarryaes in some parts of their body without being necessary to have searched for the same to curiously, or to pluck it out although that we might easily have attained there unto, & touched it, because of the danger that thereof might ensue: as for example, a violent bleeding through laceratione of some vain, or arterye: any great & violent pain, through the stretching or drawing for the of some synnue, or Membranes: An especially it is not necessary, curiously to search after such things, or to draw them forth, which can not rot, or corrupt, as that which easylye, or in time can come to rot. But yet it is always better, that all which is strange and alienate unto man's body, and is contained in the same, be drawene thereout, then to let it tarry therein, because that the health (as we have all ready said) is far surer, concerning the danger, that is then present, to cause the cured wound again to burst open, when as the bullet, or any such like thing, cometh to repraesent himself: or that we should not be constrained to make an apertione any where, whether the foresaid bullet through his ponderousness might chance to be descended.  

Which are the strange things,  The Strange things of the which in this place we have spoken, are of two manner of sorts, for they are, either external, as Iron, wood, bullet, stone, or wool: or they are any substance of our bodies, as any splinters or parcels of bones, & the congealed blood, which we notwithstanding esteem it strange, because they are separated from our bodies, and are no more partakers of our life, or vital spirits, as they wear before when they as yet wear all one with them, wherefore they are now become strange.  

The intent of the Author,  My intent & purpose is nothing else, then to describe unto the young Chyrurgiane, the practice, of all bullets, and of all other strange things, which might therewith enter mingle themselves, or therewith might be crushed to pieces, how to draw them out of the body: Because in th●se our days here in France there is no other shot used: seeing that the knowledge of the extracting of the same, may easily lead us unto the knowledge, how to draw forth shafts, & Arrows out of man's body, of the which the ancient professors have very copiously written.   

❧ How that a Chyrurgiane aptly & fitly to draw a bullet out of the body, aught to consider their difference, & the nature of the part, in the which it is shot. Chap. 2.  
THe Chyrurgiane being requested and desired to draw forth the bullet, 
Wherein consisteth the danger of drawing forth of bullets.  having pierced & penetrated some part of the body with least trouble, & hindrance to the patiented fitly, & finely to accomplish the same, because that sometimes they are drawn forth with insufferable pain, shall first of all consider & mark, that the danger consists, either in that part, in the which such bullets are shot, or in the species forms, and difference, of the bullets: it is therefore first of all necessary, that he observe, and know, the nature and qvallityes of those parts, for some parts will more gently and softly be handled, then others: wherefore he must consider, on the substance, qvantitye, figure and form, compositione, unitinge, originalle, temperature, and one the necessity & use of the same part. To the which end & purpose, he must note what wounds, in the which the bullets have been shot, are incurable, or difficult, or easy to be cured, because that we may admonish, the friends, and kindrede of the patient, of those accidents which might happen unto the wound, the bullet being drawn thereout, also of the certainty or fear, which through the danger, we are to expect, of the healing of the same. 
Advise of Celsus.  For first of all Celsus sayeth, that a prudent, and wise Chyrurgiane, shall not at any time take in hand, such a patiented, for whom it is impossible to be cured, & escape death, because he administer no occasione unto others to suspect, & think, that he hath bereft the patiented of life, which otherwise through the bad fortune of his wounds is diseased. And seeing that the danger is great, but yet notwithstanding intermingled with some good hope, them he shall admonish the friends of the patient, that the matter is heavy, and suspect, because if so be the art & science, be suppressed, and overwonne of the disease, that they should not as then think, either that he hath not known thereof, or else that he hath sought to abuse the friends. But that such is the office, and the duty, of a wise and prudent Chyrurgiane, also is it the fact of a Runagate Qvacksalver and deceaver, to make any thing, seem to be very dangerous, which of itself is easy, and light, because we should think, more art to be in him, than indeed theris. It is also seemly, that the Chyrurgiane confessing, the cure to be easy & light, do pawn his credit, & reputation, because as then he might the more willing, think one that, which might be most commodious and profitable, to the curing and healing of the patiented, and that the disease which of itself is small, through the negligence of those, of the which the patiented is kept, be made no greater.  
To this end Paulus Aegeneta counseleth us, 
Opinion of Paulus Aegineta.  that if so be, the bullet continue, or tarry, in any of the worthiest parts of the body, as in the Brains, Harte, Liver, or throat, in the kidneys, bladder, or Matrice, and the signs, & tokens of death revealing themselves we cannot by any means possible conveniently without great pains, & dilaniatione of the wounded part draw forth the foresaid bullet, that as then we may not offer to touch it, because that without doing any good or furtherance, we do not administer unto the ignorant & common people, any occasion, of evil speaking or blaming us.  
But although the issue of the wound, be as yet uncertain, having admonished and fortoulde the danger, 
Many men preserve their lives above the opiin of the Chirurgeon.  we may with God's help take the cure in hand: because that some having an Apostematione, in any of the worthiest parts, against the opinion & certainty of the Chyrurgiane, have as yet beheld & praeserved their life: yea we have also seen & beheld some, in the which a parcel of their Liver, one part of the Epiploon, the whole Womb hath from them been separated, or hewed & cut of, the patiented for all this hath been cured, and praeserved to life. We have also at some times in a vehement & great squinantie, pierced & made an apertione in the throat. But if so be that we suffer the bullet to continue in the body, or in any part of the same, without extracting of the same, when that easylye he may be drawn forth, it necessarily followeth, that the patient must die therofe, it might also bring the Physician, or Chyrurgiane into the name of being cruel, & merciless, where other wise the bullet being drawn forth, it might be that the patiented might as yet be cured, wherefore the Chyrurgiane must always endevoure & do the best he can, when he hath forttoulde, & admonished the friends of the patiented, of the danger, because some times great & fearful wounds beyond the expectations of all men are cured, wherefore we ought not at any, time to permit or suffer the patiente without help or succour, where there is any small hope of being cured. 
We must not at any time leave the patiented.  And all though that all things of this our operatione fall not out according unto our mind, yet notwithstanding, must not we leave to effect that which this art & science reqvireth, & that which our conscience witnesseth unto us.  

Consideration of bullets,  Above all that the Chyrurgiane must consider, on the wounded part, he must also farther consider one the difference, & variety of bullets, which consisteth, in the matter, form, qvantitye, number, and faculty of the same. As concerning & touching the matter, although that the foresayed bullets, most commonly are of lead yet for all that sometimes the besieged, & they that skermishe in the fields are constrained to use tin bullets, Copper, pieces of iron, steel, peasen, yea & also little stones or pebbles. As concerning the figure or form thereof they are most commonly round, although there are some shot with three corners, some four corners, & some of other fashions. touching the qvantitye, there is great difference concerning the greatness of the pieces, by the which the bullets are shot. As for the number, & constitutione of the foresaid bullets, there are some which shoot, with more. than with one bullet, with some which are fastened the one, with the other, with little chained Bullets, with hail shoot, which spread themselves, in the body of a man. Speaking of the forces or faculties, of bullets I have not as yet given any credit unto them that said the bullets might be poisoned, because as yet there hath been never a famous Chyrurgiane which ever had a venomous shot wound in hand in these our times which hath made any mentione therofe, as is plainly showed, in the discourse of the diseased the right worshipful M Ambrose Paré, chief Chyrurgiane to the king his majesty which hath very learnedly discussed & as it wear ground this question in his boockes of Chyrurgerye.   

❧ The bullets, & all other strange things ought in the first dressing to be drawn forth, so far as it is possible to be done: & of the means how to effect the same. Chap. 3.  
WHen that the Chyrurgiane shall have considered, one the part, & also a little observed, one the variety, & difference of bullets, he shall choose, a certain number of instruments which continually he ought to have by him, especially those, which he supposeth to be most fittest to draw forth the foresaid bullet with most facility & ease. 
We must endevoure to draw forth the bullet at the first dressing.  The which he shall at the first dressing, without any longer delay, unto the next day, put in ure and practice: for the bullet being drawn out, shall the patiented, & Chyrurgiane also be freed from great danger, the which both of them with all right aught to desire and long for. The bullet may also praesentlye, while the wound is fresh & green, be felt with the finger, or most fitly with the privet or searching iron without tarrying until the next day, because that the wounded part, through any concurring humours, swelleth out of hand, through the pain of the wound, by the which the entrance of the wound cometh to swelle, as also through the force of the bullet, any of the Membranes or Tendones, being bruised the foresaid entrance of the wound, stoppeth: because most commonly shotten wounds do not enter right, or liniallye into the body, but turning, & also with any Membranes, or tendones round about wound, & even ●●ngled, as also the bullet through his ponderousness, running this way or that way, chanceth to fall into some hollow place, which sometimes frustrateth, & annihilateth the knowledge of the Chyrurgiane, so that by any means possible, he can neither touch nor find him: above all this, the foresaid wound, is the second day more sensible, & tender, then when she is fresh, as the patiented also while that the wound is fresh & warm, is better able to abide the sounding or searching iron, or privett: & that which is more, the wounded having obtained no time to think, 
The wounded feeleth not his wound at the first.  & consider of his wound, his heart being as yet puffed up with vain glory, is not as yet at the first dressing, possessed with any timorousness or fear, as he is in the second or third dressing: wherefore in his frist dressinge, with more courage, & patience, is able to bear the pain, and drawing forth of the bullet.  
First of all therefore, if so be that by any means we can neither find nor feel the bullet, to acomplisshe & effect this work, fitly & conveniently, with the least trouble & pain of the patiented, we are constrained to cause the patiented to sit or stand, in such a form, & posture, or, collocatione as he sat or stood, when as the bullet was shot into his body, yea also with the same gesture, & behaviour, 
One what manner we must set the patiented  which he used: for the chainginge of the form as when we fight, or when we are laid along, or when we stand upright, or being set down, causeth a great alteration, in the being, and situatione, of these parts of the patient, because the veins, arteries, synnues, bones, & muscles, may one so many ways & fashions be turned & wound, as they have diverse uses, & actions unto the which they at fit, it be either in the erecting, or in the stoupinge, or in the turning: which often times is the occasione, that altough we search, & feel for the bullet, any muscle lie any other way turned, than it did, when the foresaid muscle was pearcede with the bullet, the wound in that place most commonly being stopped, so that for the most part the searching iron can not enter that place where the bullet lieth: But when we shall have set the patiented on such a manner, as he stood, or sat, when he was shot, them come all the parts into the same situatione, as they wear when he was shot, wherefore, as then the proof or searchge iron, may pass very easily, without any let, even into that place whereas the bullet lieth. And so far forth as the patiented, considering his great imbicillitye & weakness, hath not the strength to stand in that order, we must as then at the least, either sitting or lying, turn, & wind him on such a manner, whether he sitting or lying, in as much as is possible, as he was when he received the shot. 
Why the wound must bedilated.  Now being in such a situatione, we are first of all counciled, if so be the wound be narrow, as also all ancient Chyrurgians teach ' we must as then dilate the wound, because the bullet, or that which is therein, may have a free passage: for there is nothing, that causeth more in flammatione, then dilaceratione, or tearing of the flesh, when as with violence we seek to draw out any thing out of the wound, wherefore it is better to make the, dilatatione with a little rasore then with violence to tear op the wound: further we must note, that in the dilatinge of the wound, we chance not to hurt any synnues, veins, or arteries: the which if you perceive, you shall eschew & avoid them, or with a little & blunt hoocke pluk them one the one side, & proceed betrwixt them, as Celsus in his 5 cap. of his seventh book teacheth us.  
After that we sufficiently dilate the wound we must them search for the bullet or that which is shot in the wound, 
The second instruction.  & feel first of all with your finger, if it be possible, as with out doubt it is, the best searching iron & in feeling we must consider what way the bullet hath taken, & if it be deeper than the length of your finger, as than we must use there unto the common searching iron, which must be reasonable thick, and at the lower end very round, for if so be, it be to sharp pierceth, and goeth between two muscles, with out following that way which the bullet went.  
When as therefore we have certainly found out the bullet, 
The third instruction.  the third instruction is that we draw him forth to the effecting of the which, there is nothing surer, them to draw him through the same place, by which he entered, & especially when he hath not penetrated to deep, or passed through any great vain, arterye, or synnue because the way is allreadye made, wherefore we need not make any other inscisione.  
Amongst all instruments which ever I have used, I have contented myself best, 
In scisione one the contrary side.  with that instrument, which we call, the spoonewyse, or spoonefashoned bullet drawer, because this instrument, may both be used fore a serge iron, & a bullet extractor also, so that as soon as we heerwith feel the bullet we may also at that time, pluck him out: but piercing very deep, & one the contrary side is little substance, & without great veins, & we with our fingers may feel the bullet, it is then better, & rather counceled, there to make an apertione, namely, on the contrary side, of the entrance of the bullet, then to draw the same by the way which he entrede, considering the great distance, and space, through which he being drawn backwards, must of necessity pass buy, as also the pain is far greaater, when with the bullet, & with the instrument, the wound internally cometh to tear, & bruise the Flesh, them when by inscisione we dilate the wound, by which she is also sooner cured, because that which is cut, more re easier & sooner is healed, then that which through dilaniatione is wounded: and if it be possible, the foresaid inscisione must be made right under the bullet, but somewhat greater than the bullet, because than we need not draw him forth with any violence, & do not chance to lacerate the wound: This being in this sort finished, we shall find the bullet a great deal nearer unto us, & more easier to be drawn thereout, without passing by to great & tedious a way, in the drawing forth, of that way by the which he entered, 
Vtilitye of inscisione.  yea which is more, the wound will a great deal sooner be cured, and with less danger, the wound having two issues, to wit the one under, & the other above, partly because she may receive the remedies the better, as also considering the matter, which one both sides hath her issue, which otherwise might be retained, & collect or gather itself together in the bottom of the wound.  
As soon as the bullet is drawn forth, we must show it the patient, because he may be joy full & glad, to be released of that which was such a molestation & trouble unto him, and was cause of so great pain, and by the which he might have gone so lange a time with pain, without being thereof cured: we must endevoure by all means, either by drawing him forth, through his entrance, or else through the contrary side of the wound, well knowing how to effect this drawing, with all fitness, & convenience, because we should not forsake the wounded, neither discourage him, through our long operatione, or working: & effect that also with the least pain possible, because that the pain of the wounded patiented thereby, which is great might not be increased, 
Instructione how to work wisely.  for it is to great a shame, to bring a wounded person which bath enough to suffer, into greater sufferance & pain: we must also diligently note, that we do not buy any means hurt any particular part, and especially the great veins, arteries, or synnues, or any other vital parts, one the which we must have an especial eye, and care: for it would be to great a disgrace, & shame, thinking to draw forth the bullet to do more harm, than if the bullet had stayed therein.  

What sometimes deceaveth the Chyrurgyane.  We are often times deceived, neither can we also find the bullet, because he is clothed, with cotton, with wool, or with any other parcels of apparel, which the f●re said bullet, carrieth into the body with him: or else because the flesh, or the Membranes which are bruised, or with violence of the bullet have been rent, cover the foresaid bullet. It is also sometimes evident, that the foresaid bullet, erreth from his right way, & chanceth to come somwhether a side, into some other part, & yet notwithstanding, having in the passage met with any bone, is for all that removed into some other place, as between any muscles, between any Membranes, or betweme any ligaments, wherefore the Chirurgianes not finding of the same, & searching for him according to the rectitude of the would, must turn, & wind the instrument one all sides, & feel with his hands one the out side not only the wounded part, but also the circumiacent places, because thereby he might know whether that the bullet might be sunk: which he shall discern, and mark, either considering any pain, spamninge of the skin, hardness, or through any blewnes or cerulitye, which commonly, is noted & seen about that wounded part, where, the bullet is conveyed, & sunk. We must also dilligentlye note, that when as we think to have found the bullet, we do not rashly make an incision, before uvea are certified of the place of the bullet, and so draw him forth of the same: for that Chyrurgiane wear worthy to be laughed to scorn, which can not accomplish his pretended purpose after that he hath so intolleratlye tormented the patiented.  
Albove all this, we must note, and mark, 
The bullet sometimes carrieth sonthinge with him in to the body.  whether the bullet have trailed nothing with him into the wound, as paper, wool, cotton, linen, or any thing else of the patients clothing, or apparel, or also any parcel of the patientes armour, or harnas, or any pieces of wood, stones, or iron, which the bullet mightby any means have carried with him into the wound: as such a thing might well chance, when the bullet any where against a wall, or against on's harnas, on the which the foresaid bullet chanceth to rebound, breaking, & receavinge some small parcel of that on the which he plettered, carrieth it with him into the body: If so be there be any such like thing, carried, into the wound with the bullet, we ought to have no less care of that, yea rather more, than one the drawing forth of the bullet, for such things are whole contrary unto nature, because they corrupt and rot in the wound, out of the which needs, must follow some great Inflammations, or Apostemations, & so conseqventlye, the wound in a long time can not be cured, which otherwise might easily be cured, & much sooner, although that the bullet as yet tarried therine, & especially if that the bullet be of lead, because that lead, unitethe & maketh itself all one with our nature. 
Means how to know whether the bullet have taken any thing with him.  And perfectly to know, whether the bullet have carried any such things with him, we must consider, one the harnas, if that be any where torn, or broken, & if it be a mayled doublet, how many mails there are wanting, the which one that maketh mail doublets easily can tell you: we must also note, the patientes apparel, his shirt, whether there be any great or small pieces thereof torn & rent: or whether there be one, only hole found ther.   

❧ How we ought to draw forth those bullets which stick fast in the bones, or in the iunctures or joinetes of the same: also what we ought to note whenas the foresaid bones are crushed, & beaten to pieces. Chap. 4.  

Those bullets which stick fast in any bones, are very difficult to be drawn out.  THe greatest danger that consisteth in drawing forth of a bullet is, when the foresaid bullet sticketh fast, in anyé bone, or in any joincte between the bones. If so be the bullet, stick fast in any bone, it is most convenient that as then we draw him forth, with that instrument which we call Extractor, or Ground drawer whereof we must set the point one the bullet, & wind it very fast in the same, & when it is therein fast, we must softly & easily try, if he will not follow, turnige the hands, this way and that way, the better to make him lose, and stir. But if so be that we can not so soon get out the bullet we must then suffer him, to continued therein some certain days, with in the which time, the external flesh will begin to rot, through the which the wound will be somewhat dilated, & wider, and the bone will somewhat disclose & open, during the time, we must every day stir the bullet, & with the instrument lift him up because that thus doing, the foresaid bullet might by little & little be removed & Loosed: and if that we perceive that the bullet sticketh to fast, & can not by any of the fofsayed means bedrawne out: then is this the last remedy, that we quite, & clean pierce and boar through the bone, with the Extractor or elsi with the point orpiramide of a Trepane, pierce & boar, against, & round about the bullet in diverse places, 
Elevatorium or upheaver.  because there may be made some place for an Elevatorium, on that sort to lift up the bullet & drew him thereout, if that with all gentleness it may by any means possible be brought to pass for we are in no wise counciled, with violence or vehemence to effect it. And if it be a little and small bullet, & that he stick in any place fast, as in the middle of the greatest focile of the shin bone, or in the middle of any rib, or in the sternon, or in any bones of the head, we are as then counciled, to trepane that bone, setting the Trepane on the bullet, so that the foresaid bullet, be round about compassed withinthe circle of the Trepane, and that then the trepane might abolish and take away all that, which retained and held fast the bullet.  

On what sort we must draw forth a bullet out of a joincte.  But when the bullet is any where, in any joincte pierced & penetrated between two bones, as for example, in the knees, we must then as easyely as it is possible, endevoure with the instrument to stir the bullet hither, & thither, hut always straight forward, now toward the hip, and then toward the leg because that thereby we might the better, unshutt & make lose, with the least pain that may be, the ligaments, & tendones, which contain & hold the joincte so close together: by the which apertione, and drawing forth the space, & distance between the bones, will be a little dilated, so that at length, with less pain & trouble, & with the little spoonewyse bullet drawer, we shallbe able to draw forth the bullets. But if we feared, lest we should put the patiented to some intolerable pain, through the distending of the ligamentes, & tendones, my council is as them, that the young Chyrurgiane, endevoure, to follow and use the same, which I did or have used on my lord of Floyon: which in the skirmish of Maestricht, 
A notable History.  got a shot in his knee, the bullet lying fast, & occult in the iouncte betweme the bones, the which neither I, nor any chyrurgianes, of Don John of the Eeaste, could find, at the last it seemed good unto me, against the opinions of all the rest, we should shut & fold together the knees of the patiented: which he doing with some pain, the bullet, through the fouldinge of the Knees, & the bones which placed & pressed themselves together, was driven thereout, & revealed itself externally, under the skin, and one the sides of the foresaid joincte, where I having made a little inscisione, myself have taken the same forth of that place.  
In like sort, if so be the bullet, 
We must dilate the wound if the bone be dilacerated  have rebownded against any bone, and the bone through the violence thereof be broke, & crushed to diverse pieces, & the bullet as yet remaining therein, or else having pierced quite through, it is as then the surest way to dilate the wound, as far forth as the wounded part is able to suffer, it, & that either in the entrance, or issue of the wound, at the least if it have an issue: the which being finished, we strayghtwayes with the finger, or with any other instrument, must search for the splinter, and finely draw forth, those parcels which whole are separated from the bone, & also in like sort, the bullet, if so be as yet he sticketh therine: & if that there wear any great pieces, or parcels of the bone, which as yet are not whole separated from the bone, but are yet fastened with the Periostium, or the ligamentes, we must not with any violence draw them forth, because through such violence we might urge great pain & convulsion of synnues, wherefore it is far better to place & situate them by the bone, on the which as yet they are half fastened: For nature, expelleth them most commonly with the matter forth of the wound, without any pain, they separate also from the bone, through the increasinghe of the new flesh, the which repelleth the same from him, or else in time they conjoin themselves together, and are so again cured, as I have of ten times known the same to chance, and as yet in fresh memory, Monsr. de la Tour, ordinated and chosen gentleman of the kings chamber of presence, which in the Baricades, or Trenches of Paris, got a shot in his left leg, the entrance whereof was in the oppermoste part of his shin bone, breaking the least focile, in diverse pieces, of the which also one piece of the same focile came forth, through the apertione, which the foresaid piece, through the violence, & blow of the bullet, had made himself, which cleanly pierced througe the Muscles called Gemini & Solores, wherefore m'Habricot, Barber Chirurgeon at Paris, made an inscisione in the foresaid muscles partly to extract & draw forth those splinters forth of the same, & partly, to restore again those broken pieces of bones, into the wound, which as yet wear not separated from the Periostium: and is in the space of two months again cured, the foresaid pieces of bones being therein very sowndelye healed, and I also have treated him until such time as he was whole & fully cured.  

The bullet sometimes pierceth through the grissles.  Sontimes the bullet pierceth clean through, some cartilege or grisselye part, or through some Tendones, which being softer than the bone, doth not break, but only splitteth asunder or bendeth itself, & as soon as the bullet is passed buy, erecteth itself again, & occludeth, the passage, where under the bullet hide the himself, the which, all though we endevoure to search for with our fingers or searching iron, it for all that is impossible we should find him, which commonly chanceth in the wounds of the breast, when as the breast bone is pierced. As I remember such to have chanced, in my lord of Malicorne being wounded, & hurt before Maillezes in Poittou.   

❧ How that the Chyrurgiane ought not be to curious in searching out the bullet. Cap. 5.  

Good doctrine for a Chyrurgiane.  although, the bullet be of any strange, & alienate, substance, yea also as intolerable for nature, as is the living with the dead, the principal intention, to cure all wounds is, that we must first separate that, from the wound which oppugneth nature, yet notwithstanding ought not the Chyrurgiane be too curious, in seeking all contrary things in the wound or to too bold & audacious, in drawing them out, except he lightly or easily, can find them, & with small pain & grief to the patient can draw them out. Because that often times, in the first, we can find nothing, but the wound being come to good suppuratione, and matter, the bruised flesh round about the bullet corrupting & rotting, at the last maketh him an apertione, through the which nature in the end, expelleth the bullet without any pane, as is the nature & qvallytye of the vital & living parts, to expel from them the mortified and dead parts: the which we ought to understand of all other contrary things, which are retained in a wound: as sometimes being the surest & best way, that we recommend such things unto Nature, 
The Chyrurgiane is the servant of nature.  & follow her instructions, then that we in vain torment, and molest the same, seeing that it is she only, which curethe the deceased, when as she through the Chyrurgiane, as through her servant is opitulated & helped: For I have known many, and diverse, which being shot, the bullet hath continued in the body, are yet for all that perfectly cured, and that in short time also, without at any time thereafter to perceive any impediment thereof: which especially chanceth the bullet being of lead, the which in time by little & little cometh to unite itself and with our nature agreeth: wherefore for a renoumned example I will allege, the wound of Monsieur of Chardon, the first gentleman, of my lord the Cardinalle of Bourbon, who being the Chapelayne, of my lord of Angvien, hath gotten a shot in the skirmish of St. Laurent, in the midst of his leg, of the which shot the bullet, remained fast sticking therein, the wound being whole, & compleatlye cured, without perceiving in 28 year any hindrance or molestation of the same, wherefore he reqvested mr Pare, & me, 
Example.  that we should remove & take a way the foresaid bullet from his leg, fearing lest that the same, in time, might be any hindrance or molestation unto him, the which we also effected, finding the bullet united and coalited together, as well with the bone, as with any Membranes, and so fast grown, and joined together, as if the bone, the membrane, & the bullet, had all of them been but one substance. It happeneth also sometimes that the bullet through his ponderousenes, & heavyenes by degrees, dessendethand sinketh downwards, towards the exterior skin, 
The bullet through his ponderousness sinketh downwards.  that part notwithstanding being cured, through the vyhich he descendeth or sinketh, without the perceavinge of the patiented, where, without any great trouble or molestation of the patiented, he may be cut out, which one this manner is far surer, them if in the first we had tormented him heerwith, & brought him into danger of his life, considering the great dilaniatione or tearing of veins, arteries, and synnues, which the hardnecked and obstinate Chyrstrgiane, in searching and in drawing forth of the bullet, might be the cause of: wherefore I, in all sorts do council, that when the bullet, can not by any means possible fitly or conveniently, without any great torment of the patiented be drawn forth, we as then quietly suffer him to tarry therein: In thus doing we shall follow the practice of the ancient professors, yea also of Hypocrates, 
An example of Hypocrates.  which reciteth to have cured a certain parsonage, which had received a shot with an arrow, in his flanks, where of the head, or iron, tarried therein, and yet against the opinion of all men, is thereof cured & helped: which foresayed arrow head or piece of iron, six years thereafter he took from him. Paulus Aegineta allegeth, 
Paulus Aegineta.  that he hath of ten times seen, that the arrows have been lost in men's bodies, & that the same, in a long time thereafter, the wound being cured, are through apostematione of that part come again to light & revealed themselves. Albucasis sayeth, that he also hath seen one, 
An example of Albucasis  which was shot with an arrow into his shoulder, of the which shot, the foresayed arrow, therein stuck fast, & yet for all that is cured, but that the arrow, seven year thereafter at the length through the bone Coccix is come forth and taken out. Wherefore we must not be to curious, in drawing forth the bullet, with great danger, & torment to the patiented, & to our utter shame & disgrace.    

THE second TREATISE OF THE OPEratione of Chyrurgerye, wherein is discoursed, of the means, how to Trepane the Cranium, of the Head, Containing six chapters.  

Of the signs & tokens by the which we may know when there is a Fracture in the Head. Chap. 1.  
Of the counterfracture, of the skull. Chap, 2.  
Which Fractures we ought to trepane. Chap. 3.  
How long, we ought to tarry, before we proceed with the trepane. Chap. 4.  
How great a quantity of bone, we ought to take thereout. Chap. 5.  
The manner, and method of trepaning. Chap. 6.   

❧ Of the tokens, through the which, we shall know the fractures, of the skull. Cap. 1.  

Chyrurgerye must not rashly be effected.  THe operations of Chyrurgerye, which with great prudence, & consideratione, will be effected, we must not all to rashly or overbouldlye begin them seeing, therefore that it is dangerous, to open the Cranium of the head, before we may attain unto the operatione, we must diligently and truly consider, whether it be very necessary, or not, which is revealed unto us, by those signs and tokens which the ancient chirurgians have beqveathed unto us: For the sign or token, is the demonstratione unto us, which discovereth, that which before lay occult, & hidden: The which foresaid tokens, of the wounded part, must be taken, and observed, either of the accidents which chance unto the wound, after the blow, or fall, or also of the instrument, wherewith the wound was made.  
We must therefore first of all note, 
Discriptione of the signs  which part of the head, hath received the stroke & namely, whether the Cranium, one this place be thin, or tender, thick or strong, because the bones of the head, are not in all places of aequalle crassitude, or of equal tenuity: 〈◊〉 there we must mark, whether the weapons, wherewith the blow was given, have also cut of the hair, & that it showeth itself right in the wound for if it be so, it is to befeared, that the bone is bared or uncovered, out of the which we may easily judge, the Cranium to be hurt, because that it is all most impossible, the hair to be cut through, the which for the most part slippeth aside, with out hurting of the Cranium or breaking there of. Having thus considered and noted all this we must interrogate the patiented, whether he have parbraked & vomited any Cholera, whether he lost not his sight, and his eyes darkened, whether he lost not his speech, or hath voided any blood through his nose, through his ears, or through his mouth, whether after the blow he fell not down to the earth, and there lay still, without any reason, as if he had binne one sleep: For it is impossible that all these foresaid signs chance unless the skull were dilaniate, or broken. In like sort if the patiented, lie without his memory or reason, if he rage, if he be vexed with Paralisis, 
Divers accidents of the wounds of the head.  or with Spasmo, or with them both together, it is then credulous, that the Membrana called Dura Mater, is hurt, and suffereth great pain. And although that none of these accidents have happened unto the patiented, yet notwithstanding all ways there is something doubtful, whether the Cranium be hurt & broken, or not: and to be thereof certified we are to note, with what instrument the wound was made, as either with a stone, with a stick, with an iron, or with any other weapons: also whether it wear great, or reasonable great, light or heavy, smooth or rugged, whether the blow was smitten violently, or easily, with greath ire, & fury, upwards or downwards: of all the which we may be certified of by the patiente, when as we ask him on what manner he was strooken, or from whence he is fallen, & wherone, to wit on the earth, or on the pavement, whether he have great pain, and in what place, for how easier the blow hath been strooken the less fear there is of a broken skull: yet notwithstanding, there is nothing surer, 
Celsus.  as Celsus sayeth, than that we search the wound, & give judgement through a more surer sign, wherefore, if so be, the wound be great enough, we must as then search it with the finger, scraping the bone with your nail, one that manner to perceive the rent, and dilaceratione, and if so be we can not effect that with the finger, we must as then try it with the searching iron, which must not be to gross and thick, neither to sharp and thin, because, if that per adventure we perceived any natural hollowness of the skull, 
What form the searching iron must be of.  we should not think & esteem it to be a dilaceratione, or fracture: neither must the privet or searching iron be to thick, or gross, because it should not praetermit & overrun a little or small dilaceratione, without perceavinge it, and staying there at. When as therefore we lead and perfricate the privet or searching iron over the skull, & perceive no unsmothnes, than all even, and smooth, than we say & esteem the skull to be with out danger, & not dilacerated or torn. But if so be we perceive any thing, which is rugged and uneven, and that the searching iron standeth thereat fast, if so be, it be not on the sutures or commissures, and joining of the skull, or any natural concavitye hollowness of the Cranium, it is then a sign, that the head is broken, or lacerated, and rend wherefore the Chyrurgiane must diligently mark, that he do not in steed of the fracture, take the suture, because that those commissures, 
The Chyrurgiane may easily be deceived.  often times do deceive the sight of the Chyrurgiane in his judgement, and that as touching the similitude, which the commissures, are participating with the fractures: And we are to note, that in some persons, the future's have no natural situatione, or place, 
A suture, or commissure, is the joining together of the bones of the head.  but to the contrary we must also note, whether that there be any dilaceratione one the fracture, or not: for it might chance, that the natural similitude of a suture, might well be a rent or dilaceratione, which is not so easily to be perceived, & known, because that a suture considering her nature is unsmothe and rugged, even as a dilaceratione is wonte to be. Wherefore Hypocrates, 
Hypocrates hath been deceived.  acknowledgeth to have been deceived, in the person of Antonomus, of Omilos, who being thrown with a stone in the midst of his forehead, and a bout the sutures, died within the space of fifteen days thereafter, because that he was not trepayned, and because also the foresaid Hypocrates, thought and judged the skull not to be dilaniated or torn. Wherefore, it is the surest, and certaynest way, & principally, when by, or in the wound there are these foresaid accidents, with agues, that as then we denudate, and uncover the skull, because the sutures sometimes have no certain place, for sometimes we espy them, in the midst of any bone, which a man would think to be a fracture or dilaceratione: it might also chance that the foresayed sutures, or the next parts, unto the same, 
The future's of the head are variable.  might be dilacerated and torn, the which we can not certainly espy, without making denudatione of the Cranium, and to our sight uncover it: when as therefore we doubt, whether there be a fracture or fissure, and can not certainly espy it, because of the smallenes of the wound, as then there is less danger, and the cure thereof happeneth so much the sooner, & the surer, when as therein we make a reasonable wide apertione, rather than being thereof uncertain, we as yet proceed with such a small apertione, in curing of the same wound, because that it is whole impossible, otherwise to know any certainty, of that which therunder lieth hidden, as we easily see in the great apertions, which thereafter, may very easily be cured. It sometimes also chanceth, that the Cranium being sufficiently denudated round about the fissure, yet for all that with the tacture, or with the searching iron, or with the eyes, we can not by any means possible espy the fissure or rent, because it is as subtle and fine, 
How we shall espy the hayrye fissure.  as a hair, wherefore it is also called the hayrye fissure, or rend: to the which purpose we must above on the skull or bone, wipe a little ink, or any other black medicament, because that the nigreditye or blackness, may imprint in the fissure some sign of his blackness, if so be that there be any, which bare bone, we must there after scrape with an exfoliative trepane: For that which is burst or rend, notwithstanding retaineth his blackness, by the which means, we shallbe certified of the largeness there of and profundity of the same.   

❧ Of the counter fissure, in the bones of the head. Chap. 2.  
THe ancient Doctors, and all so certain professors of our time, make mentione, that we sometimes find a counter tear or fissure in the skull, as if we had received a blow in the occipitialle part of the head and had the tear or fissure in the antereore part of the same and there revealed itself, or in any other part of the head also, whereas the blow did not alight. 
Signs of a counter fissure.  The conjecture which we ought to have of a counter fissure, is, that we surely know whether the patiented wear roughly strooken, and whether after the blow, any bad accidents have followed, as if through the blow he fell to the ground, hath there lain impotent, hath vomited Cholera, is full of agues, although it so be that we can find no fissure in the Cranium in the place of the wound, and there where the skull is denudated. We must also farther note, and observe, wether the patiented often times lay his hand, on any other place of his head, then where the wound is, complaining of any pain or heaviness of his head: we must one that place which we suspect apply some Cephalic plaster, which when we remove, the same, we must then note, whether any one certain place of the applicatianes, be moister than in another place, or else anywhere under the payster, the skin be softened and a little more swollene, than the other, which finding it to be so, it is then a sign, that in the skull there must needs be a fissure, & that it is necessary, there and in that place to denudate the Cranium: for sometimes we find the bone there to be broken: The ancient Chirurgeons have beyond all this written, 
Opinion of the ancient professors touching inscisione.  that although we have inscided the skin, without any reason or occasione, it easylye and lightly will be again curedand if so be that the skull be dilaniated & torn, and we having forgot to detect & denudate the same there immediately followeth a great imflammatione, which very difficuttlye can be cured. But I as yet could never attain to the knowledge of such a fracture, neither can I perfectly adhibite any credit thereunto that there can by any means chance to be such fissures shut up, and closed or joined on with the other and so grown together, or being missing of the broken bone unto that, which findeth itself in the fracture of the other side, right over against it. I have seen, that with the shot of a gun, that the first table was unhurt, and yet not withstanding the second was crushed and broken, & when I perceived that the patiented, had gotten many bad accidents, namely, that through the blow he fell to the ground, had vomited, forth at his nose voided blood, was whole abashed feeling pain about the wound, having also an ague: and fearing least the patient might have died, I trepaned him, whereas when I had pierced the first table I found, that the second was burst, yea and that reasonable wide: wherefore thereafter I was urged to believe that the counter tear or fissure, in the other side of the skull, which by the ancient professors was described, must be understood in the same bone, for the first table, is right against the second situated. It might also chance that neither the first table nor the second should be hurt, or broken, yet notwithstanding the Diploe, that is the porosity which is between them both, 
An observatione of the auctor.  was so plettered & crushed, that the little veins, wherewith it was, replenished, wear broke & burst and avoided blood from them which in time corrupteth and rotteth and also corrupteth the bone internally, the which in some time thereafter we perceive, for the bone waxeth leadishe coloured, on the which the Chirurgiane must well note.  
It may also chance, that the skull, be safe and sound, yet through the violence of the blow, any veins which contain that membrane which is called Dura matter, 
Veins which burst within the brains.  as well of those which pass through the sutures as througe any of the other small holes internally are situated with in the brains, might come to break, out of the which there will issue blood, which thereafter congealeth and with great pain changeth in to matter, with many other fearful accidents. In this disease theris all ways pain about that vain which is burst, and if so be we chance to open in this place the skin, the bone there under hath a pale and dead Colour: but it is a difficult matter to judge, and know it, wherefore considering often times of the impossibility, to do any remedy or cure therine & by want of knowledge, death suddenly ensueth thereon. The which Hypocrates reciteth of the daughter of Nerius, 
A history must of the daughter of Nerius, described through Hypocrates.  which was but 20. years old who in playing being smitten on the bone Bregma, with an outstretched arm, of one of her playfellows, strayghtwayes without any respiringe is, fallen into a Vertiginem who as soon as she was brought into the house is fallen into a violent ague, with pain in the head, and redness of face: & one the seventh day she voided a goblet full of reddish matter filthylye stinking out of her right ear, by the which she seemed to be somewhat lighted and easyed but when the ague again returned unto her, she was then whole abashed, and almost lay without any reason or understanding, with Spasmo, in her right cheek, or side of the face, without being able to speak wherone the foresayed Spasmus hath possessed the whole body, with shaking, & qviveringe, with the tongue tiede, and with irremoveable eyes, and died on the ninth day.   

❧ What Fractures of the head we ought to trepane and wherefore we must trepane them. Chap. 3.  

We ought not at all times to trepane.  Although that in all fractures and fissures of the skull, the yonghe chirurgeons take their light or refuge straight unto trepaning: it is notwithstanding better, that in the first we try, with plasters, and with many other remedies, and inventions thereto constituted, and ordained: considering one the consequence and importance, of the foresaid Fracture, whether, it be needful or necessary, to take away any parcel or piece of bone, considering the excellenty, and worthiness of the brains, which are such worthy parts: wherefore we must wisely and diligently consider and mark, whether the wound give a good digestion forth of her, and purifieth herself, and whether there begin in the wound to grow, any red pomgronate Kernel wise flesh, or whether the ague which considering the suppuratione in the wound, be abated or assuaged, or hath left him which so in tollerablye vexed and tormented him, whether his appetite be again restored, and whether the patiented reasonably taketh rest or sleep, without having any troublesome accident chance unto him, wherbye we might suspect, that the membrane called Dura matter, or the brains, are molested, affected, or suffer any pain, either through a splinter, or through any blood, or through any matter, which might be come and situated itself therone: And the matter luckylye & ominously proceeding, 
The fissures recollect then selves sometimes.  we may continue the foresaid remedies, and the use therofe, because that sometimes by this means the fissures, are replenished & filled up with some obdurate substance and callositye, which agreeth and may be likened unto the callositye or cicatrice of other bones.  
Sometimes only the first table of the skull breaketh and renteth without piercing or penetrating the Diploe: 
Diploe is the porosity between the botables.  Some times also is the foresaid diploe crushed plettered, and broken & yet the second tablen safe and illaese or unburte, wherefore as then it is not necessary to detect and make bare or to trepane the membrane Dura Mater, yea and as than we may perceive the manner as it wear of a splinter, of the skull therein lying erected. The fracture at sometimes also is so great, with such a huge quantity of massacred, and crushed bones, which lie half, and half separated, or else for the most part clean beaten theroute, that we may plainly with our eyes behold the membrane Dura matter, so that the blood which driveth therone, may very easily flow out of the wound, in like fort also may the remedies therein easily be applied: To the which fractures, the trepane is nothing behoovinge or needful: And if so be in any sort you perceive any skilfers or splinters, by the which that membrane might be pricked, or crushed, you must take them very easily thereout.  
It happeneth also some times, not only in the little children but in aged people, 
The bones of the young Childrenes are bend inwardly.  also in who me the bones are so thin and tender, that with any rude blow they are inwardly bent, (as we see a tin or a copper pot to be bruised) without the external skin being any where externally hurt: To the which disease of the bones, we must only take our refuge & flight unto our extractive, & drawing plasters, wherbye that the depressed bone, might by any means be elevated, and heaved again into his right place.  
Hypocrates, comprehendethe in very Short words in his blooke De Locis in homene, 
The opinion of Hypocrates tou-  the whole cure of the fractures of the skull demonstratinge those unto us which we ought to trepane, 
The opinion of Hypocrates touching the curing of fractures.  or not. As far forth therefore (sayeth he) as if the bone be broken, or massacred, there is as then no perrille, or danger at all, & with moysteninge medicamentes must it be cured and helped, which quiet, and take a way the inflammatione, & soften and mollify the bone, because that without pain we might take the broken pieces of bone thereout: but insomuch as the bone only chauncede to be burst, it is then very dangerous, & must of necessity be trepaned, because that the matter which distilleth through the rent, or fissure one the membrane, do not in any sort corrupt and rot, the foresayed subjacent, or subiectede membrane: for as without havinnge any issue again, she come to sink through this angustnes, and narrowness, as than she causeth an ague, and sometimes also distemperatenes of mind: wherefore we must needs trepane, and make a large apertione because that the sanious matter may not only have an entrance, but an issue also: & when as we do not in any sort suspect that the membrane Dura matter, suffereth any thinghe, or is in any sort crushed, or pricked with any pieces of the broken bones, & that there is no matter run therone, by the which she might be troubled, it is not then necessary that we trepane, or open the skull. 
For what occasione we ought to trepane.  The Chyrurgiane is constrained to use the trepane for diverse occasions, and take thereout the broken bones: First of all to give an issue and passage to the congealed or not congealed blood, which was sunk on the membrane Dura matter, through the effluxion of those veins, which are as well situated in the flesh of the head as betwixt both the tables, & under the skull, which as there do restrain that membrane fast unto the skull. Secundaryly, because the matter, which continually soacketh through the fissure on the membrane do not chance to spoil, or inflame the same, because that through such an anguste passage she can have no issue, the which in the end might be the cause of the patiented his death. thirdly, to draw forth the broken bones & splinters, through the which the foresaid membrane might in any sort be pricked or lie crushed:  
fourthly, according as the work reqvireth, to apply convenient and necessary remedies into the wound: Fifthlye, because it might serve in steed of a repercussive, & defensive ligature of inflammations, which otherwise may be used in all other broken parts and joints, 
The head may not to strictlye be bound, & the reason why.  excepting only the head, because that this, considering the rotundity & rowndnes there of can not by any means possible therone be effected: for a ligature, which must be stiffly & fast wound, round about the fracture, to praeserve and keep the broken bones one by the other, might in the head be the cause of pay, and inflammatione, it would also hinder the agility of the arteries, and the ascendinghe of the fuliginous excrements, which through the future's of the skull, do evaporate: it would also repelle the external blood of the wound, & send it toward the brains, & membranes thereof, out of the which might ensue very bad accidents.   

How long we ought to tarry, before we begin to trepane, and of the places which in trepaning we must choose, or eschew. Chap. 4.  
HIppocrates chargeth the Chyrurgiane, 
Opinion of Hypocrates.  in his book concerning the wounds of the head, when as in the first he hath been thereunto fetched or sent-for, having together noted, the fracture of the bone, with the molestinge and troublesome accidents thereof, that without any longer delay, he shall within the space of three days begin to trepane, and especially the wether being hot, thereby to prevent the inflammatione: but not to the membrane, lest she lie bare, and so the external air chance to distemper her, and cause therine some corruption and rotting, lest also that in so doing we might chance to tear the membrane, in boaringe through the skull which cleaveth unto the same, or any of the other fasteninges of the membrane: or in placing of the instrument thereon, she might thereby be hurt or wounded. Wherefore, (as he sayeth) it is far better, when as there is but a little more bone to pierce or boar through, & the bared bone beginneth to stir itself, that as then we desist, until such time as it of himself falleth out. 
The Chyrurgiane is sometimes to late sent for.  But if so be that the Chirurgeon hath not in the first been thereat present, & the patiented hath of some idiot or ignorant fellow been dressed, which hath not know the fracture, and because there was no apertione made in the bone, to give air or light, unto the matter, there are chanced thereunto (as is afore recited) great inflammations, and many other fearful accidents: we must then (if it be in the summer, and the putrifactione one the sudden reveal itself) within the seventh day treparte the patiented, before the brains are whole infected, and chance to mortify: But in the winter when as the corruption proceedeth and goeth somewhat tarder ofsloer forward, we must then effect it with in 14 days: because these days being passed, as well considering the imbicillitye of his forces, as the greatness of the disease is incurable, although as then we trepane the skull, it is then to late, wherefore in no wise must we effect or do it.  

Opinion of Avicenna.  Avicenna will have that we straight ways begin to trepane, and if so be we must needs defer it, that we should defer it no longer than two or three days at the most, and that especially when as the Dura matter is pricked or lieth crushed, of any broken bones.  
Celsus sayeth, that he which tarrieth any longer from trepaning then three days, are not to be excused, because that such delay causeth a concursione of humours, on the Dura matter which finding no apertione, or issue, disordereth the foresaid membrane, and spoileth it, out of the which necessarylye must follow great inflammationes.  
But our use and practise in these days, is that as soon as we are sent for, whether it be in time or out of time, early or late, and we espy, either through searching with our, fingers, through the searching iron, or by our sight, that the skull is broken, rent, or torn, and that the Dura matter suffereth any thing, we out of hand proceed with the operatione, and that so much the sooner, when as we note, that their accidents demonstrate themselves, without any longer delay and especially, in debile aegritudinous, or corpulent bodies, because in them there are revealed far worse accidents then in others, wherefore to tarry or defer the trepaning any longer it would be small commodity unto us, but better that altogether we deferred it.  
And although the Chyrurgiane wear not in the first sent for, and that the seventh day of the summer, and the 14 of the winter wear praetermitted, and let pass, he shall not therefore refuse to do his utter most endevoure, with trepaning, for it is yet better somewhat to late them never, considering the good hope which we must have of doing the patiented any good, help, and comfort, which otherwise without trepaning of the broken bone, or the elevatione of the same, can by no means be done, which we only understand of those, which are not clean without hope.  

What places may bear the trepaning.  seeing therefore that we have the time & day limited unto us, in the which we ougt to trepane, we must consider what places, or parts of the skull are able to abide the trepaning, and which not. We must first of all therefore consider, that the bones which whole are in pieces, or being crushed, or at the least a great part of the same being separated, can not easily be trepaned, because he might chance to crush the trepane one the membranes, how easily soever he lean thereon. We must also note, that we do not chance to set the trepane one any suture, because in so doing, we should with great pain, and with great blood shedding, cut of the veins, arteries, and synnuish filamentes, which have a unity and fastening, with the Pericranium, and the membrane Dura matter, 
We may right well trepane one the sides of the future.  which have the free passage through the foresaid sutures, to retain the Dura Mater, and administer life, and nurture unto her. But if it so chanced that the fracture chanced to be one the suture, we must then apply the trepane, on both the sides of the suture, with out in the least touching of her: for if so be we trepane but on the one side only and not at the other side of the suture it wear then impossible that the blood or matter, should have at that hole any issue or passage, the membrane being betwixt them both: neither may we trepane on the fontanelle, or opening of the head in young Children, because that there tendere imbicillitye as yet is notable to suffer and abide the trepane. The inferior, or descending parts of the skull, are not convenient or fit to be trepaned, because the brains through their ponderousness, might chance to sink thereout, or the membranes through the apertione might chance to be extruded: But if so be we wear urged there unto, we must make but a very small apertione.  
We ought in no wise to trepane the temples of the head, 
We may not trepane the temples of the head.  because we should not hurt the temporal muscle, considering diverse synnues, arteries and veins, which are therein divided and intermingled through the which there might be caused to great pain, fluxion of blood, agues, Spasmus, and the patient might chance to die: Because that there under the bone called Os petrosum is situated, and that considering, the moving and stirring in the temporal muscle, which happeneth in speaking or eating, the wound might be far more dangerous, and Hypocrates also sayeth, that the inscisione of the same muscle, might be cause of a great, and villainous distortion out of the which one the same side, a Paralisis on the other a convulsion of synnues might chance to ensue. Nether aught we to trepane that part of the skull, a little above the eye brouwes, because in this place there is a great concavitye, fill of air, and white slimy, my, humiditye, of nature, in that place constituted & ordained, to paepare the air, which ascendeth up to the brains, the which indeed is worthy to be known & observed, because that the Chyrurgiane, might not in any sort be deceived, taking the foresaid concavitye to be, a depression of the bone, which needs must be trepaned: & if it so chanced, that any of these foresaid parts wear broken, as are the temples of the head, we ought then to apply the trepane, a little above the temporal muscle: 
We may not trepane that bone above the eyebrows.  if so be that the part or portione of the skull, be broke a little above the eyebrows, we must as then make choice of that part of bone, which boundeth on the fracture, as above in the fooreheade: it is right true, that if so be the foresaid bones, wear depressed, and crushed, that as then we ought to elevate them, and if they be clean separated we as then must pluck them out in like sort as we must do in the sutures.  

The sutures and temples of the head may sometimes be trepaned.  Yet considering all this, we are oftentimes compelled & constrained, to trepane in all places of the skull: The which a renoumned, & expert Chyrurgiane called Andrea's a cruse, confesseth often times to have done, without any danger. And I dare myself boldly affirm, that I in the years, of 1591. & 1592. have myself trepaned, and have seen others trepane, in the foresayed prohibited places, as one the sutures, and one the temples of the head. Notwitstandinge I would council the young Chyrurgiane, that in as much as is possible he avoid & eschew, the trepaning of these places, but rather make choice of any other part, which part, may be a little descending, because having made the apertione, the blood, the matter, & all impurity might thereout have there free passage. Considering in the days which go before and which conseqventlye follow after the trepaning, on the singularity, and worthiness of tvose parts, we must command the afflicted and wounded person, that in all things he will be sober, and observe a good diet, both in eating and drinking, abstaining especially from wine, and phlebotomye, as much as is needful, because that the humours, should not concur unto the wounded part, and that also we keep his head warm, with light coveringes of the head, because could is a great enemy unto the brains & all synuis he parts.   

❧ What qvantitye, or what bigness of the bone in trepaning we must take out Chap. 5.  
WE must in the first, according unto the quantity, 
How great the apertione must be for to trepane.  and bigness of the bone we purpose to take out make an apertjoin the skin & denudate the foresaid skull: Therefore if so be there be no wound nor any apertione, and the skin externally as yet unhurt, this shall as then be the convenientest apertione, which with hands may be made, which we shall make with two crossewyse overthwarte inscisiones, in such a form as this in the margin, demonstrateth unto you, or else in form of a borghondiane cross, which in his middle praesenteth four corners. In somuch therefore, as if the hurt, have made a wound, and inscisione, in the skin, we must suffice ourselves therewith, with such as it is, if so be she be thereunto fit and apt, making an other transversal inscisione, namely overthwarte the wound, because these two as then may present one. But if so be, the wound be very ample, & large, we must as then only cut the skin one the one side, beginning the same in the middle of the wound, because so the wound may present this letter T, in the which will be but two corners.  
These foresaid inscisions, are cenvenientest done for the inflammations. 
The inscisione must be done before the inflammatione.  But if so be we perceive the wound to be large enough to give place unto the trepane, or any other instrument, whatsoever, wherewith we might endevoure and seek to elevate, and restore again the broken, or depressed bones, in so much as if there be any, we must therewith content ourselves, exstendinge the foresaid wound at the first with lint, & with little plumaceoles, thereof being made and therein crushed, on allsydes, & corners of the wound.  
But in what sort or fashone soever, we make our inscisione in the skin, we must always note that we do not suffer any portione of the Pericranium to remain one the skull: which under the skin, decketh and covereth the whole skull: because if so be the foresaid membrane Pericranium, wear per haps, torn with the teeth of the trepane, might be the cause of great inflammatione, pain, and agues, where fore it is better that we clean, and whole separate it from the skull, which being done, we must then dam & stop up the wound with white lint, by the which the next day ensuing we shall find the wound wide open, & if as yet there wear any parcel of the skin, or lip of the wound, which might be a hindrance unto the trepane, the which in the turning about might chance to touch, we shall with the scissors clip it of, without deferring it until the next day.  
When as we having considered, one the place where to set the trepane, we must then note, how much, & how broad, we ought to boar the skull. 
What qvantitye of bone we ought to trepane.  First of all therefore, we must whole take away all the broken and crushed bones, which whole are separated from the sound part, and also from the Pericranium, considering that they can never therewith be united & joined again. But when as the broken bone is depressed, & any part thereof as yet thereon wear fastened, with the sound parts thereof, which crushed the membranes of the brains, or any acuitye of the same, as yet stick therein, we must not therefore for all that cut it of, and whole take it away. But must by all means endevoure, easily to lift & elevate the same, & situate it next unto the bordering bones, exempting only out of the same the small pieces, which might hurt the membrane, & prick it, because by this curing & remedy, the bones again renew, unite, and join themselves together with the circumiacent bones. In so much as if there be any more rents or fissures before hands, which from the one side, disperse themselves this way or that way, we shall not need to pursue them unto their end, but we shall only take some part thereof away, because most commonly they join, & saulder as it wear together again, the which is a far more better opercle for the brains, than that new incarnated flesh, which after the trepaning groweth therein, where we have taken the whole broken bone thereout, wherefore we must take no bones thereout, then with great discretion, & then as few as is possible, 
The skull is the natural opercle, or cover to the brains.  so that they do not prick, & trouble the membrane, with their acuitye & edge, & that there remain distance enough, to give passage unto the blood, and the matter which is therone gathered, to depart, for as well the membrane as the brains, shallbe better defended, through the bone which as yet they Keep, which is there natural defence, as if we qvite & clean took it away, through which discovering, the foresaid brains might be hurt or hindered.  

The Diploe is the distance between the two tables.  It chanceth often times that the first table cometh to be broken, & rent unto the Diploe, yet for all that the second table remaining untouched, wherefore it is not then needful to apply the whole trepane therone, to boar the bone qvite out, but in this case we must only use the exfoliative trepane, 
When we ought only to use the exfoliative trepane.  thereby to administer any passage or apertione unto the blood, which, being sunk between the foresaid Diploe, through continuance of time beginning to corrupt, might in the same time change & altar the second table also, and cause any accidents thereof to ensue. If so be in the wound we perceive any splinter, which exalteth itself with some high eminence, we must not be so curious, to take the same immediately a way, or cut it out seeing that it is any where fastened, but rather commit it unto the work of nature, which will deminish & separate no more therofe, than shallbe necessary & need full, because she is wise and prudent in all her works. It might also chance that the bone, not being broken or rent hath only been above contunded, hurt, or externally denudatede, which being so, we must only above scrape it even, and grate it.   

❧ Of the manner & method how to trepane well, and artificially. Chap. 6.  
So many and diverse species & forms of fractures, as there are even so are there diverse means where by we may succour the wounded patient. When as therefore the fracture, is nothing else, than a right running fissure, we must then consider whether it pierce or penetrate through both the tables: the which me may know through the Raspatorium, or through the exfoliative trepane, where with we must grate the first table, unto the Diploe, & if that the foresayed fissure, 
Diploe is the space between the two tables.  as there doth not depart or vanish out of sight, neither the accidents desist, finding also the foresaid Diploe plettered crushed, or broken, & any matter which through the second table cometh to distill into this place, it is as then a sign that the foresaid fracture pierceth, unto the second table, & stretcheth itself one the Dura matter also: 
Method how to trepane.  we are as then counciled to apply the whole trepane therone: & ordinarylye to effect this, as it is needful to be done, we must cause the patiented to sit, one such a manner as the part which is broken reqvireth: we must stop his ears with cotton, & decline and lay his head one a company of pillowebeares, which must be indifferent hard, & cause his head of one or two men to be held fast, because he stir it neither this way nor that way: then we must cover the lips of the wound, with any plasters spread uppen fine linen cloth, lest that of the air, of the turning round of the trepane they might be hurt or wounded, Al-this being in such sort fineshed, we must situate and settle, the perforative trepane very fast or steadfastly, on the broken bone, on such a place where as we desire to have the acuitye or point of the trepane situated, there to make a perforation, which being effected, we must therone situate the whole trepane whereof the point, must be set in the hole or perforation, the which before was made with the perforative trepane, and so easily turning it, the bone first of all shall raceave the point, & by and by the crown, or the teeth of the trepane, without either gliding this way or that way, or remove out of there circle, because of the acuitye or point of the trepane which must restrain the trepane, with out slipping out of his place. There is a certain industry in the depression of the trepane, so that it both turneth round, & pierceth or cutteth also: for if so be we lean to lightly therone, it than pierceth and cutteth little, or nothing at all: & if it so chanced that as than we depressed is somewhat to hard, it will not then turn round, wherefore heerine we must use a medium between them both, or mediocritye, & lift it some times out, to purify, & brush it, and then anoint it with oil of roses, because that it might the betre pierce and enter in. The trepane having now made a reasonablve deeped circle, as than we must take away the point out of the middle thereof, for if it pierced deeper than the crown or teeth of the trepane, he should be sooner passed by or through the bone than the trepane with his teeth, by the which the membrane called Dura Mater might chance to be hurt, the foresaid point therefore being taken thereout, we must again set the trepane in his hole, or circle, and marking that the trepane hath pierced the Diploe, 
Signs to know when the trepane is entered into the Diploe.  and passed thereby, the which me may perceive by the blood which will issue thereout, through those little veins which there are opened, we must then finnishe the trepaning with more discretion and heed taking there unto, unto the concavitye of the skull, turning the foresaid trepane very easily & wisely, laying the left hand very lightly therone, that thereby we may the better espy, when that the skull shallbe pierced qvite through, that we do not in any sort hurt the membrane: because thereof might ensue, inflammatione, and the danger of death. 
Note the form or figure of your trepane in the skull.  Now to mark this, we must often times lift up the trepane, to try the thickness of the bone, through the which the trepane hath passed, which we must with a little privette or searcher try, or with a proper instrument which here tofore is only for this intent described. By which means, we must also note, whether it be in no place clean pierced, for although we rightly & aeqvallye turn the trepane, it may never the less happen, that the foresaid bone be one the one side clean througe, unto the Dura Mater, and one other side not so deep: when we therefore perceive this, we must proceed with turning, & depress the trepane one the other side where the bone as yet is not through somewhat more, because the bone may aeqvallye be pierced, or if it will not so be, we may then with the same turn of the trepane, pierce the bone one the one side, & denudate the Dura Mater one the other side, which sometimes I have known to be done. Such an in aeqvallitye, cometh partly as well considering the head, which is round, as concerning any concavityes or furrows which are situated in the second table, which toucheth the Dura matter, wherefore the bone is in one place thicker than in an other.  
In like sort we must also plant the little groundedrawer in the perforation, the which in the first was made with the point of the trepane: Or we must, stick that Elevatorium which is at the point of the little foresayed growndedrawer in that circle, which by the trepane is made, therewith to lift out the little piece of bone, or make it loose, by the which we shall easily espy, whether it yet hold very fast, & whether it need any more to be bored, & if we see that it hath pierced unto the Dura matter, we shall then with the foresayed Elevatorium, 
After what sort we ought to lift out the perforated bone.  or with the groundedrawere, whole lift it out, with out breaking of it or doing any violence therone, because there through we do not chance to hurt the membranes but give it rather one turn or two, because that so much the easier we might lift it out, at one ti-time. This being done and the round bone being taken thereout, we must then smooth and make plain, the edges of the perforation, and grate them, and take away all his acuitye and ruggedness, from him, for if so be there remain any small splinter therone or any other unevennes, the which not being clenlye taken thereof, it might be a great hindrance unto the membrane: and if so be that through trepaning there chanced any of the powder of the bone to fall one the membrane, we must endeavour by all means to get it out: If so be it is sufficient to remove the first table, without touching of the second, we shall not then plain and scrape the edges only of the pierced hole, but also the whole bone, because that thereafter without any trouble to the patiented the skin may grow therover: for if so be that it come to grow over the rugged and unsmooth bone it will be a great hindrance to the patient, and cause a nue pain, because that the flesh will not be so good, wherwhithe the rugged bone shall be covered.  
And this is our practice, 
Manner we to trepane unto the membrane.  and manner of trepaning unto the membrane Dura matter, and the manner also how immediately to lift the bone out of the perforation, although that Hypocrates, in his book of the wounds of the head, strictlye prohibiteth to boar the hole unto the membrane, and presently to take it thereout, because the external air, suddaynlye alighting one the same, might chance to hurt the same, by the which occasione she might thereafter chance to rot: and more also if that we take the bone out of the same the which as yet might be fastened with the foresaid membrane, we might chance to tear the same, or any small veins therone fastened: or if that we stuck the trepane unto the membrane, we might hurt the same: it is therefore the surest way, sayeth he, that when as the bone is all most clean through, and beginneth to stir, that we then desist, and tarry until such time as it of itself falleth out: But our trepane with the crown, or teeth is such, that unless the Chyrurgiane be very ignorant, might in any sort therewith, hurt or crush down the membrane.  

Nue invented trepanes.  We have invented other forms of trepanes, which we have in this book also set down their form which we call Terrebellum alatum, the winged trepane, which taketh no pieces of bone with it but diminisheth, and consumeth them, wherewith by no means we may hurt the membrane: there are some which having used them, find them far surer, and expediter in theridamas operationes, than those with the hood. But if so be there be any great massacring of bones, or depressinge of the same, then the membrane is there through depressed and crushed, and is also sometimes pricked with the splinters, of the broken bone. In these two dangerous matters, we must help, and succour the patiented or wounded person one some other sort, & that as soon as it may be possible, in the extracting of the same, if so be they be whole separated: 
What we ought to do when as the Dura matter is crushed through the broken bones or splinters.  To which purpose, it is oftentimes necessary to trepane, & cut away some part of the sound bone, which bordereth and is situated next unto the plettered bones, because that our Elevatorium, might in the elevating of that which is depressed downwards have sufficient place, & rest itself one the sound bone, with out in the elevatione to depress the brokene bones any more downwards: for as Hypocrates sayeth, the bones which are broken, and depressed, can not without great danger be bored or perfotated, because that the depressinge of the trepane, or Elevatorij, by any means of them can not be suffered. It often times happeneth that the second table is more depressed than the first, wherefore to that intent we must let the Elevatorium pass through the perforation of the trepane, between the second table, 
Elevatorium is an instrument wherewith we use to lift up any thing out of a wound.  and the membrane Dura matter, because in that sort we might lift up the broken bones and splinters again, and take them out if they lay lose or separated. And if so be there wear no hole, & above all this, the place of the fracture, could by no means suffer, to have therein made a hole, it is as than my manner to take my growndedrawere with three feet or points and set therone, 
Practise & inventione of the author.  & then make choice, of the greatest, & which is most fittest for me, considering the fracture which is in the bone, to intrude the same therein, and easily wind the same therein, holding your hand always hanging, and not depress the same to hard, because he will easylye enough enter therein, & when he hath a little pierced we must as then with a certainty, & the easiest way possible endevoure, to lift up the broken and crushed pieces of bones. But if so be, there be any piece of bone so far shoved under the skull, that it lay above the membrane, and the same considering his greatness, and the angustnes of the apertione, could not by any means be taken thereout, either by Elevatories, or Pincets, we must then take our refuge, (if so be we will not through the trepane make the apertione any bigger) to the cutting pincers, & to the Parrates bill, with the which we may cut of as much bone as we please, with out any pains, or danger, making one this sort the apertione somewhat wijder, to take out of the same the foresaid piece of bone, which driveth one the Dura matter. touching the inflectione or bending inwards, without fracture, which commonly chanceth in young children, or in these which have a weak & tender skull, when this is crushed, or bendt inwards, as is a copper or time pot, those are better to be cured with extracting plasters, then with the trepane or with the growndedrawere.    

The French chirurgery THE third TREATISE OF THE OPERATIon of Chyrurgerye, wherein is discoursed and handelede of the sowing or suture of wounds. Containing six Chapters.  

What the suture, or sowing together of awounde is and the use thereof. Chap. 1.  
Wherone we must note in the sowing of a wound. Chap. 2.  
What is needfulle, to the sowing, and of the means, how to do the same. Chap. 3.  
Of the species, or differences of sowing, and of the time to remove the same. Chap. 4.  
How we ought to repose again the guts, with the net, whenas they hang out of the body. Chap. 5.  
Of the Gastroraphia, or sowing of the belly- Chap. 6.   

❧ What sowing is, and the use thereof, and in what impediments she is necessary, and in what parts. Chap. 1.  

Six things which in sowing must be considered  THe Chyrurgiane ought to consider six especialle things, which concern the sowing of wounds: First the use thereof, that is, in what impediments it is necessary, & in what parts: what we must therein consider: what there is wanting to effect the foresayed sowing: after what manner we ought to do it, & how many fashions, & differences there are of the same. 
Descriptione of sowing.  Therefore sowing of a wound is nothing else, but a uniting, and coupling together of the dissevered parts: which wear contrary to nature, separated and parted one from the other, which foresaid unitinge must be effected with a threded needle.  

Inventione & use of sowing.  The occasione, why we in any wound, or separated part, use this sowing, is to unite again, & join them together, whereof the convenientest means is, this sowing, & the use of this combination, and that especially in all such parts, which we can not conveniently oraptlye bind together, even as we may plainly see, in the great wounds of the arms, & legs, which are overthwartlye wounded, in like manner also in the body wvich happen in the length thereof, for the lips or edges of the same, are so much separated one from the other and causeth the wound so to gape, that she could not without great danger be cured, unless that in any place we sowed it, to bring them together and unition: because that all incarnate, or fleshy parts of the body, are drawn through with certain sinnuishe fibers or filamentes, the which being overthwartlye, or contradictorylye separated the one, from the other, the one lip of the wound is drawn opwarde, & the other downward or the one on the right side, & the other one the left, all according as the wound or the separatione is more or less, overthwarte, contradictory, long, deep, or undeepe. In like sort is the sowing, very necessary in a wound, wherein a piece or parcel of flesh hangeth one the one side, and one the other end as yet connexed, even as it commonly chanceth most commonly, in a great hew or slash, through the which the ear, hangeth by the head, or in any other part, as in the nose, the which held fast but at one end only.  
It happeneth also some times, 
Sowinge in a separated place, is unprofitable and needless.  that the whole part is clean cut of, wherein the sowing is nothing profitable, wherefore therein we must not use any sowing at all, to cure them again, for then in the separated part is no more life, & therefore can no more be nourished of the body, by the which the curing aught to come.  
And although that all those parts, which against the course of nature are separated from the other, might behoove to be healed again, can not bear or suffer to be united or coalited, even as are the synnues, Tendones, & Cartilages or grissels, because after the opinion of ancient professors, and as also the use and practice teacheth us, there must consequently follow of one prick, or thrust with a needle, in the synnues, or tendones, great pain of all sorts, inflammatione, convulsion of synnues, and some times also death itself, through the sympathy, or compassione, which they have with there first original, the which Galenus, hath showed unto us, in a wound, below the Hockes in the which, 
The tendones are dangerous to sow and why.  considering the greatness thereof, it was very needful that there should be a profound suture, & that not only to bring the supersituated places, together, but also the profound lying parts of the wound: the which he endevouringe to effect, hath separated the tendones from the muscles: for because there is great danger consisteth in the hurting of the synnues, even in like sort is their danger in hurting of the tendones, & that considering the synnuishe fibers wherewith the muscles of the belly are connected, which in time change themselves into a tendone, which we commonly call the great synnue.   

What we ought to consider in the suture, and so wing of a wound. Chap. 2.  

Why we may not in the resowinge of a wound draw the lips or edges close together.  WE must not at any time sow up a wound, least in the first she be well purified, & cleansed, as well externally, as internally, if at the least with out any great danger or peril it may be effected: extracting and taking thereout all that is contrary unto the said wound, as is congealed blood, which coming to corruption, might cause great inflammatione, & often times also a convulsion in that part, through which the sowing breaketh, & teareth, & so conseqventlye hinderethe the uniting & healing of the wound: wherefore in the resowinge of a wound, we must deligentlye note, that we do not contract & draw together on all sides) the lips or edges of the foresaid wound (except it wear in the haremouth, & in the cleaved or severed lips of the mouth) but must leave some distance between the one & the other lip or in any place some or other apertione, because the matter which gathereth itself together, in the bottom of the wound, may issue thereout, and by that means the medicamentes may be therone applied. In like sort the Chirurgiane must in sowing consider, & use medicoritye, and not take to great a qvantitye, either in the length, or in the depth of the flesh, and of the skin, through the which there might ensue and follow great pain, which we ought not to esteem for small, & thereof also would remain an ill-favoured & unseemlye cicatrice or scar: As to the contrary the not deep sowing of the wound, might easily break and burst again, & then in vain it wear sowede. For if so be, that the needle, be to near thrust through the edges of the wound, them the thread because of his tenuity teareth through the skin or flesh, & when as we thrust the needle to deep and far, from the lips or edges of the wound, than there resteth and remaineth a great part of the skin, 
Flesh with Flesh cometh far sooner to unite, them skin with skin.  which will not be united: wherefore indifferently we ought to pierce together as much of the skin as of the flesh, because the flesh far sooner and easier cometh to heal and cure, with the flesh than the skin with the skin, and that is considering the natural temperateness of the foresaid flesh, which is warm, and moist. And as touching the distance of the stitches, and soowinge, we ought not to lay them to close one by the other, neither to far separate & sequestered one from the other, as than they can not retain the wound: And when all to nigh the other they are laid, cause pain, through all the stitches, and drawing together of the same, through the which pain is caused a concursione of Humours unto that place: we must therefore use a mean therine well considering, the largeness, and length of the wound: but above all we must mark, that we thrust not, through or in any synnues or tendones, considering the pain, the Spasmus and many other fearful accidents, which thereof might ensue, as allreadye we have said. Sowing of a wound may not be effected with any violence, in those parts which we endevoure to unite and bring together, but then is sowing laudable, when as the skin stretcheth it almost together, of it own accord, & whereas in this sort it will not be effected or brought to pass easily, & that the lips of the wound with violence must be joined, it is as than most convenient, that we relay the stitches some distance one from the other, & letting them be somewhat looslye sowed: for if it chanced we drew them somewhat stiflye together, the skin might then easily rent or tear, & so burst a sunder through the tumefactione which thereof ensueth: If that therefore, 
Sowinge may not by any violence be done in the lips of the wound.  we desire perfectly to cure a wound, we ought as then so to dispose of the sowing, because that in thus doing, the humours, blood, matter, and the external air might be repelled, from the lips, or edges of the wound, because such things, may hinder, or at the least defer, the curing of the same: and in so much, as the lips of the wound are not well united the one with the other, and kept in that stature, & unitinge, the wound can verve badly & hardly be cured.  
And also if the lips of the wound, 
We may in no wise sow the lips of an inflamed wound.  do greatly chance to swell, & inflame, & they shrink in themselves, or else if they be to much bruised or plettered, we must not then in any sort resowe it again: for the suture would straight way break, and so consequently the inflammatione increased, but must delay it so long until the foresayed inflammatione be seace & the wound be come to good suppuratione and matter, and is prepared and ready, to be united & brought together.   

What is necessary unto the sowing of a wound, and how we ought conveniently to do it Chap. 3.  
WHen as the Chyrurgiane desireth aptly & conveniently to sow a wound, he must first of all have in his hand a needle, & thereto a thread, and a canulle: Concerning the needle, she must be of a reasonable length, sometimes right, & sometimes crooked, according as the parts reqvire, neither must she be made of to hard a steel or mettle, where of they easily might chance to break, but of gentle steel, because they might rather bend than break: although she ought to be stiff, smooth, & infrangible, having a sharp triangled point, because that in her entering she might both cut & prick, & so the easier pierce or go there through, & because that in her gowinge through, she might make a long little wound or hole, & not round, because those little rounds, are more difficult to be cured, 
What form the needle must have.  than the long holes. In the head she must be one both sides hollow, in form of a gutture, because the thread might therein be hidden & buried, & not hinder the percinge or entrance of the needle, in the drawing through thereof, because she than toucheth the body in that sort more easier and softer: It will not also hinder according to the saying of Avicenna, that we somewhat anoint the needle with oil, wherbye the pain of the prick night be somewhat easyed, & the foresaid needle enter the easier.  

What form the thread must have.  The thread must be smooth, soft round, and without any knot, all eqvivalent with the thickness, & greatness of the needle, but not in any sort to thin, lest he chance to break or cut through the lips of the wound. We may rather take a thread, than silk, because the knot of the silk easily unlooseth, through his weakness: it is right true that the foresaid thread, must not be to hard, because there through he might hurt, the wound, & not to soft lest he break nor chance to corrupt, before the time the wound be fully healed, wherethrough the lips of the wound, might again dissolve & wax lose yet notwithstanding now a days we had rather use a thread of carmosyne silk, them a hempen thread, or of flax, which Galenus dispraiseth & misliketh, in his third book of method, where he best liketh of a thread of woollen which may be likened unto, a brown thread, or a white silk thread raw, without being dyede, or coloured: 
Why the thread may not be died or coloured.  because that in the dying sometimes is intermingled poison, as in the scarlet die there cometh Arsenicum. The foresaid Galenus useth strings made of small guts, as are lutestringes, but considering there moisture, they quickly begin to swell, & rot, wherefore we had rather use a strong brown thread, which we must draw through wax & wax it because so much the less he might corrupt & rot, & hold the faster. And to effect this & surely to sowea wound we must have a Canulle which one the one end must be round, split, & with a hole, partly because the edge or lip of the wound, which with the needle we would pierce, & because that the foresaid lip may stay, & rest itself, on the pipe, without stirring this way or that way, & through the whole to espy, when the needle is half pierced through as then to draw her through with her thread, without either the needle, or the thread to draw the lips of the wound toward, them, & because through the split of the pipe, it might the the easier from thence be removed, to rest thereon the other edge thereafter, when she also must be thrust through. And conveniently to effect this sowing of a wound, 
How to sow a wound conveniently.  we must first thrust through the upper lip of the same, situatinge at the first the hole end of the pipe with the left hand, internally within the lip of the foresaid wound, because she may rest therone, and not stir this way or that way, then with the right hand we must thrust the needle through the externalle part of the lip, inwards, & then set the Canulle on the external part, of the neither lip of the wound, & thrust the needle internally outwards, of the foresaid lip, & gently draw through, the thread, because as then we may couple & join again the lip together: & if it be needful to lay more stitches, we must lay them as is afore said: some men hold the lips with their fingers in steed of a Canulle.   

The kinds and differences of sowing, or sutures, the the time, and the method, or rule to take them away. Chap. 4.  
THe ancient chirurgians have invented & found out diverse & sundry ways of sowing of a wound, 
Divers forms of sowing, accordige unto the diversity of the wound.  considering, & marking one the wounded part, & nature or qvallytye of the diseases: for the wounds of the arms, or legs, as in those places we may better & with more convenience use the dry suture: the wounds of the belly, are also on an other fashone sewed, than the wounds of the guts. The profound & deep wounds are sowed, on an other fashion, than the not deep wounds: Alsoe are the debile & imbicille people sowed one an other fashion, as are women, than those which are robust & strong, & by great pains taking and labour have a hard skin, there in to eschew & fly the deformity which after the sowing will be seen.  
All ancient professors have used, 
Three sorts of sowing by the ancient professors.  & have had in esteem, three sorts of sowing of wounds, as naemelye, the incarnative, the blood stopping, & the conservative sowing. The incarnative suture is so called because that through her uniting, she joineth together the separated parts, 
Incarnative suture, & her use five manner of ways.  if so be without violence & conveniently they may be brought together: we use this manner of suture in all fresh wounds, or in these, which are renewed. And this sowinge is effected after five manner of ways. Where of the first is called, 
Incarnative or knotted sowing.  the knotted suture or sowing, because that in evetye stitch, which pierceth through both the lips of the wound, is every time cut of, & with both the ends of the thread above the wound is knit together: betwixt the which stitching, we lay as yet other. This suture is done with a waxed thread, as is all ready said, noting that both the lips must aeqvallye be joined the one with the other, with out that either the one or the other, yield itself more this way than that way, placing the first stitch in the middle of the wound, with a perforation of both the lips of the wound, by the which the thread being passed, shall one the one side of the lip be drawn together, & above dobblelye knit together, cutting both ends of the thread short of, because they should be no hindrance, unto the remydyes which we shall apply: The which in the renewing of the dressing might be the occasione of pain, or breaking of the stitches, when as with the plasters we chanced to pluck them. If the wound he great, we must as yet lay more stitches, in the middle of the Spacium, & one both ends of the wound, so proceeding forwards until the whole wound be laid with stitches or sutures, every stitch a finger's breadth the one from the other, because at the least the lips of the wound might be brought close together, considering, & duly perpending the general observatione above mentioned, & especially that the stitches be not laid the one to near to the other, or the one to wide from the other because as here tofore we have said, through the great multitude, and through so many pricks, they bring & are cause of vehement pain: & contraryly they lying to far the one from the other, the wound as than being not sufficiently occluded, or shut up, do little profit, & commodity, therefore they may not be laid to close by on another, neither to far separate the on from the other, they also which are laid to loosely, suffer the wound to gape to wide, & they which to fast, & strictlye draw together the wound, cause inflammations, & compel the wound burst open, wherefore heerine we ought te observe a mediocritye. 
The second incarnative suture.   
The second incarnative, or flesh making suture, is done with one, or with more needles, as if so be the wound be great, & deep, as then we begin to stick & thrust the needle in the lip or edge of the wound, without drawing of the foresaid needle qvite through, although she be threaded, but must suffer her to continue therine, and wind the thread about her, in form of an S as the Tailors do, when as they are minded safely to keep there threeded needle, any where one there apparel, as you may see in the figure or form of the haremouth: & so put as many needles therein as shallbe needful, according to the greatness of the wound, & wind the thread there about, and let them continued therein until such time as the wound shallbe healed & joined again. This sowing or suture is used, in such wounds as stand wide open, & in those in the which the lips are separated the one somewhat wydlye from the other, & they which with the common stitching might not be contained, or Kept together.  
The third incarnative sowing, is called, 
The third incarnative suture.  the penned stitching, because most commonly it is done with little quills, or shafts of a pen, not that the foresaved qvilles, do effect the sowing, but because they contain it, & also are a let & hindrance that the thread doth not cut the lips of the wound clean through, which if with all expeditione & with the least pain we desire to make them we must do as hereafter followeth. We shall first of all take a strong double thread which is separated in two, at the end having a knot, which with the needle we must thrust through both the lips or edges of the wound, redoinge the same so often, & in diverse places, as the greatness of the wound shall reqvire, always remembering that every stitch must be a fingers bredthe the one from the other situated & laid, or thereabout.  
This being in this sort finished we must as then one that side of the wound where the knot lieth of the thread, between every dubblethrede stick a little shaft or qville, or else a little stick of wood, which is wound in linen cloth, & must be as long in the wound itself: which afterwards with the thread, we must draw close unto the lip of the wound: and one the other lip of the wound, we must through that same dubblethrede, in like sort also put a qville, or a little stick, wound about with linen which in the first must be drawn with one of the foresaid threads, and with a double knot be knitted together, bringing by this means the lips of the wound as close together as is possible, in this wise proceeding with drawing together and knitting, all the threads which there are, in such sort as the first was drawn together & knit. Such sowing, is used, in great, & deep wounds in the which we fear lest the common sowing or stitching might chance to break, & cut through the edges of the wound.  
The fourth is called the dry stitch, or sowing, 
The fourth incarnative suture.  because this may be done without piercing of the skin or flesh: which we are wont to do with two strong pieces of linen cloth, which are cut of the side or edge of the cloth, and which in the ends are cut sharp or picked, as here before in the figure we may see, on the which other end we must spread a very drawing & fast holding plaster, which qvicklye may be dried, which must thus be praepared, we shall apply this same one both sides of the wound, a little higher than the foresaid wound, & in such sort that both the sharp ends of the pieces of cloth, may be situated close unto the edges of the wound. This being cleaved very fast to the skin, we must as then sow both their ends close together, without touching of the skin, and draw them together with the thread, through the which means, we may compact the lips of the wound as close together, os we please. Such a manner of stitching is very willingelye used in the wounds of the face whenas we desire to have no great cicatrice left therein.  

The fith kind of sowing is no more in use.  The fifth incarnative sowing or stitching, is effected with iron hoockes, which one both there ends wear crooked, with the which we must hold both the lips of the wound, bringing the foresaid lips close together: but because they continually prick & are never without causing of pain, & moreover might chance to stick in any membrane, which might suscitate & cause pain, concurring of humours, & inflammatione, in the wounded part, it is now a days no more in use. 
The second general suture  The second suture is, the bloode-stoppinge suture, so called, because she stencheth & stoppeth blood, and hindereth that the air can not enter into the wound, when as in manner of revolution we turn the needle, (as the furriers are wonte to do, when as they sow together the skins, & lay the stitches, reasonable close, hard, & on by the other. Some use this suture, or stitching, when as the great veins or arteries, are hurt or cut of, considering the great shedding of blood, through the which they are compelled to do so, & so the more easier to join & bring together and shut the lips of the wound.  
But this stitching, is nothing to certain, because the one stitchbrekinghe, all the other break & go lose, moreover the blood which is therein contained causeth that part to swell, and loseth as it wear himself between the muscles, which also thereafter by continuance of time corrupt & are mortified. Wherefore I would council the young Chirurgiane, that he should rather tie or bind the mouth of the vain or arterye, or with a Cauterium cauterize it together, then to use such a stitching, which is far convenienter, in the wounds of the small guts, or entrails, of the blather, or in the wounds of the stomach to be effected, if at the least in the two last it may any way possible be brought to pass.  
The third sowing, 
The third stitching.  or stitching we call the conservative, or the praeservinge suture, because she praeserveth, & Keepeth, the lips open the wound which are very wide separated the one from the other, or else because they are plettered, & crushed, or else because there is any part of them lost, through the which they can not by any means be brought & joined again, the one with the other, reqviringe only to be defended, & maintained in that estate, till such time as the wound be come to a good suppuratione & incarnatione: where through the wound, is so much the the sooner cured & cicatrised, without any great, or deformed cicatrice, remaining in the place. This stitching is also used when we suspect, that there is any thing contrary to nature in the wound, which we willingly would have thereout, wherefore we do not bring the lips of the wound so close together, as in other sutures, contenting ourselves, that in such sort we may continue it.  
touching the time, when we ought to cut a sunder the stitchinges, there is no certainty thereof, because in some bodies, the wounds are sooner cured, then in others, also the one part healeth sooner than the other, wherefore we ought not to cut lose the stitches, before the wound be so far come, that she hath no more need of the stitches, which cutting, must also be done one diverse manners, as the stitchinges are diverse: for the knotted stitching, must be done, by cutting every stitch apart, right at the knot, lifting up the thread with the privette or searching iron, having in this sort cut of the knot of every stitch, we shall as then with the pincet or pinsinge iron draw them out by there knot laying the one finger one the stitch, to hold that fast that the one lip of the wound, be not drawn out wards. 
Sowing of haremouthe.  That stitching which happeneth to be done with one or more needles, as in the haremouthes, in these we cut a sunder the whole thread, which is wound round about the needle, then gentlelye taking the same away, & thereafter the needle also. The penned suture, 
The penned suture.  is taken away through the discidinge or cutting away, as is above said, that we ought to cut every stitch above the knot, and there gently draw forth the threads thereout. The dry stitch is taken away, when as either with water or with any oil we moisten the same. 
The furriers fashioned suture.  And the suture of the furriers fashone, is very difficult to be taken away: in this stitching, we must first of all begin to cut, the first stiche, and so proceeding forewardes, with the scissors, or shears, unto the end, if at the least it be to be done, and then easylye and gentlelye take every stitch out apart, always holding fast the lips of the wounds with pour finger, lest that they in any sort lift up themselves because if it so chanced we could not easily resowe them again.   

❧ How we ought to thrust in again the guts, and the net, which is sunk out of the belly. Chap. 5.  

Gastroraphia or belly suture.  IN the great wounds of the belly, which enter into the concavitye of the same, therein is used an other manner of sowing, which the ancient professors call Gastroraphia, that is as much to say, as the belly suture or sowing. But because in such wounds, most commonly the guts & the net come to sink out, it is therefore first of all necessary, that we handle of the means, through the which we might again restore in to their former place the guts, or the net, for otherwise can not the sowing be effected, or brought to pass.  

The small guts being hurt, & clean cut a sunder, can not by any means becured.  When as therefore it chanceth, that the guts are sunk out of the belly, we must then first of all dillygentlye consider, whether in no place they are wounded, or hurt, secondly, whether as yet they retain the natural colour, for if so be the small guts are clean cut of, & especially that empty one, which we call jeiunum, it is then impossible that he may be healed again, because of a great company, and diverse great veins, which are therein, also considering his subtile and synuishe tunicle or koate, and because he continually receiveth the Cholera, and is situated more nearer the liver, than any other. But the great guts being hurt, we may rightwell sow them, yet not without a steadfast hope that we are able to cure them, although in respect of the small guts, by the great ones, which are hurt, it is always better to have a doubtful confidence than a certain despair, as much as belongeth unto there curing. If so be any of them be black, or pale, (which is a certain sign they have lost there feeling) there is nothing to be done unto them, or at the least very little. But if so be as yet they retain the vitalle colour, we must by all means endevoure to bring them in again, and that with all possible expeditione, because the external air, in the which they are not wonte to be, doth strait ways change and spoil them. And first of all if they be wounded, we must stitch them with the furriers suture, which above we have described, & when they are sowed, bring them into there natural place or situation, diligently noting that we do not let the end of the thread hang in the wound, because when as they are cured, we may draw the thread there out, & not let it sink into the belly, for the which occasione he ought be reasonable long, without cutting of him from the sowinge.  
But when as we will begin or take such a thing in hand, 
After what manner we must set the patiented  we must as then conveniently set, or lay the patiented: even as if the wound wear in the bottom of his belly, we then lay the patiented one his back, with his thighs & his buttocks aloft: if so be the wound wear in the upper part of his belly, the patient must lie one his back highly situated all most sittinghe, because that the wounded parts may suspend & hang in the belly: if so be the wound be in the right side, we must then situate the patiented one his left side, and if in the left side he be wounded, he must then lie one his right side: when as the wound is so narrow, & so small, that the swollen gut, which hangeth out, cannot again be put therein, it is then necessary, either that by art we drive away, & consume the winds which cause the tumefactione and swelling, or that we dilate the wound: but it is always best that we try first of all to repel the swellinghe of the guts, which must be effected with some resolving and strengthening medicamentes, 
What we ought te do when the descended and swollen gut can not be put in again or restored into his place.  amongst the which must be intermingled some mollifying and softening medicamentes: as when the guts are to dry, we must then bathe them, in warm water, in the which must be done a little quantity of oil of roses, or else with some gross black wine, because it strengtheneth and warmeth the guts more than water: & if so be the guts with these remedies, will not as yet relaye their swelling, & tumefactione, it was then the use of Mr Pare, chief Chyrurgiane to the king, in diverse places to prick them through, with a needle, through the which the winds as then depart. Having thus finished all this, if so be there be such a quantity of guts sunk out of the belly, that they can not in any sort be put in again at the same entrance, or wound, because she is to little, we must as then dilate it with a crooked Lancet, which cutteth but one the on side, dilligentlye noting that in any sort we do not hurt the entrails, which being finished, a convenient person thereunto shall with his fingers, hold a sunder the edges of the wound, & the Chirurgiane impose foresayed guts again into their places, first of all intruding of those which wear last, in the coming or sinckinge out, exactly noting, 
The entrails must every one be brought into his natural station.  that every circumvolution of the guts, or every revolution of the same, may obtain there own place, intruding the same therein with the fingers, and one such a manner that the one may follow the other: otherwise that which is allreadye thrust in, the finger being taken away, might chance retire and come forth again, unless that with any other finger we retained the same, whilst that the other finger is finishing his operatione or work, with bringing an other portione or part, into his place, and using this manner, they may easily be reduced into their former places. Which being done, (imposing or laying the hand one the wound) we must as then a little stir and jog the body of the patiented, where through the entrails, will situate, settle, or place themselves every one in his natural & proper place, even as they wear, before they wear removed out of the same. 
After what sort we ought to put in the net.  If the net, issueth out of the wound, and the same be not hurt, or without any wound, and as yet sound, we must genttlelye cause it to sink one the guts, but if so be any part there of or portione is become black or leadishe coloured, we must as then a little above the blackness bind it, to prevent the bleeding, and cut it of under the foresaid succincture, and immediately reduce that into the belly again which is not as yet black, & is yet sound, laying the end of the thread hanging out of the wound, because thereafter we might easily extract and draw it forth, when as it shallbe thereof loosened, and the wound be come te good suppuratione and voydinge of matter.   

❧ Of the stitching of the belly which we call, Gastroraphia Chapter. 6.  

The sowing of the belly must not be done as the other sutures.  THe guts or entrails, and the net, being brought into their several places, we must as then sow, & stitch up the wound: but because such suture, according unto the opinions & sayings of diverse, may not be done in that sort, as other stitchinges, or sowinges, to wit the joining together of that, which is of one nature and dispositione, the one with the other, as the Peritoneum, with the Peritoneo, (& so forth of the skin and the muscles) but we are willed and counseled that we join and stitch the Peritoneum, which is a membrane, with the muscles, and with the skin Epigastri, because the same being very synuishe, will very difficultly be cured or healed, with the other part Peritonei, which oppositely is situated against it which is also of the same synnuishe substance. In fine we are counseled, to sow up the edges of the wound which is in the right side Peritonei, with the muscles, which are in the left lip of the wound, so that one this manner the musculous flesh, of the right lip Peritonei, which healeth with the left lip of the foresayed Peritoneum, with the musculous flesh one the one side, and the musculous flesh with the Peritoneo on the other side. Because that Peritoneum, with the Peritoneo, can not be healed, wherthroughe the wound only above in the fleshy part might chance to heal, out of the which might ensue a tumefactione, as if it wear a roushing, or issuing forth of the navel, considering the foresayed Peritoneum, which through erection & heaving up of the guts, could not in any sort conjoin together: and such a meaning must be done one this manner. The wound being great, we must have a convenient minister or servant, which must with his hand one the exterior part of the wound depress it down, because as then she may be shut & closed, & neither the guts, nor the net, roush thereout suffering only a small portione of the wound uncovered for the Chirurgeon, who with his threded needle, must begin his first stitch in the end of the one lip of the wound, thrusting through the external skin, and the musculous flesh of the wound, without touching the Peritoneum, which is there under situated, drawing the needle from outwards, inwards with her thread, & thrust the second stitch, clean through the whole lip of the wound, which oppositely is situated against the first stiche, to wit, the Peritoneum, the muscles and the skin, first bringing the stitch clean through the Peritoneum, and drawing the foresaid needle, from inwarded, outwards: And the same being drawn out, with her thread, he must then lay his third stitch, as he did the first, beginning the stitch in the skin, & in the musculous flesh, of the first lip, without touching the musculous flesh, of the first lip, without touching the Peritoneum, drawing the needle from out wards, inwards, them he must bring his fourth stitch, as he hath done the second, thrusting clean through the Peritoneum, all the musculous flesh, & the skin, drawing out the needle from inwards, outwards, & in this sort he must proceed, and go forwards, until the whole wound from end to end be clean sowed up, thrusting through on the one side, only the skin & the musculous flesh, and one the other side the Peritoneum, the musculous flesh, & the skin: because the sowing of the Peritoneum only, with the other part Peritonei, is not sufficient, neither the suture of the flesh only, but this suture must as well be done in the one as in the other, endevouringe always to unite the Peritoneum with the musculous flesh.  

another fashion of sowing of the belly, according to some men's sayings.  Some there are which effect this suture on this manner, following, being of opinion, that those parts, which are of one nature & property, very easily unite themselves the one, with the other, as the skin with the skin, the flesh with the flesh, and the membranes with the membranes, wherefore they bring their first stitch, quite, and clean through the skin and the musculous flesh, from the first lip, without touching the Peritoneum, which is therunder situated, drawing there needle from outwards, inwards, with her thread, laying their second stitch, in the lip right opposite against that, thrusting then only through the Peritoneum, & through a little flesh, drawing the needle, from inwards, outwards, them they bring there third stitch, in the first lip of the wound, thrusting through the Peritoneum, & a little flesh, without either thrusting through the muscles, or the skin, drawing there needle from inwards, outwards, & then they bring there fourth stitch in the opposite lying lip, & thrust through the skin, and through the musculous flesh, without touching the Peritoneum, and in that sort proceed forewardes, until the whole wound be sowed, so that through one edge of the lip, but yet at diverse times they thrust through the skin and the musous flesh, and also the Peritoneum.  

The manner of sowing of the belly out of Celsus-  Among all other sorts of sowing the wounds of the belly, or stitching of them this which we have taken out of Celsus is the least dangerous and the best also, & easiest to be done. That we must have two threded needles, 
By the left lip we must not onderstande the left side of the patiented for it is the right side of the wound, but rather the left side of the Chyrurgiane.  with one thread, the one needle at the one end, and the other needle at the other end of the thread, where of we must take the one needle in the right, & the other in the left hand, we must begin in the end, of the superior part of the wound one the left side, first of all pearcinge through the Peritoneum, than the musculous flesh, and the skin, drawing the needle with the thread out, unto the one half, from inwards, outwards, than we must with the other needle of the left hand, make the second stitch, right opposite against the first, in the right side of the wound, beginning with Peritoneo, as we have said of the first stitch, on this sort the acuitye or point of the needle is far enough from the entrails or guts, & yet notwithstanding the head close unto the forasayed guts: When as therefore the needles have pierced & passed through from the one side to the other, we must as than change hands, in receavinge again of the needles aforesaid, & take the needle, of the right hand, in the left hand, & the needle of the left hand in the right this permutation or changing being in this sort effected, we must then again thrust through the lips of the wound, as all ready hath been done, to wit, from the internal part, towards the external, & so proceeding forewardes, as much as is sufficient, and always considering that the one stiche be always laid right opposite against the other, in this sort proceeding, until the wound be whole sewed up, always remembering to leave a little apertione, in the bottom of the wound, through the which the congealed blood, and the thread may be avoided, which apertione, we must always keep apart or open with a little leaden hollow pipe, which in the end must be tyede & bound with a thread, because that by chance it do not come to slip into the belly of the patiented. And we must well and diligently note, that this suture or sowing always bedone with a good strong thread, 
What manner of thread & needle we must have.  & with a needle, somewhat crooked at the point, laying the stitches, somewhat closer the one by other, then in other wounds of the body, because the stirring of the belly, far sooner causeth the stitches to burst and break a sunder, then in any other parts of the body, & because also the wounds of the belly, are not so subject unto inflammation or incensions, as other although that often times the belly is thrust through.    

chirurgery THE FOURTH TREATISE OF THE OPERATIon of Chyrurgerye, wherein is discoursed and handelede of the openinges, and apertions of Apostemations, Containing five Chapters.  

Of the general way to open any Apostemations whatsoever. Chap. 1.  
Of the tumefactions, which we call, Ateromata, Steatomata, & Melicerides. Chap. 2.  
How we ought to cauterize, & make any inscisione in the Apostemations of the breast. Ch. 3.  
How we ought to make the Paracentese, and take away the water from them which have the dropsy. Chap. 4.  
How we ought to cure the Hernias aquosas, or water burstings. Chap. 5.   

❧ Of the general way te open Apostemations. Chap. 1.  

What we ought to consider before we make the appertione.  WHen as we endevoure to open any apostemations, to let the matter run thereout, we must first of all before we come to the inscisione, or apertione, consider, whether the matter might not in any ways be resolved or consumed, through the forces of the natural caliditye, or heat, or else whether needs and of necessity be changed into matter. When as an Apostematione, must needs be brought to suppuratione of matter & can by no means possible be consumed or resolved, the signs thereof are these, namely a burning heat, erecting of the tumefactione, or swelling, more redness, 
Signs of suppuratione.  & which is also harder than before, pricking, knocking, or beating pain, ponderousness, as if there did hang any heavy thing at that joint: And if so be this apostematione be situated in any principal part, than there is a chillnes and shivering therewith associated, the ague also is more violent by day, then by night: sometimes also the next kernels which are in the body situated thereunto come or chance to swell, & be distempered. 
Signs when the matter is fully ripened.  But the suppuratione, or resolution to matter being finished, or accomplished, the tumefactione as then diminished, we them sensibly feel pricking, with a little itching therbye, also a little deafness or numbness, wherbye also some times is felt a great pricking, especially the matter lying very deep: For the matter lying close under the skin, there then demonstrateth itself a little head which in feeling is soft, and when as we depress with the finger it glideth a side, where of the skin, in the superior part of the same head openeth itself, & separeteth itself from the inferior parts of the same.  

When with the lancet we ought to open an Apostematione.  When as therefore all these signs reveal themselyes, we may then bouldelye & freely, open the Apostematione, with the lancet, with out tatryinge any longer, that it might of itself break through, because the matter may then issve forth thereat, & because that through to long tarrying, with the opening thereof, she do not come to diminish into the circumiacent parts, & make other concavityes. Although Celsus sayeth, 
Opinion of Celsus.  that very seldom we ought to make any inscisione, under the armepittes, or in the flanks when the matter is ripened, & come to a full and good suppuratione, in like sort also, when the Apostematione is not to great & is placed under the skin, but that as then we make the apertione with Cataplasms, & let them of themselves break through, unless through the intollerablenes, and great dolour or pain of the patiented, the Chyrurgiane wear compelled, to open the same, because sayeth he, that if with out inscisione or cauterisatione we make the apertione, no deformed cicatrice, or sign, thereof, may remain. When the matter lieth deep we must then consider, 
When the Apostomatione must be opened with a hot Iron.  whether the part be synnuishe, & if so be that it is so we must as then open the foresayed Apostematione with a hot Iron, which is thereunto very convenient, because that apertione, although we make it somewhat small, it tarrieth a long time open to make issue unto the matter, through the which also the cicatrice continueth very little. We use now in these days potentialle corrosives. If so be about the place of the apertione any synnues be situated, we ought then to fear when we must make the apertione with a hot iron that then the patient might fall into Spasmo, or else the joincte might be cripple, and tarry lame, therefore we ought rather to use the lancet.  
It happeneth also sometimes, that although the apostematione be not yet ripe, 
What apostemations will be opened before there complete ripeness.  & without great store of matter, yet notwithstanding reqvireth to be opened, especially, when as it is situated by, or next unto some worthy part, the foresaid matter being venomous or pestilentialle, which if we suffered them to continue until there complete ripeness & maturity, might draw inwards, & through there venomous damps, might infect some of the worthiest parts, out of the which, as then follow most fearful accidents. And although Celsus counseleth us, that we must stay until such time as all apostemations, are come unto an accomplished maturity, which are situated in the synwishe parts, because the skin being grown thinner, and the matter nearer approaching thereunto, we might then the easier & nearer attain thereto, notwithstanding our best practisioners council us, that we should open such apostemations: as they also council us, to open all apostemations, which are situated close to the joints, bones, synnues, tendones, and to the ligamentes, yea and before the time of the accomplished maturity, because therein, they might not cause any great rottenness, or corruption of other parts.  
In like sort must the apostemations of the privityes be opened, before they be come to there full maturity, because there chance no corruption in that part, as all such parts through there great, moistness, are very much inclined unto corruption & rottenness, as also beyond this, the matter through to long being therine continued, causeth the Intestinum rectum, or the gut of excrements, to corrupt, & rot, which is far softer, them the external skin, wherethrough the foresaid matter oftentimes internally bursteth out, by the which commonly followeth a Fistle, which is all most incurable.  
When 〈◊〉 therefore we see that there is any matter in the Apostemation, which hath no issue, & by herself can make or effect any either considering her crasitude, her crudetye & viscosity, as thereby not being possible for her to attain unto complete maturity, or else because the skin is hard, or that the foresaid matter lieth to deep, through the which there remaineth a great thickness betweme the skin & the matter, or else considering certain inconveniences, we may not delay so long, until it be fully mature, and ripe, as are the Apostemations, which are situated next unto some worthy part, as by any great veins, or synuishe parts, which are inclined to great corruption. The Chyrurgiane must without any longer delay, make the apertione with his lancet, rather than to expect any of these daunngers above rehearsed. The fittest time therefore first of all to do an operatione, is in the morning by time, considering that in such a time, the person is far better qvieted & better animated and encouraged, except the great danger reqvired otherwise the contrary Secondly we must note, that the apertion be made in a convenient place, which convenient place, is known by the tumefactione, 
Secondly  of the part, in the which there revealeth itself a little head, & there is great weakness & softness found therein, which glideth under the feeling of the finger, & where the skin is thinnest: it is right true that such an apertion might bedone in the inferior parts of the tumefactione a foresaid, because the matter might the easier issue out, 
Four principal conditions, which the Chyrurgiane must consider before he open any swelling.  with out drawing of the medicametes, or through the hard depression of the same because all evacuations which chance in the hanging sores, can far better avoid the matter, than any medicamentes, especially in such parts, of the which we can not change the situatione, as in the whole Chaos of the body: For although, in the arms, or legs, any apertione is made in the superiore parts of the tumefactione, through the situatione, such a fault may be remedied.  
The third conditione is, that we must consider, one the rimpelinge of the skin, 
The third conditione  & one the fibres of the muscles, and because the muscles almost run through the length of the body, the apertione must then be made in the length of the body, and according unto the right concurring of the muscles. Notwithstanding although, the rimples, or forefront of the head lie thwarte over, yet the incision must therein be made according unto the length, following the fleshy fibers, of the broad muscle: otherwise the skin being cut according to the running of the rimples, might chance to fall on the eyes, In the head we must observe the growing of the hair. Under the armepittes, & in the flanks, we must consider the shutting, or one the rimples of the same places, because the deformity of the cicatrice, under the fouldinge of that part may be hidden, & to prevent the imbicillytye, which is an occasione, of the receavinge of the concurring humours: Then to prevent, that we do not chance to touch, any synnues, Tendone, Vain, Arterye, or any other parts of esteem, & that the apertion, may be done without one danger, we make now the incision in the length as then overthwarte, according as every part reqvireth: which can not rightly be done then of those which have a complete knowledge of the anatomy: otherwise they ignorantly might chance to touch a synnue, or a vain, or might chance to cut an arterye, wherthroughe the Spasmus, the Paralisis, or any great shedding of blood, yea also & at sometimes might because of his death.  
The fourth conditione is, 
The fourth conditione.  that we must remember diligently to make as small an apertione as we may, survayinge the apertione, with the magnitude of the Apostematione: For if so be it be little, we may as then make therine a mean and reasonable inscisione, which also must not be deep, but the apostematione being great, we are then sometimes urged, to make two inscisions, or more than two, being therein made, that one of them all ways, be in the inferior concavitye of the foresaid Apostematione, because the humour do not chance here or there to make any more concavityes, even as the humours, always internally, corrupt & eat through the circumiacent parts, and there in diminish.  

An admonitione considering all great Apostemations  And if so be that any apostematione, with great concavityes came into our hands, & the skin there over might as yet becured again with the flesh, we must as then make but one apertion or inscisione, through the which the matter may issve: but if so be the flesh internally is eaten, & corrupted away, we must as then cut through with a right cut, the whole concavitye, according unto the length thereof, which being done, & the edge of the wound in all places being very skin, & bereft of all their flesh we must clip or cut them clean away: because such skin restraineth and keepeth back the matter, which causeth the circumiacent parts to corrupt, & hindereth the applicatione of the medicamentes: but when as we cut the skin, we must do it triangle wise, or in form of a myrtle lease, because the apertione so much the sooner, might chance to heal, because all rotundity in ulcerations is difficult to be cured.  

Fron whence we must take our indication, of the greatness of the wound.  And touching all great apertions, which may be made in the apostemations, must be made, according to the abundance, or the qvantitye of the matter, & according as the subject parts thereof require. As also we must consider, on the depth, & mark that we thrust not the lancet to deep therein, but reasonable deep: for when as we thrust to deep, it is then great dolour, & pain to the patiented, & causeth also much bleeding: & thrusting not deep enough, we effect & bring nothing to pass.  
The fifth conditione, must be observed, according to the apertion of all great apostemations, that at one time we suffer not all the matter to run out, but rather by little, & little, especially, the patiented being debile, old, young, or any woman with child, because all suddayn evacuations, do cause great imbicility & faintness because there through the vital spirits, evaporate & fly away, which in the concavitye of the Apostemation with the matter wear shut therein, although they are against nature.  

another condition wherone we must consider after the apertione of the swelling.  The apertione being done, we must handle the wound, according unto the diversity of those parts, wherein the Apostematione was situated, & also according unto the time & season of the year. The Chyrurgiane ought especially to eschew the great tents, which Celsus prohibiteth to use in the ulcerations of the arm pits, & flanks, & that because of the great veins, arteries, & synnues, which in those places are situated, laying only there one a sponge which is madefied, & wetted in wyne. We commonly lay thereon a flat plumaciolle or tent made of lint, and therone a plaster, levinge so the solutione apert, because that the remaining matter might issue & come forth thereat which otherwise through a great long thick tent, might therein be retained, & kept back. This being done, we must then dress that part, & wind it beginning to wind from the sound part, unto the bottom of the concavitye if there be any, ending at the apertione because the matter may be pressed & crushed thereout, without being therein retained, any longer, because by to long tarrying therine, it do not cause a great hollow fistulous concavitye to come therein: then we must lay that part in such a sort that the apertione may depend or hang, because so the matter may the better issue out thereat.   

Of the tumefactions, or swellings called, Ateromata, Steatomata, and Melicerides. Chap. 2.  
THe ancient professors, 
The difference of these three Vlcerationes.  have always noted, only the species & forms of ulcerations, that they only differed the one from the other, in the matter, which is found therine. For in the ulceration Ateroma, 
Signs to know them.  is a kind of matter like unto thin pap: the ulceration Steatoma, a kind of fat matter, like suet. In Melicerides, is a matter like unto honey: So that by the form of conjecture we may say, what matter therein lieth enclosed, but for a certainty we can not say it, before such time as we have fetched some of the matter thereout: and one this manner they are always known the one from the other. when as we chance to touch the ulceration Ateroma, it spreadeth abroad, in that place whereon we chance to depress it, & doth not so suddenly, join itself together. The ulceration Meliceres, differeth from the Ateroma, in his form, & substance of his humours for his figure is much rounder, and the substance of the humour which is therein, far subtler. so that it spreadeth more abroad, than the Ateroma, when with the finger we depress it, it separateth itself far soener, & also joineth much sooner, when we take the fingers thereof. The ulceratione Steatoma, is much harder, than both the other, & in the touching of it, it stirreth not, but resisteth the depressinge of the fingers, & commonly in the bottom is it somewhat broad, and very seldom or never may we see any which are under narrow & broad above.  

We oftentimes find hard matter in these ulcerations.  These foresaid ulcerations, are in there beginning alway little, but in continuance of time, they grow to be greater, some are very hard, & we find sometimes therein wondrous matter, as if it wear little stones, bones, rolled hair, mixed with any matter which is thick.  

The matter lieth enclosed in a little blather.  Philexomus sayeth, he sometimes hath found, in the matter which therein lay enclosed, little creatures, as if it had binne gnats, we must note that all those foresaid humours, & all these wonderful things, are enclosed as it wear in little blathers.  
But as much as concernethe the apertione of the same, it hindereth nothing whether the matter be like pap, or like honey, or like suet, or what matter soever it might be: for we have but one only intention, to wit that we extract & draw out the blather, or little bag, wherein the matter is enclosed, for the manner how to open it is this.  

The operatione to cure the ulcerations is nothing different.  We must first of all lift up the skin from the bottom, & then cut it of, making inscisione according to the greatness of the ulceratione, dilligentlye marking lest we cut the blather or purse wherein the the humour is enclosed, because the matter do not chance to issue out: For the matter being issued, the whole remanent operation is perturbed, & annihilated, because also there by the operation falleth flat down: so that as than we may or can very difficultly slay, peel or separate the foresaid membrane of the matter, from the flesh, wherthroughe the whole curatione, consisteth without reciduitye.  
When as in this sort, we shall have cut the skin, them the little bag demonstrateth itself white, and outstretched, which with great diligence, we must endevoure to separate thereof, with a Spatula, to wit, from the skin, & out of the flesh, or with any other instrument, which is thereto serviceable, where with we must take it out, with all that which is therein, without suffering any jot thereof to remain in the bottom, because it chance not to increase again: And is it so happened that there chanced to tarry any thing thereof in the wound, we must not as then heal together the apertione very soon, but with puryfyinge medicamentes, purify that thereout which as yet remaineth therein.  

We must in the operatione diligently consider, that we do not chance to break any Veins, synnues, arteries, or tendones.  We must also here note, that some of these ulcerations, are rotede between any veins, arteries, synnues, & tendones, which eradication, reqvireth a great & long continued & convenient manual, operation, because, thinking qvite and clean to take away the little bag or purse from thence, we might chance to burst any vain, arterye, synnue or Tendone, therefore if so be therebe any part therone fastened it is then bentter to desist from our operation. When this operatione is thus finished, in any small swellings, there is as then no more danger, wherefore there resteth no thing for us to do, then with any curing medicamentes, to heal op the inscisione, laying therone a Compress, madefied in some defensive or other, because that in the dressing, all inflammations may be prevented, & the separated parts the on again conjoined with the other. But if so be the wound wear great, & could not be cured, one this manner, it will not then seem discommodious, that we stitch it up, laying the stitches somewhat wide the one from the other, to let any medicamemt or other drop between them, & to give passage to the matter which engendereth therein: & then we must whole cure these ulcerations as all other ulcerations.  
touching the curing of Queen's evil which is also done through manual operatione, is also one this manner effected, taking the foresaid Queens evil whole thereout, if so be it be possible diligently marking, that we chance not to hurt any veins situated there about, & especially of those which are divided amongst the muscles, which are serviceable to the speech, or voice, as are the recurrentes, or retrogradinge muscles, & those which are situated, abute the Laringa as well the principals as common: For it hath often times happened that some have had this disease of the queens evil cut out about their throt, which all there life time thereafter have remained hoarse & without speech.   

❧ The manner how to cauterize, & make an inscisione in the uleerations of the breast, called Empiema. Chap. 3.  
Between the ribs, 
Hypocrates in prognosticis and in his third book of diseases.  and between the intercostalle muscles & between the membrane Pleura, concurrethe & gathereth sometimes certain blood together, which changeth itself into matter, although the Physician, as well through Phlebotomye, through purgations, through fomentations, or through any other appliclations, hath done his best, 
This tume factione externally sometimes demonstrateth itself.  to resolve & consume that. This foresaid matter, sometimes externally demostrateth her self causing a tumefactione under the skin of the breast. Then the foresaid membrane Pleura, 
The vice-ratione of the breast, which we call Empiema often times demmonstrateth it self.  always most commonly breaketh, & and bursteth a sunder, to give passage unto the matter, which thereafter sinketh into the concavitye of the breast, & is sometimes voided through the urine, or through the mouth, the longs drawing the same unto them, and then through the throat is coughed up.  
The signs, if any matter be retained in the breast, are these, to wit, difficultness in breathing, stinking breath, heaviness in the side, 
Signs of the matter which is retained in the breast.  a dry cough, with great pricking in the breast, a continualle ague, which against night redoubleth her forces, swetinge in the end of the digestion, little sleep, & no appetite at all. Sometimes in the place of matter, there is water gathered in the breast, which we espy when as the patiented through great thirst, hath drunk great store of water: when he continually cougheth, without spitting, with Shortness of breath, with swelling in the feet, & when we stir the breast one the one side, wherein the water containeth itself, we hear a shogging, as we are wonte to hear in a pot half full of water: & this disease may be called, the dropsy of the longs & of the breast.  

Dropsy of the breast and her tokens  When any of these diseases have continued any time, & no remedies have helped, & no hope left, that the water, or the matter might by any means be expelled out by the mouth, or else be purged through the urine, 40. days being passed, we must as then come to the manual operatione, & endevoure to open the breast, & make a passage for the matter to issue forth, because the longs do not in any sort chance to corrupt, or rot. Which may bedone through the inscisione, or through a potential, or actual Cauterium. We must first of all consider, whether in any parts of the breast, 
How we ought to make the apertion in the Empiema with a lancet or with a corrosive  we espy no swelling or tumefactione: which having espied, we must then make the apertione, with the lancet, or with the Cauterio, & that in the fittest & convenientest place we can find. But our common use is, to apply the potential Cauterium, because the apertion, which we made therine, through the Cauterium, may the longer be kept open and apert, without troubling of the patiented, with the impositione or putting in of great tents, to keep open the inscisione. And if so be we perceive no tumefactione, or swelling, externally in the breast, we must then between the third and the fourth true rib, beginning to account from under, about the midst of the one side, 
The place of the apertione.  six, or seven fingers bredthe from backbone, make an apertione with the crooked lancet, into the concavitye of the breast, not all at once, but by little and little, or by degrees, beginning from upwards, downwards, thrusting, the point of the foresaid lancet, from under the fourth rib, the cutting side of the same, reaching, to the upper end of the third rib, lest that we should cut in any vain, arterye, or synnue, which lieth occult and buried under the inferior concavitye of the rib. We may in the same place set a Ruptorium, whereof the Escara being made, we must cut it through, into the concavitye of the breast, setting again the foresaid Ruptorium, or corrosive thereon, if so be at the first tim it had not made his operatione sufficient deep enough. This apertione may also be made with the actual Cauterium, here before described, which we may crus he as deep therine, as is necessary, to pierce the matter.  
When as therefore the apertione is in this sort effected, 
Admonitione of letting the matter or water go from the breast.  we must not as then suffer the matter all at once to decurre out, because that to many of the vital spirits, do not chance to fly away, which therein lie included, or enclosed: so that when as one part of the foresaid matter is run thereout, we must then put therein a tent, and lay therone a plaster of Gratia Dei, or of Betonica, Hypocrates counceleth, that we should make the apertione, 
Opinion of Hypocrates.  one the third rib, when as we have discovered, & bared the rib, of her skin, & membrane, wherewith externally she is clothed, setting there one, a Forret, or Trepane, wherewith we must boar her clean through the water which is enclosed in the breast: the which easy lie may be done, in those, which have an ulceratione under the ribs, the foresaid ribs, being broad enough, to set a trepane therone, between the Mediastinun, under the brestbone, may also gather water, 
The trepninge of the breast bone through the advice of Columbus.  which Columbus witnesseth, that we trepaning through the self same bone, let forth the water thereat. But we must note, that there are some ancient professors, which hold this apertione to be very suspicious, because they piercing into the concavitye of the breast, might chance to cut also the membrane there under situated: fearing lest the patiented, immediately after the sudden apertione, through the evacuation of the animale and vital spirits, might chance to die, which with the matter fly away, or also considering the in curable fistles, which might thereof ensue: but now a days we find the contrary because there through are cured, without having retained any fistle thereof. In stead of such an apertione, they place in the breast certain actual Cauteries, or potentialle, 
The manner now a days to make an apertione  to the number of 7. or 8. yea also sometimes cauterizing only the skin 14. times without piercing any deeper, making the Escara reasonable brood but not deep, whereof they kept the ulceratione so long open until all the cough and all other impediments are, clean gone.   

How that we must make the Paracentese, to draw away the water out of the bellies of those which are troubled with the dropsy. Chap. 4.  

Descriptione of the dropsy.  THe dropsy, is a tumefactione, or inflation, against nature, or Phlegma is engendered, or also of some certain winds and ventosityes. This svellinge sometimes also, spreadeth herself through out the whole body: sometimes also only in the inferior part of the belly. The first kind is engendered, of a phlegmatic humour, & the second kind of dropsy, 
Three sorts of dropsy.  is engendered of water & wind tohether: wherefore the ancient professors have thought that there have been three sorts of dropsy. Whereof the first is called, 
The first kind.  Anasarca, Hiposarcidios, Leucophlegmatias, when as the universal body is through soaked with water, through the which, every part of the body seemeth to be tender, or weak soft, pale, & unseemlye to the sight, so that crushing therone, the prints of your fingers for a little continuance tarry therein: 
The second.  The second, is called Tympanitas, and of Hypocrates the dry dropsy. when as the inferior part of the belly is full of inflation, or winds, and stiflye stretched out and spanned, so that smiting therone, it giveth from him a sound like unto a Drum, it is right true that sometimes there are also a few humours mixed theramongst, because by continuance of time the winds come to condence themselves, and change into some waterye substance. 
The third kind.  The third kind of dropsy is called, Asites, which is an inflation, and strectchinge out of the belly, because of the aquositye wherewith it is replete, having unparted her name of Ascos, which is to say, a leather vessel, wherein in former and ancient times, they used to keep any moisture in, as we do in the hides, & in the bucks skins: when this disease increaseth, & groweth, 
Accidents of the dropsy.  sometimes the hips, and the Scrotum begin to sveelle, which is a sign of Leucophlegmatica, as differing, from the self same being or essence of Ascites: as in the contrary it is not so, when as any aqvosytye ascendeth up to the breast. 
Ascites is subject to Paracentese.   
Amongst all these three species, and kinds, there is but one of them subject unto our manual operatione, to draw forth thereof all that water which lieth enclosed in the concavitye of the belly: 
In what persons the drawing of of water must be used and in what persons it must be left.  but before we come to the apertione hereof, we must first know, which of them are curable or incurable, because in vain, & to the hindrance of the patiented we take it not in hand, in those which through age are grown debile, and feeble, or in those, which are corrupt & not sound of body, the intestines or entrails, being very ill disposed and ill at ease, without any hope of amendment, & in those, which whole are grown impotent, or in those which are there with borne, we must not in any wise through this operatione lay hands one them. But in those which as yet are young, strong, & are of a good constitutione, neither have any agues, having all there entrails sound, and tempered, & in these, in the which the water as yet hath made no concavityes, whereby the liver, the milt, and the guts, might chance to be altered, in those remaineth as yet some hope, ominously to effect and bring to pass this operatione: & in this manner we must with the same proceed. Namely, 
How we ought to effect this opening  and especially, if the dropsy, resume his original from the liver, the patiented lying one his bed, we must gently lay him one his right side because we may make the inscisione one his le●● side: & is so be this foresaid dropsy proceed, through any disease of the milt, we must then turn him, one his left side, to make the inscisione, in his right side, so that the inscisione, must always, be done one the contrary side, of that part, from whence the dropsy taketh her original, & that because the patient must lie one that side, from whence the original of the disease cometh, for if so be he lay otherwise then so then the obdurated part, through the ponderousness thereof, might chance to sink and descend downwards, & making internally any solutione, might there through be the occasione of great pain and dolour.  
And the patiented lying one the obdurate liver or milt, might through the warmeth of the bed, be eased and stengthened. And if so be, the patiented chance to lie one the open side, the wound would then be a great trouble & hindrance unto him, & the which he mervaylouslye might be debilitated, 
The place where the apertione must be made.  & enfeebled. Morover it wear inconvenient that the debilest side of the obdurated liver, or milt, through inscisione, as yet should be more vexed.  
The patiented being in this manner situated, we must note, in what place the inscisione might easiest & with most convenience be do ne, to wit three fingers breadth under the navel, drawing either towards the left side, or toward the right, but not lineally right forth, between the navel, & the privityes, be cause we must eschew, and avoid, the whit line which in this place is situated, & the ends, of the muscle Epigastri, & also the synnuis he tendonousnes, of the right muscle: 
Excellent consideration.  because these wounded or hurt, might suscitate, & cause great pain, with many other dangerous accidents, wherefore they difficultly will be cured, when as fain we would heal up the wound. Having noted all this, the Chirurgiane must with his left hand, & his servant, which assisteth him, nype in the length, the one, on the one side, and the other, one the other side, first of all the skin, & the incarnate or fleshy pamnickle, of this side, to lift it up, & cut it clean through overthwarte, unto the muscles, which being effected, they must let the foresayed elevated skin, & pannickle fall again: And to finish the rest of our operatione conveniently & fitly, after this first in scisione, (because the foresaid skin may fall again, one the inscisione, which inscisione must also bedone, in the muscles, and in the Peritoneo, to stop them, & to prevent the running forth of the water, than we shall lift up the foresaid skin) we must again lift up with the hand the skin, & the fleshy pannickle, and then as high as is possible follow the fibers of the muscles, we must easily thrust in the crooked lancet, & cut through the muscles, and Peritoneum, as broad as we are wont to make the apertione in blood letting, or phlebotomye, diligently noting, that we neither touch any veins, no guts, or any other part which is situated in the concavitye of the belly. Now therefore to effect this, we may with great convenience, & dexterity, in stead of the crooked lancet, use our punctual instrument, here before described & defigured, the incision now being done, we must thrust clean through the inscidede skin, the fleshy pannickle, the muscles, and through the through cut Peritoneum, in to the concavitye of the belly a golden, 
The use of the pipe.  or silver, pipe, as thick as a qville or shaft, which must have a broad end, that nothing chance to slip between into the concavitye of the belly, and therone a little string, or thread tied, by the which foresayed pipe, the water must be tapped as it wear, & drawn out, but not all at once, but by degrees & not to superfluos at one time, but on diverse days, to wit, so long till nature, being released, & lighted of her pack or butthen, which mitigating this evacuation, & governing of the forces according to the fortitude of the patiented: which we may know, by feeling of the Pulls. Because there are some, which having made to great an evacuation at one time, have also evacuated the vital and living spirits, which wear therein enclosed, and finally have caused the patiented his death. When as therefore we shall have drawn water enough of at one time, we must then stop the pipe, with a tent of linen, or with a tent of sponge, to retain the rest of the water, & lay thereon a great plaster of Diacalcitheos': some there are which draw out the pipe, and let the wound which is in the muscles and in the Peritoneo, the skin, and the lip of the wound, which before the inscisione was niped, and lifted up, because that the foresaid wound, might therwe be stopped, and covered.  
Now certainly to retain and keep back, the water Mr. Floris Phillippes, 
Practise of Mr. Floris philip's, a renoumned Chirurgeon at Orleans.  a very renoumned Chyrurgiane, at Orleans, sticketh his needle qvite through both the lips of the wound, comprehending sufficient qvantitye of skin, wherein he letteth his needle stick, as we are wont to do in the har● mouths, and windeth his thread round about the needle, wherewith he containeth & holdeth the lips close together, so that there may not one drop of water pass forth, and when he desireth to draw, or tap more water thereout, he than unwyndeth his needle, & openeth the lips of the wound, without drawing the threded needle there out. Whilst that these things are this doing, we must strengthen the patiented, with good cibaries and food, which easily may be changed in to blood, & let him so rest until the next day: on which day, if so be he be strong enough, we must yet draw of some more qvantitye of water, either through the drawing out of the tent, wherewith the pipe is stopped, when as we put the pipe therein, or with the elevatione of the skin, wherewith the apertione is covered, with out putting the pipe any more therein, if so be there can issue any water out, always egallinge or proportioning the qvantitye of water, with the forces and strength of the patiented, and in this manner must we proceed in the drawing, or tapping of, the water.  
Others there are which in the opening of the belly lay there one a carrosive, 
Corrosive with inscisione in the Escara.  where by the skin is bitten & corroded through, them they make an inscisione through the Escara, unto the concavitye of the belly, making a very, small apertione, through the which the water shall droppingly distill forth, & having drawn thereout sufficient water enough, them they stop it, with scraped lint, which when they are desirous to draw more water thereout, they than remove, & take it of. Yet there are others, which after the inscisione of the foresaid Escara, thrust therein a little pipe thereby to draw the water out, as we have above said. Others set there on diverse, and sundry, corrosives, on the place of the liver, 
Applications of diverse corrosives.  and of the milt, penetrating nothing deeper than the skin in●tatinge therein the doctrine of the ancient professors, which wear want sometime, to apply nine at once. Others make small inscisions, like unto little scarifications, one the sides of the belly, or else they lift up the skin, & thrust there through a needle with a silk thread, which thread they suffer to continue therein.  

The navel which heaveth up itself may be pricked through  And considering that oftentimes, in those which are troubled with the dropsy, there navel heaveth up itself, yea and sometimes as big as an egg, which standeth as clear, as if it wear a blather with water, there through I have seen to be drawn, a silk or wotlen thread, by the which the patiented perceived great ease, considering the great qvantitye of water, which through this apertione, is droping wise run out.  
Allsoe beyond all this are the legs, the hips, and the Scrotum oftentimes, swollen: for the which there is no better remedy, than that we scarify them through the skin, once as broad, as the apertione is in phlebotomye: Some there be which do this by the innermost ankle or four fingers above it. 
In what places the scarifications may be made.  I have sometimes myself very luckylye & ominously done the same, above the knees, and in the inside of the hips, in the bag of the testicles, out of the which first of all issueth a little waterye blood, but immediately thereafter the water superfluouslye issueth thereout without any inflammatione, so that the foresayed scarifications, can not shut, or heal, before all the water thereof be issued, & run out, & the patiented all most grown smaller, & the belly evidently waxed thinner, which in short time will be effected, with out any troublesome accidents, happening thereunto, & without any inflammatione in the foresaid parts. More over we are not to expect any danger hereof as we might well do, when as we open the belly of the Dropsy Ascites, because one this manner, the water with great qvantitye, at one time is not drawn of: and if so be the patiented, after that there is a great qvantitye of water drawn of, began to be weak, we may as then restrain the droppinge of the water, when as we cover the scarifications, with scraped lint, or with a few burned pieces of linen, and so stop it, & bind it. Out of the which scarifications, if so be we are disposed to draw more water thereout, we as then untie the foresaid place, & take away the lint from the same cause the patiented somewhat to walk, or ride in a waggon or koache, if it be possible, & with the leg hanging out, To cause the water, 
Council of Hypocrates, to draw of the water.  very superfluously to run or issue out of the legs, Hypocrates commands us, to rub the foresaid scarifications with sault, & thereafter stew them, & with any fervent or hot medicamentes we must always & continually keep open the same, to wit, with medicamentes which are sharp & biting: because in such scarifications, the ancient professors, as Aetius, Asclepiades, Leonides, Hypocrates, and Archigenes, have always had great confidence therein.  
But before we must come to these scarifications, we must consider one the strength, & one the age. of the patiented: for these apertions, are to no use, or commodytye, to those, which are whole overcome of the sickness, neither those which are very old, & macilente, because that as well the one as the other, of these scarified parts, might easily out of hand be mortified, without being able in any sort to retain & keep back the same, whereon immediately followeth death, & by the which often times, the Physicians, or the Chyrurgians, are injuriously & without right blamed, and of all men hated & had in little worth, as I myself have known it happen unto some, for the which I was not a little grieved.   

How that we shall cure the water burst, called Hernia aquosa. Chap. 5.  
IN the Scrotum, which we call the bag where in the testicles are contained, is congregate & gathered together a certain, waterishe moisture, through the which the foresaid bag cometh to swell, which tume factione, or inflation, of the Greeks is called Hydrocele, 
Hydrocele.  which seemeth to be a particularre kind of dropsy: & must here note that this swelling, sometimes cometh but in one side only: if so be that this disease proceedeth out of any antecedent or foregoing occasions, it necessarily followeth, that the blood, which into all parts of the body is sent as nurture, is permutated & changed. into some waterye substance: & if so be of any blow, or fall, it produceth his original, then is contained in the swelling a bloody kind of moisture. This aqvositye, remaineth not, 
The signs of a water burst.  in one certain place only because sometimes she is congreated & situated between the first & second membrane of the testicles: we may know this, when as we depress the swelling, because as then the foresaid moisture again by little & little runneth therein: the bag as then is more safter, neither can we perceive any hardness, or tumefaction therein as the waterye moisture, which is situated, within the concavitye of the Scrotum, because the foresaid aqvositye, is not driven therein: yea also in the same side, where the moistness demonstrateth herself, there lieth the swelling in form of an egg, or in an oval figure, neither as then can we either through the sight perceive, or through the touching thereof feel, any part of the testicle, because the foresaid testicle lieth therein hidden, and when we assemble & liken them both together, he appeareth somewhat greater, & more swollen, and when as this swelling or inflation of the testicles is great, them is the bag of the testicles, upwards somewhat long stretched out, and elevated, so that the upper end of the yard, partly also under the tumefaction lieth hidden, & occult. Sometimes also is this waterishe humidty secluded in a several membrane, as in a little blather, the which only for that purpose is constituted & ordained, as commonly chanceth in the tumefactione Ateroma, and when it is so, then is the swelling round, & closely compacted together, so that it seemeth to be a third testicle.  
There is also oftentimes, a ventosytye gathered together, in the bag, or Scrotum, as if it wear a waterye humiditye or moisture, which rightly to discern & know the one from the other we must consider that the windy Hernia, 
Whereby we may know the windy Hernia.  or burst, is partly hard and light, and is at one time engendered, on the suddayn, & subitlye can it lose itself, & depart: where to the contrary, the waterye Hernia, doth not whole depart, but waxeth sometimes a little smaller, considering any small ague, or else considering the great abstinence, & that especially in young child. If so be therefore that there be no great qvantitye of moisture, or humiditye, then is the tumefaction soft, but if that there be great qvantitye, it causeth then such a renitatione, or stretching out, as a bottle which is full, and closely stopped, & is heavy in elevating, or lifting up: such a swelling by little & little increaseth: the veins of the bag of the testicles swell, when as with the fingers, we thrust thereon: the humeditye flieth before the finger, & spreadethe herself round about the finger, & that whereon we do not crush, beareth up itself: and this waterishe humiditye, revealeth herself over thwarte, as in a glass, or in a blather: as easily we may espy, when as we hold a candle close thereunto, one the side of the swelling, and look then one the other side: And so farforth as the humiditye, therein contained, and occluded, be waterishe, than the inflation or swelling glistenneth, & is of such a colour, as the circumiacent parts thereabout lying are: if so be it be bloody, or like the wine mother or dregs, and faeces of wine, then is the swelling reddish of colour, or purple coloured: 
To know wheter the Hernia be one both sides.  & if so be we find all these signs, and tokens, in both sides of the Scrotum, or bag of the testicles, it is then a sign of two kinds of Hernia, to wit, in every side one. All these swelinges, of themselves, cause no pain, unless it wear great spanninge, of that part might chance, through the great tumefactions, and that especially, whereas the watery moisture lieth enclosed, between the membranes of the testicles. Now to abolish such aqvositye, there is nothing more profitable, and commodious, then to make an apertion therein, on this manner as followeth and succeedeth.  
Having shaved away the hair, 
How we ought to make the apertione.  round about the privityes (if so bo the patiented be no child) we must then cause him to lie one his back, either one a bed, or bench, being well stored of linen, than we must cause a servant, or helper, to stand one the one side of the patiented, & on the other side of them wherein we will make the apertione, which foresayed servant, must draw the yard toward him: then must the Chirurgeon with his left hand crush, on the inferior part of the bag, because that part which he will thrust through might show itself the more stretched, and fuller of substance, and prick with his right hand, wherein he must have a strong crooked lancett, from upwards, 
Inscisione of the Scrotum.  downwards, unto the concavitye of the bag of the testicles, because that the aqvosity may run out. And if so be the foresaid humiditye, lie enclosed in the membranes of the testicles, we must as then most gently, & artificially, once again thrust therein, diligently noting, that we chance not to touch, the foresaid testicles, neither any of the spermaticke vessels: and if the humiditye wear enclosed in a blather, the Chyrurgiane must then with his left hand, crush one the inferior part of the bag, on this manner to drive upwards the swelling, and the swelling being there retained & kept, we must continued it in this place, lest that she sink downwards again, and with the crooked lancet, cut in the nethermost part of the foresayed Scrotum unto the blather, or bag, wherein the humiditye lieth enclosed, & let it run thereout, as much as is possible: And if so be, it be able to be done, we must take thereout, some part of the bag, or blather, because it should not heal again, & other water therein be engendered: then we must put therein a great tent made of lint, which must not be to hard wound, therewith to keep open the wound, and not so quickly heal it: for if so it come to be too soon healed, & shut their might then chance to be an other collectione, and gathering together of water, so that it might be right needful, to be sure of the curing of the same, that as much as we can, we cause the membranes, to be purified, and cleansed, of all the humiditye, and moisture wherewith they are throughly soaked.  
Some there are which apply also in the superior part of the Scrotum, a potential cauterye, the operatione whereof being done, they then make an inscisione in the Escara, unto the concavitye of the Scrotum, wherein the foresaid water lieth enclosed, & then suffer the foresaid Escara of herself to fall out and separate. Such an apertione, which is made with corrosive, can not so easily be cured, so that in the mean season the water hath time enough to issue out thereat. 
Apertion by the thrusting through of a silk thread.  Others, draw through the swelling, with a strong needle, a silken thread, in stead of making an inscisione, or applying of the corrosive, in place of a Seton, or transforation where through the foresaid water by little & little leaketh out.  
But the apertione which is least dangerous of these three foresayed, is, the incision, whereof no, or at the least, very small accidents, can ensue, if so be she be done expertlye, and one a convenient place. It appeareth according as we have above taught, in the opening of Apostemations, that the apertion of the Scrotum, or bag, reqvireth to be done in the inferior parts of the same: 
The apetione is better to be done above 〈◊〉 under.  notwithstanding experience teacheth us, that there happeneth far more pain, & inflammation, unto it, when the inscisione is made below, them when she is done & made above, towards the flanks: for there is less danger of hurting of the testicles above, or their membrane, because it is situated more inferior, where all the fibers, of the foresayed Scrotum, do finish & end, wherefore, they are very sensible & painful. So that Celsus, & Paulus, council us, that we should make the incision close by the flanks. 
A dubb●● inscisione in a ●●●ble Hernia.  When as therefore this species, and kind of Hernia, is double, we must then make & do such an operation one both sides, & especially when we see, that they do not in any sort assuage.    

THE FIFTH TREATISE OF THE OPERATIon of Chyrurgerye, wherein is discoursed and handelede of the diseases of the nose, & of the mouth, containing seven chapters.  

Of the Polipus. Chap. 1.  
Of the Haremouth. Chap. 2.  
Of the ulcerationes, & of the excrescence of the flesh of the gums, called Paroulis, end Epoulis, Chap. 3.  
Of the tongue tying, or of the shortness, or brevity of the tongue, which the Greeks call Anciloglossum, & of the ulceration Ranula, which is also called Batrachos. Chap. 4.  
How we ought, to cauterize, and cut of, the Wula, or pallaet of the mouth. Chap. 5.  
Of the swelling of the almonds, & of the ulcerations of the same. Chap. 6.  
How that we ought to draw, break, or cut of teeth, Chap. 7.   

Of the Polipus. Chap. 1.  

Root, & original of the Polipus.  SOme men there are, which have a certain excrescence, of flesh in the nostrils, which resumeth her original, out of the bone, Etmoidis, or Chribleus, & out of the bones of the nose. This excrescence happeneth or cometh to a man, by little & little at once, and at the last, she waxeth so big, & huge in qvantitye, that she stoppeth the whole nostrils, & sometimes also hangeth down to the lips, by the which the patiented, is mervelouslye molested, as well in speaking, as breathing. Sometimes also she groweth in the entrance, or conduction, through the which the air, & the breath, are drawn into the throat, the which we may easily see, when as the patiented openeth his mouth, behind the pallaet of the mouth, & in such a greatness sometimes, that she stoppeth the throat, wherthroughe the patiented cometh in the end to be chonaked, if that in time we do not prevent it, And because such an excrescence of flesh, most commonly is soft, and pale, having diverse small sprouts, not mislike unto the feet, of the fish Purpura, it is therefore of the Greeks called Polipus, & also in our language Polipus.  
There are no sorts of Polipus which being venoumous, 
No sorts of Polipus, can through Chirurgery be cured.  have need of the operatione of Chyrurgerye, because we may not touch them, in like sort we may not touch those which are infected with the Cancer, because their nature is therewith polluted, & they there through spoiled. The young Chyrurgiane, may know them by there sensibleness, 
Signs of a venomous Polipus.  because they are very dolorous, & full, of pain, & extreme hard, being almost purple coloured, with a very stinking odour, or smell, on the which the Chyrurgiane shall do nothing, but must be handled as if it wear the canker, to wit, through koolinge, drying, & through mollifying medicamentes, through the which her excrescence may be prevented.  

Signs of a tractable Polipus.  That Polipus, which is insensible, or where there is little, or no pain, which is weak, lose, tractable, without being irritated, pale, or which is of a reddish colour, those we may through the operation of Chyrurgerye take in hands.  

How we ought to cure the Polipum.  To the effectuating of which, the ancient Chyrurgians, & those which have followed there doctrine, have effected this operatione cruelly enough: for some there are which with an instrument cut round, or circle wise this Polipum, which to that end & purpose, thereto they have caused to be made, and is called in greek Polyticon Pathion, without touching of the cartilege, or gristle, which being effected, they draw forth the foresayed descided Polipus, with an instrument much like unto an ear picker, or else with some kind of hoocke, & then they cure & heal the ulceration, as it reqvireth to be done. And as commonly there remaineth some little piece of root, in the bones Etmoides, & of the nose, the which they scrape of, also from the foresaid bones turning, & thrusting therein, with an instrument, to fetch all thereout, that by any means possible might tarry, and remain therein.  

another manner.  Others endeavour to consume, & annihilate the foresayed Polypum, with certain caustic, or ustive medicamentes, as with Aqva fortis, with oil of vitriol, or with the liqvefacted, & molten corrosive, in the which they dip, & madefye little small tents, which they lay therone, with or through a little pipe, because they should not hurt the nose one the internalle or inner side. Others there are, which with an actual cauterye, cauterize it, which through a pipe they thrust therein. Others, after the example the four famous chirurgeons, 
another manner to cure the Polipum.  which not being of opinion, that in no wise, or in any sort we wear able to cauterize the Polipus, unto his root, because he is so deep engraffed, they then make an inscisione, one the one side, of the cartilege of the nose, unto the bone of the same, & having in this sort discovered, & denudatede the Polipun unto his root or first offspring, & original, than they there cut, & cauterise him, & stitch together again the said inscisione, as we are commonly used to do in the hare mouths. The wise, & Learned man Guido de Cauliaco, liketh & commendeth this, or such like operatione, but in no wise, counseleth, to stitch up the incision, before the foresaid Polipus, be wholly eradicated, & rooted out, because if so be, that any parcel thereof remain, it again increaseth, which happening he, to be so, all the trouble, & pains of the patiented, hath been done for nothing, & to no purpose. All which operations, being as sufficiently and completlye effected as they possible may be, yet for the patiented they are tedious & trouble some, as often times, we have with our eyes beheld, which to speak the very truth indeed, they have never attained unto there perfect, and former health again, but rather far worse, than better: whereby we wear moved, to try. & make experiment of a far more ominous, and more convenient operation, to the curing of this disease, which consisteth in the whole eradicatione of the same. 
The manner how to drowe out the Polipus, more certainer, & convenienter, through extirpatione.  To the which end and purpose it seemeth unto us convenient, that we situate, & dispose the patiented, on the most convenient manner we may, in a seat, towards the light, & the Chirurgeon, with his left hand opening the nostril, wherein the Polipus is situated, shall with his right hand, thrust therein the flat tongues, as deep as possibly he may, (which tongues must be somewhat broad, & like a Ducks) bill wherewith he must nip the foresayed Polipun, & gentlelye with both his hands turn & wind the same, & therewith also draw towards him a little, & not at one pluck, because the root which is fast settled in the foresaid bones, might also follow, & the foresaid Polipus at one time be drawn forth, and extirpated: which I myself may with the truth allege to have done, with very little pain. Mr. Sourlin, a very expert Chirurgeon, hath assured me, that he also diverse times hath done it one the same manner, without any inconvenience. 
Admonitione for the Chyrurgiane.  But the Chyrurgyane must consider, that he do not adventure on such an operatione, then in that Polipus which is tractable, and not canckerouse, & which is great enough, to be gripped, & with out breaking to be extirpated, wherefore, if it be not great enough, we as then let him grow, & increase. And so far forth as the foresaid Polipus, drew himself upwards, avoydinge the nipinge, of the little tongues, we must then draw it downwards, with a little hook, because as then we may the better, take hold therone: the operation being finished, there ensueth an effluxion of blood presently, thereafter, which we shall permit, & suffer to bleed, because that part may be thereof released, & unburdened: we must then cause the patiented, through his nose to snuffle up red wine, & that as oftentimes a day, until such time as it be internally cured, without applying any pingveditye, or oils thereunto.   

❧ Of the haremouthe, or split and cloven lips. Chap. 2.  

Coloboma, Curtum.  THe cleaving, or splitting, which daily we see, in the lips, in the ears, and in the nose, is of Galen called Coloboma, & in Latin Curtum, when as these parts through any natural disease, are split, or cloven, as if there wear a piece cut out. 
To regenerate any substance is a work of nature and not of the Chyrurgiane.  It is impossible, that we should ingendre, any other matter, & restore, the substance, which therein is wanting, because it is the work of nature & not of the Chyrurgiane: but he may bring the separated parts the one, by the other, and cause such a substance, which in that part is deficient, & wanting shall seem as it wear there in engendered, so that very hardly we shall espy, & mark such an unseemlines, & deformity, especially if the slit have been but small: for these diseases might per adventure be so great, that they should be incurable, and wear not convenient for us to lay hands one them, & if so be we endeavoured to cure them, we might chance to make them far worse, & more unseemlye, then before they wear. Wherefore the Chyrurgiane ought diligently to consider, that one such kinds of fissures or splittinge, he impose not his hands, and especially in those which are to wide separated the one from the other, & where there is to much substance deficient or wanting, between them both, for when a Chirurgeon endeavoureth to cure such a disease, then must necessarily the seiunged and separated parts, either join, & heal together again, or else not: if so be they grow, & join together, the lip them is merveylouslye stretched, & lieth close to the teeth, & one the gums: And if so be they can not souder, & join the on with the other, the fissure, or splitting, will be much greater, then before it was, because & considering that, which one both sides was taken & cut away, through which occasione, the patient, as then can far and much more difficulter eat, and also speaketh worse, because that a complete, & whole lip, is very convenient, & necessary, as well to the commestione, as to the locution, & speech.  

In what persons this operatione is dangerous.  This manuale operatione, is very dangerous in aged persons, & in those which are unhealthesame, of body, or in those, which (as we commonly say) have naughty healing flesh, because, that in man's body there is no part or place, where in the canker can sooner come, and being therein, wherein he may be worse cured, & with more difficulty healed. The means to cure such a disease, is on this manner: Whe must first of all situate the patiented towards the light, & with our left hand, lift up the right side of the cloven or split lip, & as then cut with the crooked lancett, in the middle or upper end of the foresaid side of the lip, through the skin, & also between them both beginning as high, & as near the nose, as possible might be done, drawing the foresaid lancett, unto or towards beneath or end of the lip, 
How we ought to cure the cloven lips, or haremouthes.  because that the whole interjacent skin, might be clean thereof separated and severed: then we must change hands, taking in our right hand, the other side of the cloven lip, which is situated in the left side, & then we must cut with the left hand, even as before we have done with the right, because the cloven lip, may on all sides be cut, & on the edges be brought to raw flesh, without leaving the least part thereof untouched, which is not cut, or made raw, either in the infierior, or superior parts thereof, & that nothing differing from a green, fresh, & bloody wound, before we assay to stitch them the one with the other. 
We must let that part somewhat bleed.  This being one such a manner effected, and that part having somewhat bled, we must as then contract & join together both the cut parts, as close, and as smooth as by any means possible we may, and thrust a needle through both the foresayed reunited parts, thrusting deep enough through the flesh, & suffer the needle to remain therein, one the which we must round about wind the thread, as the Tailors are wont to do, when any where one there apparel they stick there needle there to keep it: As far as the fissure or splitting be great, we may as then stick two needles there in, the one under, & the other above. If so be the separated parts, of the foresaid lip, can not with any facility, or ease be brought together, we must then make two inscisions, in each side of the lip one, inform & likeness of a half-moon, both the korners thereof towards the wound, 
View the figure before.  as here before in the figure we may see, which inscisiones must only penetrate the upper skin, because that the edges of the wound being drawn together, might the better join the one with the other, for with any violence they may not be compelled, but rather, with gentleness, and without any force, because that, they being brought and joined the one with the other, be not again withdrawn backwards.  
It chanceth also sometimes, that the skin one the on side of the fissure, can not completlye unite herself with the other, where through, that place of the wound, is deformed & misshaped, because it is not whole cooperte, & covered, seeing therefore that this so chanceth, we must as then cut this said part half-moon wise, without in any sort touching the other side. 
We must nip of the point of the needle.  If so be the acuitye or point of the needle which sticketh in the wound, or lip, sticketh somewhat long through the other side, we must nip, or break it of with certain pincers or tongues because it should not prick or hoocke in any other place, & we must apply thereon, a plaster of Betonica, & in those inscisions which are made in the form of a half-moon, we must apply therone only dry lint, because the lips, or edges thereof, might not heal, & because that the flesh which therein increaseth, do not replenish the wound, & the lip there through be made broader.  
The foresayed suture, is commonly healed together the seventh day, and soudered the one with the other, when as therefore we espy & mark that it is so, & that they are joined the one with the other, we must cut of the thread which is wound round about the needle, & pluck the needle thereout, & cure the remanent of the wound, & also the stitches of the needle, as necesitye reqvireth the same to be done, and effected.  

Lips which are cleft in two places.  The lips are some times split, or cleft in two sundry, & diverse places, but thereon is not so much consisting, if they be not so far separated the one from the other, as if there wear a noteable pieces cut thereout, because otherwise it is as well & easily to be cured as the single fissure. If so be there be any excressence of flesh, or any cartilege, found about the lips, or in any place, which necessarily is to descided we must also cut that out, because, in all places it might be of an aequalle smoothenes. 
Cleaving of the ears, and nostrils  As concerning, & touching the fissures, of the ears, or nostrils, we must therewith proceed, on such a manner, as heretofore we have said of the splittinge and fissures of the lips.   

Of the ulceratione, and excrescence of the gums, called Paroulis, and Epoulis. Chap. 3.  
AFter the inflammation, or inscensione of the gums, commonly succeed the & follow the an excrescence of flesh, which of the ancient professors was called Epoulis, & that especially about the check, or hindermost teeth. Such a humour, & excrescence increaseth by little, & little, till at last it increaseth as big as a hens egg, so that sometimes the teeth there through fall out, and the patiented not able to open his mouth. 
We may not provoacke the Canckerouse.  If so be these excrescences be black, and Canckerouse, we must not apply there one any sharp, or corrodent medicamentes, neither with binding separate, & root them out: but must entreat, & handle them, in such sort, as before we have spoken of the canker, and like all palliative cures.  
If so be this excrescence be tender, soft, 
The manner to cure Epoulis  & tractable, we must whilst it is small, descyde & cut it away, if so be it be great, we must then bind it of, with a strong thread, which we must alligate, and tie under at the root thereof, and by degrees knit it closer, till that in thus doing, the root by the thread be cut through, and the excrescence fall out of the mouth. 
Such a ligature is more certain than inscisione  Such a ligature or binding is far surer, them the discidinge or cutting of, the same, because that therthroughe, we need fear no superfluous bleeding, & the root better one this manner be taken out, & also the patient have less pain, and fear to expect, then of the inscisione, or cutting, and cauterisatione, which after the inscisione conseqventlye followeth.  
When as therefore througe binding, 
How we ought to handle the Epoulis that returneth  we have decided this carnositye, or excrescens, & that she reverteth & cometh again, as often times chanceth, we must as then religate & bind again the same, or cut it, and cauterize the root thereof, it be either with a little actual Cauterium, or with a little oil of Vitroll, with Aqvafortis, or with any other liqvefacted corrosive, which we find thereunto most convenient. A part of the ancient professors, wear wonte to apply therone, some or other corrosive powder, on the same, where of the excrescence might clean be corroded away, which in mye opinion is very inconveniente, especially in these parts.  
There is as yet an other kind of ulceration, 
Paroulis, and the means how to cure it.  or tumefactione incident unto the gums, which of our praedicessors was called Paroulis: which perseavinge it to be come to his full maturation, & ripnes, we must immediately make therein an apertione, & inscisione, with the crooked lancett, which must be of an indiffeferent latitude, because it might not again chance, to cause a reulceration or swelling, & so chance to change itself into a fistle: being apart, and open the patient must wash his mouth with some gross red wine, which must be somewhat warm, to exsiccate, & dry, to comfort, to repel, & drive back & if need so reqvire to stop, and restayne blood: the next day following he must wash his mouth withhonye water, to the purging, and purifying of the disease.  
This ulceration, must immediately be opened, because the matter, chance to make no more concavitye, and the cheek bone therthroughe chance to be polluted. If so be their chance any corrupting, and rottenness in the gums, we must then anoint them with a littie Aqvafortis, 
A remedy against the corrupting of the gums.  but with due consideratione, and discretion. And because that oftentimes immediately after the diseases Paroulis, or Epoulis, there commonly engendereth, and cometh a fistle in the gums, which penetrateth, & pierceth unto the cheeckebon, we must note, if the root of the tooth be not rotten, & corrupt or altered, for if so be it wear so, (as oftentimes it happeneth) we must draw forth the tooth, and correct the place, wherein the tooth hath stood either with a cauterye, or with oil of Vitriolle, and if so be there be any part of the cheek bone corrupt, by this means, nature will expel and drive from her the corrupted piece of bone, without with violence to draw forth the same.   

❧ Of the retention of the tongue, which of the Greeks was called, Anciloglossum, and we now call it tungetyed: And of the ulceration under the tongue, which of the Greeks is called Batrachos, & of our modern Physicians Ranula. Chap. 4.  

The disease of a hortened tongue.  THe tongue in some persons, or children, is shorter than she ought to be, wherewith they are borne, and by the which occasion, they must with difficulty utter the words which they would speak, the tongue being intercepted, and hindered, by a certain ligament, which we call the spamned vain, wherthroughe the tongue, is restrained, & as it wear, seemeth to be bridled, or through any membrane therunder situated, whereon the tongue resteth, & because she can not so move herself, and turn, as it wear convenient, she should. The children are very long time before they begin to speak, & when as they begin, they as then speak very festivouslye & hastily, & without any hindrance, except in uttering of those words, which are difficult to pronounce, as are those, in the which many R. R, R. and L. L. L. come.  
This disease, is also sometimes accidentalle unto a man, 
The disease of the tongue after a callice ulceratione.  when as after any ulceratione under the tongue, there remaineth a hard callousnes, & anguste cicatrice, whereof the tongue sometimes, inspeaking must double & redubble herself, & they which are troubled with this imperfection, do speak with great pains & difficulty, wherefore the ancient professors of foretimes, have called them Mogilaous. The foresaid disease must be cured only through the manual operation. To which end & purpose, we must situate & place the patient as the matter is reqviringe, 
How we ought to cure the tongue tying.  the servant of the Chyrurgiane having both his finger's wound with fine linen (to wit, the thumb, & the first finger) wherewith he must take the foresaid tongue by the end, & lift her up, towards the roof of the mouth: which being done, if so be the membranes wherone the tongue is fastened, be cause, of the difficulty of speech, them must the Chirurgeon with a small hook, as is before described, hold the same therewith fast, with his left hand, & when indiffierentlye he shall have stretched out the same, he must as then either with the point of his scissors, or else with his crooked lancet, cut, and decide it of. If so be the shortness be caused because the ligament of the tongue, is to short, & stretcheth itself more than is needful toward, the middle of the tongue, or else because of any cicatrice: we must then also in like sort take hold on all that with the hook, & pluck or draw it, & cut it of, which is obdurated & hard, also all that which with the natural flesh of the tongue is not moved, or stirred. This operatione then being effected, the patient must was he his mouth, with a little water & vinegar, & diligently stir the tongue, & often times thrust her forth of his mouth, & rub or wipe his finger therunder, & often times with his teeth crush her up towards the roof of the mouth, because that the foresaid ligament, or membrane, do not chance to join & grow fast again thereon: 
How we may hinder the healing.  for as the stirring, & removing up & down, are a hindrance, unto the healing of the same, so is all so qvietnes, & stillness, an occasion of the uniting, & combination of the same: yea he must also in the night season lay a compress under his tongue, there by to hinder, & delay the curing of the wound, which easily sleeping might chance & come to pass, & that because the tongue, neither by eating, nor by speaking is in any sort stirred or moved.  
Some of our ancient professors, 
Membranous ligament or tongue tying.  to prevent the danger, of bleeding in such an operation, thrust through the membranous ligament, or through the cicatrice, whereby the tongue is kept bound & tied, a needle with a thread, which by degrees they draw & pluck together until such time the membrane heerwith be cut a sunder.  
When as we would cut the tongue tyednes in young children, which are nuely borne, 
How we ought to cut the tongue tying of young children.  we must first of all with the finger lift up the tongue, & with the point of the scissors, descide, and cut of the membrane which is situated under the tongue, & then with the finger wipe a little salt therein & rub it, without doing any thing else there to, commanding the nurse, to do the same once, or twice more.  

The ulceratione Ranula, and the original thereof.  It may also chance that the speech is impedited & hindered, by reason of some ulceratione, which cometh under the tongue, called Batrachos, or Ranula, in which ulceratione, there lieth a waterishe humiditye therein enclosed, which often times is not disliking unto the white of an egg, as well considering the consistence thereof, as concerning the colour, always commonly being included in a little membrane, like unto the ulceratione Ateroma, & many other could ulcerations or swellings. In have seen such manner of swelling, & tumefactions so great and so often times (after they have been thrust through to let out the matter) return again, that the patiented, by reason of the greatness could not speak, yea also in dawnger there through of styfelinge, or smothering, so that I have known them to have been opened four times in one day, and at every season a handful of matter to issue thereout, like unto slime, and the white of an egg. The which hath binn so difficult to be cured, that in the end we have been compelled, to apply there one an actualle Cauterium, in which large and wide apertione, we have imposed & laid in lint, being madefyed and made wet in oil of vitriolle, by the which at the last the patiented is sowndlye, and completlye cured.  
Now to cure this disease, we must first of all make an apertione, with the crooked lancet, according to the length of that part and not thwart or crosseover, to give issue & passage to the humiditye & matter to run out, which is the occasione of this tumefactione, or ulceratione: and if so be this swelling return, the surest remedy, as then is the actual cauterye.  

How we ought to cure this ulceratione & his return again.  To which intent, we must well, and conveniently situate the patiente, & cause his head to be stayed, & held by his servant, with the one hand one his head, and the other under his chin, there about where the foresaid ulceration is situated, because partly there through it may be elevated and lifted up, for the Chyrurgiane with more ease & facility to attain to his purpose, when as with the lancet or with the cautery we will make there in an apertione: For those parts being tender, & soft, how little soever they be crushed yet notwitstandinge yield themselves inwards where through the apertion might be hindered & failed, and all our labour be lost, & bestowed in vain. The patiented therefore in this sort being settled and disposed, and being by some servant held fast, must open his mouth, then shall the Chyrurgiane with his left hand lay a piece of lattinne or a silver plate under the tongue of the patiented, which hath a hole in the midst thereof right on the place, where we desire to make the apertione, then must the Chyrurgiane take in his right hand a glowing or red hot Cauterium, which he must sittuate right one the hole of the foresaid piece of Lattinne & thrust the same into the concavitye of the foresaid ulceration: in so doing are the circumiacent parts defended from all combustion or burning, & the ulceratione very conveniently opened. This apertion being on such a manner effected, & brought to pass, we must cause the patiented to wash his mouth, with a mouth-water, or gargrise, which must be made of barleywater, of Plantine, and of honie-water.   

❧ How we ought to cauterize, cut of, or bind, and tie, the palate, or Wula of the mouth. Chap. 5.  
NAture hath in the posteriore parts of the mouth created, a spongiouse, & carnal or fleshy dug, as thick, & round. as is the end of a shaft, or qvill as easily we may see, when as we open the mouth. This reserving his natural proportione, the Greeks as then call it Gargareon, the Latinistes, Gurgulio, 
Gurgulio  & we the palate of the mouth: but the same being amplified, and grown greater, then naturally it is, through the discendinge of any superfluous humours, being of one crassitude above, & beneath, it is as then of the Greeks called Chiou, in Latin Columella, 
Columella.  as if we would say, a little pillaer: but if so be it be below rownder it is as then of the ancient professors called Staphila, of the latins, Wa, 
Wa.  and of us, the sinking or falling of the palate. It hath sometimes such a longitude, depending one the tongue, that the patiented always supposeth, to have somewhat in the throt, which very willingly he would swallow.  
That which is black, 
Wen we ought not to cut away the palate.  we must not in any wise meddle with, or take in hands, in like sort also the same being wholly inflamed, because as then with out danger we can by no means possible, descide and cut it of, because of the superfluous bleeding which conseqventlye followeth, wherefore as then we ought rather to use all such medicamentes as still, and assuage pain, which moisten and madefye, and gently fortify & strengthen the patiented. But if so be that there be no inflammatione, & the palate be thorough soaked with humours, & is waxed very long, white, pale, and sharp, 
Three means or ways to cure this disease.  we must as then cut it of: as we must also do when it is above thin, and below thick.  
This disease may be cured, by taking away that, which in the palate is oppugnant unto nature, either through dissectione, or through cauterizing, or else through binding of the same. If so be we fear any superfluous bleeding, it is then the surest, shortest, & easiest way, to decide it, because the patiented there through might be freed from many more miseries, calamities, & mischances, wherine otherwise he might in time chance to fall as is the cough, through the continuallirritation of the forefayed long hanging palate, omission, & loss, of sleep, & sometimes also the choackinge, so that we noting & observing all these things, are of ten times compelled, for the succour of the patiented, to effect our extreme, 
The first way to cure the sinckinge of the palate.  and last remedy, to preserve and keep him from greater danger ensvinge.  
And aptly to bring this to pass, we must cause the patiented to sit in a very lucent and lightsome place, and also to set apert & wide open his mouth, and depress his tongue with the Speculum oris, then take hold one the foresaid palate, with a little instrument, or tongues made only for that purpose, leaving as much hanging of the palate under the foresaid tongues, or instrument, as is to long, nought, & as must be cut of, plucking of the same a little towards him, because that with the point of the scissors, he may conveniently cut of, that which hangeth under the foresaid instrument or tongues but not that which is above the foresaid instrument as easily it may be done, for when as this palate, is tender, spongeous, and covered with a membrane, 
Accidents which may ensue through cutting to high of the palate.  we as then easily take hold thereon when as we would pluck him, wherefore some chirurgeons have oftentimes been deceived, supposing him to be much longer, wherefore they have cut him to short, & almost clean away, where through also very troublesome, and difficult accidents have followed: because this being happened, all the pectoral parts, are heinously & merveylouslye therethrough offended, with great difficulty of well speaking, yea & sometimes also with want of speech, or dumnes: wherefore we ought not only to leave the root, whereon that this dug, or this palate is fastened, but somewhat more, and only cut of that, which above his natural constitutione seemeth to be toe long. Others there are which take hold on this palate, 
An instrument or tongue, called Staphilagres.  with an instrument called Staphilagres, wherewith they wring it round about, & having wrung it round, it waxeth crooked, & purple coloured, and in the sectione thereof issveth little blood thereout. Being now descided & cut of, if so be there followed a great effluxion of blood, we must as then cause the patiented to gargrise his mouth with water and vinegar, and then with some constringent decoction which hath bin boiled with gross red wine, or else touch the place, 
Remedy agayst the bleeding of the descided palate.  orwype it with some strong cauterisinge water, wherewith the opened veins might be seared together.  
The second manner, of effecting this same, is done with an actual, 
The second manner to cure the sinekinge of the palate through cauterisatione.  or a potenciall cauterye: as concerning the actual cauterye, we must thereunto have in a readiness and praepared, a sylver, or copper pipe, which in the one end thereof must have a little apertione in form of a little window, to receive there in that part of the palate, which you resolve to cauterize, than you shall put into the pipe your glowing actual cauterye, which with his end will abolish and take away that, which shall hang there in as if it wear with a little cheesell strooken of, and one this manner we must cauterize, and cut of the palate even, and smooth. touching the potential cauterye, or corrosive, we must first receive, into the apertion or window of the foresaid pipe, that part of the palate, which we desire to corrosive, and then with a privett or searching iron thrust into the foresaid pipe, a piece of corrosive, against the foresaid piece of palate of the mouth, and continue the same therone a certain time, diligently considering, that not any part of the corrosive, fall one the tongue, or the throat, when as through the humiditye of the palate it beginneth to liqvefye. 
This corrosive is described before among the instruments.  And when we desire to take away the foresaid pipe, we must then first of all lay the Speculum oris, one the tongue, because as then no part of the foresaid corrosive, chance to light or fall one any of the subteriacent parts, neither touch any part, but the palate only because thereby they might be endamaged, and hurt. Thus having brought this to pass, we must anoint the palate with a little oil of roses, with a little cotton or linen there in being madefied, and made fat, then shall the patiented wash his mouth with a little roosewater.  
A sort there are which do not use the foresaid pipe, but they dip, & moisten, a little cotton, or linen, which is tied to the privet, or searching iron, in oil of vitriol, or Aquafortis, with the which they touch the palate, and cauterize it, the tongue before being laid down with the Speculo oris, & then a little season following they wash it with Plantine-water. Others take a little kind of spoon, 
Staplulocauston, a certain kind of spoon so called  (which of our praedecessors was called Staphilocauston) full & implete with powder, of corrosive, full Aquafortis, or oil of Vitriolle, wherein they cause the end of the palate to depend, alway before having laid down the tongue with the Speculo oris, and by this means they cauterize, & consume, the palate which before was to long: it is right true, that some of this corrosive in the spoon might chance to fall one the tongue, wherefore I would rather council to use that corrosive which is thick and of some crassitude, as that is which may be pulverisated & beacon to powder, because without being pulverizated it can not show his forces one the palate. When as therefore, through the applicatione of any of the foresaid corrosives, or cauteryes, the place of the palate beginneth to be black, it is then a sign that it is sufficiently cauterised, and if so be the colour thereof be not, as yet changed, we must then yet once again apply the corrosive thereunto, & then cause the patiented to gargrise his mouth with Oxicrate or with warm red wyne.  

A tried remedy.  I have known the sunken palate to be lifted up again, with a little pownded pepper & sault, by a spoon, being therone fastened: others use there to some astringent powders. The third means, to cure this disease, is effected by ligature, because of the timorousness which the patiented conceaveth of the cutting of, or cauterizing the same, or effluxion of blood. 
The tying, with the third means how to cure the palate being sunk.  Which is effected and completlye brought to pass, when as with a strong thread we tie the foresaid palate underneathe, in that place where it surpasseth his natural length: through which ligature, the inferior part can obtain no nurture, because the veins by the thread are suffulced & stopped up, so that in a short time the thread cuttethe of, and causeth to separate that which hath been bound, the superior part being almost cicatrized, with out any fear of any superfluous bleeding. The means how very neatly, and conveniently to effect this operatione, and also the instrument thereunto serving, is described unto you before among the figures of the instruments.  
The use of the foresaid palate of the mouth, 
Use of the palate.  showeth unto us, that we ought to observe a mean, in cutting of the same, when as it surmountethe the natural longitude, or else the use thereof is brought to nought, and lost, because therthroughe, the voice of man is form, and retained, as the mouth or apertione of a Citerne, when as we touch the strings thereof, she as then giveth a sound, even so the breath of man, which is the substance of the voice, issuing forth of the longs being divided, and spread over, and throughout the whole roof of the mouth, there and in that place to receive the articulatione, and by the tongue, teeth, lips, and nostrils, in the utterance thereof to be form. Wherefore those which have the same surpassing the natural length, or in any other sort, troubleth them, have such a feeble, & imbicille voice, that very difficultly we may hear them, or at the least speak through there noses: & if so be it be clean cut of, they lose their speech, and wax mute and dumb. Above all this it hath as yet a twofoulde use, viz the one to prohibit, the dust, and any other substance, to enter into the throat, by our breath, which constinuallye we must draw inwards, and hangeth as it wear dilated and spread abroad like unto a tapistry, over the throat. The other, and second use of this pallatis, that it warmeth, and temperethe, the could air which we draw in through the nose and through the mouth to the lungs, because through the extreme could thereof, it might not chance to endamage the foresaid tongue, wherefore they which have no palate, find themselves always very much altered, & changed, and a great could always one the breast.   

Of the swelling of the Almonds, and of the ulcerations of the same. Chap. 6.  
ONe both sides of the palate, and in the hinder parts thereof, in the angustnes of the throat, which of the Greeks is called Isthmos, hath nature created and form, two Almonds, the one right opposite against the other, which are therefore called Paristmia: which be cause of the form, figure, and qvantitye thereof, are whole likened to an Almond, & are for that occasione called Almonds: there functione, and office is, that they retain in them, a certain sputaminous humiditye, which sinketh & descendeth out of the head, thereby not only to refresh & moisten the mouth, & the circumiacent parts of the same but also the throat, and the entrance of the stomach, because the tongue in speaking might not whole be exsiccated and dried, and that the continual speech might not thereby be hindered, and interrupted.  
These foresaid Almonds, are situated, 
The use, situatione & compositione, of the Almonds.  in a moist, and warm place, and considering there spongeous, nature, are subjecteth to all concursions of humours, and all inflammations, wherthroughe oftentimes they wax harder, and greater, than naturally theyought to be out of the which, proceedeth an ulceration or tumefactione, called of us Antiades, 
A tumefactione called Antiades.  wherthroughe the passage of eating, drinking, & breathing is stopped, & interrupted, so that those afflicted patientes, can not without great difficultly, swollowe, or respire & breath, & even as the patientes, here through are come into great peril, & danger, so they must immediately be succoured with excellent & good remedies.  

remedies against the tumefaction Antiades.  The assuredest and most convenient remedy is, that we cause them praesentlye to be phlebotomised, after that they shall at the first have used a glister: and then in like sort cause him to be let blood under the tongue: that we box them behind in the neck, that they use gargrises, which are indifferently frigifyinge, and astringent.  

Signs how to know when the tumefacted Almonds, exulcerates and their remedies  This tumefactione oftentimes is of such a magnitude, that it exulcerateth: which easily we may espy, when as we perceive it to be rumpeled, and whytishe, and when as before there hath been any pricking therein. Which having espied to be so, we must with an instrument, which only to that intent, & purpose was made, open the foresaid ulceration, or else with a lancett, which round about unto the point is wound with linen. The apertion must be reasonably dilated, because theris no especial great vain situated in that place, which we might hurt, except it wear in the bottom or root of the foresaid Almonds. We are sometimes constrained to open this ulceratione, before it be fully mature, and ripe, to unburden, and release that part thereof, because the blood which issueth out of the foresaid ulceratione, diminisheth & intercepteth the pain, and inflammatione thereof, adminestreth better passage unto the meat, and drink, and finally, prolongeth the breath. It is right true, that we always in the first, aught by all means endevoure to mitigate the pain, and cool the caliditye of the ulceratione as much as is possible.  
If so be these said Almonds, are groowen so long & hard, with out any hope to reduce them again to there former & natural estate, & being, we must as then use the manual of Chyrurgerye thereunto, either by cutting of the same, or else through inscisione: if so be there be nothing to hinder or be a let here unto, than the ligature wear most convenient thereunto, and especially, when as we fear any superfluous bleeding. Which very conveniently may be done, 
Ligature, or incision in the almonds, when they are grown to long & hard.  with an instrument, one the same form and fashion, as before we have rehearsed, in the tying of the palate, ever observing, that we cut thereof no more, then is needful, contenting ourselves therewith, not to cut thereof any more, then that which surpasseth his natural magnitude, & greatness: because that through the largeness and romthe of the throat which by this dissectione might chance, there be not irritated and occasioned to follow, all such accidents and inconveniences, as before we have described, of the palate which is to short cut of, or any dangerous bleeding, if so we descide and cut it of unto the natural, & sound flesh, of the forerehearsed almonds, because of the great veins which there under lie dispersed.  
But before we proceed unto this operatione, we must consider, 
The canckerouse almonds may not be tied, not cut of.  whether they be not of some canckerouse nature, because those which are canckerouse may not by the manual, operation of Chyrurgerye be cured: they are most easiest known, when as they are hard, of a purple colour, rugged, full of pain, and have a great root. But if they be pale round, tender, smooth, and below thin, we may as then without danger tie, and cut them of. And in as much as concerneth this operatione, 
History of Albucasis.  the history of Albucasis shall at this time suffice, to instruct the younger Chirurgeon, to imitate the same, which affirmeth to have had a woman in hands, with such an ulceratione wherbye her throat was almost occluded and stopped, that with great difficultly she respired, & breathed, neither could she any more eat, or drink, being in great peril, & danger of death, if so be that in that estate she had continued but one day longer, in whom this ulceratione was so extreamlye swollen, that it had yet spread itself abroad into two branches more, into the nostrils. In which great necessity, and perplexity, with all expeditione he took, a little hook, wherewith he laid hold one the one branch thereof, which was come into the nostrils, wherewith he drew forth thereof a reasonable qvantitye, and then as deep as he could, he cut it of, & having done the same, in the other nostril also he hath aperted and opened her mouth & depressinge the tongue downwards, hath taken hold on the swelling and tumefactione, with a hook, & also cut a great qvantitye therofe, without any great store of blood issuing out of it: This being finished, the miserable & poor woman hath immediately opened her mouth & began to eat, & drink water. At other seasons also thereafter he hath cut away there from other pieces, but yet notwithstanding, as often & as much as he descided & cut thereof, is increased again & grown thereunto: which when he had marked, he cauterised the same, & by this means in the end hath prevented the excrescence of this tumefactione: but being constrained to take his journey to some other place, could never hear, or by any man understand, how it happened thereafter with her: & it may right well be thought, that the cauterisinge of this disease unto his root, could not in any sort increase again, as before it had done.  
It happeneth also sometimes, that the Almonds so chance to swelle, that there is no hope left, that we should perforate, or thrust them through, or to bind & tie them, because sometimes it is impossible for the patiented to open his mouth, & not being able in any sort to respire, must of necessity die: which perceavinge to be in such an estate, we are then constrained in our extreme necessity, to take our last refuge, unto the making of an inscisione in the throat, or Trachea arteria, rather than with our eyes behold the patiented to smother & choke. When as therefore we would effect this, we must cause the patiented to lie, & lean on his back, and hang his head backwards, because the throat, or Trachea arteria, may evidently show itself, than we must with our fingers, take hold on the skin, of the third, or fourth ringle of the throat, where with the foresaid, circles, or rounds of the throat are covered, & lifted up, now this being, so heaved up, we must according unto the longitude thereof make the incision, which being cut through, & again let fall, we shall as then perceive the throat bared, & if so be therone we espied any vain, we must detrude it one the one side & eschew, or avoid the same. Which being effected, we must with the point of a crooked lancet, make our inscisione thwarte over, betweme the third or fourth rotundity or circle, qvite through the membrane, wherewith both the foresayed cartilages, or circles are the one with in other united, & holden together, of which between them both is situated, without touching either of both these cartilages, or rounds, into the concavitye of the foresaid Trachea arteria, or throat, which easily we may perceive when as the breath issueth forth of the wound: in the which wound, immediately therone, we must impose a silvern, or golden pipe, because there through during some short space the patient may breath. This said pipe must in the one end be somewhat broad, with a thread thereon fastened, because that through the drawing of breath, it do not chance to be drawn into the throat. Now the danger of choakinge being passed, we must as then take it thereout again, because that the wound, with convennient remedies may be cured.   

How we ought to draw, thrust out, and cut, of the teeth. Chap. 7.  

Divers v operations.  THere are diverse diseases inscidente unto the teeth, which through the manual operation of Chyrurgerye must be cured: as by cauterisinge, of the same, & by dissipation of the gums from the tootheth, by filinge, by cutting of, by drawing by setting, by cutting in therofe, & by allegation & binding together of the teeth. Those teeth which are slimy, & thereon, a black, yellow or white tough matter, & sometimes like unslissed lime, or as it wear some putaminous substance, chanced to be thereon obdurated, & hardened, we must with a little scraper, or instrument, for that purpose make them clean & purify them, without hurting of the gums, & loosening of the same, because that such teeth which are heerwith polluted, are not most commonly very fast: the aged people, & the rheumatic, they which are troubled in the lungs, or which have any disease in the stomach, which in times passed have been infected with the pox, are commonly subject unto diseases of their teeth: when as this increscens is not as yet obdurate or hard we may then with more facility remove the same, & in the first we must wash the gums as well of the one as the other with a little alum water whereby the increasing of this matter is somewhat prevented, & retarded, 
Practise & inventione of the aucthore.  & it fasteneth also the gums unto the teeth, when as they hang loosely thereon. Some there are which esteem this a great secret which heretofore I myself have used, to wit, that we take a little Aquafortis, and a little stick, as thick as a quill, the one end thereof being dipped in this water, with which end of the foresayed stick, we must well rub the tooth therewith, diligently observing, that no drop thereof chance to fall one the lips or gums, & immediately the tooth being heerwith rubbed, we must as then with a linen clout wipe the tooth, the linen cloth being madefied in could water thereby to dissipate from the tooth the tartenes thereof, which the Aquafortis hath left behind it, causing the patiented immediately to spit, & thereby the tooth will be exceeding white as snow. 
For rotten hollow & stinking teeth.  If there be any tooth corrupted, foraminous, concavous & stinking, & that causeth sometimes great dolour, & pain, yet notwithstanding we always endevoure to praeserve him, either because he is commodious for chawing, or serviceable for the speech, or else is for a decorum or grace unto the mouth: to the repelling of which pain, we must use a little oil of Sage, of rosemary, of cloves, or any other oil, of aromaticalle spices. And if so be therewith the pain, & the corruption be not seized, we must as then with Aquafortis cauterize the teeth, or with oil of vitroll wherein we must dip and moisten a little cotton, which neatly we must thrust into the concavity of the tooth: & if so be all these remedies be not sufficient, there is as then no surer, or better remedy, than is the use of the actual Cauterium, which must be proportioned very little, & according unto the concavitye of the tooth.  
Other chirurgeons there are which howld in great esteem the filing of the teeth, 
Why we file the teeth.  where they be corrupted, which I also esteem to be commodious, when as conveniently it may be effected, & when the tooth is corrupted but on the one side thereof: for by this means we shall intercept, & hinder the corruption of the next tooth joining thereunto, that he be not therwithe polluted above other commodities, which therethrough we shall effect.  

Teeth which grow forth with an acuitye.  There groweth oftentimes a tooth higher, than the other of the teeth, either upwards, outwards, or inwards, the point whereof is so acute, that in speaking it either hurteth the tongue or the lips. Alsoe sometimes the teeth are rugged & unsmoth above, wherefore they, one the tops & summityes thereof be filled, by this means to make them smooth, as the other. And conveniently to use the file thereon, & to cause that the tooth do not chance to stir in the filinge, we must hold fast with our fingers the foresayed too the, laying certain pieces of linen on the gums, 
Teeth which stand out of there order, which are broken & wherein as yet remaineth some little piece.  unto the roots of the tooth. We must file of all such teeth which extrud themselves externally, will not be contained in the semicircle of the other teeth, or they which are broken, & a little piece thereof as yet remaining in the place, lest they might chance to hurt the tongue, or the mouth. Conserninge the supernatural teeth, because it wear to great pains & labour to file them, it is also sometimes dangerous to draw them because commonly they are grown, & stick very fast in the cheekebone, we cut them of with our cutting pelican, 
Supernatural teeth.  or instruments which only for that purpose are composed & made, & are before figured & set down in their forms: we all so breack them sometimes i● place of cutting of them, with such instruments as here before are praefigured unto us: but the best way is to cut them of, if by any means possible we can effect it. 
For great pain & dolour in the teeth.  The pain of the teeth is at sometimes so vehement & in tolerable, because that the tooth, is corrupted unto his synnue, pierced, & is hollowed, that the person, is almost phrensye, & considering that there is sometimes no remedy to be had, for the quallifyinge of this pain, he is as then constrained to cause the said tooth to be drawn, which as then is the certaynst way.  

How we ought to draw a tooth.  When as therefore we would draw forth a tooth we must cause the patiented to sit in such a sort as is most convenient, & then make choice of the corrupted & rotten tooth, because we do not mistake the one for the other, which we must make lose from the gums, & fill up the concavity or hollowness of the tooth with a little piece of lead, or with a little lint, or cotton stick it full, because in the Pelican he chance not to break, through the hard shutting of the same: having hold thereon, we must gently & easily crush the tooth drawer together, lest the tooth chance to break, and then drawing the foresaid tooth a little a side pluck him out, because that if to rigorously we waggle the tooth up or down that part of the cheek bone wherein the root stood so fast, might easily be broken, wherefore he will not with to great violence be drawn out, as also by to violent drawing, we might disjoin, and pluck out of joincte the nethermost cheekebon, & cause great perturbation in the uppermost chaw even to the eyes. The tooth being drawn, 
The bleeding of the gums when as the tooth is drawn out, is not to be little esteemed of.  we must with both our fingers shut, & join together again the gums & cause the patiented to wash his mouth with a little Oxycrate, wherein we must also put in a little salt. If so be there wear any effluxion of blood, we ought not to esteem it to be a small matter because I have known some to bleed themselves to death.  
The assuredest remedy which I ever have known to be used, is this, that diverse times, we must thrust therein some cotton, which hath been madefyed in juice of lemmones, which always we must put in that place, out of the which the tooth was drawn.  
And touching the convenience of the ligatione, or tying of the teeth, 
After what sort we ought to tie the teeth, shut, & set them fast which are lose, & also inserte those which through art are made.  to join them together, & to inserte & set fast those teeth, which are lose, & grown to be movable & may be waggled up & down, & also to inserte any therein which by art are made, all this may very conveniently & fitly one this manner be effected, with a fine golden wire of fine oriental gold, which we may easily bend & bow, between the foresaid teeth without any violence. First double the wire, laying the same with his duplication, between two sound teeth & then bring both the ends, to that tooth which is lose, whether it be one or more, until such time as we shall have drawn unto the second sound tooth one the other side, than we must reduce the wire unto that tooth whence we took our original, gently drawing the foresaid wire together, close to the root of the tooth lest that he go lose: This being done we must with a pare of shears cut of both the ends of the foresaid wire which are to long, & wind the rest thereof round about the sound tooth, as close to the root that the foresayed golden wire, may very difficultly be espied, neither in any sort may perturb, or hinder the tongue. The teeth not only being lose but also whole fallen out, we may for all that inserte them in there place, & tie them, with a golden wire, as is before rehearsed, or else we may set other teeth in their places, which are by art made of Ivory, 
Look afore in the figure or forms  or of any other matters, as here before we have set down the figures and descriptions thereof.    

The French chirurgery THE sixth TREATISE OF THE OPERATIone of Chyrurgerye Containing nine chapters.  

Of that, wherone we must consider, before we make an apertion in avayne. Chap. 1.  
How we ought to phlebotomive, or open avayne. Chap, 2.  
Whereon we ought to consider, after we have opened the vain, & when she bleedeth. Chap: 3.  
Of the number of veins, & arteries, which are used most commonly to be opened. Chap. 4.  
Of the apertione, of the Arteries. Chap. 5.  
Of Aneurisma, or broken arterye, how we ought to make an inscisione therein, & after what manner we ought to bind them. Chap. 6.  
Of the Cirsotomia, which is, how we ought to make our incision in the Varices, or bursten veins. Chap. 7.  
Of horseleeches, and of their use, and how we ought to apply them. Chap. 8.  
Of boxes, and how we must apply, and use them. Chap. 9   

❧ Whereon we must consider, when as we desire to open a vain, or phlebotomize. Chap. 1.  

Intention, & purpose of the author.  MYe purpose, and intent, is not in this place to discrib unto you, what sicknesses reqvire phlebotomye, in what age, in what time or season of the year, in what country, in what constitution of the body, it must be done, & of what occasione, namely & especially, whether it be for any simple evacuation, or for any deprivatione, or derivatione, or for any revulsion. In like sort also in what vain we ought to make the apertione, what qvantitye of blood we ought to detract out of the same, in what sort, and how much at one time, how often after the other or in what time of the sickness we must make the apertione in the vain.  
But my purpose, and meaning is, only to show, how we ought to open a vain: whereon we must think, & diligently consider, before we make the apertione therein, after we have opened her: & wherone we ought to not, when the blood issveth out of the same. This doing, shall the Chyrurgiane, be no less worthy of praises, because he can very excellently phlebotomize, than the physitione is praise worthy, by his perfect knowledge, whether the patiented have need of phlebotomy, or not: 
Why phlebotomye is difficult, & dangerous.  For although, that it seemeth to be a small science, to phlebotomize aright, & very well, yet notwithstanding is it oftentimes, a difficult matter & very dangerous, because the veins, are situated sometimes close to the Arteries, yea also theruppen, as also are the synnues, 
Accidents which are caused, & take their original of their hurting of any vain, synnue, arterye, or tendone.  & the tendones. If so be therefore we chance, with the lancet to hurt a Tendone, thereafter most commonly issueth a Spasmus, or a Gangrene and mortificatione, wherthroughe the patiented pitifully & ruefully, and with great torment endeth his life. If there be then any arterye touched, & opened, she very difficultly will be cured, whereby the patiented bleedeth to death: & when as we descide a vain qvite asunder, both the ends thereof are immediately retracted, and drawn inwards, the one end this way, & the other end that way, so that under the flesh both of the ends are lost, & no blood can possibly issve thereout: if she be then with to great timorousness & fear pricked, the skin only wherewith she is covered is as then inscided, & the vain not opened: or else if she be only pricked with the point of the lancet, the blood as then issveth thereout droppingewyse and the subtlest blood only cometh out, where conseqvently thereafter she exulcerateth.  
Sometimes also lieth the vain occulted so deep in the flesh, that we can not with the lancet find them, without great pains, yea also & although we espy them, yet through there perpusillitye, & rotundity, they avoid, & eschew the point of the lancet, how acute & subtle soever the same be. So that there are oftentimes diverse occasions, wherefore phlebotomye is difficult, which to an other which never hath done it seemeth to be very easy.  
Before the Chirurgeon maketh his apertion in the vain, if so be the patiented be restringed & bound in his belly, & hath in a long time not binne at stool, we must then first of all cause him to use a Clistere, because through the phlebotomye, the veins being evacuated, & emptied, do not attract, & draw unto them out of the guts or entrails, any corrupted, & rotten humours, wherbye any of the worthiest parts might be offend, & hindered.  
Nether is phlebotomye expedient, 
Whereon we ought to consider before phlebotomye.  when as the stomach, is burdened, either with any crudity, of undigested meat, or drink, or with any other viscosity whatsoever, as also it is wholly dissuaded to do after any great evacuation, or any other occasione, whereby the patient might be debilitated, as is superfluous parbrakinge, a great lask, great abstinence, continualle vigilatione, and great conversation with women. When as therefore the Chyrurgiane in the absence of the Physician, hath on all these foresaid things diligently considered, he must as then defer the phlebotomye. And if it so chanced, that any person to prevent any disease desired to be phlebotomized, he must then cause it to be done, when as he is best of courage, as being freed from all care, of sorrow, of ire, and beside all this, we must not phlebotomize any person, which is to timorous, & fearful of phlebotomye, because the afrightednes, & the fear, causeth the blood to withdraw itself towards the internal parts of the body.  

How we should conveniently phlebotomize.  And the patiented as yet being lusty, & strong, we must then cause him to sit in a stool, but if so he be feeble & debile, & is subjecteth unto faintness & sowndinge, as those are, which are of a hot nature, we must in the first let him sup in a soft dressed egg, or a morsel of bread sopped in wine, & then cause him to lie one the bed, half sitting upright, & stuff him under with cushions as if he sat. And above all we must diligently note, that the light of the air, or shining of the candle, do rightly shine one the vain, because that through the shadow therofe, the knowledge of the vain, & of the place where she must be pierced, be not vanished out of your sight: then must the Chyrurgiane, with his right hand, take the right hand of the patiented, or with his left hand, the left hand of the patiented, out of the which he meaneth to draw the blood out depressinge the arm sonwat down wards, and then with his left hand, or with a warmed table naptkinne, rub the inside of the arm where he intendeth to make the apertione: 
Double band in Phlebotomye.  And then bind the arm double a little above the elbow, with a little narrow list of woollen cloth, not to stiff nor to lose, because to loosely bound, or to stiffly tied do both of them hinder the bleeding: then must the patiented, shut his hand close, whereby as well through the binding, as through the closing of the hand, the veins lie fast & steadfastly in the flesh, and not move this way or that way when we should pierce them, wherthroughe also they raise themselves, and swell the more, through the blood, that by this means is drawn thither wards, by the which also we may the easier see, and feel them.   

❧ How we ought conveniently, to make an apertione in the vain. Chap. 2.  
Having dilligentlye considered all these things if the Chyrurgiane, 
Continvance of the manner rightly to phlebotove.  determine to phlebotomise in the right arm, he must then take hold one the foresaid arm with his left hand, by the bending of the arm, or about that place, wherein we purpose tO make the apertione, & lay his thumb one the vain, a little below the place, where we will prick, because that so he may howled the vain stedefaste, without gliding this way or that way because sometimes the vain being, spanned like a little cord, might chance to roll, & glide under the lancet. And because the foresayed vain is oftentimes implete with wind, & ventosityes, she therefore yieldeth, & slideth away under the lancet, wherthroughe we can not fully pierce her, & by this means the apertione falleth to small: all this being in this sort noted, we must with the first finger of the right hand feel where with most convenience we might make the apertione, setting an impression on the skin above the vain where we purpose to prick, with the nail of your finger, & then immediately, take the lancet in the right hand, which between our lips we must have in a readiness, with the which we finely must make our apertione, in the vain, causing the point, and acuitye of the same, gently to enter into the concavitye of the vain, & not abruptly, and rudely, with a hasty thrust. And to make this apertione with more certainty, & without trembling of the hands, the Chyrurgiane must take the lancet in the middle, with his thumb & his first finger, suffering his hand with three of his fingers to rest on the arm, & so lay his thumb and his first finger which hold the lancet one the thumb which holdeth fast the vain, on this sort to hold fast his hand, & with out any tremefactione to use the same. Some there are which anoint the place wherein they intend to phlebotomise, with a little oil, or with fresh butter, therewith somewhat to mollify, & soften the skin, & so with more ease and with less pain, to pierce there through. 
To mollify the skin.  Others anoint the acuitye of their lancet with oil because she might the easier perforate the same, & cause less pain, the perforation, or wound might better contain itself apert & the blood if so be it wear gross, might the subtler, & with more ease have his passage.  
If so be then that the apertion be made with one thrust, it is then good, but if not, we must immediately give an other prick, either a little below the same, or else a little above the same, if the vain sufficiently demonstrateth herself. If therefore the apertion be to small, & the blood issue out of the same to subtilely, so that we fear that we shall not draw sufficient blood enough thereout, then immediately we must thrust into the same hole, or apertione again, & a little dilate the same: because that oftentimes through to small an apertion, the gross blood congealeth before the apertione, and there conseqventlye exulceratethe.  

Why we must give a staff to them in their hand which we Phlebotomize  Having conveniently brought to pass this apertione, we must then give the patiented, in the hand of that arm wherein he is phlebotomized, a round staff, partly thereon to rest his arm, as also to turn round the foresaid staff in his hand, because by this means the blood might the better shoot out: the which if it do not rightly issue out, we must then mark, if the ligature be not the cause thereof, as if it wear to hard tyede, which as then we must a little district and make it loose, without whole loosening of the same.  

Broad, & narrow lancets.  The Chyrurgiane must also have diverse lancets, whereof the one must be a little broader than the other: The broad lancets are very necessary when as the veins lie high exalted, & when we desire to make an ample apertion. The small narrow lancets are very necessary, when as the veins lie profoundly occulted in the flesh, and also when as in the high exalted vain, we desire to make a small apertion: because sometimes the sick person, reqvireth a great, & festivous phlebotomy, to the which end, we must make an ample apertione, as we must also do, if we conjecture the blood to be gross, & dence, & when the patiented is lusty, and strong.  
contrarily, if so be we retract, & draw back the blood, which supernaturally hath issued out of any part of our body, as in those which, spit blood, or those which bleed much out of the nose, as than we must make our apertion small, because that great evacuation of blood is not necessary for them, because through there noses they have avoided sufficient, then only in such accidents, where in is only reqvired a regression of blood. Besides, it is necessary & expedient, that in the foresaid evacuation, and sickness, we suffer the blood to issve long enough out of the apertione of the vain, which the patient should not be able to suffer, if the foresaid apertione wear ample, because there would issue to much blood otherwise thereout.  

In the Phrenesy we ought to make but a small apertione.  We are also in phlebotomye urged to make a small incision, in those, which are troubled with Phrenesye, & in those which are grown mad, because that little wound might with all expedition be cured again, because that such raging▪ & frantic persons will all ways make lose the ligature or dressing before wear thereof ware, whereof they might come in danger of bleeding to death, but the apertione being small, although they loosen the arm, yet notwithstanding they can not violently bleed because in such a small apertione, the blood congealeth, & occludeth, & stoppeth the wound. We ought to make in small veins, a small apertione, & in great veins an ample apertione: for if so be we make in a great vaune a small apertion, them should necessarily follow, that the blood, which coagulateth in the small veins, be a hindrance unto the issuing or running out of the blood.  
touching the form, & figure of the inscisione, it is effected in three sundry sorts, and fashions: whereof the first is made overthwarte, the second according unto the length of the vain, wherthroughe the vain is cleft or split, & not pricked: the third is the mean between them both, which we may well call the contradictory apertione, because contradictorily she is made. 
Three forms of inscisions in phlebotomye.  We make the apertione overthwarte, when as we are not minded to reiterate the phlebotomy: for when we bend the ellbowe, them both the ends of the vain join together again, This figure or form is necessary, when as we desire to make a large apertione. We must make the apertione sydelonge or contradictory, when we purpose to iterate the phlebotomye: and we making the apertione in this manner, very seldom or never miss the vain: and which is more, it is better for the circumstantes, and standers by, when the blood in this manner issueth thereout. That inscisione, which is made according to the length of the vain, is very expedient, when we intend to renew the blood letting, & that not only the same day, but one the next day also, because that when we bend the elbow, both the labia, or lips of the vain, do separate & divide themselves.  
But in what form soever we make the inscisione, 
The vain must be inscided in her middle.  yet notwithstanding the vain must be pierced in the middle, without whole cutting a sunder of the same. Because her lips, might chance to be inverted inwards, and the blood could not result out of the apertione, but run down a long by the arm, or both the ends of the vain, are drawn inwards, without deliverance of any blood from her, or at the least, in the first very little.   

❧ Whereon we ought to mark, after the thrust, & apertione of the vain, and when the blood issueth thereout. Chap. 3.  

Although the vain be well opened, yet she droppeth through the afrightednes of the patiented  WE may know, that the vain most commonly is well opened, as easily we may perceive by the blood, when as in the first, it rousheth and as it wear leapeth out in great haste, but immediately altereth unto droping, which through the afrightinge of the patiented is caused, for which reason the blood is drawn inwards. Which when it chanceth unto us, we must with patience abide, & and unbind it somewhat, and encourage the patiented, causing him to move his fingers, & turn, 
Gross blood doth nothing but drop.  and crush the same in his hand. The apertione in the vain is sometimes ample enough, but because the blood is gross, it can not issue out thereat, to the which end we must put a little oil therine, which to that purpose is very profitable.  
If so be therefore the Chyrurgyane, in absence of the physitione, findeth the patiented very feeble, and yet notwithstanding, following the rule, & ordinance of the physitione, is very necessary to be well phlebotomized, we must them do it providently, that although, at the first we have not drawn so much blood as the sickness or disease reqvireth, we must then, some certain hours thereafter again renew the phlebotomye for the second time, and if it be needful yet once again, for the third time, without over charging of the patiented with to great phlebotomye at one time.  
It might also chance, that before we could detract such a qvantitye of the patiented as was ordained, and reqvired, the patient might chance to be debilitated, and in danger to fall in great faintness, & sowndinge, whereon the Chyrurgiane must diligently consider: as he may easily perceive it, when the patiented waxeth pale, and oppressed at his heart, his pulls diminishing, & when the blood runneth down by his arm. 
What we ought to do when we perceive the fainting to approach the patiented.  Which when it chanceth, the Chirurgeon must then immediately seize the bleeding, laying his thumb, one the apertione of the vain, & lay the patient on his back, with his head one a cushion, sprincklinge could water in his face, and give him a little wine in his mouth, and cause him to smell at some vinegar, and then have a little patience, until that again he reviveth, & come to himself: for as soon as he shallbe come to his former strength again, we may as then finish the phlebotomye.  

The patiented lying fiat on his back can very well suffer phlebotomye.  Some there are which in any sort can not endure phlebotomye, how low soever they sit, although it wear on the bed, or although we continually held vinegar before their nose, or gave them wine to drink, yet notwithstanding they lying prostrate on the bed, with their head reasonable high, they can as then very well suffer and abide the foresaid phlebotomye, although we draw a good qvantitye of blood from them: As of late I myself have known to happen, in an honourable, and courageous gentleman.  
After that we have detracted a reasonable qvantitye of blood out, we must then dissolve and make lose the ligature, and crush out the blood of the vain, lest that the blood chance to congeal therine, and coagulate, and so exulcerate: and if so be there appeerede any little parcel of pingvedity, or fat, we must then gently thrust it in again with the head of a pin, and not cut it of, and then wipe of the blood which cleaveth & is dried or exciccated to the arm, lay a little compress, one the apertion, which is madefyed in could water, and wind the ligature, twice or thrice about the elbow, like a borgondian cross, without tying both the ends fast, before you have caused the patiented to bend his arm, to lay the ligature thereafter. 
The Ligatione of the elbow after phlebotomye.  This ligatione may not be to stiflye bound, because the cicatrice by this means, may qvicklye be sitvatede on the apertione of the vain. The arm being thus fouldede together if so be the patient be able to walk he must wear his arm before on his breast in a scarf & if so be he lie on his bed, he must gently lay the same beside him, with out much moving of the foresaid arm, neither must he lie therone: for there have been some, which in their sleep have had their arms violently to bleed, with great danger of their lives. 
How we may stop & restrain blood  The blood issueth sometimes with such violence out of some parts of our body, that with no compresses or ligatures we can restrain the same: which happening, we are then constrained to lay above one the top of the apertione, the one half of a great bean, and the compress therone, and in this sort bind it together,  
There remaineth sometimes a nigreditye or blackness, 
Danger that happeneth to phlebotomye.  & viriditye or greene's about the apertione, but thereof ensueth no evil, unless any other accident chanced thereunto.  
When as therefore we desire to renew the phlebotomy, 
To renew the phlebotomye.  we must then lay one the inscisione saulted oil, because that hindereth the curing of the wound, and the salt keepeth the blood from coagulation, wherthroughe the apertione of the wound is stopped, And if so be the wound wear so stopped, that the blood would difficultly issue thereout, we must not then rigerously stretch out the arm, which the patiented hath carried on his breast dubbed, neither depress the vain with to great violence, to get the blood thereout: Because such violence might cause great pain, and inflammatione, 
To renew the phlebotomye.  but we must rather with a small privett or searching iron, remove that blood which therein is exciccated & dried, or rather once again make an inscisione, after that we have bound the arm somewhat higher, than the elbow, as before we have said.  

How we ought to open the veins or arteries of the temples of the head.  When as we desire to make an apertione in the veins or arteries of the temples of the head, of the forehead or under the tongue, we must then cause the patiented gently to wring about his neck a table naptkinne, or a towel, thereby to cause the blood to ascend, on high, & the veins to swell, which we intent to open. 
How we ought to open the veins of the hands & feet.  And when as we desire to open the veins of the hands or feet we must bathe them in warm water, because through caliditye & warmethe of the water, the foresaid veins might erect themselves, & the blood, the vain being opened, might the better issue out thereof.   

❧ Of the number of veins, & arteries, which commonly, use to be opened in man's body. Chap. 4.  
THe ancient professors of Chyrurgerye, have observed, certain veins, which in man's body must be opened, according as every diverse disease shall reqvir: whereof the Chyrurgiane must not only know their situatione, & their divisione or separatione, but also the names of the same, because that he do not mistake the one from the other. 
Vain of the forehead.  They which most commonly are opened, are 41. whereof there are in the head 17 e'en: the first whereof is called the vain of the forehead, which is situated in the midst of the forehead, and is opened when as we have any inveterated pain in the occipitialle parts of the head to trouble, & molest us. The second is called Vena Pupis, 
Vena Pupis.  which is situated right in the midst of the occipitialle, or hinder parts of the head: this vain is opened, against the soporiferousnes, & pain of the head, which is situated in the forehead. 
The temporal vain.  The third is called the temporal, or vain of the temples, whereof in each side there is on, which in diverse branches ascendeth in the temples of the head: we open those veins against the superfluous lachrimation of the eyes, against vehement pain in the ears, against the Hemicrania, which only cometh in on side of the head. 
Eeare vain.  The fourth is called the ear vain, one each side one, & have their place, & situatione behind the ears: this vain is opened against surditye, 
Eye vain.  pain, & ulceration of the ears. The fifth is the eye vain, the which in the great corner of the eye, close by the nose, we may perfectly see: she is opened, against all diseases of the eyes, & eyelids. The sixth is, 
Nosevayn  the nosevayne which hath her place in the midst of the end of the nose, between the two grisles or cartilages: she is opened, against the heaviness of the head, & against all rheums, of the eyes, & eyelids. The seventh, 
Lippevayne.  is the lip vain, whereof one each side are, two, in the internal parts of the opermost, and nethermost lip: we open them against all tumours, & excrescenses of flesh, against all ulcerations of the mouth, & against the vehement redness of the face. The eight is called Ranularis vena, 
Ranularis.  which is situated under the tongue, one each side on, we make therein an apertion, against the Sqvinantie, against the incensione of the Almonds, of the palate, & more other diseases of the throat. The ninth is very public, lying in the neck, and is called the jugularis, 
jugularis.  vain, & of the Arabians Gvides, on each side of the neck one. She may very conveniently be opened, against that Sqvinantye, & against all rheums of the throat, which bring us into great angustnes, and trouble.  
In the arms are six, in every arm three which in the fouldinge of the arms are phlebotomized. The first is the head vain, 
Headvayne. Cephalica.  which is situated highest & most outwardly, in the arm, which we open against the pain of the head, eyes, ears, & pain & swelling of the throat. The second is the nethermost in the inside of the arm, & is called Basilica, 
Basilica,  being the foundatione of both the other veins, and is also called Hepatica, or liver vain: 
Hepatica or Liver vain.  We open this vain, against the stopping of the Liver, & against all inflammations of the whole body, & all diseases, which are situated under the head. The third, is the Mediane, 
The Mediane or Mediana.  as well concerning her situatione, as original, because she taketh her beginning out of the Head & Liver veins, as also considering her conditions, because we open her as well for all diseases, which are situated in the upper, as undermost parts of our whole body, and there trouble, and molest us.  
In the hands, we have six, in each hand three. 
Eye vain in the hand,  The first descendeth a longest the Metacarpion of the hand, and passeth betwixt the thumb, & the first finger, we call her also the head vain, or the eye vain. Wherefore she is only opened against pain in the head, & eyes. The second is called Salvatella, 
Salvatella,  or Liver vain, betwixt the little, & third finger, she is phlebotomized, against the yellow gaundise, & in all diseases of the liver, on the right hand, and one the left against all diseases of the milt, wherefore of some in the left hand she is called the miltvayne. 
Black vain,  The third, is also called the Mediane, Black, and Common vain, & descendeth by the finger called Medicus, 
Black vain  or third finger, which vain we may open, when we can find neither of the other two.  
In the belly are two in each side of the belly one, 
Vena Illiaca.  which we call Venam Illiacam, or Titillarem, & demonstratethe herself between the hips, & the flanks. She which is opened in the right side, against the dropsy, and other diseases of the Liver: she which lieth in the left side, against the diseases of the Milt.  
In the fundament, or privityes of a man, are one each side two, the one whereof we call the Hemorrhoidalle vain, 
hemorrhoidal vain.  & is only opened in melanckolye diseases.  
In the legs are eight, in each leg four: whereof the first is called Vena poplitis, 
Vena Poplitis.  situated in the hockes, or fouldinge of the knees, & is opened against all diseases of the nethermost part of the belly. The second Saphena, or mother vain, 
Saphena or Mother vain.  which we open one the inside of the leg under the ankle, in all diseases of the kidneys, & of the womb, & to provoacke in the women there monthly sickness, or mestruousnes, in all running of the reins, and in Venus' botches, or as we call them in latin Bubones. The third is the Schiaticke vain, which externally demonstrateth herself, above the ankle, which is only opened against the disease called Sciatica, 
The vain Sciatica. The kidnye vain  & against all pain, and dolour of the hips, and flanks. The fourth is the median, or kidnyevayne, situated below the foot, and is phlebotomized against all diseases of the kidneys.  
Amongst all the other which are most commonly opened, are those three which in the folding of the arm are phlebotomized: to wit the head vain Basilica & the median. 
Basilica, or liver vain is dangerous to be phlebotomised.  We must dilligentlye consider that when we make an incision therein that under the Basilica or Liver vain lieth an artery or great heart vain: under the Median a synnue or tendone of the muscle Biceps or both of these together, but under the Cephalica is neither synnue artery or tendone sitvated, 
Cephalica or head vain is opened without danger.  wherefore amongst all other veins, there is none which with less peril & danger may be opened.  
If so be that through mischance in opening of the vain Basilica we chanced to hurt the artery which there under is sitvated as I have knoowne to have chanced, we must praesentlye for the stopping and restrayninge of the blood, and to the curing of the arterye, without leaving any Aneurisma, 
Remedy for a wounded arterye.  cleave a bean in two pieces, & lay the one half of the bean, one the apertione of the vain, with a compress therone, gently tied, without visiting of the same in three or four days, or once offer to touch it. If so be in the apertion of the median, we chanced to prick the subter situated synnue, or tendone, we must then immediately phlebotomize the patiented in the other arm: and we must drop in the wound of the pricked synnue, a little hot oil of Terpentin, and a little wool, being dipped therein upon the same, thereby to keep the apertione apart, & then lay a plaster of Diacalcitheos', round about the wounded part of the whole arm, which hath binne liquefacted, with oil of roses, and vinegar.   

Of the Arteriotomia, or apertion of the Arteries, or hartvaynes. Chap, 5.  
COncerning the Arteriotomia, or apertione of the Arteries, the praedicessors & ancient professors wear want to effect it especialle behind the ears, & in the temples of the head, against all continual, & rebellious fluxions, & Rheums of the eyes, in like sort also, against all diseases of the head, which have taken there original, from hot, dampish, or subtle rheums: as yet now a days we do, but not who lie as they wear wont to do, in opening of the same: for so far forth as if the Arterye be small they then cut her clean a sunder, & they also cut a piece thereof away, & both the ends are drawn inwards, where by she as then bleedeth no more.  
And if the Arterye, be great, & violently beateth, it is the surest way, that we tie her under & above and then between both those ligations cut her of, but the threads wherewith we bind her, must be strong & closely tied because that through the continvall beating of the arterye, the threads loosen, & the arterye openeth, if so be it be not stiflye bound: & because that she should not chance to corrupt, before the incision be replete & grown full of flesh: where through the mouth of the foresaid artery is stopped. 
How we use now adays to to open an artery  But now a days we only make a simple incision in the artery in such a manner as we make an apertion in the veins, without cutting of the same clean of & having drawn as much blood thereout as we desire, we them lay a little plaster of mastic on the apertion, & a little compress tied thereon round about the whole head as close as is possible. I know right well that there are some which hold this apertione of the arteries very suspect, because it can hardly be stopped again, and in doing this, there remaineth a cicatrice, in those parts which are situated round about the foresaid arterye, before the same is fully cured, and there through often times an Aneurisma caused, which is very troublesome, 
Aneurisma is a dangerous dissese.  and dangerous for the patiented. But I may with verity affirm it to be true, that oftentimes I have seen opened the arteries of the temples of the head, without any of the foresaid accidents being happened thereunto, the which I council the young Chyrurgiane to do it only in this place, because such an inscisione, is more fit, & less dangerous, than the whole cuttings of, and ligature of the same.   

❧ Of the swelling Aneurisma, and of the means how to bind, and cut of the same. Chap. 6.  

Description of the tumefaction Aneurisma.  THis tumefactione Aneurisma, is caused most commonly, through the dilatation of an arterye, which only we must understand of the small Aneurismata, being impossible, that the arterye, should so dilate, & as it wear unshutt in the great Aneurismata which oftentimes we see: wherefore we will rather say, and hold with the opinion, of the ancient professors, that Aneurisma is then caused, when as the blood, and the vital spirits, are repulsed out of the arteries, through the apertion, or orificia of the same, which we call Anastomosin, or else when as the tunicle of the arterye is burst, it be either through a wound, or by any other occasione: as we may see, when as the Chyrurgiane, purposing to open the vain in the elbow by chance prickethe the arterye which is therunder sitvated & the skin which is thereon lying, cicatrizeth itself and the perforation of the artery, through her continvalle reverberatione, tarrieth uncured, & open & is not stopped, or with any carnal substance replete, as being unprofitable for any use & in no sort can be bound so close as the arterye of the temples of the head, but through the blood & vitalle spirits, which by degrees issue thereout, & are congregated under the skin, & so conseqventlye cause the swelling supposing they very well did know, therein to be matter, or any other slimy substance, or viscosity, for which reason, they have made an apertione therein, whereupon a little time thereafter death hath followed, because of the blood, and of the vital spirits, which in great haste have rushed thereout, without any remedy how to restrain them. Now perfectly to know such a swelling, and to discern it from other tumefactions, 
Signs of this tumefaction.  we must observe, that in this tumefactione there is, a continual reverberation, the foresaid tumour, being of one colour with the skin, how great or small, the inflation be, it is also tender, and soft in the touching of the same, gliding away under the finger when as we depress it, yea and almost through the foresaid depression whole vanisheth out of our sight, considering the blood of the vital spirits, which through the foresaid depression, are crushed in the arterye, wherefore they also, as passing through a little apertion which violence, do make a noise, or sound, which having taken away, and removed the finger immediately shoot again in their foresaid concavitye, as also again in their forth coming, of the foresaid angust apertione, we may hear a certain sound: which commonly chanceth when as this Aneurisma, is caused through an Anastomosis, and not of any wound, because, the Orificium being apert, the vital spirits, as being most subtle, are before the blood driven out, so that the whole tumefaction, is almost replete with vital spirits. But if so be the Arterye be burst, there as then issueth much blood thereout, which bringeth in the tumefaction more blood, than vital spirits, wherefore also it is more obdurate, and harder, and the said blood coagulateth, and therein rotteth, and corrupteth.  
As much as concerneth the curatione of this tumefactione, it consisteth only, 
Curation of Aneurisma.  in the binding of the foresaid arterye, and especially the same being somewhat thick, for they which are great, and especially the arteries of the neck, the arm pits, or of the flanks, may or can in no sort be tied, because it is impossible to find them, & make them bare, and if we also make an inscisione therein there then followeth such a quantity of blood, and of the vital spirits, that most commonly the patiented, dieth under the hands of the Chyrurgiane.  
That artery, which is situated in the bending of the arm may easily be cured, 
Of an arterye which of the Author was tied above the Aneurisma  as out of this subsequent history we may note. My lord of Maintenon, desired me to visit the son, of my lord, of Belleville, which through phlebotomy in the bending of his arm, had gotten a little Aneurisma, which through continuance of time, is grown as great as a fist, wherein, in the end the blood which therein was included, coagulated: so that in the foresaid tumefaction Aneurisma, there came a corrupting and rottenness, which he one the out side of the foresaid skin, of the swelling he espyede, which from the vital and living colour was changed into a black, and purple colour, whereby also there was an apertione caused in the skin: To the remedying, and curing of the which, especially the superfluous effluxion of bloede, which might thereof ensue, & the loss also of the vital spirits, if so be the apertion as yet wear dilated: I as then counseled, the Physicians, and chirurgeons, to prevent farther evells, that we ought to tie, & bind the Arterye, (which was situated, and his place in the bending of the arm) somewhat higher than the Aneurisma, to the which opinion, & propositione, in the end they all consented, & agreed: The which also with happy successione of all causes was brought to pass, in the presence of the worpshipfull master Drovet, Doctor of Physic, at Beauvais, and of the Chyrurgiane dwelling at Avet, which wear come thither to cure him.  

On what sort the Author tied this Arterye.  First of all, I considered, on the arterye, in the uppermost, and inner part of the fore arm, as she from above descendeth under the armpittes, unto the bending of the arm, three fingers breadth therabove, on the which place when I had seen, and fixed mine eyes therone, I made an inscisione, in the skin according to the length therofe, which lay opened right above the Arterye where by tacture we might feel her, which when I had found, and discovered her, I thrust a crooked needle therunder, wherein was a strong thread, where with I tied the foresaeyde Arterye, with a double knot: this being done, I took away, and purified, all the congealed, or coagulated blood, & all other impurity out of the wound or swelling, and have washed the same with Aqvavitae, 
Remedy against the putrefactione.  in the which I mixed a little Aegyptiacum, by this means to cleanse it the better from all putrefactions: and the patiented, is within a month thereafter ensuing, whole cured, and grown sound, with out retaining any lamnes in his arm: wherein I myself have wondered. If so be that in any other external part, there chanced to come any Aneurisma into the chirurgeons hands, he must then know, that always for certainty, he shall find the arterye in her uppermost part, or discover, and bore her, & so bind, and tie her with out any more ceremonies.   

❧ Of the Cirsotomia, that is, of the manner, how we ought to cut of the varices. Chap. 7.  

Discriptione of a Varice.  VArices, or bursten veins, are troublesome, because of their greatness, their extracting, thickness, and their gibbositye above their nature, & property. Wherefore, either because they cause pain, and hinder the actione of that part, or else because they soacke in some certain ulceratione, with some humiditye, (whereby she can not be cured) we are urged to open them, and cut themof, 
Curation of a Varice.  or else with some actual cauterye, to cauterize them, & so consume, and bring them to nought. To which purpose, the ancient professors, 
Council of the ancient professors for the curing of the Varices.  have ordained, that we should cut out, and clean take away, those which lie croockedlye and dubbelye folded, in diverse round revolutions, or else lie entangled the one with the other. But before we proceed to such an operatione, it is necessary, that first of all, we bathe that part with hot water, to cause the gross blood somewhat to separate, and wax or grow subtle, and the veins to swell and exalt themselves.  
But the most gentlelest remedy, is that which daily we use which is the simple apertione, and inscisione of the foresayed Varices, at one, two, or three places, as if we intended to phlebotomize, making the apertion somewhat greater and larger therein because of the gross, melancholic blood, which we desire to let thereout: Through which foresaid apertione, we extract as much blood, as we suppose to be good, and sufficient, or else as much as the patient can abide, one which foresayed apertione, we must lay compresses, which therone we must bind, as we are commonly used to do one the veins, when as we have phlebotomised, prohibiting the patiented, not to stir, or go, which said Varices, if so be they chanced to swell again we must as before a little distance there after make therein an other apertione.  
But if so be we intend wholly to decide, and cut them out, we must first of all, 
How we ought to cut away a bursten vain.  denotate the same with ink, one the skin, which is placed one the Varice or bursten vain, the skin being annotated, we must with two fingers of both the hands, lift up the same, the one this way and the other that way, when we have fast hold therone, than we must make an incision, in the midst of the elevated skin, on the self same place, which before we had denotated with ink, of such a magnitude, and greatness, as is reqvired & necessary: the incision being effected, we must suffer the skin again to descend, through which inscisione, the Varice, or bursten vain which is therunder situated, shallbe discovered, an denudatede of the skin: Wherunder, as than we must thrust, a crooked needle: because thereafter we may with both the ends of the foresaid thread, 
The place where we may cut the varice, or burst ●n vain.  draw the one upwards, and the other downwards. This being effected, we must make an apertione in the varice, according the length, of the same betwixt both the threads, which must be separate & apart the one from the other a thumbcs breadth, through which apertione, we may draw as much blood, as we please: and then draw & bind together very fast the foresaid threads, & then also cut, the foresayed varice, or bursten vain, clean away, which is situated between both the threads, if so be it seem expedient unto you, suffering the threads, by continuance of time, putrefy and rot out of themselves, without with violence to draw them out, because that nature, may have some respite, & time, to close, and replenish the cut, and ligated veins.  

The ancient chirurgeons have cauterized the Varices,  That bursten vain, which runneth right, although she lie overthwarte, if she be simple, & small, we wear better tie her then to cauterize her: But first of all we must purge the patiented, & phlebotomize him either in the arm, or in the varice, or else in both places at once. Our praediscesors & ancient chirurgeons, make mentione of the actual Cauterye, but before they applied the same, they first in scyded the skin, wherewith the varice is cooperted, & covered, in such manner, & form, as we do when we bind the same: the varice therefore being bared, they then imposed thereon, a small stamped Cauterye, which was well glowing, & red hot, which reasonable stiffly they impressed thereon, but yet not so violently that the adustione penetrated any deeper, them through the vain, with out touching the lips, or edges, in cauterizing, of the foresaid inscisione, wherefore they with wet, & madefyed clouts or with some certain plasters, recincted, & defended them. 
Use and practise in these times,  This operatione being after this sort finished they applied therone, some certain remedies, to the qvallifyinge of the pain & dolour, and profitable for the combustion. And because it is incident unto all men, to fear the hot iron, and also the inscisione of the skin, which first of all must be done. Our use therefore now a days is, that we (without making any inscisione in the skin) apply on the self same place of the varice, a great, & strong potential Cauterye, because it should not only combure qvite through the skin, but also through the whole varice, or bursten vain: but we may not in any sort touch the Escara, but gentlelye of herself suffer her to separate, using at this season those remedies, which for that use expressly amongst the cauteryes, we have described. The which I have seen to be used, of Mr. le jeune the king's Chyrurgiane, and of the Duke of Gvyse, which was a very expert man, in all operations of Chyrurgerye.   

❧ Of the Horseleeches of there use, & how we may apply them. Chap. 8.  
THe Horseleeches are little, 
Descriptione of Horseleeches,  and perpucill creatures, like worms, of the longitude of a finger, or thereabout, neither are they of any great crassitude, or thickness, unless, it be when they with sucking of blood are grouwen thick. The end of their head hath a round hole, much like unto a little lamprel, wherein are to be beheld, and seen three stings, or acuityes, proceeding out of three corners, which so violently, & strongly prick, that therewith they can pierce the hides & skins of all creatures whatsoever, & wherone they depend fast hanging, until such time as they have sucked themselves round, and fall of with their one accord. They live, & are engendered in the water, & especially in all stagnes, & standing waters, because they delight, and are solaced, in filthy, and muddy places. I esteem, & suppose, that there is no Chyrurgiane, but very well knoweth them because of all men they are known, but every one doth not know which are the venoumous, or not venoumous, which notwithstanding, is very necessarve to be known, considering the accidents, & mischances, which might thereof ensue, and follow, as in example, great tumours, Inflammations, 
Messalinus died of the biting of a venoumous Herseleech,  & venoumous ulcerations, through their venoumous momorsiones & bitings, yea also & death itself, as the history of him, which of a venoumous one, was bitten in his knee, & died thereof, is witnessinge unto us.  
The vonoumous, are as well known, & discerned by their greatness, as their colour, 
Signs of a venoumous Horseleech,  and also by the place where they are caught. For those which are thick, and have a thicker head than the rest of their whole body, shining, like unto glistninge worms, and are greenish, and which have on their back, blue, or black strokes, or lines, and wear caught in standing pools, where all manner of foetide, & stinking Carrions, with more other filthiness is thrown in, they are all venoumous, wherefore in any sort we must not use them.  
But those, which are small, round, 
Signs of good Horseleeches.  & have a little head, & are of colour much like unto a liver a round belly, & the back stripped, stroked with gouldeyellow strokes, which live in clean running waters, they are not venoumous, we may safely, and with all security use them. And yet notwithstanding, those which are so as is before said, may we as soon, as we have caught them, apply them to the body, but must first of all, keep them two, or three weeks in a glass of fair water, because therein they may avoid the viscosity, & impurenes, refreshing the foresaid water every three days once, washing the said horseleeches, 
What we ought to do before we use the Horseleeches.  with your hands from all their viscosity & slimishnes. Galen counseleth us, that the first day we should give them a little blood, & then, put them in fresh water. We may praeserve, & keep them a whole year, or longer if we please, to use than, when the necessity so reqvireth.  
The use of Horseleeches, was invented in place, 
Use of the Horseleeches.  of scarifying: we apply them most commonly one such places of the body, where we can not set any boxes at all: as in example in the privityes, one the gums, one the lips & sometimes also one raw flesh of any wound, on the nose, above on the hand, & fingers, & when the patiented too much feareth the boxinge, or else when as we desire to draw & extract any venoume, out of a thrust, or bit of any venoumous creature.  
Before therefore we apply them, & because they might be hungry, neither retain any thing in their bodies, & because they should the sooner take hold, we must take than out of the water, & suffer them three or four days before we use them to lie in a nue little wooden box. 
Horseleeches are enemies unto all fatness.  Which being in this sort praepared, to apply one the body, we must first wash that place where we purpose to apply them very clean, & if so be the place, by reason of of any salve or plaster, wear fatty, we must also wash that place & wipe it very clean, because they are enemies unto all pingveditye & fatness: this being effected, we must then take them the one after the other, in their middles with a white clean cloth, (for if so be we touch them with bare fingers, they as then will not bite) & present, or place their heads to that place where we desire to have them suck. If so be the Horseleech will nont at the first bite, & take hold, we must then anoint the said place with pigeon's blood, or hens blood, or cause the place either with the point of a lancet, or with a pin, to bleed, wherethrough immediately she will begin to suck. 
To make a Horseleeah violently to suck.  And so far forth as she sucketh not strong enough, or if so be we desire to have her to suck violently, before she leave, & is not whole full, & satisfied, we must vyith a pair of scissors clip her a sunder, about the third part of her body: where by, she beginneth to suck far stronger & with more violence, and the blood as fast as she sucketh the from her through the hindermost parts which are cut away. 
How we we shall cause them to fall of.  As soon as the one Horseleeche is fallen of, if we please, we may apply an other thereon: for they being replete & satisfied, praesently of themselves, fall of: & if so be we desire to have them fall of, before they be satisfied, we as then straw a little sault, or ashes of wood on their heads & immediately they fall of. There as yet droppeth blood out of the bit when as they are fallen of, which is a sign & token, that they have drawn & sucked the blood from far, which blood, we must not one the sudden restrain, & stop, because that part may the better purge, & purify itself, from all venoumous humours, if so be there be any at hand: wherefore some there be which to that end, apply some small boxes, on the biting of the Horseleech, or else they wash that part with hot water, being saulted, & cause it to bleed somewhat longer, if so be that part require the same, & the patiented be able to suffer the same: If so be the blood run thereout somewhat to long, & will difficultly be restraygned, through any compresses, we must then apply thereon a little adusted, or burned linen, or a split or cloven bean, retaining the same with his finger so long therone, 
How we shall restrain the blood  until such time as she cleaveth fast thereon, whereon thereafter we must lay a small compress, & bind the same therone, if so by any means possible it may be done.   

❧ Of Boxes, and how we may apply them. Chap. 9  
A Box, is an instrument, of Chirurgery, the magnitude where of, must aeqvallye be proportioned, according to the greatness of that part, whereon we purpose, and intend to apply them, & also diverse forms, & figures: 
Difference of Boxes.  for some there are which are short, & thick, others which have a long neck, & below wide, which commonly draw better than any other. Others are of diverse substance, for there are some of Copper, others of Horn, of Tin, and of glass, which we most commonly use, because through the glass we might see, whether they draw much blood or not. There are also some which are made of wood, and some baked of earth: yea for want of Boxes, we may use little wooden dishes, or little earthen pots. touching their form, they must have a wide mouth, and a reasonable broad belly, thick & round edges, because in the applying thereof they should not chance to hurt.  
And if so be they are very great, they must then have a little hole on the one side, which with wax must be occluded, before we apply them that we may give them air, when we will take of the same, some there are, which lay a little stick, cross over in the mouth thereof, on the which they impose a little piece, or inch of a candle, which in the application thereof they incende, and light.  

How we shall apply the boxes.  The manner of applicatione is this. That we first of all, perfricate, and rub the place Wherone we intent to apply them situatinge that part of applicatione, in the right form thereof, because the muscles, may lie in their right situatione, and places, and not be recurved this way, or that way, because the boxes being thereon fastened, might not with the reflection of the part, or joincte, fall thereof, when as the foresayed recurved muscles, should reverte again to there accustomed locationes, and places. This being done, we must impose therone a counter or any other piece of coin, with a little, flock of flexe, or tow incended in the midst of that place, wherone we desire to apply the Boxes, lest that the fire chance to touch the skin, whereon immediately, we must whelve the Boxes, turning the same a little round, because he should the better fasten thereon: the which as then we must cover, with a double warmed clout. Some there are which in the bottom of the Boxes apply and lay a plaster, and therone a little tow, in place of an inch of candle, which in the application, theyt set one fire, with a candle.  

Discriptione of the horn Boxes.  As touchinghe the horns, they are wide above, and narrow below, having a little perforation in their midst, and internally, a little leathern tongue, which is very thin, which stoppeth the foresaid holes. They are applied without fire, & sucked with the mouth. To wit with a little pipe, or with a quill, which we impose in the foresaid perforation, wherewith the foresaid tongue is thrust backwards, which stoppeth the horn, when it hath drawn and sucked sufficient, & drawing the pipe thereout, the foresayed tongue, internally shutteth, & cleaveth itself so close to the hole, as we may see in a kind of ballon, when he is blown up.  
Those which are ignorant of this secret, stop, & occlude the hole with a little wax, which in deed is not so necessary, and needfulle. Those little Boxes which are laid in warm water, are aplyed, after that we have put the flame of the candle, therein and must then with all expeditione be thereon imposed.  

The use of small boxes.  The use of these small Boxes, is three-fold: Namely therewith to withdraw, and repel, the blood, and humours, which are concursed to any place: to draw forth any particular thing which nature can not expel from her: & to draw, out or cause to consume, any occluded ventosityes, in any parts of our body: wherefore we apply them one diverse, & sundry places: they are very good and commodious to be placed behind in the neck, against all rheums which are incident unto the eyes: behind in the midst of the neck are they necessary to be applied, for those which are short of respiration, and troubled with the cough: one both the shoulder blades, against pain, and dolour in the head against Hemicraniam, against ophthalmye, and pain in the teeth: we apply them also in place of phlebotomye one the right hip, against bleeding at the nose: in like sort also close to woman's breasts, when as there menstruositye, too superfluously floweth from them, and when there lie included any ventosityes in the Liver: on the left side, when as there is any wind retained in the milt: on the Navelle against the wind colic: on the Vreteres, to cause the gravel to descend, which is contained, in the kidneys: on the rump, against the ulcerations, and the Hemorrhodes of the fundament: on the hips, against all vesicall diseases, and of the womb, and provocation the monethlye sickness, or menstruositye.  
To conclude, we may apply them, 
The Boxes may be applied one all parts of man's body.  on all parts of man's body, yea also one the self same place where the pain is, which we endevoure to cure, to retract and draw thereout all humours, which are therein secluded, as when we desire to draw any humours outwards, which lie profoundly & deeply occulted, and hidden, or else also, any ventosity, which in the foresaid part lieth enclosed, as on any bit, or prick, of any venoumous creature, lest that the venoume might chance to penetrate and pierce, into some of the worthiest parts: one the Venus botches, or Bubones, one the venoumouse, & Pestilentialle Parotides. But desiring to apply them against any superfluous efluxione of blood, we must then situate them on the contrary side considering the alliance, & community of the veins which is between them, through the which the blood is retracted, & drawn back. It chanceth also sometimes, that we neither apply the Boxes, on the deceased, or dolorous place, neither one the contrary side thereof, but one that part which next, and proximately thereunto is situated: as when we desire to suscitate and provoacke, the retained and kept back mestruosityes, we as then place the Boxes, one the bone Pubis in the flanks, and also one the flatness of the hips.  
The Boxes, or horns, are sometimes applied with scarificationes, and sometimes without: If so be we apply them without scarificationes, they then only draw certain damps unto them: but if there be any bad humours, in those parts, we as then scarify it: And the disease proceeding out of winds, and ventosityes, we then apply them without scarifications, but when we are minded to scarify any part, we first set the Boxes therone, and having again removed, and taken the same of, we them prick, or scarify therein, either with a lancet, or with the point of a razor, whether it be deep, or not deep, according as we suppose, and judge the blood, to be gross, or subtle, but always we must note not to scarify deeper than the skin: touching the number of the foresaid scarifications, if so be we are not intended to draw much blood there out, we may not as then make many scarifications: but if we intent to draw much blood thereout we must then make many scarifications: whereon we must again apply the boxes, so that when we desire to draw much blood thereout, we must apply the foresaid boxes two, or three times thereon, & every time scarify the place, & especially when there is contained in that part any venoumouse ventosity, or gross, and corrupt blood. In delicate, and dainty persons, which are tender of flesh, and have an apart or open skin, in such persons we must scarify but once, notwithstanding must apply the boxes two, or three times after other thereon: which being finished, and having wiped, and dried the part, we must then apply one the scarlficatione, the Cerotum Galeni, or else the unguentum Rosarum.    

THE seventh TREATISE OF THE OPEratione of Chyrurgerye, Containing six Chapters.  

Of the carries, or of the corruption & rotting of bones. Chap. 1.  
Of the fistles of the Privityes or fundament. Chap. 2.  
How we ought to draw forth children out of their mother's body, which of themselves can not be borne. Chap. 3.  
Wherefore the externalle parts or joints of the body, must be extirpated, as Arms and Legs & wheraboutes the same must in the foresaid joinct be done. Chap. 4.  
How we ought to effect, the extirpation, or dissection of any joinct, & restraing the blood after we shall have laid down the patiented. Chap. 5.  
How we ought to extirpate the spoylede, & superflvous fingers, & how we shall separat those fingers which are combined, & grown together. Chap. 6.   

Of the carries, and corruption of the bones. Chap. 1.  

Disctiption of the natural bones The bones are as well subjecteth unto all manner of diseases, as is the flesh.  THe bones, not being spoylede & corrupt, are of nature whit smooth, & solid. They are according to the sayings of ancient Chyrurgianes and our daily experience, subjecteth unto all evil dispositions, which the flesh is subjecteth unto, yea also unto apostemations. Celsus avouchethe, that all bones which have any impediment, are either hurt, corroded, corrupted, burst, broken, crushed, plettered, or out of joincte. We may prejudice the bones to be altered, 
To know the corrupted bones through sight.  or polluted, through our sight feeling, matter, and impurity, which thereout issueth: when we perceive it to be yellow or purple, and at the last black, & as very learned lie, & discreetly the said Author, writeth, first the corrupted bone waxeth fatty then black, 
Through feeling.  or putilaginous, that is corroded: when as in touching with the privet or searching iron, we feel the bone to be rugged, and not plain, and the privet, entereth therein, as if it wear a piece of corrupted, & worm eaten wood, & especially we knowing the same not to have binn bared of his flesh, neither hath binn of the air illuminated: because that sometimes the altered bone, for that it hath a long while lain bare, is grown to be so hard, & thick, that without great pains, we can not fasten thereon with the grating iron, through the matter, which is thin, 
Through the matter.  & subtle, clear, faetide, stinking, & blackish: when as round about the ulceration especially, is regenerated a tender & viscouse flesh where through the ulceration can not, be cicatrized, & although she be cicatrized, thereafter redubleth herforces, & breacketh open again. 
Occasion of the corruption of the bones  Such alteration proceedeth of some concurrent humours, that descend on the bared bones, as appeareth when they are through soackede with any pestiferous humours, or else because they are of their flesh & pellicle, or membrane Periostio, denudatede and bared wherethrough they corrupt & wax dry for want of blood wherewith they should be nourished, or else because they are to full of humiditye, & moisture, through the purulent matter, which continually thereon distilleth, & corrodeth: either because they are to much amnoyncted with oil, & to much fatty salves thereon applied, whereby the ulceration is corrupted, & putrefied: Or because she is polluted, with the matter of the ulceratione, which supernaturally, & from above is descended & thereon distilled.  
Whenas therefore for certainty we know that there is putrefaction, & rottenness in the bone we must then do our devoyr to know how large, & profownd the same is, because thereby we may the surer know, how with most convenience we should remove & abolish the same & cause therein a separatione, because it is necessary that the vivificent part, expelle & drive from it the mortified, or else the mortified also cause mortificatione in the vivificent parts.  

Magnitude of the putrefaction.  Concerning the magnitude thereof, we may discern it through the sight, unless it be operted with any viscoufe or slimy flesh, & we supposing & doubting to be more putrefactione of bones, that is patefiede & evident unto us, through the circumiacent parts of the ulceraration, which as then are purple coloured through the spongiouse flesh, through the elevatione of the edges of the ulceratione & through the diuturnalle continuance of the same in one estate: 
Hypocrates.  For as Hypocrates affirmeth: In the venomous ulcerations, which for the space of a year have continued, or longer, it can not otherwise be, but necessarily in the bone under the flesh of the ulceratione, must needs be a corruption, putrefaction & a corrosion, & some pieces thereof come out, the Cicatrises also will continually be concavouse, & hollow. 
To cure the putrefacted bones.  We therefore certainly knowing this, we must as then dilate the ulceration denudate the bone, & diligently mark how large the foresaid putfaction is: which must be effected with caustic medicamentes, by the which the spongiouse flesh, must be consumede, according as the foresaid ulceration reqvireth. Celsus counseleth us that first we make an inscisione in the skin, to denudate the bone, if so be the putrefaction of the bone, be greater than the ulceratione, discidinge & cutting of all the flesh round about, unto the sound bone: touching the depth of the putrefactione of the bone, we may know it through the privet or searching iron, when as we feel thereon, the which piercing deep or not deep in the same, showeth unto us that the foresaid corruption of bone is great or small. But if w see the bone to be black & dry as it happeneth bereft of blood the privet them will not enter therein, wherefore the depth of such a corruption, can so certainly be known, as through the perforative Trepane, or else through the little ground drawer, wherewith we must perforate the foresaid bone through which perforation of bone, we easily shall perceive, whether the bone be black, white, or red, & whether there issuethe blood out or not if it be so, it is then a sign that the putrefaction, of the bone is not deep. And if so be we perceive, the perforated bone to be black, it is then a token, that the putrefactione is deep, because the corruption of the bone, pierceth so deep, & when we perceive that the bone is white, & red, so far is it then incorrupted.  
To the which carries, or corrupting of bones we must use the actualle Cauterye, or else also the potentialle or the Raspatorium: If so be the corruption of the bone penetrateth not very deep, 
How long we ought to raspe.  we must then grate the foresaid bone with a peculiar Raspatorye, & in raspinge of the same, stiffly crush thereon, that we may qvicklye penetrate through the corruption, & the operatione, wih all festinatione be effected & done. All danger being now passed, & we perceavinge the bone to be white, smooth pure, & solid, it is then sufficient: For it is impossible, that the foresaid corruption of bones may have an end, as long as we do not liberat, & free the same, by one means or other, from all danger, & corruption. When we perceive, in raspinge the bone to give blood from it, it is then a sign that all corruption is thereout, and that the bone is well disposed, because that no corrupt or altered bones will give from them any blood. This being done, we as then use the powder of Aristolochiae of Myrrha of Ireas & of Aloe to liberate the foresaid bone from all corruption & praevente the same to be any more putrefacted and corrupted. If we suppose, that the Raspatorium, be not sufficient enough, to remove the foresaid corruption, as when she is deeply corroded inwards, 
The fire is the surest remedy to repel all corruptions out of the bones.  & when as there is a peculiar corruption imprinted in the bone, the same also being fat, & oily, & if so be the patient wear not timorous of the fire, the afsuredest remedy as then is, that we cauterize the foresaid corruption, with an actual Cauterye, which comforteth that part, and consumeth all venoumouse humours, & with all festinatione causeth the corrupted bones to separate, & causeth little, or no pain at all, because the foresaid bone is insensible, and doth not communicate his unhemence unto the other circumiacent parts.  
When as therefore, 
Mamner how to apply the Cauterye.  we desire to use it according to the depth, & greatness of the corruption, or carries, we must therein use a mean, of applying the foresayed Cauterium on the bone, to wit until through the porosity of the bone there cometh out, a frothy matter, & no longer: for if we held it longer thereon, it should through his great calidity, & through the exsiccatinge virtues thereof, not only consume, the humeditye of the putrefaction of the bone but also the natural humiditye, & moisture through which occasion, the flesh engendereth & increaseth between the sound & the corrupt bones: This doing, nature in a certain time thereafter, will separate the corrupted bone, from the sowndebone, engendringe betweme them both, a tenerouse flesh, which by little & little hardeneth, as if it wear Pomgranate-kernelles, which foresayed flesh, we oftentimes may see, grow clean through the corrupted bone, & that in such sort, as the small tender grass, groweth through the ground, & as then is the suppuration, & matter good & laudable, white, or reddish coloured, and without stink. And we must here also farther note, that the Chirurgeon, may sometimes gently move, the corrupted bone being cauterized, & stir it, because nature there through may be opitulated, unto the separatione of the cauterised bone, and the foresaid bone lying somewhat raised, may be lifted on high, because as then it holdeth fast noewhere, but we may not with any violence take the same thereof, for in so doing, the sound, bone, before completlye it be covered with flesh might chance of the air, to be again infected, and corrupted.  

The Cauterization must be reiterated  Nether is it sufficient, that once we apply the Cauterye thereon, but must diverse & sundry times do the same, neither must it be glowing or red hot, but reasonable hot, removing of the foresaid cautery from one place of the bone to the other, or holding of the same in one place, until the place be throughly warmed.  

What we ought to do in a deep carries.  The corruption, therefore or carries being very deep, we must them trepane or boar it with a perforative Trepane, unto the sound bone, or with the small ground drawer, make diverse holes therein, the one close to the other, of an aeqvall depth also, as the corruption of the bone is, in which trepaned holes, we must as then apply some little hot actual cauteryes because the foresaid bone, there by may be throughly dried: By this operation, the corrupted bone will separate itself from the sound bone, as heretofore we have said. If so be that the whole substance of the bone be corrupted, & corroded, we must then whole remove, & take the same a way. 
A history of Albucasis.  As Albucasis, to this purpose, reciteth a memorable history of on whom at three sundry times he took away almost the whole shin bone, dividing also the operation, in three sundry & aeqvall times, because the patient was not able, to tolerate so great pain, because of his great imbicillitye, & also because Albucasis feared lest that under his hands he should have died, because through certain evacuations, he always fell into great faintness, but in the end was perfectly cured: and in place of bone, there engendered in the place, a hard carnositye, which so miraculously fortified from day to day, that he during some continuance of time thereafter, could again courageously go one that leg.  
When as therefore it is reqvisite, to apply the foresaid actual Cauterye one any certain place, we must diligently consider, how we might liberate, & defend, 
The circumiacent parts of the ulceration must be freed.  the circumiacent parts of the Vlceratione, lest they be touched of the cautery, which we may with most convenience do, with some certain plasters, because neither the fat nor any other ebullient humiditye, which through the calliditye or heat of the cauterye might chance to run thereout, one the self same circumiacent parts, of the ulceration, & that thereby they chanced not to be burned, & seared, which would be the cause of great pain and dolour.  
Now therefore to correct & cure the carries, or corruption of bones, there are diverse Chyrurgianes of our times & age, in place of the actual Cauterye use the potentialle: 
Divers remedies against the carries.  amongst the which the oil of vitriol is in the most chiefest, in like sort also the oil of franckinsence, which of diverse chirurgeons is highly commended, and esteemed.   

Of the Fistel of the Fundament. Chap. 2.  
ANd because we have not here intended generally to write of all fistles, & to discourse of their matter, & conditions, what parts be thereof polluted, of their occasiones, signs, prognosticationes, & of the remedies, of their cures, it seemed expedient unto me, briefly to show, the means, to cure those which reveal, & demonstrate themselves in the Fundament, & that especially through a convenient handling, 
Intention of the Author.  or operatione of Chyrurgerye when as shortly and breeflye I shall have taught, in what sort we may best and easiest know them.  
Those Fistles which are engendered in the fundament, are of diverse & sundry sorts: for some of them are occult, others patefyede, the occulted are so called, because we nowhere externally espy them, and internally in the foresaid fundament, 
The fistles of the fundament, are ether-hidden or apart.  or excremental gut have their apertion, & issue in the muscle Sphincter, whether they be situated upwards or downwards, or anywhere one the side, adioninge unto any of the two buttocks. Which although we can not evidently perceive them, yet may judge, that the foresayed parts, are hurt or hindered, through the pain and through the stinking matter, and humiditye, which issueth out of the foresaid fundament, & through the which commonly, the shirts of the patiented are polluted, & through certain ulcerations also, which before times in that part they have had, or through certain internal hemorrhodes, or through any inveterate wound, which was badly cured. We may also sometimes see them with our eyes, through the Speculum Ani.  

The patefyed Fistles of the sudament.  The patefyed Fistles, are therefore so called, because immediately without any danger we may evidently see them: Of the which there are some which lie crooked, and curved, & although they have but one apertion, which visibly we may see, yet they have diverse ways, branches, or cubicles, like Conyeburrowes, which of their patent Orificium, in the body, run this way and that way, which with the searching iron sometimes we may find, when as we thrust it this way or that way, where we feel it of his own accord to enter, together also, out of the great qvantity of matter, which daily issueth thereout, we may easily judge, that the foresaid Fistle, must needs have more concavityes, then by the external fistulous apertione we can judge, which at sometimes is not great.  
There are also some Fistles, which externally have but one issue, and do not pass through the concavitye of the external, or arsegutt, or through the muscle Sphincter, as easily through the privet or searching we may perceive when we thrusting the same therein, we can not any where perceive it against our fingers, to the which intent we must thrust the same middle finger of the left hand in the fundament, for if it so be that we between our finger, and the privet feel any thing it is then a sign that it doth not pierce through but if we feel it against our finger, it the pierceth through.  
And now as concerning the curation of the same, 
A three fold means to cure the Fistles of the fundament.  we will not here treat of any things belonging unto the medicamentes, but only speak of the Chyrurgerye to the curing of this disease: the which on a threefoulde manner is taught unto us, as well in the curatione of the internalle, as externalle Fistles: to wit, either through ligature, inscisione, or through Cauterye.  
Although Avicenna, with more others are of opinion, that with any of these foresaid remedies we ought in no sort to meddle there with unless, they wear too intolerable, and molestiouse unto the patiented, but that with clean linen, with Cotten, and with decent and convenient lavamentes, we ought to sustain them. But for all this not withstanding, I will here describe unto you, our use and customs of the ancient Chyrugians.  
Now therefore as well to cure the publiqve, and patent Fistles, as the occult and hidden, we must cause the patiented conveniently to lie, namely that the patient must lie one his back, with his legs on high, retaining and holding the foresaid legs, close unto his belly, and this is the manner, and customs of ayncient chirurgeons. But we now a days, cause the patiented to stand on both his legs, with his head, lying on a bed, disjoininge & separating the foresaid legs wide the one from the other, which also of two servants or standers by must so be held, lest that he again might chance to shut them. The patiented being thus situated, towards the light, we shall then thrust the middlemost finger of the left hand into the fundament, having with some certain oil anoyncted your finger, and pared close your nails: and in our right hand we must have a privet or searching iron, in form of a needle, in the which at the on end there of must be a thread, which foresayed needle, or Privet we must thrust into the Orificium of the Fistle until we sensibly feel the same on our finger, and then with our finger recurvate, the end of the foresaid needle, & neatly, & conveniently reduce the same unto the fundament, and then draw the same thereout, diligently observing, that internally we hurt or wound nothing, 
How we must bind a public, or patent Fistle.  and the thread also being passed through the fundament we must then cut of the foresaid needle from the thread, & tie the ends of the foresaid thread both together, drawing the same reasonable fast, and close together, and with a sliding knot bind the same together, because daily we might knit the same closer, and continuing this same so long in this sort, until such time as we shall have cut away all the thread which was remayninghe between, both the Orificia, and both the apertions become to one, and the thread conseqventlye, without any more dissectione of the same, shallbe taken thereout.  
But we perceavinge the Fistle to have no issue in the concavitye the arsegutt, and the needle doth not come out against our finger being in the foresaid arsegutt, and that there as yet is some pellicle, or membrane between them both, the needle having a reasonable sharp acuitye or point, we must thrust the foresayed threaded needle, or Privett, boldly, and audaciouselye therthroughe, into the foresaid concavitye of the Arsegutt, because we might also draw the foresaid thread thereout, as already above we have mentioned.  
We must also here farther note, that this privet, or needle, must either be of gold or silver, because she may the easier internally in the foresaid gut be recurved. We use hereunto a silver plate, which thereunto expressly, we caused to be made, as this same plate, & the foresaid Privett, or needle, before amongst the figures of the instruments, are also defigured, and set down unto us.  
The thread must be of course thread, the same being twisted three or four times double. And because that unto some, the dissectione of this simple thread, falleth somewhat tedious, they annoyncte the same with some caustic medicamentes. Gvido, 
Opinion of Gvido.  effecteth this dissection, with a rescindent actual Cauterye, & to prevent the same that it pierce no deeper, than it ought, he thrusteth in the fiistle a hollow Privett, on the which concavitye, he with the foresaid Cauterye pierceth the skin, and in like sort also cutteth through the fistle, bringeth, & dirimateth away with it the callositye, & praeventeth also the fluxion of blood.  

It is surer to make an incision in the fistle, them to tie it.  Others will not in any sort, have the fistle cauterized, nor bound, & tied, but will only have that same to be inscided with a crooked lancett, which is between both the Orisicia, to wit of the fistle, and the excremental, or arsegutt, & that also which internally is grown callice, they will have it to be crudifyed and made raw, or excoriated, as we are used to do in the haremouthes: yet daily experience teacheth us, that the ligature is more certain, than the inscisione, wherein we need not to take away the callosity, because it oftentimes chanceth, that we endevoringe to remove, and take away this callositye, we decide, and cut of any of the Fibres, of the muscle Spincter, which being wounded, or hurt, the patiented there after can in no sort restrain his stools, or excrements.  
It may seem admiraculouse, & strange unto some, that I write that, the fistle may be cured through the ligature only, without removing the callositye, because it seemeth oppugnant unto reason, because all combination, & healing together, is caused through the joining or touching of weak things together: yet I dare affirm, that all those, which I have seen tied, have been perfectly and sowndlye cured without in any sort to have touched, or removed the callositye.  
Now to come to the operation of the hidden fistles, having situated the patiented as before is said, we must then apply therein, the Speculum Any, opening the fundament therewith, with the least pain we can, as wide as is possible, always annoynctinge the foresaid Speculum with oil, through the which said apertione, the Orisicium, of the ulceratione may appear & be apparent unto us, be-twixt which concavityes or branches, we must thrust in a privet, which must be of a reasonable thickness, or crasitude, like unto a small & little needle wherewith we are wont to make our stitches, which must be blunt, & in the one end must with a thread be threaded, which foresayed needle, or privet, we must thrust unto the bottom, or ground of the fistle, which penetrateth unto the skin, as we easily may feel with our finger, on the which, with the crooked lancet we must make an incision, & the needle being in this sort passed through, & the Speculun Any being taken away, we must then draw out the needle, and cut her from the thread, and tie both the ends thereof together.  
Other say we ought besides the privett, internally to make an inscisione through the whole Fistle, unto the other hole, which is made on the other side: but there is most certainty in the ligatione, to avoid the effluxion of blood, whenas theridamas is sufficient flosh enough between.  
There have been certain ancient chirurgians, which could not agree unto the Speculum Any, but have only thrust there finger into the fundament, to dilate the same, and besides the same a thin and pusille privett, wherewith they have so long felt therewith this way and that way & up, and down, till such time as they have found the Orificium, of the fistle, which is felt as if it wear a thing rend, or torn, and now having found the foresayed Orificium, 
another practice or inventione.  they then close to their finger thrust in the privett, conducinge the same along the finger supernallye, or upwards, or thither where they suppose the bottom, or ground of the fistle to desist, and end: which through feeling of the finger of the other hand we may easily discern: and having found the end thereof, and perceavinge the skin or the flesh not to be very thick, in stead of ligatione, we violently thrust the privett there through, upwards, the privett being passed therthroughe, they then cut open all that which is situated between the two Orificia of the ulceration, or else they thrust a thread there through, and so bind it through.  
Amongst those which are of opinion, that we ought to cure the fistle through an actual Cauterye Albucasis describeth unto us the means, 
Albucasis  willing us to use a Cauterye of iron thereunto, which must be very subtle, and glowing, or redhott, and that it be proportioned according to the greatness of the fistle, thrusting the same twice, or thrice therein, until such time as all the callositye is taken away there from, lauding the fervent, & glowing Cauterye, above the cutting or rescindent Cauterye, because the glowing Cautery, as he sayeth correcteth and amendeth the untemperatnes of that part & there followeth no effluxion of blood the callosity thereof is burned away, & the superfluous humidity is exsiccated, which was concursed, and assembled together unto that pat.   

❧ How we ought to extract, & draw forth little infants out of their mother's body, which of themselves can not be borne. Chap. 3.  

Admonition for the Chyrurgiane.  BEfore we offer to employ our hands, on such on operatione: it seemed expedient unto me to admonish the Chyrurgiane what women may escape this danger, because we should obtain great blame and discredit, unto our selves, if so be the woman being in childebearth, should chance under our hands to die, she supposing, by our help, & council to be released out of this danger, 
The signs where through the Chirurgeon is hindered, to draw forth the child out of his mother's body, whic of itself can not be borne.  Wherhfore those which we suppose to be in danger of death, we must not in any sort lay hands on them▪ because the countenance and cheer of those women which are in labour, or childebearthe and also their face, administereth sufficient knowledge unto us, what event, or success the matter shall have: for those which are in any great danger, of their lives, have a strange & wonderful behaviour over them, to wit that she troubleth, or molesteth herself with nothing, hath a fearful sight, which is clean contrary to her natural being, is debilitated, hath hollow eyes, a sharp nose, a feeble Pulls, which beateth obscurely, and without time: She is wholly convicted, as if she had the soporiferous disease, with out all strength, clean laid along, & although we speak unto her, yet we can not awaken her, & if we do long trouble, & pluck her, she speaketh very feeblelye, & with no strength, and then again lieth, as it wear in a great sleep: the air also flieth out of her throat. Those in the which is any strength left, they fall into Spasmo, or convulsion of synnues. Others after they hay continued a long time in their labours, as are those which have been troubled & molested therewith the space of five, or six months, they are whole decayed, grown lean, & wholly consumed, for want of food, & because also that which she hath eaten, is not changed into any nurture, the whole boodye being through soacked with humidity, & especially the face, whereof her sweat most commonly, is fatty, & axungiouse, and smearye.  
But those which can suffer the manual operatione, & are fit, to have the child drawn out of their body, have none of these fore-rehearsed accidents, wherefore withal festination also they must be opitulated, & helped, on this manner as hereafter followeth notwitstamnding without rashly, or temorously to begin the same, without being certifyede, of the Midwife, what the reason or occasione might be, why the woman can not be delivered, or bring forth her child, 
There are three things which make Child birth difficult.  being certified hereof, as well of the parturinge woman, as of the Midwife, in as much as is possible, dilliggently considering the same, & having well prepended it, thereout to know the just occasione of this heaviness & sorrow, considering, whether it taketh his occasion of the parturient women, or else out of the child, because thereby we might know how to rule, & govern ourselves  
If so be this danger consisteth in the mother, 
The mother.  it happeneth then, either because of her mistrust or small hope, or because she is fearfulle, and fainthearted, having the womb, and the neck or entrance of the same, small & anguste, because she is young & small of body, tender, and delicate: Or else because the entrance of the foresaid Womb, lieth recurved, or is occluded with some tumour, or else there is some Apostematione ulceration, or any Carnositye there in, which oppugn themselves against the birth of the infant: Ether because that the mother, hath a stone in her Bladder, which therein also being oppressed, seeketh by all means possible to come thereout, and being come into the mouth, or entrance of the Bladder, crusheth there the entrance of the Womb, where through she is angust, or else because therein is some cicatrice, where through she is narrower, than she ought to be, where through she can not in any sort stretch forth herself.  
Child birth also in some women is hindered above all these foresaid accidents, because they are to fearful, & are to much affrighted, of the parture, or Childbirth, as yet not being used unto the labouring of child, & do not yet know thereafter to govern themselves, as wear condecent, and needfulle. Others are grown impotent, through any praecedente sicknesses, and having no strength at all to deliver the conception or fruit from them.  
The child also may be occasion hereof, 
The child.  because it is to feeble, and can not help itself, in the deliverance of his mother's labours, and that especially when it is dead, and swollen: in like sort also the same being to gross, and great, either in any part of his body, as having two heads, four arms, being double, or else if there be more, than one, to wit, two, three, or four, whereof the one might present his arm, & an other his leg, or any other part, all at one time.  
Afther the infant praesenteth himself, the childbirth falleth easy, or difficult: because, that following the natural Childbirth, the child always praesenteth first his head, having his arms stretched out alongst both his sides: or when it praesenteth itself with both the legs forward, whereby it may easily be plucked & drawn out: & when it praesenteth him one any other manner, it is as than not natural, but very dangerous, wherein we must use our remedies as hereafter shallbe showed.  

The external occasions.  touching the external occasiones, they are violent heat, wherethrough the strength & forces of our bodies are convicted: contrarily, there is great could, wherethrough, all the conduits are stopped as also are those persons which we fear, or hate.  
The child also as long as it lieth dry, & the water as yet is not broken out, wherthroughe it can have no passage, because the ways & passages are dry, & not slippery, not smooth, as in the water streams we may see, that the stones, through the slipperishenesse of the water, 
The operatione.  are carried away. In like sort also all sorrow, & tribulation, stoppeth & occludeth the entrance of the womb: as contrarily the mean, & reasonable iucunditye, openeth the same.  
All these foresaid occasions, must be compared, unto their contraries, as if so be that through the imbicilitye of the mother it be occasioned, she must than be comforted, giving her a little wine, or Hippocras, comforting, & ioyinge her in her necessity, as much as is possible: & if so far forth as the passage, be to narrow, or anguste, to exsiccate, or dry, or else to much shrunk, we must then, endevore with decoctiones, with warm infusions, & with pingvefactions, to soften, moisten, & make supple the same: If then there be any carnositye, which in terrupteth the passage therofe, we must depose, & detrude the same one the one side: or if there be a stone in the entrance of the bladder, we must thrust the same on high: & if so be the Child otherwise present itself then it should, as first with the head, we must then turn it in the best sort we may: or if it thrust one arm, or leg out, we must not therewith draw it out, but must gentlelye retrude it back again, & again bring it into his place: or if there, be more than one child, we must diligently consider how we ought to take hold therone, noting that we do not take the one by the foot and the other by the foot, & so both at once pluck them, wherefore we must thrust one foot on high, & draw towards him the foot of that which is next, 
How we ought to situate the woman.  & most readiest unto the passage.  
But before we come to the manual operation, we must first of all situate the woman conveniently: & although there be diverse manners of situationes, (for some set them in a stool, others set them leaning, on a table, or one the edge of a bed, with the legs separated the one from the other: others set them one their knees) yet the best & fittest way is one a bed, causing the woman to lie one her back, thwarte over the bed, close to the edge there of, with cushions or pillows under her back, to rest her head thereon, laying her heels close to her buttocks, which must lie also somewhat exalted, and the hips spanned the one from the other, which of two women must so & in that sort be held, lest that she do not chance to draw, & shut them together: the woman lying in this sort, the Chirurgeon as then may the easier obtain his will, and come close unto her, to drive, & detrud the child toward the entrance of the womb.  
The woman being thus settled, or laid, the Chirurgeon must lay one the knees, & one the belly of the woman a clean linen cloth, partly to be an opercle, or covering to the woman, & partly there through to be freed from the external air: them he must gently thrust his hand being annoyncted with fresh butter with Sallatoyle, or with hogs suct, in to the entrance of the womb, first of all considering whether the child be alive, or dead, & how it is therein disposed, or turned, whether also there be more than one, two, or three children a fore hands: & how soever it be situated, 
The child must with his head be drawn out or with the feet if it be possible.  or disposed, either alive, or dead, curved, or crooked, if it be possible we must draw the head first out, but if not, with both the legs, drawing the same aeqvally downwards, & cause, one of the arms, to be stretched out, alongst the side of the head, because there through may be hindered, that the body being thereout the womb do not chance to shut, & the neck of the Child be not therein enclosed, which through the arm which lieth stretched out by his head shallbe prevented & hindered. If so be the one foot praesenteth itself, & the other tarry therein, we must tie the foresaid foot with a ribbon & gently thrust in again the foresaid foot, suffering the end of the ribbon to hang out, and inqvire, & seek after the other foot, thrusting the hand, alongst by the foresaid foot, & leg until such time, as we feel the buttock of the other foot, & then reducing your hand close to the buttok shall immediately find the other foot, which gently you must bring forewardes, & drawing by the ribbon, the other foot, will come forth again, which having them both aeqvally together must gently drawn them out with, the rest of the whole body of the child: by this means we may know whether they be both the legs of one child, on this manner drawing out the same, first the one & then the other.  

Signs of a dead Child in his mother's body.  But if so be the Child be dead, it will not as then stir itself, & in the feeling also thereof it will be could, whenas we thrust the finger in the mouth thereof, it stirreth neither lips, nor tongue to suck: The mother as then hath a stinking breath, hollow eyes, and a swollen belly: we therefore out of all these foresaid tokens, perceavinge the Child to be dead, we must then draw it out as already we have said with the feet forwards: As far forth therefore as if the Child had one arm or one Leg hanging forth of the womb & it wear impossibleto reduce the same again into his former sitvation, because that through the body of the Child, the entrance of the womb is stopped, we must then pluck the foresaid arm or leg & draw it to the joincte of the shoulder, or of the hip: 
How we ought to draw forth a dead Child.  & then decide, & cut of the same in the foresaid ioncte. And if so be the head did first repraesent itself, we must then thrust both our fingers into the mouth thereof in place of a hoocke, towards the roof, and so as gently as is possible draw the same towards you. If so be the belly thereof be swollene, or hath to great a head, and the same full of water, we must then with our finger, a little crush thereon, because the aquosity might soacke thereout, and the swollen parts by this means be diminished and unswollen: & if so be that our hands wear not sufficient to draw out the Child, or to find the belly, to let out the said Aquosity, which either is retained, in the head, in the Breast, or in the belly, we must then gently with our right hand bring therein, a little curved and crooked knife, which within the curvednes thereof is sharp, and cutttinge, the acuitye or pouncte thereof being closely enclosed betwixt his fingers, 
After what fort we may draw forth the aquositye out of a dead Child's body.  which he must hold very close together, wherewith we must make an inscisione either in the Head, in the Breast, or else in the Belly, by this means to draw forth the water which is therein contained: And then we must take, a hook, which on the same fashion as is afore said we must bring therein, whereof we must fasten the point, either in the eyes, or in the mouth, or in the Clavicles, whereon we must then draw as violently as the cause reqvireth to be done, diligently considering that the hook breack not through & let his hold go, & through the violente plucking of the same do not chance to hang & take hold in the Womb, to the which intent we must with as much judgement, & consideration, draw the same as is possible, only with one hand which must be within the Womb. Now if the Child, be so thick, & so gross, 
A monstrous Child.  that wholly to draw it out is impossible for us or else if it be a Monster, or two children fast together, we must as then by parcels draw them out, cutting the Head thereof in pieces, & then pluck out first the the one piece, & then the other, than the Breast the Arms, and the legs, & always making that it be cut in the joints, without breaking any bones: for although they be tender, yet the splinters thereof might chance to hurt the womb, so that it is always the surest way we cut of the Arms, and legs in their joints.  
It chanceth also sometimes, that we drawing forth the Child by the legs, that only the head tarrieth therein which thereafter without great difficulty we can not get it out, them with extreme danger, because the same rolleth up and down in the concavitye of the womb: this therefore being happened, there must as then a servant, or one of the standenrs buy which is experimented in such affairs, sitting one the left side of the woman, crush with both his hands one the belly of the woman, being covered with a warm cloth on this manner to depress downwards the head of the child, and there in that place to contain, and keep the same. 
How we may draw forth the head of the dead child as yet remaining in the womb  And the Chyrurgiane which sitteth on the right side of the woman must with his light hand bring the hoocke therein, as is already said, which he must faften in the head, either in the eyes, in the mouth or in the apertione of the head, & draw the same by little, & little thereout, as if, as yet the whole body remayend therein: If so be the foresaid head wear to great, we must then in like sort also cut the same in pieces, and draw thereout the pieces first the one, & then the other.  
The Child being drawn thereout, we must diligently consider, that we do not break a sunder the navel, because it may serve for a conductor, & leader, which we must always feeling the same, and suffering it to glide through our right hand must follow until we be come to the matrice wherewith the Child was covered in the foresaid womb: & having found the same, we must gently round about separate her where we find her to befastened, & then draw her forth with all the congregrated blood therein, if therebe any, lest that there it might chance to putrefy: having thus finished all this, the woman as then shall join, and shut her hips together again, and must then circumligate the belly, as is required, and necessary.  
In this forerehearsed danger, is oftentimes incident unto the woman a far more lamentable and pitiful accident, to wit, a discendinge, and sinckinge do wnwardes of the womb, which between the hips sinketh out, through the which the woman, can not go. 
The manner to elevate again the sunk & descended Matrice.  If so be therefore this chanced, we must gently, and easily by degrees thrust in again the same, as we have said of the guts, or entrails being sunk out, whereof we must cause the deceased and sick woman to keep her bed some certain continuance of time, with her buttocks a little exalted, and if so be the Matrice in her rising chanced again to sink out, we must then again, thrust in the same.  
And to prevent her that she do not again sink out of the body, we must then thrust in the Matrice a Pessarium, like a round Apple, which must have a hole in the middle therofe, as here before amongst the instruments we may see it defigured unto us where we shall also find, the form, the figure, & the manner of using the same.   

❧ Upon what occasione, the external parts as Arms, and legs are, and must be extirpated, or cut of and in what place it must be done. Chap. 4.  

When, & why the external part, must be saved of.  THe externalle membres of man's body, as are Arms, & legs, are cut, or sawed of, when as they are sqvised, plettered, and broken, the Veins, Arteries, & sinews, wholly be lacerated, & cut of: Or else when they concerning any externalle occasione are hurt, or endamaged, whereby they sometimes wholly come to be mortified, & that suddenly, or else sometimes also by degrees, so that sometimes there ensueth such a Gangraena, or mortification, that not only the flesh, & all the other mollified parts, of the foresaid joincte, do mortify & corrupt, but also the Bones themselves, so that there is no hope at all, of any health, then only through the extirpatione of the same, fearing lest that the foresayed Gangraena, should farther infect & pollute all the circumiacent parts, wherethroughe the patient might suddenly chance to die. Notwithstanding the Chyrurgiane may not in any fort approach unto his extreme, & last remedy, before he have tried all other remedies, to ease & appease this foresaid mortificatione, & to save the joincte: because that such an operatione, 
Extirpatione of any joincte, is effected with great danger.  can not be done, then through extreme danger, as oftentimes the patientes themselves, do die under our hands, because of the great effluxion of blood, or else some great faintness. Others immediately after the extirpatione fall into a Phrensye, in extreme, & intolerable pain, in Spasmo, in a could sweated, whereon praesentlye, followeth death. Wherefore first of all we ought to admonish the friends, & kinsfolk of the patiented, & certify unto them that this operation is full of danger, and is as well lamentable for the Chyrurgiane as for to patiented: and that we ought not thereof the make any great matter of worth, or estimation, seeing there is no other hope, nor any other success to be expected, & that it seemeth more convenient, and necessary, to extirpate the mortified joincte, and so to avoid & fly death, which is more terrible, and fearful, than the loss only of one joincte.  
And before we begin this operatione, & that we must extirpate, the foresaid joincte, it is necessary that first of all we know, the place where it must be done, 
Reason, how to make choice of the place, where we should extirpate the joincte.  because of diverse opinions which are had thereof: for some are of opinion, that in the joincte we ought to do it, because in this place it would fall easier for the Chyrurgiane to execute the same, & is also more tolerable and easier for the patiented, be-because there it may be done with more festinatione, with a simple incision of a well rescindent and cutting knife, if only the Chyrurgiane be agile, and expert, in finding of the joincte.  
Now as touching those which suppose all wounds of the joints, to be more subjecteth, 
Reason for those which extirpate any member in the joincte.  unto deadly, and dolorous accidents, them those which hap to be three fingers above, or under the same, yet for all that they are no less daungerouse, because of the Tendones, and all other sunnuish parts, which as then are also cut of, which are round more thicker there then in the joints themselves: Wherefore we need not to fear, that there will follow more pain, or convulsion, although the extirpatione which is done, three, or four fingers below, or above the same, because the Tendones, and the synnues are as well in the on place as in the other aequallye cut of. And which is more, if we extirpate a member in the joincte, the marrow, of the pipe as then is not denudated, because of the Epiphysis, wherewith it is covered, and contained: But contrarily if we saw through the focille, or pipe, the marrow as then is denudated, for the praeservatione of which Nature with great difficulty, must have a long time, to engender a calum thereunto, and to cover it, because nature must separate that end of the sawed bone: And besides all this, there followeth no superfluous effluxion of blood, as Hypocrates in his boocke of Hemorrhoidibus, witnesseth unto us.  
Although that all these foresaid reasons, 
Reason, for those which extirpate the member above or below the joincte.  are sufficient enough, to persuade the young Chirurgeon, to extirpate the members in their joints and Hypocrates, also commandeth & counseleth the same, yet all PractisionerS of Chyrurgerye, do here in agree, & unite their opinions together, that we ought to extirpate the member, 
Reason, for those, which extirpate the member above or below the joincte.  three, or four fingers under, or above the joincte, according to the dispositione & reqviringe of the mortified joinct: For first of all the opratione is done with such festination & so certain, because of the facility thereof, for we may right well know that the whole infected, & spoylede part, most commonly swelleth, & the finitimate parts also thereunto lying, that without great danger & difficulty, we can not know the joincte or the place thereof in the which we ought very warily to enscide: Farther also the joints are most commonly very difficult, clean to cut them of, or extirpate them, because of the bones, which are placed the one in the other.  
touching therefore the certainty thereof experience teacheth us, that an inconvenience may as well come of the one, as of the other: And such wounds, are no less mortal, than the wounds of the joinctcs. secondly, there much sooner followeth a cicatrice, because of the great qvantitye of flesh, wherewith the bone on all sides is circumcinglede, & covered & which in that place is not of such a crassitude, & spongiousnes, as in the joincte. And although the Cicatrice can not so soon be effected, the patiented nevertheless needs not abstain from going, & that without pain also, laying his knee in a stilte, wherewith he shall as then abide the time of his complete sanatione: The which he in that sort should not be able to do, before that the cicatrice we are whole cured, & obdurated, if so be his leg had been extirpated in the joincte, because the whole body resting thereon, through the confricatione, or rubbing together of the same might chance to breacke open again. 
Experience of the Author.  As touching myself, I have always found that the cicatrice hath ever been very difficult, yea & almost impossible to be cured & effected in the joinct, but immediately thereafter is opened again, how little soever the body rested therone. 
Conclusione.  Wherefore I also am of the same mind, & opinion, with all other common chirurgians that as well considering the festinatione, & facility of the operatione, as also the brevity of the generatione of the cicatrice, that we ought to do our extirpation or sawinge of, of any member, three, or four finger's breadth above, or under the joinct, to wit, of the Leg, if it be under the knee: For although the Gangraena, or mortificatione of the Leg, wear only below in the foresaid Leg, & the middle of the Leg as yet illaef unhurt, & sound, wherefore it is all ways better to make the stump short, then long, because with his length, it is associated with a certain deformity, & might cause great impediment unto the patient, with thrusting of the same, here against this thing, & there against somewhat else. Which in the Arm is contrary because there it is better, that we suffer him ●o keep as long a part thereof, as is possible to be by any means done,  
It is right true, if so be the Gangraena, 
Exception.  or mortificatione of the Leg, do end in the joinct or, close thereunto, & no higher then to the beginning of the hip we must then always rather do the extirpatione in the joincte, then above the same, & especially in the hip: Because the accidents might always be worse, considering the great Veins, Arteries, & Synnues, which by how much the more we pluck, & draw them upwards, so much the greater we find them: 
Nota.  And then the cicatrized part, should be constraynede to rest on the artificial, feigned leg, as if we extirpated the same in the joincte: Be it therefore what place you will choose, we must note, that always we rather take away some of the sound part also, then leave any of the corrupted, or mortified part behind. Because that such a part of mortificatione, might also corrupt, & mortify, the finitimate sound part, so that the patiented, should have suffered all the dawnger, & pain in vain, & for nought, & to continue his life, we should be constrained to make an other extirpatione.   

How we ought to do the extirpatione, or sawing of, of a joincte and how we may stop the blood, after we shall have laid down the Patient. Chap. 5.  
Having noted the place, where we intend to do the extirpatione, we must situate the patiented as it is reqvirede, not only considering the nature, disposition & qvallitye of the part, which we intend to extirpate, 
Situation of the patiented in the extirpation of a joint  but also one the Chyrurgiane his commodity, that the patiented sit not against the day, & ligt of the Chirurgeon, not to high, nor to low, nor on a place where he might slip as it oftentimes hath chanced, the patiented sitting to far in the bed. Some are of mind that we ought to set the patiented on a stool because he may sit the faster, & convenienter: Others effect this operation, the patiented sitting on the edge of a bed, fearing lest he should grow faint, or syncopize, & might then with more ease be gotten into his bed & resting place the extirpatione beingedone.. But my use is, to cause the patiented to ●itt in a reasonable low chair, because all beds are not of one height, neither are so ready, and fit for our purposes neither so well towards the day, whereas we may set the chair wheare we ourselves list: farther the patient is more surer in such a place, & may also better, & with more convenience be held, and better towards the chirurgeons hand, as well to cut through the flesh, as to saw of the bone and restrain the blood: the servantes also shall have more better opportunity to hold the patiented fast & in more safety.  

How we may well & conveniently extirparte a joynct.  Therefore to effect and finish this operatione, the Chyrurgyne must stand between the legs of the patiented, and must cause a servant, or slander buy as much as is possible with both his hands to strip up the skin & the muscles which are situated above the extirpatione, after he shall have caused the patiented to bend the joincte, & that as well for the longatione of the skin, as lengthening of the Veins, and Arteries, which after the extirpation of the joint, the ligature being taken away, will more easier as than demonstrate themselves, & be more easier taken hold of with the Crowesblil, and they tyen or cauterized: Then we must immediately one the place, where we intent to make our extirpation, lay a strong ligature of strong linen, the same being reasonable closely drawn together and that because of diverse occasions: First of all because the joynct may be presented the stedyer and faster to the Operator, and because the flesh should the better bear, and receive the inscione of the crooked, or curved knife: secondly, because the sensibility of the foresaid joynct, in the scissure, might partly be therethrough benumbed, and somewhat mitigated: thirdly, because after the incision, in sowing of the bone, the blood might be so long through the foresaid ligature restraygned, & kept back.  
Farther more, by this means we keep the skin & muscles on high, which after the operation, the ligature being dissolved, & made lose, sink again downwards, and cover the sawed bone, by which means the Cicatrice the sooner groweth therover, and serveth the foresaid bone thereafter, in steed of a Cushone.  

There may not be any flesh one the bone when we intend to saw it of.  All which being finished, we must then with a crooked knife, which is very sharp, cut through the flesh close unto the ligature round about, unto the bare bone, without leaving any thing betweme the bones uncutt, if there be two, scraping of with the back of the knife the membrane Periostium, wherewith the bone is covered, because we do not chance to tear the same, with the teeth of the saw, which would cause an intolerable pain unto the patiented, & also in serratinge, or sawinge might be some hindrance: In like sort also we must remove the flesh as much out of the way as is possible, & then with a well cutting saw, saw of the whole leg as close to the flesh as may be, diligently noting, that with the teeth of the saw we do not in any sort touch the foresaid flesh.  
The leg now being extirpated, 
The joynct being extirpated, we must then make lose the ligature.  we must then dissolve & make lose the ligaments, which wear tied above the wound, & strip downwards the skin, and the muscles, because the bone of all sides may be well coured: which being done, if so be there be but little blood issued thereout, we must not then (especially where there is a Gangraena,) so soon restrain the same, but as yet let it a little more bleed, & that as long, as you suppose it may without any danger to the Patient be done, because that part there through might the better ease herself, and be disburdened, and so much the less be subject unto any inflamationes.  
The blood having indifferently and reasonably issued thereout according to the strength of the Patient, we must as then stop, 
Instruction how we shall koow whether it must be stenched, or let bleed.  and restrain it, which we must do through the imposition of the fingers one the mouths, or apertions of the Veins, which we must either bind or else cauterise the one or the other according as the same shallbe needful, and requisite, it be either through binding, or cauterizing, as the ancient chirurgeons of former times have done, & we have committed it to the memory, of those of our times.  
For as in example, 
Virtves of the actual Cauteryes.  if there be any member corrupted, and mortified, which must be extirpated, after which extirpatione, the fluxion of blood, must be far more stopped, through the applicatione of glowing cauteryes, on the appertion, or mouths of the veins, them through the ligation, or binding of the same, because the glowing cauteryes, make one the foresayed Orificia of the veins an Escara, wherethrough the foresayed Orificia of the veins are occluded and the blood stenched, because it can no more issue out, by which means it draweth unto itself, & also consumeth all the venoumouse evaporations, & damps, and bringeth them to nought, which as yet through the foresaid veins, have binne retained in the supersituated parts, although, it seemeth not that the foresaid part is in any sort corrupted, or putrefied, then only soacked through with some certain venoumousenes, whertroughe sometimes that part hath been prepared as it wear to some mortificatione, or Gangraenatione: that we supposing to take hold one the veins with the Crowesbill, and so to bind them, do most commonly chance to break between the Crowesbill, or else how gentlelye soever we knit the thread together, one that sort to tie them, are through the tying of the thread notwithastndinge cut a sunder: wherthroughe we are in the end constrained to use the actual Cauterye.  

Galenus.  And not without occasione, Galenus testifieth unto us, to be a thing very expedient, & necessary, to stench, and restrain the blood through actualle Cauteryes, which through any corruption, hath corroded through the veins, because they, neither are able to suffer the Crowesbill, thereby to be drawn out, neither the tying, & binding. It is also the most surest way, to cauterize all that, which through the Gangraena is corrupted, or else, that we apply thereon any caustic medicamentes, as we are used to do one the original of all corruptions.  
Wherefore if so so be the Chirurgeon have any suspicion, of any venoumousenes, which after the extirpation, might be drawn inwards towards the finitimate parts thereabout, it is as then the surest remedy, that to the restraygninge, and stenchinge of the blood, he have in praeparatione, and readiness, three, or four fervent, & glowing cauteryes, vyhich he must apply on the Orificia of the descided veins, 
How through cauterisatione we should restrain, & stench blood.  without holding, or depressing the same to hard thereon, because thus doing there may be left behind a good Escara: And if it chanced that the blood through the applicatione of one cautery wear stenched, it is then sufficiently cauterized, neither must we any more cauterize the same Vain, prosecuting of the same, on the other veins.  

Instruction how to restrain blood through ligature.  contrarily, we being constrained to extirpate any member, being very much plettered, and broken, & which through no Gangraena,, or corruption is putrefied, it is as than most convenient, to restrain the blood, through taking hold of the Veins, or Arteries, with the Crowesbill, compraehendinge also some part of flesh therewith, which with a good & strong thread we must bind together, as also the flesh, which with the thread is tied, is an occasione, that the ligature must be the more certainer, and surer.  
And as Galen findeth it good, to stench the blood, through actual cauteryes, whereby is any corruption, or putrefactione, in like sort also he commendeth the ligature in the effluxion of blood, whereby is no corruption, 
Accord to agree, the right worshipful Mr. Gourmelen, & Mr. Pare.  or any venomousness. Which right well may be an agreement betwixt to great personages of our time, where of the on is a Physicione, and the other a Chyrurgiane, because of a certain dispute, which they had, concerning this matter, of the means, which we ought to use, in the restraygninge of blood, as they have agitated most inmicisiously this disputatione the one against the other without the one, understanding the other.  
The blood therefore through the foresaid means being stenched, & restraygned, we must as then strow some restringent powder one that part, and apply therone diverse dry plumaciolles, or flat tents, and therone an ordinary restringent, or defensive plaster, laying round about the stump, a plaster of Refrigerans Galeni, because that the foresayed defensive, should not chance to cleave too fast therone, and so bind the part, as it requireth, and then curing the same as a simple wound, always diligently considering that we do not take away the Escara, which through the foresaid Cauteryes is made, neither the threads also where with the Veins have been tied, if so be at least there be any.  
It happeneth also sometimes, 
Of the dressing after the blood is stopped.  that the Veins after that they have been cut of do draw themselves inwards, so that with the Crowesbill in no sort we can take hold therone: It might also chance, that the tied Vain, might chance to untie, wherethrough the patient is charged with a new effluxion, of blood.  
If so be any of these accidents chanced, and come unto your hands, and it seemed best unto you, to Cauterize the Vain, then to bind her, or else rather to bind, then to Cauterize her, and such a mischance, or accident happened into your hands unexpected, and not being therone provided, without having any Cauteryes in are adines, the right worshipful Mr. Pare counseleth us very fitly to stench the blood. The which if in two or three or four Veins it chanced, or Arteries, at one time then must the servant, of one of the circumstantes, lay the ends of his fingers, one each vain one, gentlelye crushing the same, one the Orificia of the Veins, because as Galen sayeth the Chyrurgiane may have time, to restrain the blood: And then take a needle of a finger's length, or longer, and of a reasonable crassitude, which is very sharp, and rescindent, as here before is defigured unto us, being threaded with a strong thread, wherewith the vain after this sort following must be tied.  
Having first of all considered, where the bleeding Vain is situated, 
How we should do this ligature to stench the blood  you must then thrust your needle therthroughe, beginning on the skin a good finger's breadth higher than the wound, one the side of the Vain, making the same to come contradictorily out of the wound, to wit one the side, & also somewhat lower then the Orificium of the Vain, because the thread may be therunder, there to circumcingle the same, suffering the end of the thread to hang one the skin, without extracting, or whole drawing out of the same: Then you must again, thrust the same needle inter nallye in the wound, one the other side of the vain, because in so doing, the thread, which with both his ends is come forth externally on the skin may take hold on the foresayed vain, with some certain portione of flesh, & so through both the stitches of the needle, & passages of the thread, may stiffly be bound together, through both the ends of the foresaid thread, laying between the threads a little compress of leather, twice, or thrice doubled, as thick as a little finger, because there through the pain might be praeventede, which through the foresayed stiff binding, might be caused, & because the knot, through the continuance of time should not cut through the skin.  

A certain ligature.  When as this ligature is convenietlye done, she as then is very certain, which also may be done in all parts of the body, where there is any fluxion of blood, as in great wounds of the Arms, of the Hips, or of the Throat. Hear before amongst my Instruments of Chirurgery, you shall find them defigurede unto you.   

How we should extirpate, the superfluous, & corrupted fingers, & separate those which are grown, & conjoinede together Chap. 6.  

The hand is an instrument, of instruments.  THe hand, which is an instrument, of instruments, is divided in five fingers: And it sometimes also chanceth, that besides the thumb, or the little finger, there groweth a sixth finger, which is all carnal, or fleshy, or else composed of some small bones: Yet is neither the one nor the other complete, whether ye consider either their figure, or their magnitud, & greatness, as being against the course of nature, wherthroughe they are an impediment to the actiones of the hand. It may also well chance, the one finger of the hand to be pletterede, without being able to keep the same from Gangraenatione. Besides this there cometh in the ends of the fingers, sometimes a certain ulceratione, 
Curation of the Panaris, or Paronichia.  which is called Panaris, or Paronichia: The which cause such vehement pain, through the venoumouse matter, that therthroughe the bone corrupteth, & rotteth, yea & the inflammatione also beginneth most commonly in the bone: The which to remedy, before that the bone be corrupted, we must make an incision in the end of the finger according to the length thereof, beginning at the extreameste end of the joincte, unto the bare bone, because the venoumouse matter, which lieth inclosede between the bone, and the pellicle, which covereth the same, might have some or other issve. The inscisione being done, we must suffer it to bleed as long, till it of itself restraygneth & stoppeth, them thrust the finger in good Aqvavitae, wherein we must before dissolve a little Treackle: And if so be notwithstanding all these remedies the finger as yet corrupted farther, and must be extirpated, we may then very aptly effect the same with our rescindent, or cutting pincers, wherewith, without great pain, we may with, 
How we may remove the superfluous fingers.  one nip clip it of. There are other, which lay the finger on a little block of wood, & as then with a razor hue it of. On this manner also we may extirpate the superfluous finger wherein there is any bone.  
And so far forth as if the fingers, wear from the nativity, and birth, or through combustion, or else through any ulceratione, healed and joined together, we must then with a razor, separate them the one from the other, and according to the length there of cut them asunder, and then with an exsiccating plaster, being separated cure them, and so skin them, by which means every finger will separatlye heal. If so be that there came any ulceration in the finger, after the which there followeth a deformed Cicatrice, wherthroughe the finger, groweth crooked: We must then try thereon some mollifying remedies, to cause the finger therewith to rectify, & grow strait:  
And if so be by no means it will be so, as it sometimes chanceth, when the foresaid Cicatrice is great, and inveterated, & either the sinnues, tendones or skin have been hurt, we must not therefore proceed with the same as a thing which is incurable, for if so be we cut, either the one or the other, the finger thereafter should neither be able to bend, nor stretch out, yet is it necessary that the bending, proceed before the stretching out, and the stretching out, or rectifying of the same, before the recurvatione, so that he should always be right, and very inconvenient, as being better that he be reasonable crooked, then right, because of the inconvenience, which there through we receive: For we supposing to shut, & close the hand, and to fasten on any thing, this finger as then should stand right out: But when it is only the skin which maketh the Cicatrice, through the which the finger is recurved, we must then clean cut of the same for as it being hard, & callice, can not be through the finger erected, and stretched forth. 
Curation of a crooked finger.  Having therefore now rectified this finger, by this means, we as then make a nve Cicatrice therone, & must note that in the generation of the foresaid Cicatrice, the finger do not chance to be again recurved, or shrink up again: 
A fingercase of lattinne, or of silver.  to the praeventing of the which, I know no better means, after he be cured, that there one we wear a finger case, of lattinne, or of silver, one the plaster, & one the combustion. This fingercase must be covered with Taffatye, or with any other decent substance, & conveniently, with a band, fastened above on the hand, which fingercase shall do more commodity, & help, than all the splintes which we might apply thereon.  

The thumb or the finger being wholly lamed.  There happeneth also a disease, clean contrary, unto all other diseases of the fingers, especially in the thumb, having received therone a blow on the Tendones, whereby the same is erected, & again the foresaid Tendones being cut of, can in no sort be again elevated, neither stretched forth, wherthroughe he lieth in the hand immovable, and can not be stirred. The same chanceth also in the hand, having received any wound in the hand one the Tendones, or also above the hand, where through the hand hangeth & falleth downwards, as is she wear paraliticke, and of herself is not able to be lifted up. As touching therefore the thumb, & the fingers: we must either have a thumbcase, or a finger case wherthroughe they must be heaved up: And for the hand, a glove, wherthroughe the hand may be held up. Which in the boocke of Mr. Pare, are described.    

THE EIGHT TREATISE OF THE OPERATIone of Chyrurgerye, wherein is discoursed and handelede of the Cauteryes, and of the Setonne Containing five chapters.  

What a Cauterye is, the Species, and differences thereof. Chap. 1.  
Of the inventione & use of the Cauteryes, & in what diseases, and one what places we may apply them. Chap. 2.  
Of the Potentialle Cauteryes, and how we should make them. Chap. 3.  
On what manner we ought to apply the Potentialle Cauteryes. Chap. 4.  
Of the Seton, & how we ought to apply it. Chap. 5.   

❧ What a Cauterye is, & of the Kinds, & differences thereof. Chap. 1.  
Having with myself resolved & purposed, to write somewhat, of the Cauteryes, it is first expedient and necessary that we know, what a Cauterye is, & how many kinds, and Species therebe thereof: what their use is, on what bodies, on what diseases we ought to apply them, and the manner how we shall apply the same. 
The name of a Cauterye may be under stood in two sorts.  Therefore to understand their nature, we must first know, what we by the name Cauterium understand: For it may be understood one two sorts or ways, Simplely, and not Simplelye: simply, considering the instrument, & the caustic matter, which adureth in any part, as Galen, in his sixth of the simples in his 27 Chap. describeth: Not because of the sign which remaineth in the Cauterised part, that is because of the little Vlceratione, which remaineth, therein, when as the Escara is fallen thereout: So that this word Cauterium, in properly being understood, can no otherwise be understood, than a little Vlceratione, in any external part of the body, which through the art of the Chyrurgiane, is made therein, through some comburent, & adustive medicamentes, to give issve, & passage to some certain matter, of some disease.  
Wherefore the differences, of these Cauteryes, 
The differences of the Cauteryes not properly taken.  or Vlcerationes, are as it wear drawn, from their place, & being, whereon they are applied, & also from their efficient cause. The essence, & being of these Cauteryes, consists in their form, & figure, wherefore some there are which be round, some contradictory, others right, great, small, deep, or not deed: All the which have but one only apertion, or sometimes also two, & is then called a transforatione, or Seton: And also of all other places, whereon they may be possiblelye applied, as on the Head, in the Neck, Arms, Legs, & finally in all parts of the body, wherone they might be applied, when only the agility, or actione of the part can not there through be hindered, or hurt: Of their efficient cause, which is taken out of the diversity of the matter, which is applied one any part of the body, or engendered in the same. The matter which continually is applied on the body, actually combureth, 
Actual Cauterye  or potentially, wherefore they are called actual, or potentialle Cauteryes: That which in our body is engendered, can come through any sharp, corrodent, or biting humours, wherthroughe the skin is corroded, bitten through, & exulcerated, of which ulceratione, may be effected & made a Cautery, or fontanelle, which may be called actual Cauterye.  

Differences of the cauteryes simply taken.  Hear of we may conjecture and suppose, that the Cauteryes, & fontanelles, wear invented, following nature therein, there through to give passage, to that which is contrary, & opposite unto her, & whereof she is perturbated, & molested, it be either in quality, or in qvantitye, as hereafter we will farther speak of. And as touching the Cauteryes, which we call instruments, their principal, & especial difference, is taken, of their substance, form, & figure, & of their tarditye & slowness, or festinatione, of adustion, of their depth, & shallownes, & of the manner of their applicatione: touching their matter, or substance, because they actually, & in deed do combure, & burn, or potenciallye, they are therefore called actual, or potencialle Cauteryes.  

The substance of the actual cauteryes  The form of those which actually burn is almost innumerable, which are made hot, & glowing. The antic & ancient chirurgeons, have commonly made their Cauteryes of mettles, as of gold, of siver, of Iron, & of copper. 
Archigenes.  Archigenes hath cauterised the lachrimall fistles with liquefacted lead, which through a little pipe he dropped therein. They wear of opinion, that the cauteryes of gold caused less pain, 
Substance of the cauteryes which the ancient chirurgeons used.  & wear far more easier to be suffered, that also the Cauterised place, should not avoid so much matter, and the adustion is not so dangerous, because gold amongst all other mettles is the most temperate, wherefore it burneth not so violently, as Iron, because it is not so condensated of substance: wherefore in like sort also the Cauteryes which are made of Copper, do not so closely burn, or cauterize, as those which are made of Iron, because the copper, is not so solid of matter, wherefore we desiring strongelye, & violently to cauterize we must take such cauteryes, which are made of the condensest, 
A kind of spongiouse matter full of dust growing on the mountains wherewith we use to stench blood.  & most firmest matter, & substance. Sometimes have also the ancient professors as Hypocrates,, recited, to have cauterized, with tents, which they dipped in ebullient, & seething oil, or with dry incended puffs as we call them or with the root Aristolochiae, being madefyed in seething oil, or with the roots of Strutium, as Caelius Aurelianus, Dioscorides, and Attilus, which have cauterized with incended Goats dung. Aetius hath cauterised the corrupted gums, 
Aurelianus, Dioscorides. Attilus. Aetius. Albucasis Guido.  with ebullient oil, which he applied thereon with wool being therein madefyed. Albucasis in like sort, hath cauterized the hollow, and concavouse teeth with seething butter. Guido hath cauterised the bones, with liquefacted Brimstone, to wit of the carries. So that out of all these we may sufficiently understand, that we may make as many sorts of cauteryes, as there are substances, which may be incended.  
The foresayed cauteryes, 
Differences of the cauteryes concerning their figures.  & especially those, which are made, & composed of any mettle, are also differing in their figures the one from the other: For every cauterye must be proportioned, according to the disease, and that whereon we will apply the same: so that some are like heads of great nails, & triangled, others round, like unto a button, others cutting, some not dislike unto a half moon, and others circlewyse: As we may behold, and see, the circles of Albucasis, other in form of a rapersblade, as Celsus describeth, there with to cauterize the fissures in the lips.  
They are also differing the one from the other in their depth, or shallownes: for we need sometimes to cauterize the skin only, as Hypocrates willeth us to do, in the pains of the shoulders: We must also sometimes cauterize the flesh, as in the Sciatica: 
Cauteryes to cauterize deeply.  Some times also to the bone, and crush the same reasonable close thereunto as we must do, when as we must cauterize above on the head, we must sometimes cauterize, into the concavity of the body, as when we must cauterize into the breast, to let there out any matter, & sometimes we do but only scourse or sing above one the place.  
And because that amongst the cauteryes, 
Differences of the cauteryes taken out of their actione.  (considering the matter whereof they are composed) there be some which are quickly heated) and some which continue longer hot, than others even so there are some, which considering their ponderousnes, or levity, tarditye, or festination, either in violence, or pain of their operation, are differing the one from the other.  
The Cauteryes are also differing, 
Difference in numbered.  in their numbered, for at sometimes we apply but one, sometimes two, three, four, yea also fifteen at one time, as Aetius commandeth us, to the curing of the ulcerations of the Breast.  
They differ also in their manner of applicatione, for some are applied alone, 
Difference taken out of the manner of the application  others in little pipes, which at one end are apart, and open, or have any appertions, or windows in the sides thereof.   

Of the Invention, and of the use of the Cauteryes, and to what diseases, and one what places, they must be applied. Chap. 2.  
IT may rightwell be said that nature hath showed unto us, 
The invention of the cauteryes is dimonstrated unto us through nature.  the inventione, of the Cauteryes, & fontanelles: For as sometimes the parts being overladen with to many humours either their tartness, or venomousness are troubled, they in the end, discharge, & unburden themselves, in some part of the body, of that which molesteth them, as in one of the Arms, or legs, causing there to their solace, and ease, some excoriatione, or apertione. So that the Physitiones, & Chyrurgianes, to help herein the nature, have there through found out the use of the Cauteryes, & Fontanelles, effecting by their art, that which nature oftentimes, through her own commotion thereunto endevoreth to do, wherefore we also use the Cauteryes, as oftentimes as we desire to make any derivatione, revulsion, interceptione, or evacuation, of any matter, the which either considering her qvantitye, or qvallitye, or with both of them together, might in any sort be occasione of any harm. We also use them, not only when as we desire, to transpire, and cause to evaporate any venoumouse vapours, but also, when we would cause any concurrent matter to exsiccate, & consume, endevoringe to draw the same from withine externally, as well through the extractione, which it here maketh, as through the ulceration, which thereafter remaineth, as through certain little open fistles, or small running issues wherewith we draw the matter from inwards, outwards, there to evacuate the same, and cause to digress from the one place to the other.  
Cauteryes are profitable sayeth Galen, & Hypocrates, in all corrosive, & ambulative ulcerationes, against fluxions of the eyes, in the tumour Aegylops, 
Vtilitye of the cauteryes  when as the fore arm, is sunk and descended under the Armepittes: In the Sciatica, & pain of the hips, for they retract & draw back the humours, which trouble & in that place hinder those parts: In the Gangraena: in the extirpatione of the members, to stench, & stop the blood, & so forth in all fluxions of blood, & in all other internal diseases what soever, as in the Consumptione, in ulcerations of the Breast, 
Albucasis  and in the dropsy. Abucasis avoucheth the Cauteryes generally, to be profitable, in all diseases, and sicknesses, which take their original, of any matter, or without matter. They are also profitable, and commodious, for all bitings, & stingings of any venoumouse creature, in the Carbuncles and Venus' botches, because through their heat, they consume the venomousness of the humours, & annihilate them and out of the depth draw them upwards. They are also very profitable, in all critic Apostemations, which are could, & waterye, and which are very slow in maturatione because that through their caliditye, they opitulate, and help to ripen, the could, & tough humours, which are in that part. They are also good, against all corruption of bones, because they exsiccate the venomousness of the same, and consume it, and cause the corrupted bones to separate from the sound.  
We may apply them on all parts of our body, and especially, being needfulle, to make any apertione, to give issue and passage, to any matter, or vapour, which therine is assembled.  
There are some which have applied the cauteryes one the upper part of the head, 
In what parts the Cauterye must be applied.  about the sagittal suture, where she joineth herself with the Coronalle suture: Which with great and good success I have seen to be done of Mr. Pare, 
Mr. Pare.  against the Hemicraniam, or pain of the one side of the head, and against many other sorts of inveterated pains of the head, because that through such an apeatione, many and diverse humours, & vapours, which are congregated in the head, by this means are exhalated: also against the falling sickness, to give transpiration to some venoumouse humour, & vapour, which are often times the occasion of this disease: Against shortness of breath, and difficulty of breathing, which have taken their original, of the superfluity of humours, and descend out of the head downwards to the breast & there hinder & molest the parts of the breast, and bring with them the shortness of breath, and oftentimes also are cause of ulcerations in the breast through corruption, and putrifyinge of some pituitous humours: & also in the Ophthalmia, or inflammation of the eyes, which is there through caused, through any fluxion, which is sent through the veins, which lie scattered in the Pericranio, & so run to the external tunickle of the Eye: Against reddnes of the face: Against pain in the teeth, of the Eyes, in the Sqvinancie, & in many other diseases, which come in the mouth, and in the throat.  
We Cauterize also the eyelids, which are relaxated, in like sort also the Cilia which stick in the Eyes, and also in those which in number are to many: Alsoe in the Arteries of the temples of the Head: The tumefaction Aegylops, the Polipus, and Ozena, the cleaved lips, the Ranula, the Teeth, and the palate of the mouth when it hangeth to long, & also the Almonds: The Thorax, or Breast, on diverse places, sometimes shallowly, & sometimes to the concavity of the fores. yed Breast: the inferior part of the Belly: the Scrotum, or genitals, & especially the hip against the Sciatica: & the bone, under the knees, on the inside of the leg.  
Some there are which set five cauteryes one the head of those which we suppose to be infected with the lazarye. 
Cauteryes for such as are troubled with the lazary  Whereof we must set the first cautery, one the Conjunction, of the sagitalle suture with the Coronalle: The second above the forehead, where the hair ceaseth: The third in the Neck: The other two the Ossa Petrosa above the ears, somwhate afterward, toward the end of the Lamdoidalle Suture, to avoid the end of the temporal muscle: to wit one, one the right side; & an other, on the left side: All which Cauteryes are applied, to separate those humours, which cause the nose to exulcerate, and the internalle part of the mouth, in those which have the lazarye, and which externally have their face corroded, & deformed, & fearful to behold. These Cauteryes are applied one some, because we should not see that they have been cauteriyed, only behind in the neck, and one both the Arms.   

❧ Of the Potentialle Cauteryes, & how we ought to make them. Chap. 3.  

The potential Cauterye, and the matter thereof  THe potential Cauteryes are those, which through their intolerable, & extreme heat, being with their forces set to work together with the benefits of our natural caliditye, burn as it wear a fire in that part, wherone they are applied, leaving behind them an Escara, or crust: Of the which the matter of the Corrosive is in great number, and hot, unto the fourth degree: Among the which there are some, which are extreme hot, & a little gentler, according as their operatione is tardive. Amongst them are numbered, the Cantharideses, the Tartre, the common Vitriol, or the calcined, the unslissed limbs, the Auripigment, the Arsenicum, the sublimate, the Aqvafortis, the Oil of Vitriolle with more others) the which we nowadays, do seldom use, in such sort as they are, with out praeparinge, or mixing of them, to make any Fontanelles, because that experience, hath taught us some, which are far more convenient, & less dangerous.  

The use of the actual Cauterye.  The actual Cauterye, is much convenienter▪ then the Potential, whether it be we consider on the nature & substance, on the healthfullnes festinatione, and certainty, in operatione: for the fire, is a simple element, having no other forces then by the heat thereof, & exsiccation, without having associated unto it any venomousness, wherefore the operatione thereof is festivous, certain, & healthful, piercing deeper therine when we please, without causing any accidents in the circumiacent parts, although, that therewith we chance to touch them, & that because of the subtleness thereof, and considering the virtues of his substance. It is an enemy unto all corruption, wherefore, it freethe also from all couruptione, & putrefactione, yea it consumeth all venoumouse matter, & qvallityes, which in that part might lie occulted, and hidden, consumeth also all superfluous humidityes, and correcteth also all untemperate could, and moisture.  
Where on the contrary, the matter, 
The use of the potential Cauterye the matter, & virtues thereof, and wherone we ought to consider.  whereof the Potential cauteryes are made, are oftentimes venoumouse: And how soever they be praepared, yet their operatione, & actione, is uncertain, retardate, and slow, and sometimes also dangerous, without simply knowing the vittues' therofe, & how to limit his operatione: Because sometimes it spreadeth itself broader, than our meaning is it should, and causeth more detriment, and harm in corrosion, then willingly we would, it should, because it doth not only combure & burn the place whereone it is applied: But being united, with our natural caliditye, it extendeth, and pierceth also deeper in the flesh than is necessary it should, wherthroughe that part being by little, and little calefyed, and warmed, it imprinteth not only one that place his venoumouse nature, but extendeth itself farther, through the circumiacent veins, & Arteries, & Synnues, in the worthy parts, spoiling, & oftentimes burning, the good, & well disposed complexion of that part, out of the which commonly follow very bad accidents, and ulcerations, which thereafter very difficultly will be cured, yea also some times a Gangraena.  
Notwithstanding although the chirurgeons nowadays, are bold enough in the application of actual Cauteryes, nowithstandinge most commonly they use the potentialle considering the fear, & affrightednes, which the Patientes conceive therofe, so that the actual Cauteryes are almost therthroughe relapsed into oblivione: It is right true, 
Velvet Cauteryes.  that the Potential Cauteryes which now adays we use are indeed of velvet, & very excellent, & where of I never as yet knew any bad accident to follow, through the long use whereof, we have learned the certainty how to make them.  
We must note, that in the Potential Cauteryes, or Ruptoryes, we add nothing, which hath any venoumouse nature or qvallitye: Because they, considering their virtues, are through our natural calliditye compelled to do their operation, which by little, & little suscitateth, the redormitinge, & soporiferous forces thereof, so that it is not possible, but that of necessity, this venoumouse nature, must imprint some parcel of her venomousness in that part, if so be at the least there be any venomousness mixed therewith: wherefore most commonly one this sort we praepare it, that immediately it might show forth his operatione.  
We make now adays Cauteryes in form of Trociskes, of diverse kinds of Ashes, Saultes, 
The matter of the potential Cauteries which now adays are in use.  & limbs. The ashes are made of Oacken wood, of Figgetreewoode, of VineBranches, of Beanestrawe, of Cabbage stalks, and of Titimallo: The saultes are Alcali, Salpeter, Armoniac, Salt of glass, Vitriol, Tartarus, or Pottashes, whereof we, either of any parts of the same make lie, out of the which we extract a Corrosive salt, which may be made strong, debile, or extreme strong, and acute, according with all that which cometh in the foresayed lie.  

Mr. Pare.  Among all Cauteryes which are made that is one of the best, which Mr. Paré, calleth the Cauterye of Velvet, when it is only sodden, & made, as it reqvireth to be done: notwithstanding it seemed convenient unto me, here to describe certain other Cauteryes, whereof I myself have seen diverse good operations. 
receit, of the Velvet Cauterye  Take salt of glass, Potashes, unflist lime, of each a pound, ashes which are burned of the inveterate sides of a wynepipe, two pound: Put all these together in a great earthen pot, & infuse thereon 18, or 20, pound of clear water, and let it so stand soackinge 8. or 10 days, or as long, till one your tongue you feel, the lie to be very sharp, and tart, or until that there may drive an egg thereon, with a stick daily stirring of the same, and then we must let it to clarify, & sink, whereof you must defuse the uppermost thereof, and either straygne it through a thick close clout, or else through a Felt, without stirring of the bottom or feceses thereof, of which aeqvall part, you must make Trociskes, as here after we will demonstrate.  

another Cauterye, of the diseased Monsr. Cheval, Chyrurgiane.  

Of Monsieur Cheval.  Take salt of glass half a pound, Sal gemmae six ounces, Sublimate which is smally perfricated, half an ounce, Ashes of Vinebranches half a pound, 10 pound of common water, let all this stand and soacke, as is above said, and thereof make trociskes, adding in the end thereunto two drams of Opium, which is liqvefacted in Aqvavitae.   

An other of Monsr. Rasse Desneux.  

An other of Rasse desneux.  Take two pound of potashes, Saul●●f glass and Sal alcali, of each half a pownd● 〈◊〉 pound of common water, & hereof make a Lixivye, as is above rehearsed, and also make thereof Trociskes,   

An other of Mr. jaqves de Vile neufve, a great practitioner at Mompeliers, as I have in the same city seen him make.  

An other of jaqves de Villeneufve.  Take Sopemakers lie two pound, Vitriol three ounces, Sublimate one ounce, make hereof Trociskes adding in the end thereunto two drams of Opium.   

An other of Monsr. de jovine.  
We may also make good Lixivye, only of Oacken ashes, or of Ashes of Vinebranches, when as the same is well sodden, with potashes, and of Beanestrawe, adding thereunto a little unslissed lime, whereof we may make very excellent good Cauteryes.   

An other which qvicklye can be made.  
We may in one day make very good Cauteries taking thereto a pound of unslissed lime, half a pound of Potashes, 
An other which with all expedition can be made.  Sal alcali pulverizated very small, four ounces, commone ashes of wood two pound, infuse here in 15 pound of common water, let it stand & soacke three or four hours, & then seethe it a little, if you take it to be convenient, and then let it stand & purify, or sink, and then let is straygne through a Felt, & hereof you may make good Cauteryes.  
although that we have all these foresaid things in a readiness, 
An observatione in seething of the sault to the Cauterye.  thereof to make a lie or lixivye, unless that you ebulliate your salt, very short, & dry, it will as then have no great forces, & will qvicklye be liqvefacted, & again dissolved. Therefore to seethe a right your lie you shall infuse it in a Basin, & let her there seeth, and ebulliat, or evaporate, till such time as she be very thick, like unto honey, mix, & stir it well together, with an iron Spatula, and then the foresaid salt, will sometimes present diverse colours, as blue, & by little & little, will grow thicker, yet not withstanding, we must yet make greater fire therunder, 
Liqvefactinge fire  with violente flames, as if it wear a liqvefactinge fire, because the foresaid salt might be melted and liqvefacted, as Butter, & changed into water, of the which you must take a little on your Spatula, & lay it on a stone, & if so be it immediately wax hard, it is then a sign that it is sufficiently sodden: For if so be as then you keep it longer one the fire it will as then burn, & again be changed into ashes, as being needful that there be some humiditye thereby to keep it in his wont thickness: which being done, you must then remove your Basin from the fire, & with the Spatula, take out the salt, or your Cauterye thereout, whilst as yet it be hot, lest that it cleave therone to hard, whereof yond must then make great or little Trociskes, which immediately you must put, into diverse little glasses viols, lest that through the air they chance to be altered, and changed, and stop the same very close, 
How we must praeserve the cauteryes  & use them whensoever it shall please you.  
And to prevent, that the Escara, of the cauteryes, or ruptoryes, be not to hard, a certain friend of mine for certainty imparted unto me, that in the end of the ebullitione of your lixivye, when she is about the thickness of honey, we infuse thereunto a little Aquavitae, or spanish wine, or else any other strong wine, as Malmasye. And to make them so, that they should not cause any great pain, we must as then add unto it a little Opium, which is liqvefacted in Aquavitae, but I never tried it.    

The manner how we ought to apply these Cauteryes. Chap. 4.  
NOw therefore condecentlye to apply all cauteryes as well actual, 
Whereon we ought to consider in the application of the Cauteryes.  as Potential, without expecting therein any reproach, we must first of all consider, one those, which are able to tolerate them: In what places they may be best set, and applied: & one what manner we may apply them: for commonly, the withered, & lean persons, can not tolerate them, unless it wear one the head, because their bodies, are nothing else then Membranes, Veins, & Synnues, wherethrough sometimes great pain might be caused, or any vain, or Artery might chance to be through corroded, one all which things we must note, when as we must apply any Cauteryes: we must also consider, one the nature of the Patient: 
Divers considerations.  for a strong gross body as a Labourers, or country clown, may far more easier tolerate, & suffer a Cauterye, than a tender delicate body, or of a woman: neither can any obdurate part, as is the skin of the head, so easily be corroded through, as any other soft or tender part, wherefore we must hold the Cauterye longer one the one place, than one the other. A little actual Cautery, or a little parcel of a potential Cautery, will work as forcibly, one a tender, & soft body, as a great cauterye would do, one a strong gross, and obdurate body.  
If so be, it be a replete, & corpulent body, or an unhealthsame body, we must then first of all Phlebotomize, or purge the same, because in the cauterized parts there chance not to come, any concursione of humours. When we desire to apply any Cauteryes, or make any Fontanelles, we must consider that we apply them not one any synnuishe part, neither on the ends, or beginnings, of any muscles, neither any great Vain, Arterye, or Synnue.  

Places whereon we apply the Cauteryes.  We apply them most commonly on the Head, one the Arms, and one the legs, & betwixt all corners of the head, for the curing of diverse diseases, which here before we have recited, the ancient Chyrurgians have made their choice of that place, where the Sagittalle suture, joineth and uniteth herself with the Coronalle, which place is like unto a threfould way of the head: the which please because we should not miss of the same, is showed unto us, of Albucasis: To wit, that we cause the Patient, to put forth the one of his hands, 
How we shall find in the head the place whereon we must apply the Cauterye.  and lay the end thereof, (which is the wriste, or bending of the hand) one the original, & beginning of his Nose, between both his Eyes, and then stretch forth his middlemost, or longest finger, towards the crown, or superior part of his head, & one that place where as the foresaid finger shall have his ending, there we must apply the Cautery, because that there is the place where the nulls suture uniteth herself with the coronal suture: & if so be through the application of this cauterye, we desire to do any utility, & profit, we must then suffer the same to penetrate unto the bone: for by this means the bone being denudated, it will exfoliate, & peel, through the which, the apertione continueth the longer open.  
Wherefore, diverse, after they have applied the potenciall cautery, & the next day following have cut of the Escara, do apply thereon an actual cautery, without any danger, as oftentimes I have seen to be done of Mr. Paré.  
We may apply also cauteryes, of corrosives, in the posterior parts of the Head, in the end of the suture lambdoide, behind under the Ear, therthroughe to avoid the muscle Crotaphite: To the surer finding of the which place therefore, we must cause the patient to open, & shut his mouth, and so to feel the motion of the said muscle. Monsr. Martel chosen, & ordinary Chirurgeon to the king, which was an expert man, he applied cauteryes behind the Ears, in the concavity which is situated behind the little flap of the Ear, called Fibra, 
Cauterye in the Fibra.  and that against all inveterate diseases of the Eyes, whereof he certified me, to have always had ominous and happy success, we also sometimes apply the Cauteryes in the Neck, in the hollowness, or concavousnes thereof, but we must consider that they do not penetrate to deep lest that we chance to adust, or corrode, the eight small musckles, of the Head, which are in this place situated, which might cause dangerous accidents, as I oftentimes have known to chance.  
The most commonest now in use, 
Means how fittlye to apply the Cauterye on the Arme.  is to apply the Cauteryes, one the arms, where most curiously, & with great care we must make electione of the place: the most fittest place is in the midst of the arm, towards the inner side thereof, right betweme the brachialle musckle, & the musckle Biceps close to the side of the head vain. And conveniently to make choice of this place, we must lay the first finger one that place, stiffelye crushing the same, & with the other hand, fold & shut the elbow, & again stretch him out, & also lift up the Arm, because through this motion of the Arm we might perceive, whether there be no synnue or Tendone situated therunder, to wit under your finger, & whether you find in that place no concavity, or interstitium of muscles, which is very fit, for a Pease or little pellet to be therine, to keep open, & apert the foresaid Cauterye: having now with your finger found out the most fittest place we must there apply the Cauterye. 
Means how to apply the cauteryes conveniently on the leg.  And touching the same which we desire to apply one the legs, the most convenientest place there unto is two, or three fingers breadth below the knees, where we are used to tie our garters, whether it be internally, or externally one the leg: But those that are much used to ride on horseback, & also to cause better abscessione of humours, wherethrough the Sciatica is caused, for them it is better to apply them in the external parts of the legs, in like sort also for women.  

Admonitione in the application of the actual Cauteryes.  Having therefore well, & diligently considered on the fittest places, and those which are also the surest, you must then first race away the hair, if at the least there be any. Which being finished, we must then situate the Patient on a convenient place, being held of some other person, if so be it be needful, & then you shall take your Cautery, which must be proportioned, & fashioned according also unto that part which you intend to cauterize, and must be glowing, & red hot, or at the least as hot as is required, because your operatione may at one time be finished, if it by any means be possible, which according as shallbe required, you must imprint the same deep, or shallow in that part, considering, & taking heed, that in no sort you chance to hurt the circumiacent, or finitimate part thereunto, to the praeventing whereof, there are invented, & found out diverse defensions for the foresaid Cautery, as certain pipes, & little cases being composed, and made of Iron, lest that we should chance to combure, the finitimate, & approximate parts, whether it wear through the fault of the patiented, or else through temerousnes, & timorousness of the Chirurgeon, as in other places we more at large have spoken of, & also thereby have placed the discriptione of the foresaid Cauteryes.  

For the reiterated Cauteryes.  Being therefore necessary, oftentimes to reiterate the Cauterye, as in any great Gangraena, or in any Carie of legs, we must then cover, the approximate places thereunto where we intent to Cauterize, with Compresses, being madefyed in Plantine-water, or any other humiditye, yea & also vestite the edges of the ulcerationes, with plasters of Infrigidans Galeni, or else with some linen clouts, being madefyed, and dipped in any distilled Aquosityes, or waters.  
Now being sufficiently Cauterized, we must then by all means indevoure to qualify & ease the pain, and dolour thereof, & to cause the Escara to separate: 
To ease the pain, and Separate the Escara.  which must be effected through any warm, and moist remedies, which is aequallye proportioned with our humiditye, & calidity, because through the humiditye, or moister thereof it may soacke through the Escara, and also the finitimate parts thereof, which are obdurated, & dry, & because through the caliditye thereof, it might suscitate, and draw unto him, the natural caliditye, out of the internal parts of the body into the external parts of the same, & by this means expel that from him which is mortified & combured. Amongst all remedies there is none better, than that which is made of Oil of Eggs, of insulsed, and fresh Butter, & of Venetiane Terebebentine, adding in the end thereunto a little powder of Ireas, Aristolochiae, and a little Beanemeale, wherthroughe also all the purulent matter, which hangeth therone as lime, and an Escara is purified. Some use a Digestive made of yolckes of Eggs, of oil of Roses, & of Terebintine: But that is not so necessary, as the formest, because it doth not so califye, coagulating as the yolcke of an Egg is wont to do, and also immediately waxeth dry, and exsiccated.  
The potential Cauterye, 
How we must apply the potential Cauterye  which maketh an Escara, or scab, being as it wear a Vicarius, of the actvall, is in this manner following applied. We must first of all make a plaster, of Diacalcitheos', or some such like, as great as a large piece of twelve pence, in the midst where of we must cut a little hole, as great as the nail of ones little finger, or a little greater, according to the bigness as we desire to have the apertione: and if you desire to have the apertion somewhat long you must then also make the hole in the plaster somewhat long, & then lay the same on that place which we desire to open: And in the hole of the foresaid plaster, wherthroughe we perceive the skin denudated, lay your potential Cauterye, or Corrosive, whether it be great, or small according as you desire to make the apertion great, or little deep, or shallow: Which being done, we must lay thereon, a small doubled clout, which must be somewhat greater than the Cautery, 
The cauterye maketh a far greater Escara than the hole of the Plaster.  therewith to cover the same, and thereon as yet an other plaster, which must be a little broader than the first, and one this plaster an other compress, which must be of two fingers breadthe and again thereon an other which must be yet greather, and then tying the same with a ligature, according as the part shall then be requiring.  
The Cauterye therefore having done his operation, which most commonly in the space of two hours is finished, if so be the said cauterye be strong, & violent enough, we must as then take it of: and presently to cause the Escara to separate, we must make a crossewise in scisione therein: Other suffer her, of herself to separate, without inscisiove: Some inscide her round, and then lift her up, & so cut her lose from under. But we desiring through the application of a Cauterye, to make an apertion, for the evacuating of any matter, we must not only then inscide the foresaid Escara, but also pierce somewhat deeper therein, until such time as we have sounded the matter, to give her passage.  

Divers means to keep, open a Fontanel, which through a potential cauterye is made.  If so be the Cauterye be applied to make a fontanelle, we must then cause the Escara through the said remedves to separate, and keep open the hole, or the foresaid ulceration, as great as the rotundity of a bullet: to the effectuating of which, some use a great Pease, which through the great humiditye wherewith she is soacked swelleth as thick & as big again, as she was before, by the which means we may keep open the apertione, as long as pleaseth us: others make little pellets of elder pith, of Rhabarber, of Agarico, of the black neesing root, of a Gallenut, of Gentian, & some of gold, or of sylver being hollow, & concavoyse, but the most convenient, & fittest which I have experimented, are made of white wax, amongst the which is mixed, verdegriece, Cantharideses, hermodactilles, & a little auripigment, adding thereunto a little pirosin. This kind of little Balls, wear invented of Mons r. Hubert, Chyrurgiane to the king, one of the most expert chirurgeons of our times.  

What continuance we may keep open the ulceration.  touching the time, of keeping open these Fontanelles: Celsus teacheth us, in his fourth boocke and 22. Chap. that it is oftentimes necessary for the Chyrurgiane, to exulcerate the parts of the body, with a glowing Cautery being, as it wear, an aeternal prohibition, that we should not suffer such ulcerations so quickly to close again, as of themselves they would, but that we must sustain and keep them apert & open, till such time as the disease, which through this apertione we intent to cure, be whole finished, and cured.   

Of the transforation, or seton, and of the manner how we ought to apply it. Chap. 5.  

Seton Properly taken.  THe transforation, or the Seton, may in two sorts be understood, properly, and improperly, we simplely understand it, considering the thread which we draw clean through the skin, with the needle, which thread in ancient time, was made of, course hair, as of horsehayre, or any other such like, which of the latinistes is called Seta: But we now a days make our thread of silcke, of Cotten, 
Seton improperlee understood.  or of Course yarn. Improperly, we understand by the Seton, a logestretchinge ulceration, in any external part of the body, which is clean thrust through the double skin, and that through agility, and dexterity with a glowing Cauterye.  
We apply especially the transforation, 
In what parts we ought to apply the Seton.  or the Seton, in three parts of the body: to wit behind clean through the Neck, although some to follow, the direct concurrence of the fibers, apply the same in the length therofe: In the Naule, and in the Scrotum, when as it is full of matter, & ventosity, as it oftentimes is wont to happen in the dropsy.  
This transforatione, is used, either for any regression of humours, or for an evacuation, 
The use of the Seton.  or expulsion of the same: For we applying the foresaid transforatione behind in the neck, it than revelleth, and draw the back again those humours which concur towards the Eyes with those also which run toward the Mouth, and the Breast, and retaineth also those humours, which descend, and sink, behind in the backbone, and in the Hips: He being drawn through the Naule, or Scrotum, he than draweth there through all the Aquositye, and ventosity which is therein contained.  
It is now adays also applied on two manner of ways, namely with Pincers, 
Two sorts of application of the transforation.  and with an actual Cauterye, or through the Needle only. The transforation which only is laid in the Neck, must be applied betwixt the second & the third Vertebram. Which conveniently to effect, we must cause the patiented to sit on a little stool, and least that the transforatione should compraehend more one the one side then one the other we must denotate a line with Ink in the middle of his neck, or else on the same part where we will apply the tranforation, 
How we ought to apply the transforation behind through the neck.  causing the patiented to hold his head on high, and leene backwards over, because thereby, the skin might be the loser, and stretch the farther commanding than one of the servants, or standers by, that with one of his hands he take hold one the skin, close by the hair, as deep as he can, either according the length, or thwarte over the skin, following the line which therein is made, lifting the same in the middle on high, which then the Chirurgeon, with his left hand shall take hold one in the midst of the same, and elevate it, because that he with his right hand, & with a round, & well cutting threaded needle which must be threaded with a thick thread, may thrust clean through the same, the foresaid thread being in this sort thrust therthroughe we must cut him of close to the Needle. 
The transforation with an actual Cautery.  But if rather you desired, to effect the foresaid transforatione with a hot Iron, the skin being lift up on both sides, through some servant, or through the Chyrurgiane with his Pincers, which he must hold fast in his left hand, diligently considering lest he take hold therewith of any Muscles of the Neck, which are situated under the foresaid skin, as to that purpose, & intent he must cause the Patient to bend his neck, hold his head up, or on high, & right by this means to know, whether any of the foresaid, Muscles are compraehended of the Pincers or not. Which being done the Chyrurgyane must nip, & shut close together the foresaid pincers thereon applied, thereby to benumb & dissipate the senses & feeling which through the hot iron might be caused, & as then with a triangled glowing cautery thrust through the hole of the pincers & so through the elevated skin also: The which foresayed skin being in this sort perforated, & immediately again being drawn thereout, without suffering the skin to fall, we must thrust through the perforation, a needle with a thick double thread which thread must be soacked in the remedies above rehearsed for the Cauteryes, or else at the least being made fat in some Digestive, & then the said thread being dissected, and cut of, we must suffer him to remain therein, as is above rehearsed, & apply therone a Plaster of Refrigerans Galeni, for the first or second day, and then a Plaster of Betonica.  
This foresaid thread, or Seton, we must suffer it to continue therein, as long as it shallbe needful, as we have said of the Fontanelles.  
As concerning the transforation, 
A transforation applied in the Scrotum.  which in the awl, or in the Scrotum may be applied it will be sufficient when we take the Scrotum, & the extremest end of the awl, & so perforate the skin being doubled, with a reasonable great or gross needle, which must be threaded with a woollen, cotton, or silcke thread, and applying therone, the self same remedies, of the which we have in the transforatione of the neck rehearsed.    

THE ninth TREATISE OF THE OPERATIone of Chyrurgerye, wherein is discoursed and handelede of the Ligatures, or windinge, & circumvolutions, & of the convenience or the situation of the parts, Containing six chapters.  

What the Ligamentes, or Circumvolutiones are, their matter, quality, form, and quantity. Chapit. 1.  
The Kinds, and differences of the Ligamentes. Chap. 2.  
Rules, and general instructions, wherone we must consider, in all circumvolutiones, and Ligamentes. Chap. 3.  
How we ought to tie the Ligament, and again make lose the same. Chap. 4.  
How we must ligate, and tie, the broken Arms, Legs, and Hips. Chap. 5.  
Of the placing, and situatione of those parts, one the which the operatione, is set one work. and employed. Chap. 6.   

❧ What the Ligamentes or Circumvolutiones are their matter, quallitye, form, and quantity. Chap. 1.  
Having therefore spoken, & treaated of the combinationes, and sutures, wherethrough all wounds, & divisione, or separation of the whole is inserted & combined together again, and the lips or edges of the foresaid wounds are kept close together & shut, we will now treacte, and handle of the Ligamentes, or bindinge, of the wounded parts wherein we ought to consider, what their matter, their quality, form, quantity, & differences are, 
What Ligamentes are.  how we ought to wind, and again unwind the same.  
The winding therefore, or dressing of a wound is nothing else, than a winding about, or circumvolution, of the Ligatures, which is as much to say, with a broad and long ligament, wherewith not only, the wounded part, butt also the fin itimate, and circumiacent parts, are involved, and circumvestede by this means to restore them to their Former estate, and natural being.  

Matter of the Ligamentes.  Those Ligamentes according to the affirmations of ancient Chyrurgians, are of diverse matter, as of Linen, wool, or Leather: the linen Ligamentes are the most commonest of all the other, which at that time they used, when as they would stiffly compress, & bring close together any part: they used woollen rollers, in the fractures with wounds, gently in that sort to retain together the broken bones, & to cause no pain, or inflammatione at all. Hypocrates used the Ligamentes of leather, 
Hypocrates.  in the fractures of the Nose, & the nethermost chaw bone: But of what matter soever we make them they must not be too much worn out, because that they may be strong enough, to be drawn close together, & stretch stiffly out: Farther more they must be even and smooth, neither must they have any silvages, neither must it have any hard seams, & must be cut aright the thread, according the length of the linen, & not contradictorily: because they may tie smooth and evenly, without the one side being hardre tied then the other, as oftentimes it chanceth, when the rowler is cut contradictorryelye: It is right true, that the ligature wherwithe after Phlebotomye we tie the arm, yieldeth itself better being so cut, but it chanceth herein, because in that place it yieldeth itself better for the bending of the arm.  
Touching their qvallity, they must be clean & white, least that through their impurity they be a hindrance, or interruption unto the part, & because by that means they may the better receive the humidityes, as Oxicrate, & wine, or any such like, wherein we chance to madifye, & wet them. They must also be fine & light because through their ponderousness, they do not overburthen the part, suscitate, & provoke pain, & cause inflammation. Thirdly they must be soft, & flexible because through the obduratnes thereof, they might chance to hurt that part. fourthly, of linen, which must be very white, & not to closely woven because so they are more better to be placed, & the matter, & the evaporationes might the easier therthroughe transpire, which being therein occluded, cause inflammatione, & itching.  

Form & figure of the Ligamentes.  Concerning their form, & figure, we must know, that these foresaede Ligamentes, or rollers, are either rolled up, or involved, simplelye, or dubblelye, unto the midst of the foresaid ligature & of an aeqvalle latitude in all places, as are those which we use in the fractures of the Arms, Hips, & Legs: In like sort also in the wounds, & ulcerations of the same parts. The double ligament or rowler is either of on piece of linen, on the ends being diversely cut, or on an other place, in other ends, as are the ligaments of the Head, which are cut into four, or six ends: And in four ends for the Scrotum: Or in the ligament, which is sowed together, & made of diverse pieces, as are those which are used for the flanks, for the Breasts, for the Testicles, & for the Fundament, & that especially we desiring to spare, & be chairye of the linen. And as much as concerneth their longitude, & latitud that consisteth on the consideratione, & judgement of the Chyrurgiane, which before hand must see the figure, & know it, & must thereby also be able to know, the conformatione, & sitvatione of the part, & the diversity of the disease: for when as we are urgede to make a great circumvolution, we must then consider on the length, & make it as long as is reqvired: considering the breadth, we must make them according to the longitude, & latitude of the disease, 
The Ligament must been broader than the disease.  so that the foresaid ligament must be greater than the disease, because with on circumvolutione do not only involve the wound but also both the ends thereof as well on the one side as the other: for if so be the ligament wear small, he must then crush the disease, wherethrough great pain, and inflammatione might becausede.  
And to speak of the qvantitye of the foresaid ligamentes, 
quantity of the Ligamentes.  that is nothing else then the mean, and measure which we must use and observe either in stiffly or loosely binding, as in respect, of the person. For as the one man is grosser & more corpulent than the other, so there are also diseases, whereof the one is more painful than the other, wherefore we must consider, that the ligament be neither too stiffly nor loosely tied, for all ligatures which are too stiflye bound, cause pain, & concursione of humours, with inflammations, yea & sometimes also a Gangraena: And those ligamentes which are too lose, they are profitable for nothing, & cause that the restauratede parts, which are sitvatede, move thereout, as the broken Legs & the dislocated membres, yea & also the lips of the wounds which are inserted, and brought together through the lose ligature do again separate the one from the other. And finally in one word to conclude, the mediocritye of ligatione, is a great solace, and comfort to the Patient, as he will then with his own mouth testify.  
We must note that all ligatures must not in a wound so fast be ligatede, 
Wherone in Ligatione we ought to consider.  as in a Fracture & less in a Fracture which is without a wound, then in a simple wound: We must also harder, & more violenter bind & ligate on the vulneratede part, & one the fracture, them on any of the approximate, & next adjoining parts, thereby to repel, & drive back again the humours, which do thereon sink and also crush out, those which are sunk into the finitimate parts, which is least shut: for in so doing, we keep those parts occludede, & liberate, & free from all inflammations. Farther more in the end of the ligatione we espy a tender tumefactione, out of which we may judge that the part is reasonably shut: if so be the tumour be hard, & obdurated, & blackish, it is then a sign that the part is too stiflye tied. And whereas at all we perceive any tumefaction, it is a sign that the ligament is too loosely tyede.   

❧ Of the kinds, & differences of the ligamentes. Chap. 2.  

Two sorts of ligaments in general.  HIppocrates gennerally hath made two sorts of Ligaments: where of the first is, that which of itself, & by his virtues did prosper, 
First kind of ligature.  & opitulate the curing of the diseases, and without the which they can not be cured because that with out the same, the part can not be contained in his station, or form, wherein she must be contained, to be cured, & to be prevented that there happen no fluxion unto the part, neither the matter being therein congregated, without the saide ligature could not be driven, & expelled thereout. As we may note on the ligamentes, which in the wounds of the Head we use, which also in all concavouse ulcerations we use, in Fractures, in dislocations, recurvatione of joynctes, in the separating of those parts, which against nature lie the one above the other, in the reduction of the separated parts, in the apertione of the parts, which are to closely occludede, & shut & against the mind of the Chyrurgiane, will combine themselves together.  

The second sort of Ligament.  The second ligament, is that which is ordaynede, not only because of itself it is commodious, & profitable, but Per accidens, & buy chance, & it is but only used, to contain, & keep the remedies, & compresses, on the disseasede part, as on a great, & dolorous inflammatione, on a great Apostematione, or on any other dolorous part.  

Redivision of the first kind of Ligature.  And touching the ligature which of itself is profitable, & commodious, there of there are two kinds, which of the use, where unto they are ordaynede, are taken: which is either to contain the parts as close in their natural being because therthroughe they may be combined & unitede, wherefore this ligatione is called, the agglutinative, or incarnative ligatione: Or else to praevente, the fluxion which might chance to come to that part, & expel the same thereout, which is molestiouse, & troublesome unto him, wherefore he is called the expulsive, or repellinge ligature.  
The incarnative or conglutinating ligation, 
Icarnative Ligament.  is commonly used in this form on the wounds. To wit, that we roll up the rowler, or ligature on both his ends, unto the midst thereof, whereof in each hand we must take the one end being rolled up: laying that part of the ligament which is not rolled up, on the other side of the wound, reducing both the ends of the ligatione, which we have in our hands above on the wound, that there through, we might adjoin, & bring together, the separated parts, & lips of the wound, crossing the foresaid ligature, in form of a Burgundiane cross, or in form as in the margin is set down unto you: Then we must reduce both the ends to the part, bringing one end, towards the superior part of the member, because thereby the fluxion may be prevented, & the other end, on the inferior part, that the blood therethrough, which is sunk, and descended into that part, might be depressed, and crushed out: and the foresaid Ligature must be of such a breadth, that when as he is rolled up, & applied on the wounded part, may not only compraehende the wound but also both the ends, of the same.  
If so be the wound wear ample, & great, and the ligature, considering his latitude, 
Nota.  could not be accommodated, we must as then compraehende but the one half of the wound, & the other half thereafter.  
Such a Ligament therefore must be reasonable closely wound, but always a little stiffer one the wounded part, 
Hypocrates.  as Hypocrates willeth us to do, yea also, in the wounds with Fracture, because there through might be expressed, and crushed out, the blood, which in that part is sunk, lest that there should happen any inflammatione thereunto, & then an Apostematione.  
The expulsive, or repellinge ligament, 
Expulsive Ligament.  is very much used in Fistles, & in concavouse ulcerations, therewith to expel the matter, which is descending to the ground or bottom of the same, & which through the long retention, internally corrodeth that part. 
Admonitione.  This ligature is also very commoeiouse in the Varices or bursten veins, & in tumefacted Legs, but we may not use it in Fistles, nor in any concavouse ulcerationes, unless first of all they be putrifyede, & their callositye taken thereout, neither in inflammationes:  
This ligament is imposed, 
How we may make the expulsive ligament.  with the one end being revolved, & rolled up, beginning with the sound part, which is sitvated close to the bottom of the Sinus, where he must be somewhat more drawn together, & shut, & then is reduced again toward the wounded part, & toward the mouth, or apertion of the concavitye, with out binding the same to stiff, & consideratione, of the inferior part.  
As if the Sinus be in the leg, & the bottom of the same under the Knees, & is also higher, & hath his issue in the crassitude of the calf, we must them begin to bind, one the Knees, & finish in the inferiore parts thereof. contrarily if so be the inferior part of the Leg, & the issue thereof be by the Knees, we must then begin the ligation by the foot, & end the same close to the Knees. But if we desire to use this Ligature in great Arms, and great Legs, which are Varicouse, we must then begin from below the leg, or Arm, upwards, which is the most farthest, from the original of the Veins and supernallye end the same, to wit, about the Heart, & the Liver, which are the originals of all Veins, & Arteries, hereby to repel the humours which are in that part, & to prevent that there concur no more unto that place.  
As far forth therefore, as if that part be rugged, and unsmoothe, as is that Leg, which is far more thicker in the Calf thereof, then in the lowermost parts thereof, we must then from palm, to Palmebreadthe, a little more than half through cut the same, and fowlde both sides contradictorily the one to the other, & so looslye sow the same, by which means the said Ligament, is made to be recurvated, and croockedlye wound, like a Bow. Having therefore stiffly rolled op this foresaid ligature, or rowler, 
An attractive Ligature.  we may therewith as smoothly wound & involve a Leg, without making, therein any inaeqvalitye, or furrows causing that side which was cut of, & then again sowed, aeqvallye to agree with the thinnest part: & the whole part which is the longest, to agree with the greatest part. Above these two foresaid Kinds, & differences of Ligamentes, we may as yet add thereunto a third Kind: The which we call an attractive Ligament, which we may use when we desire to retract, any blood, nourishment, or any other vital Spirits into that part, the which, the part of itself can not draw, & attract unto it, because her attractive forces are debilitated, & very much feebled.  

The second kind of Ligament above rehearsed.  We will somewhat also speak of that ligament, which of itself is for no use profitable but accidentallye cureth, through his continuance of the remedies, which are applied unto the disease, wherefore we may call it the retentive Ligament: wherein we must consider three especial things. First in what diseases it is commodious: Secondly on how many fashones, it may be composed, & made: Thirdly, 
Ligament for the disease.  & lastly, how we ought to use the same.  
touching the first, we either use the same, considering the part, or the Disease, which can tolerate no other: Considering the Disease, as any wound, or ulceratione, accompanied & associated, with any great pain, or inflammatione, or when we desire an Apostematione to be matured: Considering the part, as when a wound is in the Head, in the Neck, in the Belly, or in the Testicles, which parts can not indur to be stiffly tied, or bound, & therefore need no ligatione, but only to retain the remedies therone, because that the other stiff ligatures, bring with them great discommodity.  
Concerning the second point: 
Ligament for the part.  The retentive Ligament, must have two, three, or four ends, according to the form, & situatione of the part which we would dress. Touching the third point, that must be begun in the disease, & ended on the other side of the same.   

❧ Of the Rules, & general Instructions, whereon we must consider, in all Rolls, & Ligatures Chap. 3.  
Therefore conveniently, 
Two things to be considered, when as decently we desire to wind any part.  & decently to wind, or involve any part, or member, we must note, & consider on two especial things, whereof the first is, the wounded part, which we will wind: the second is the aegritude, or disease. Touching therefore the deceased part, we take this for a general Rule, that she must be tied, & that in such a form, & figure, as we will have her to continued, & lie: For if so be we wind a folded, & curvated part, which thereafter must be situated right, and extented, there will as then conseqventlye ensue such or the like Accidents: to wit, that the Ligature will dissolve, & loosen, that their will be caused great pain, & dolour in the part, because the Muscles, Veins, Arteries & Synnues, & the very bones also have an other situatione, being erected, & extended, then when as they are recurved, and crooked.  
As in example: If so be a broken Leg, 
Example.  being recurved, & so on that manner be circumligated, & wound which ought otherwise to be tied, being stretched & extended right forth, without doubt all the Ligature will go lose, when as we desire to extend the same, out of the which will follow great pain, because the brocken Bones, Veins, Arteries, Synnues, & Muscles, do not as then keep the same place, as they have done, the part being bound, & tied.  
contrarily, we desiring to dress a fracture in an Arm, he must then be shut, & folded together, for if so be we dress him being extended, when as thereafter he shallbe recurved & bended, than the Bones in therre lying, with the other parts, be turned into some other fashone, wherthroughe the Ligature, will in one place be loosened, & in another spamned, which also suscitateth pain in that part: For it must necessarily follow, that when as a tied part be changed, and then either shut & bended, or extended, them there are some of the Muscles extended, & crushed, as in the rotundity, in the abbreviation, & others weackened, & united: And when they are exrected, they must needs then be crushed through the Ligature, out of the which must necessarily follow intolerable pain, because of the Compress, which in ferreth with it in that part great fluxiones, & other accidents, & mischances.  

The disease.  Now for as much as concerneth the disease, we must circumligate, & involve an Arm or a broken Leg with a wound, on an other manner, and fashion, than a Fracture with out wound: & on an other fashion a Leg, which hath but a simple Vlceratione, than a Leg, which hath a concavouse, or Fistulouse ulceratione: And a joint which is full of pain, must one an other manner be tied, then that wherein is no pain.  

Decentlye to wind.  Therefore conveniently, & decently to ligate or wind, the Ligature must be right, & closely rolled up, because we may hold him the faster, & stedyer in the hand, without stirring, or gliding this way or that way, as he might chance to do the same not being stiffly rolled up, because that through his hardness he may the better be handled, & conduced, so that all ligationes, far convenienter, & more decent & to more contentment of the Patient, and the circumstantes, or standers by may be effected, than other wise, when as the Ligature is laid double, crooked, curved, & uneven.   

❧ How we ought to tie the Ligament & again make lose the same. Chap. 4.  

Wherone we ought to, consider in the fastening of the ligature.  THe Chyrurgiane must consider, & note, that there be no seams knots, or any unevennes, in the Ligament, which might chance to crush the wound: and the Ligatione also being finished, considering that the end of the Ligature, be not fastened, one the wound, neither one any place where there is any pain, for unless with a pin, we fasten it, or else with a Needle sow it, it always inferreth pain with it: wherefore we must fasten the said Ligature, either higher, or lower, or one the side of the same, one the end of the rowler, & one such a place of the Ligature, wherone the Patient doth not lie, as behind one the Head, in the Temples of the Head, one the Back, & on the Buttocks, neither one the Flanks, or Armepittes,  
And concerning the dissolutione, or untyinge, therine we must consider two things: 
Two things wherone we must consider in the dressing of a wound  Namely one the time, when the Patient must be dressed, & one the convenience of doing the same: and herein disagreethe the practice of the ancient chirurgians, from us: For touching the dressing of wounds (Celsus willeth) that we ought not to dress the wound, but in three days once, suffering it two days▪ 
Celsus.  to continue without dressing: And then willeth he us, that we dress it but once in five days. And as touching the simple fractures, 
Hypocrates.  Hypocrates counseleth us, that in three days once we dress them But now adays, we do not observe this man's, for we dress the Patient after the first dressing 24, hours, unless we feared any great fluxion of blood, wherefore we suffered the Patient to lie longer with out dressing, to wit, two, three, four, or five days long: It is right true, that we sometimes make lose the ligament in two, or three days once, without touching of the plaster, only to give air to the part, & to note, whether there be neither Inflammatione, nor any other Accident come there unto: But when as the wound is come to very great suppuration, & that there is much matter, pain, or Inflammatione at hand, we as then dress the wound two, or three times in the space of 24 hours, to wit, all eight howeres once, if it be possible.  
And touching the simple Fractures, 
For simple fractures.  we keep them sometimes, six, or seven days undressed, unless that there wear any Accidents, at hand, but always we tarry as long as is possible: for how little soever we touch a broken leg, the ends of the bones, of the fracture are nevertheless, stirred, & dislocated, & the on rubbed against the other, wherthroughe is caused pain, and the combination, or together healing is hindered, because that all conglutination, can not be with out continual conjunction of the one part with the other.  
The redressinge, or dressing, 
How we may gentlelye take of the Ligament.  must be done one this manner: to wit, that we easily make lose the band, or rowler, now with the one hand and then with the other loosening of the same, always holding the whole Ligament in the hand. But because most commonly the first dressing of the wound, cleaveth so fast, as if with glue it wear thereon fastened, because of the blood & matter, which is therone dried, and baked, we must first of all therefore, madefye, & moisten the same with a little warmed wine, and therewith soacke the same because the ligament may be taken, & revolved thereof without pain, yea or else also in the winding of, of the same coming on the wound, we might there every time cut it of, because in so doing, we might by piecemeal take away the same, without in any sort hurting of the Patient.   

❧ How we shall dress the broken Arms, hips, and legs. Chap. 5.  

Our manner of dressing of all broken legs may be assimilated, and compated, with the manner of the ancient chirurgians.  ALL though that our common practice, of the dressing of all broken Legs, seemeth to be alienate, and to differ, from the manner of doing, of the antic, & ancient professors, & Chyrurgians, it is notwithstanding in such sort, that we easily can compare them together. All the ancient physicians, & Chyrurgianes, have been of opinion that in the Fractures we ought to use a double kind of Ligament: Namely inferiore ligamentes, which they called Hypodesmidas, & superior ligatures, which they called Hypodesmous: they have these names because of their situatione, because some of them are tied, and bound under & some again above. And as touching the inferior ligaments, Hypocrates maketh mention of two sorts.  

Two sorts of inferior, or underligamentes.  Whereof the first, & the shortest, beginneth one the fracture, laying always the one end contradictorily therone because it should not wholly lie, on the place of the pain, which ligament must be tied round about the fracture, & then be reduced upwards, where he as then endeth: This ligament must closely be wound together, because so the fluxion, which might chance to sink into the deceased part, might the better be kept thereout. The second ligament, which almost, must be as long again as the first, is also begun one the same manner, to wit, on the fracture, laying only therone, a turn, or two, winding downwards, to crush thereout the blood which might chance to sink into the fracture, with circumvolutions, which must be laid a little more a part the one from the other, then in the first ligament they wear: for we must take heed of making to great expressiones of blood, in the ends of the Arms, or legs, that without imflammation they can not receive much thereof, and the ligament being come down, must wind the same upwards again, to come again to that place where we did begin, because both these ligamentes might hold fast, and the muscles be brought into their natural situation, which through the two foremost ligationes might be brought thereout.  

Subdivision of the second inferior ligature.  Other ancient Chyrurgianes make of this nethermost ligature, two ligationes, whereof the one is the surest the second for the fractures, which beginneth one the broken part: having thereafter, made one, or two circumvolutiones, then is the foresaved ligature reduced downwards. The other which may be the third for the fractures, must be begun, on the beginning of the part, ending supernally where the first ligation is ended passing over the Fracture: So that they impose therone three ligationes all which three we may call inferior ligaments. The first which ascendeth from the fracture one high, as from the middle of the leg toward the knee. The second which descendeth from the fracture downwards, as from the middle of the leg towards the foot. The third, which from the extreameste part of the joint, ascendeth superiorlye as from the the soul of the foot towards the knees.  
But nowadays & following our common practice, 
An astringent plaster on the fracture.  which we use before these three ligamentes, we apply first of all, one the place of the fracture an astringent Plaster, which is made of Bolus, of flower, or volatill meal, of whytes of Eggs, of Oil of Roses & of a little Terebentine, (in stead of Cerotum Galeni, which the ancient chirurgeons used:) After the first dressing we use the Plaster of Diacalcitheos', or of Diapalma, liquefacted in oil of Roses, with vinegar. The ligature now being decently wound, because the legs, the hips & the Arms, are thinner below than above they are, we must therefore one such slenderness apply some certain compresses because the foresaid joincte may be in all places of an equal crassitude, & thickness, & the splinter, which must be made of stiff paper, of lattinn, or of any other substance, be very evenly, & smoothly applied therone, & tied under the inferior ligatures, or rollers.  
These splinters must be three in numbered, which must be excavated like a gutter, whereof the first must be a little broader, than the other to by applied under the fracture, & to compraehende all that, which is below the fracture, & be as it wear a fundament, or foundation thereunto. The other two one both the sides of the fracture, being somewhat separated the one from the other, lest that in the ligation they chanced to glide the one over the other. They must also be of such a longitude, as the broken part requireth.  
These three foresaid splintes being thus imposed, one the inferior rollers, 
Applycatione of the inferior Ligatures.  we must then tie the fracture that it may lie fast and steady & the part be contained in a good quallitye & disposione. With the first of these two ligatures, we must begin, at the extremest part of the member, from under upwards. The second must begin from above & end below: we must also note that the one of those rollers, must take his beginning internally in the member, & must proceed from the left to the right side, because they may cross the one over the other, in such a form as in the margin you may see, or in form of a St. Andrewes Cross, because it may be involved very closely thereon.  
It seemeth that Hypocrates hath used no other ligature, in the Fractures with wound, but that he rolled the same somewhat lose.  

Ligamentes for shot wounds, with crushing of bones.  But in those fractures which wear shot, or with any other such like instrument, or engine, be done, wherein is great crushing of bones, because we should little need to handle this part, which is thus broken, and crushed, lest the acute, and sharp ossicles, or bones, & frustles, the which in the pertractatione of the same, might chance to prick the Flo●he, Tendones, Synnues & the Peritoneum, we must therefore use hereunto great Compresses, being folded three, or four on the other, and so sowed together in the middle, being in two places cut through, the compress being of the breadth of a palm, of ones hand, or thereabout, which we revolve the one towards the other part, as if we desired to circumligate the part. These, or such like Compresses, we must by little & little shove under the crushed part, or member: & the same being immundifyed, & impure, and we desire to lay an other therunder, we as then sow a clean white Compress, one the impured Compress, & as than we draw away the impure compress from under the Fracture & then subseqvently followeth the mundified, & clean compress therunder, in the stead of the immundifyed. I have constituted the defiguratione, of these Compresses, here before amongst the figures of the Instruments, in the table of the Glossocomium, which of Hippocratis is called Ambi, on which place, & in the foresaid leaf, is defigured unto you, a broken leg, with the Ligamentes of the same.   

Of the situation, and of the constitutione or collocatione of those parts, one the which the foresaid Operatione must be effected. Chap. 5.  
No man is ignorant, how necessary, & requisite these operationes are, to the resanation, of the diseases, wherewith man's body is daily, & continually oppugned & oppressed: and indeed, this operation should in vain be used, if so be that not only the whole body, but also the foresaid deceased parts, whereon we effect our Operation, wear not thereafter, constituted & situated, and with most convenience collocated.  
Therefore decently, & with most couvenience to collocate the same, 
Vitilitye in constitution of the part.  the Patient must first of all lie on his bed, (if so be at the least the magnitude, and largeness of the disease require the same,) & that in such a form, that the wounded, or vulnerated part; may be with most ease, & convenience collocated, as it is reqvisite, for they are not all together situated in one fashion, & manner: It is right true, that there are some certain rules, as are in the ligatures, which must only be used one diseases.  
First of all therefore, & generally, 
Three things to be considered in the collocation of a part, or member.  to collocate & rightly situate all wounded parts, we must consider three especial things: to wit, that the situation, be Soft, Smooth & High: Soft, because a hard situation, sometimes might chance to disturb, and irrequiate, not only the vulnerated part, but also the approximate parts there unto, by the which means great pain, inflammation, & consequently also an attraction, & a fluxion must necessarily follow in that part: & which is more, the Patient is constrained not being able to tolerate the obdurate collocation, to ease and yield solace to that part, by oftentimes turning, and reverting of himself, which is very unprofitable for him, because that part, requireth nothing else then quietude, without being much disturbed, and molested.  
Even, and smooth, because that the uneven, 
Plain, & smooth situation.  & implanitude collocation, inferreth pain & recurvation in the joyncte, to wit, the one part resting on somewhat, & the other part, depending without resting one any thing.  
On High, because that thereby, 
High situatione.  all concursione of humours is prevented, which otherwise through the low situation of the jouncte, might be thertherwardes drawn.  
Considering this occasion, have the chirurgeons always caused the broken or wounded Arm to be dependently worn one the breast & the leg to be collocated on high, to wit somewhat higher than the body, the Patient lying on bed, because he may neither be erected, nor sit.  
Nether is it only necessary that the member, or part be collocated softly, smoothly, 
The aperon of a wound must all ways be recurvated downwards if it be possible.  & highly, but it is also requisite, (if so be there be any wound, or ulceration, which especially is fistulous) that the apertion thereof, if so be it is possible, recurvate itself downwards, because that the matter, might have the liberater a passage, to enter forth at, without making any greater concavityes, & do not chance to incense, or inflame the approximate parts, neither to corrode them, which would bring with it diverse, & sundry accidents: & praeposterate the resanatione of the same.  
secondarily, 
The situatione of the joint must be natural, & accustomed.  the joint must be situated in such a form, and fashone, which is agreeing with the natural disposione of the joint, and alienated from all pain: which two observationes, are well agreeing the one with the other: For all fashions which cause no pain, that is the natural, and accustomed figure, and collocatione thereof: Even as the painful, and unnaccustomed figure is against nature, so that the natural, and accustomed figure, or fashion, is wholly without pain: which happening, the Patient must a long continuance keep his joint in that being, because so he shall feel no, or at the least very small pain at all which is very commodious, to the resanation of all wounds, ulcerations, Fractures & also for all dislocations, as it is in like sort profitable for all other diseases whatsoever,  
The ancient chirurgeons, have called, this form of situatione, the right and true collocatione, because all the Veins, Arteries, Synnues, & muscles, as then are right, neither are they extended, neither lie they recurved.  

The natural situation which of the ancient professors, is called the right situation.  And although that the Arm have binn anglewyse collocated, notwithstanding we esteem it as then to lie right, because that all the foresaid parts, are accounted to lie right, & not extended, neither recurved, & that this collocation of the Arm is naturalle, as here after we will more largely speak of.  

An example of the situation of any deceased part.  And by degrees to specify, the situatione of each, & sundry part, we will here describe some of them for an example: when as there is any wound, Apostemation, or dislocation in any joyncte, we must then with all diligence note the situation there of: for through a bad situatione, not only immediately are caused many accidents, but after the sanatione thereof, the joynct sometimes tarrieth right out extended, which ought to have been crooked, or else abideth crooked where it ought to be extended or else combineth itself, & joineth with some other thing, which ought to have binn separated, & sejoincte. 
An excellent observation  Wherefore if the wound be in the uppermost part of the shoulder, we must then impose under the Armepites of the Patient, a great linen ball, & hang the arm one the Breast, & somewhat bear, out his elbow, because that the head of the arm, may be somewhat elevated, & the separated parts, may again be inserted the one with the other and so much the better be cured together again: The contrary whereof must be observed, if so be that in the inferior part be any wound, as under the Armepittes: for the wound being cured, & we do not lift up sometimes, the Arm & let him fall down again, & stir him otherways, without causing any pain, and that the Arm is not held from the Breast, the Patient thereafter, because of the Cicatrice shall not be able to lift up his Arm because through the same the Arm is grown stiff. As thereof we have an example, exemplified unto us of the throat, & in the Neck also of many and diverse, which being wounded, or burned, the cicatrice hath remained so obdurated, that they there through have either held their Heads, to much on high or to much stoupinge, or hanging backward, or to much depending either on the right, or one the Leftsyde.  
If so be that there be an Apostemation, 
The anglewyse figure, is the natural form of the Arme.  in the Elbow, or else that the same be dislocated, or wounded, we must then situate the Elbow angle, or cornerwyse: for such aforme is very necessary for the same, & natural, & accustomed unto him: & although, the cornerwyse figure is that which maketh an acute corner, notwithstanding we mean thereby through the anguled figure▪ with the ancient chirurgeons, that which hath his corner right but yet not so clean, and wholly erected, but that which attaygneth somewhat toward the rectitude, so that it cometh somewhat bluntly, and such a figure is not as yet truly the mean, between the inflexione, and the extension, but is the same which yieldeth herself, toward the extension: If so be the Arm be inserted and combined, with being able to be recurved, or extended we may yet as then better, and with more facility help himself, then if he wear whole recurved, or whole extended.  
We may also observe the same in the hand, 
The hand must be shut.  for we must keep the fingers shut, & half bended, and if so be the disease wear in one finger only, it wear then better that the same continued either inflected, or incurved, them that he wear straight, for the property of the hand is to gripe and take hold, the which she can not effect, and bring to pass, then through the recurvatione of the same.  
If so be above in the Hip there chance to come, an Apostemation, or wound, 
The hip must be stirred.  we must then in the consolidatinge of the same, observe that which in the shoulder we have seen, as being necessary to stir the foresaid part, on diverse fashions, because the head of the bone, do not insert itself, and grow fast in the pan.  
We observe in the jointure of the knees the contrary, for if so be, 
The leg must be kept right.  that there be a wound, or an Apostemation, or else in the finitimate part, the Patient must then hold his leg right, without having the heels drawn in towards his buttocks, as it in diverse persons happeneth, and that to the hindrance of the Patientes, when they are cured.  
And we must diligently note, that the leg be collocated as right, as is possible, and if so be by chance it lay recurved, we must then as gentlelye, as is possible stretch and extend the same again, otherwise the patiented being cured, might chance to be mutilate, and without great indecorum, or deformity should not be able to go, as we have knowene the same to hap unto two great personages, of our times.  
Now as concerning the foot, & the Toes, they must also be extended, and not recurved, or inflected, as we have spoken of the hand, & fingers: 
discommodity of having the Leg crooked  For if so be they continued so crooked, the body as then should not be able to rest, or stayed thereon: So that the situation of the Arm, is contrary to the Hand, to the Leg, and to the Foot: because the one must be recurvede, or crooked, and the other extended right out.  
The end of the French Chyrurgerye, containing the manual Operations.    

Methodicalle discourse, or rehearsal, of the originals, & occasiones, Signs, & Tokens, Accidents, & chances, Prognosticationes, and remedies, against the Bloodyeflixe, or Dysenterye.  
BY all other miserable and pitifulle diseases which do commonly vex, and trouble the entrails, and run through the same, as is the Colic, the restriction, or constipation, Ileus, Lyenteria, Diarrhea, Tenasmus, the worms, & many other such like yet me thinketh the Dysenteria, or the Bloody flux, of all these to be most intolerable, 
Bloodyeflixe.  and most mortal: And also amongst the Commonaltye, amongst our French Martiallistes or worriours, amongst the Switsers, countrymen, Englishemens, & farther amongst all sorts, and Kinds of warriors, it is so common, that it seemeth this disease, as soon as they are gone out of their houses, that there nothing else followeth them, then the shadow of their body, wherethrough in all leaguers through this dessease at sometimes there are more people deprived of their lives, then through all the inqvietude, through all poverty, through the Plague, yea & more also then of the enemy are Killede: And touching my opinion herein, I take this sickness to be a pestilentialle spirit, and a certain essence of the Plague: So that necessarily there under must be occulted, & hidden, a secret, & ineffable venoume, or poison, which through defiling, and infectione, spreadeth itself from the one body into the other, Because the intestines or entrails, of a sound, and welfaring man, through some inclination, or Sympathye, are made partakers of such venoumouse vapours, of him whose guts are polluted with this disease, and by that means also are imparted with the bloodyeflixe: As in the consumptione we may see, which proceedeth out of some ulceratione of the Lungs, and also in the Ophthalmye of the Eyes, the same to be as infectious, that the on body, may obtain the same of an other: Which cometh to pass, 
Reason of Aristotle.  as Aristotle sayeth, because that the Lungs, & the Eyes, are continually contained in a perpetual motion, wherethrough the venomousness is the easier imparted to an other body: Health being, as it wear a continual rest, and an assured estate.  
And as the entrails, have also their perpetual motion, the which in Greek we call Peristaltica, in like sort also may they impart their disease unto other entrails, as the eyes unto the eyes and the Lungs do unto the lungs.  
Of the Causes, Signs, Accidents, prognosticationes, and remedies, I will somewhat discourse, considering more the necessity thereof, thereby to instruct the young Chyrurgian, them because of any pleasure, which I take therein, or any ostentation.  
The Dysenteria, or bloodyeflixe, 
Description of the Bloodyeflixe.  is a sangvinolent excrement of the Belly, with great dolour, and as it wear scissure which the Latinistes, call Tormina: And this disease may be taken properly, or improperly.  
The improper Dysenteria, or Bloodyeflixe, 
Dysenteria Improperlye taken.  is a fluxion of blood, with out any great pains, or travail, whereof there are two sorts, or Kinds, either when we avoid pure, & clean blood, which we call Sangvinolenta, & Cruenta or else when we avoid unclean blood, and impure.  
The pure clear blood issveth forth of the Mesenterium, where a long time it hath lain occulted, & congregated, as it oftentimes chanced, in those which are gross of Belly. And sometimes also it proceedeth out of the Liver, of the milt, of the Hemorrhodes, and sometimes also out of some great veins, and out of other parts, yea and also out of the whole habitude of the body: All which differences, must through their own signs be known, because the resanatione of the same may be the surer.  
As for example it happeneth commonly, 
Those which are deprived of any joint, are very subject unto the Bloody-flixe.  through any great superfluity of bleeding, in those which have lost an Arm, or a leg, that on certain times they have the bloodyeflixe▪ In which kind of Mysenteria, we need not much to fear, neither need we to use those remedies heerunder described: But must restrain such Patientes, from great comestiones, and superfluous drinking of wine, and cause him to be well phlebotomised: whereof we in this place endevoure to advertice, and instruct the young Chyrurgiane, because that without making any great delay, he might be adiuvable & helpful to the patiented with these remedies which consequently follow: the which in passing by, it seemed convenient unto me to rehearse: Because it is not my intent, in this place, only to speak, of the improper Dysenteria, & curatione thereof, but of the true, & proper bloodyeflixe, or Dysenteria, which in all Leaguers is common, & familiar, and infectious.  
The impure Bloodyeflixe, is the truest, & assuredst, and is assimilated unto water, wherein nue slaughtered flesh, hath binn washed: the waterye Bloodyeflixe, 
Fluxus Hepaticus.  is called Fluxus Hepaticus, the Liver lask, which is caused, through the imbicillitye, of the retentive forces of the liver, through the which the vital spirits & the natural calliditye do exhalate, & the person, is whole bereft of all his forces & therthroughe also the stomach is feebled, that it can not any more compraehend, any meat, or drink, to feed one, neither digest the same, so that by this means the whole body consumeth and withereth.  
The black, heavy, & thick bloodyeflixe, proceedeth especially out of the milt, which is, as it wear a Pool, or receptacte, of all melancholic, thick, and blackebloode.  

Dysenteria properly taken.  But that which properly, or uprightly is called Dysenteria, or Bloodyeflixe, that is a common ulceration of the entrails, out of which first of all the viscosity of the same is driven, & expelled out, than the Axungiousenes therofe, with a little red blood intermingled: Thirdly, the internalle membrane of the intestines, of the which the pellicles, and the little fibres are in the stools seen, therunder to be mixed: finally the ulcerrtion as yet proceeding, & more, & more growing worse, as than consequently followeth the carnositye, & the very substance, of the corroded, & corrupted guts: all which kinds, are accompanied, & associated with those common accidents, to wit, with biting, or mordicante pain, with continual punctions, with continualle concupiscence of going to stool, with intollerabilitye, & with a continual commotion. Which foresayed Dysenteria, or Bloodyeflixe, either happeneth to the small entrails or to the great intestines, the which we first espy out of the situatione of the pain, & out of the diversity, and mixture of the matter,  
When as therefore the upright Bloodyeflixe is in the small guts, 
Signs when the small guts ate hurt.  as than we see blood, & certain membranous pellicles, intermixed with the excrements, there is also great pain above on the Naule the time betwixt the pain & the dejection is slow, and there associateth it most commonly a vomiting, and a great oppression of the heart, and the Hick cough, in the entrance of the stomach, through community which the foresaid entrails have therewith: For as Galen sayeth, the Harmony, & conjunction, which the parts of the body have the one with the other, is wonderful, & to be admired, because as soon as the actione of one part is hindered, or suffereth any thing, all the other parts of the body do therwithe conspire, and sympathize.  
If so be the said ulceration be in the great guts, or entrails, 
Signs of the great▪ intestines  there as then driveth one the deiectiones, or excrements certain drops of blood, and some little parcels of flesh, and the dolour of the wounded, or hurt entralies, not so pungent and sharp, but somewhat more surde, and benumde.  
The occasione of the bloodyeflixe is the venoumouse puissance and force, 
Occasion & cause of the Dysenteria.  Dynamis of the acute, sault, and mordicant humours, which being as it wear on the journey, to descend right to the guts, but they come recurvared, & in form of this lettre S. as in the situatione, they must pass by many recurvationes, & concavityes▪ where they cleaving fast, first of all crudifye, and excoriate the foresaid guts, & in the end through their acuitye corrode the same: as is the choleric humiditye, the melancholycke humours, and the sault Petuita, the which is either engendered internally in the guts, or else congregate together in other place & are so driven that way, as it happeneth commonly in the Pestilentialle agues, in Causo colliqvanti, Phthisi, Athrophia, in the Cacochimia, in the inflammatione, and in the colliquation, of the worthiest parts. The humours are also irritated, and provoacked, through caustic and venoumouse medicamentes, as through the Coloquintida Scammonia, or through the Sublimated powder of a Diamante. 
Raw fruit causeth the Bloodyflixe.  Also through any vicious, acute gross cibaryes and those which are apt unto corruption, or else is not sufficiently dressed: Alsoe through any fruit, as by cherries, Blackecherryes, Plumbs, Peatches, Coucoumbres, Million, & such like, which we call Hotatij Fructus, which more, through the constitutione of the air, which either is to moist, and pluviouse, or raynye, to could, or to hot, in others through intemperature, and other inordinate victitatione, or debacchatione, by the which it inseparablelye happeneth as well in the Winter, as in the Summer, that this disease of the bloodyeflixe, afflicteth man kind.  
It is right true, that this disease, 
Indicati● how we may easily, or difficultly attain to the Bloodyeflixe.  oftentimes reagneth in the Prime, or vernal time of the year, and especially in the Harvest, or Autumn, in the which time the humours, do most impeach, & hurt us with the qvallityes. Having observed all these things, we must consider one the quantity and quallitye of the disease, as on the greatness of the ulceration, and the superfluity of blood, and one the great corrosion, and one the violence of the disease, thereby to judge, whether the disease with any facility, difficulty, or impossibility may be repelled, and cured.  
We esteem the cure of the Dysenterya to be of more facility, the same being in the great guts, or intestines Caecum, Colon, & Rectum, them it being in the small entrails, Duodenum, jeiunum and Ileum.  
We take also the same to be less dangerous, in young persons, and in the men, then in young children, and women.  
In a longevalle, or long continuing Dysenterye, it is a bad sign when the appetite is departed, & yet a far more worse sign, when as there are associated unto the same Agues, or Imflammationes.  

They which are of most experience may judge of this point.  As is that which is caused, out of any Apostemation, being burst out of the Liver, or of the milt, which very rarely happeneth, and yet more rare out of the pulmonicalle Apostemationes, whereof the matter disgorgeth it self in the left ventricle of the Heart, and so into the Artery called Aorta, the trunk, or body of all other Arteries, from thence into the Veins of the Mesentery, which are extended to the entrails, the which passage or way we can not then through imagination compraehend, and which is very obscure. And if so be there followed any peculiar thing thereout, besides the caustic, and venoumouse matter it might then infer fearful, & dangerous accidents, to the heart of the Patient, (which is the wellspring of life) & the only original, of vital spirits, which are diffused over the whole body, & are occasione of the actione, motion, & also all other agilityes of the body.  
The evomition of the choleric humours, in the beginning of the disease, do bear witness also of the danger following.  
The bloody flux, which is caused out of any melancholic humours, is esteemed to be without any hope.  
The convulsion of synnues, the Hickough, & the parbraking, are forerunners, & as it wear, ambassadors of death.  
In like sort also when we espy, a black spot behind the left ear, as big as a Vetche, wherbye is great alteration, that also is a sign of Death, as Hypocrates withnesseth unto us. If so be this disease, through negligence, or through malice, or aulteration, or by any other means, came to be inveterated, the Patient as then will whole consume, & wax so feeble, that without great difficulty he shall not be victor thereof.  
This therefore is the cause, or occasion, the species, & kinds of this disease, & the afflicted, & oppressed part being apart, and known, we must now proceed to the resanatione of the same.  
The final end of the curatione, is either general, or specialle.  
The general end is to be noted, either on the disease, or on the Physitione, as on both the especiallist, & most principal personages, which act and set forth the History of this disease. In all the kinds of Dysenteria, 
Cure of the Dysenteria.  the patient must keep himself reposed, and quiet, because all ulcerationes, desire to be quietly kept, and in ease: Notwithstanding, Hypocrates in his third boocke de Diaeta counseleth, that we should cause the Patient which hath the bloody flux to walk, & also cause him to stir his body, whereby he meaneth, that we ought to do the same, before the foresayed Dysenteria become, & because of the Prophylactica, therthroughe to prevent, the procreation of all bad humours, & to defend the same out of the intestines, & cause them to withdraw themselves into other external parts of the body.  
furthermore the patient must always retain his stools as long as he possibly may or can, without constraygninge himself thereunto,  
The Chirurgeon must first of all consider on the use of the astringent medicamentes, 
What astringent medicamentes the Patient must use.  which before repast, or comestion are used: for he containing the viands, or cibaryes, they help also to the digestion of the same: but by the astringent things I understand, & mean, which are reasonablelye fortifyinge, and confortative, and those which are helpefulle to the concoctione: For it wear the greatest, & absurdest error of the world, if so be in the first, & especially in an unhealthfulle body, to use violent stopping & astringent medicamentes, for it wear nothing else, them to shut & keep our enemy or thief within doors.  
Wherefore his viands, or meat & drink, 
What his meats, & drinckes must be.  must only be Diuretic, & astringent & causing to void urine, because through the urine especially, all aquositye of the blood is evacuated: but if so be you perceive, that the great toughenes of the acute & sharp adusted Pituita, or aquosity, which is very retardatelye expelled & conglutinateth with the guts, or entrails, is a cause of the bloody flux, with pain & with corrosion, you must then with discretion use the urine expulsors, or urine provoking remedies because through the use thereof, it expelleth the aaquosity through the which otherwise the foresaid viscouse & tough Pituita, might by chance have been driven out, so that therewith it is made more viscouse and tougher, than before for by how much the less any thick viscouse matter, hath adjoined unto it any thin humiditye, by so much it is the worse. We permit some considering the imbicillitye of their stomachs, to use & drink a little astringent wyne.  

Medicamentes which we must eschew.  furthermore we must beware, and take heed, of all sharp, & mordicant medicamentes, as Arsenicum, Auripigmentum, Antimonium Sal Gemmae, & many other such like things, & that because of their, to great, & sudden evacuationes, & because they irritate & provoacke the disease.  
thirdly we must consider on the Liver, & especially on the stomach, because all those which are afflicted with the bloody flux, can digest no viands. The special end must be the fluxion, or the disease itself.  
The Scopus of the fluxion is, to stop, & to diverte the concurrent humours, but we must in the first gently, & easily reserate the same, & with such, consideration, as before we have said, lest that in reseratinge of the same you increase the ague, the which with reason, and experience may chance.  

remedies which may be taken out of the reason.  The remedies which may be taken out of the reason, are either external, or internalle.  
The internal are, either simple, or compownde. Simple, as Cowemilcke, nue Eggs, with Mastic, or with Ambergris, Powder of sower Mulberryes, flowers of Peatches, fine Bolus, Terra sigillata, confited Nuts, Nuttmegges, being therewith intermixed: Rhabarbarum so acked in Plantine-water is also had in great estimatione, or in the decoction of Mirobalanes, Syrup of dried Roses, & julep, of Roses.  
Amongst the compound remedies are the Trociskes of Diacorallum, Dialectrum, De Spodio, with the juice of Endive, of Cicorye, & more other.  
We must also content ourselves, in this disease with sudoriferouse medicaments, and with easy vomits: because through diversityes, we may reserate, & retain the fluxion.  
This subseqvent powder, is oftentimes with great success administered, & used, the weight of a Crown, with the yolcke of an Egg.  
rum Boli Armeni, terrae sigillatae, lapidis Haematites, ana drachmas duas, picis navalis unciam semis, Coralli rub. Margaritarum elect. cornu Cervi usti & loti in aqva Plantaginis, ana scrup. duas, Sacchari rosati uncias duas, fiat omnium pulvis subtilis: capiat drachmam semis, vel scrupulos duos mane.  

Admonitione.  But to commit no error at all, we must before the reseratione, or before the use of this powder, administer an ounce of Cassie, by it self, or with half a dram of Rabarber: or with an ounce of the double Catholicon, with a decoction of Plantine, of Agrimonye, Flowers of Nenufarre, 
Infusion of Rhubarb.  with Tamariscus, to the refrenatione, or bridlinge, of this furious humour. Or else we must take, a gentle infusione, or expression of Rhubarb, made with rose-water, adding thereunto six drams, or an ounce, of Catholicon. But besides all this, we may not reserate, & restrain this lask at the first, as the common people suppose.  
But amongst the external remedies, Phlebotomye is very commodious for the same, but must always be effected with Knowledge of the cause, for that sometimes is more necessary than all the other remedies, & especilye, when as the intemperature being caused out of the Liver, urgeth us thereunto but not hereby to debilitate the forces & strength of the Patient, which in this disease reqvire to be firmed, & comforted, 
Phlebotomye must be done with discretion.  the said phlebotomye must with all discretion be done, because the Patient, through the deprivatione of to great a qvantitye of Blood at one time, might chance to be whole superated, & overcome, and fall down dead under his pack, or burden: For it is known unto all men, that the blood is the treasure of life or the domicille, & habitation of the soul: Secondly we may not in Phlebotomizatione be to timorous & fearful, for in place of Phlebotomye, & yielding air to the Veins, the ague chanceth sometimes to continued, & increase also, the blood also getting no air, is then polluted with some sharpness, or venomousness, which thereafter corrodeth, & consumeth the entrails.  
The Patient is praeserved by his strength, through good nurture, & feeding, which is easy of digestion, & through the Cordialle corroborating medicamentes.  
Amongst the astringent Medicamentes, 
Astringentia.  there are the oils of Quinces, of Roses, of Mastic, & oil of Myrtles, being intermingled with a little astringent powder, in like sort there are also confortative Plasters, amongst the rest, is the comfortative Plaster of Vigo, which with consideratione, must be used, as before we have said.  
We may in this disease also use some certain fumigationes, & exsiccating Lavamentes.  
Those things which are most belonging, to the disease, are the mundificationes, and the consolidationes of the ulcerationes: For the mundifying of all ulcerationes is nothing else, them to cure, to exsic●te, & to consolidate them. Where fore first of all we must elavate the ulceratione with a clisterye, and if the same be profownde, & deep, a little absterge the same, mixing therunder some confortative things, to fortify, & strengthen the intestines.  
Whereunto as then we may use, mellifyed, or Honyed-water, Barlye-water, with the yolks of Eggs, Sugar, Honey of Roses, & with many other such like things being mixed therunder: and if so be we as yet desire more to mundify the same, we must then use the decoction of wheaten bran, & of Vetches: and if so be there be calidity adjoined thereunto, we must then add thereunto Sap of Roses, of Plantine, or juice of Night shade, or Solatri.  

remedies to consolidate the ulcerations.  touching the consolidation, that is effected through the providence of nature, or with any incarnatinge medicamentes, which we call Sarcotica. Unto consolidation are four things necessary, to wit, the clisteryes of Plantine, of Hogs grass, and of Willowleaves, unto the which we add goats suet, Butter, oil of Roses, or oil of sweet Almonds, wherewith the ulcerations be internally annoyneted, the punctione, & acuitye of the ulceration is somewhat diminished, which continually soacketh therein.  
We may also very fitly mix theramongst, the sealed earth, Franckinsence, Sangvis Draconis, & amongst many other this one incarnateth very much, to wit the Lachrima Thuris, but we must note that all these Pouldres, be very diminutlye pulverisated, lest that in the ulcerationes of the entrails, they chance to corrode, & bite.  

Clisteryes made on diverse fashones.  As touching the Clisteryes, we must at the first use, pain asswaginge clisteryes, as there are those, which are made of fresh milk, where in we must contunde some yolckes of Eggs, oftentimes reiterating of the same: and then using the absterginge clisteryes, which gentlelye will purify the intestines. We make also diverse other of diverse fashions, & forms: where unto this shall serve, for an example of one.  
rum Rosar. rub. Tapsibarbati, Furfuris Hordei, ana P.j. fiat decoctio in lact, in colatura, ad lib. j vel, ad quartastres, dissolve oleiras. colati, Sacchari albi ana ℥ ij. Syrupirosar. siccarum ℥ ij. fiat Clyster, additis duobus ovorum vitellis.  
We may use this clyster, & reiterate the same as often as we perceive it to be necessary: but when we must use some astringent Clisterye, which we may not do, unless that the repeccating humours, be cleanly purged out, and then we may use this subseqvent clisterye, or any other such like.  
rum Furfuris macri, paleae Hordei, tapsi Barbati, Centinodiae, Chamemillae, & summitatum Anethi, ana M j fiat decoctio in aqva Chalibeata, velin lact ustulato, in colatura, ad lb j vel ad quarts tres, dissolve syr: rosar. siccarum, vel mirtillorum ℥ ij. Vitellorum ovorun iij. pulveris Mastiches, & sang. draconis, ana ℥ iij. fiat Clyster.  
We may also constitute, & exordinate, to this end diverse & Sundry potiones, & electuaries, also the Kinds of Diacorallum, nature of a Heart fine Bolus, sealed earth, juice of Berberis, Ribs, conserve of Roses.  
The Empiricke medicamentes, which the Methodical Physiciones, do so disdain, & esteem of little worth, are those which we through experience, & through the diuturnall use have found to be most excellent, which being used with judgement, are not whole to be disdained, seeing that Galen testifieth, that the Physician, must be established one two fundamentes or foundations, to wit, on the reason, & on the experience, whereof the Reason is, as it wear the Soul of the same, which measureth, & ponderateth all things: and the Experience the body, as a provident, tutor & Schoolmaster.  
Experience teacheth us, that the Rhubarb, on what manner soever we administre the same, (but especially the infusione thereof) is very commodious & profitable in this disease, as in like sort also is the Spiritus Vitrioli, with Rose-water, & with Plantinewater, & also being administered with Cynamomewater. There is a sugerye dulcor, or sweetness, extracted out of Lead, which never deceived the hope of the right worshipful Mr. Duion, 
Monsr. Duion an expert Physician  which is a very expert, & learned Physician, & whereof I have attained the best, of this discourse. The Tincture of Coralle, and of yellow Amber, extracted with Aquavitae is in his operation admirable, also Crocus Martis, Flos sulfuris being administered with conserveses of the betryes of the Cornus, Conserve of Roses, Marmalade, Citronpeelinges, with many other such like things, are all together very commodious. Because amongst natural things, I know nothing that exsiccateth more, & oppugneth itself more against all corruptiones: And to conclude there are an innumerable sorts of remedies, which we must so compound, that they may have one similitude, or one Analogy with the disease.  
finally, we must in an extreme Dysenteria, for the last remedy, endevoure to mitigate the pain, with Narcoticall things, as is the Oleum jusqviami, Mandragora, the could seeds, the Philounium. Reqvies Nicolai, & many oaths such like compositiones, which are unto this disease used, & which may not be administered them with great judgement and advice had therone.  
The end of this Treatise of the Dysenteria, or Bloodyeflixe.   

An apology, for the Chirurgeons, where through is apparently, & evidently demonstrated, & showed, which be the occasions, or causes of death, in diverse & sundry, wounded Persons, although notwithstanding, their wounds wear small: where by the chirurgeons may be liberated, & excused, from all calumnes, & slanders where with falsely they are accused, & reproached.  
THe common discourses of Chirurgery, are now adays far more mean, & idle, more fabulous, & uncertain, than the Nativityes of the Gods, the Histories of the Giants or the doctrines of the Philosophical stone yea & a thousand other fantastical sommationes, 
There is but one expert Chyrurgiancinal France-  & dreams.  
There is nowadays in all France, but one expert Chyrurgianes, whom every potentate and great Lord, endeavoureth to retain by them, wherethrough they are want to say I have the best & expertest Chirurgeon which is living, wherefore they also laud, & extol him, to have a million of knacks which wear never before herd, or known. The one boasteth that his Chirurgeon, in a very short time, hath cured one which hath binn shot clean through his head although the very substance of the Brains, 
Divers fictions, & Lies.  issued thereout: the other steadfastly affirmeth, that his Chyrurgiane, hath again imposed the Eye of a man, which from the earth he took up, without being deprived of his sight in that Eye, or else that he cut of a piece of ones Liver, or milt, & yet hath praeserved the life of the man. furthermore an other will boldly perjure himself, & say, that they are but nugationes, & children's play for his Chirurgeon to cure, a harqueboushed, or shotten wound of the Heart, the Liver, the milt, the Blather, and the stomach, and the Intestins and of the great veins, yea & is no more molested therewith, than wear the Sold lours of julius Caesar, which never interrogated how forcible, & strong their enemies wear, but where they wear: neither one what place of the City the breach was bartered but whether indeed it we are shot or not. 
Comparasion.  So that nowadays, the chirurgians also do not any more ask, neither do any more endevoure, to know the nature, the condition, the necessity, the use, or the worthiness, or excellency of the wounded parts, but ask only whether the man be wouded, & although all the ossicles of his Leg, wear crushed, yet within the space of 14. days, at the farthest, with their water of shotten wounds they are able to cure them, although I myself do not disdain the same, the same being administered, & used with discretton. And briefly to conclude each lord supposeth that he hath by him an Hypocrates, an Aesculapius, a Podalirus, a Machaon.  
Out of which ignorance, & persuasion, as not to know, what wounds are mortal or curable, what wounds are little, or great, which are of an easy, or difficult resanation, there must then necessarily heerout follow, that whenas any body seemeth to be little hurt & dieth under the hands of a most expert Chirurgeon either because of the greatness of the wound, through any unhealthfullnes of the body, through any concursione of humours, or else because of any unexpected accidents, he is then without all compassione, blamed, disdained and defamed, notwithstanding all his great pains or diligence, according to the art he in curing of the foresaid Patient hath done & that, because they are ignorant of the causes of his death, & always persuade themselves, 
A foolish persuasion  that if the Patient had been in hands of their Chyrurgiane, he without all doubt had not died, although that their Chirurgeon, have experimented & tried little or nothing at all and is wholly inexpert so that by continuance of time we find them to do, or worck no more miracles than a common or lay man, and also with no more certainty, doctrine, nor experience and oftentimes in their practice, being at their wits, or counsels end, are constrained to sue for succour, & aid of their companions, or partakers. Because therefore that in conseqvente times hereafter, these fellows, should not undeservedlye reap such honour, & the ancient chirurgians might liberate, & free themselves from all calumnes, & of being ignorant which is laid to their charge, and to reqvite, and resolve the opinions of those mighty, and potentat Lords with reason, because thereafter they do no more blame, and slander the chirurgians, I will here breeflye recite, 
Some wounds are esteemed to be small, which indeed are great and dangerous.  the occasions of Death, causing them plainly, and evidently, to understand that there are some which of a wound, which we esteem to be but small, and of little regard, do notwithstanding die, & yet of expert, & learned men the same was esteemed, and accounted for a perilous wound. And contrarily, some are cured of great wounds, which indeed we esteem to be but small, and of little regard, and which with all facility may be cured. 
They can not cure all men.  Notwithstanding being impossible for the Chyrurgiane, how erudite, & expert, soever he be, to cure all men, although at sometimes they be woundede with very small wounds.  
Now therefore to return to our discourse, 
What is required to the resanatione of wounds.  we must first of all know, that to cure a woundede part, & to restore again that person- into his former, & accustomed estate of health thereunto are many things reqvired, which I here normallye, & rightly will prosecute. First of all there is the integrity, force, & vigore of the vulneratede, & hurt part, or member: As evidently do demonstrat unto us, the authority, reason, and experience: For according to the opinion, and sentence, of divine Hypocrates, It is nature which cureth all sicknesses, and diseases sect. 5. Epid. 6.  
The wounded parts are enfeebled, either considering the nature of their first conformation or through any accidents, chauncinge to the disease, or else because of any hurts, or shots which happen unto the same: we may through their nature know them when as the head is to little, for as than it is whole inconvenient: Or else to gross and so vast, and ponderous, that because of the disease, the patiented is not able to bear up the same right on his shoulders: If so be it be perfectly, and completly round for in such a Head is either wanting, the anterioure, 
A Head noughtily form  or the posterioure future, or both of them together which are the suspiracles, through the which nature disburseth herself, of all superfluityes, which being therein contained, they retardate the curatione of the wound. And if it so chanced, that the Head of your wounded, wear indecently form, the wound seeming to be small, (although indeed no Capitalle wounds are to be esteemed small) and the curation thereof be tardife, and the patient chance to die thereof, we ought not as then in any sort to attribute the fault unto the Chyrurgiane but to the bad formatione of that part which is hurt, or wounded.  
We must also understand the same of the Breast, which being anguste, & strict, sufficiently demonstrateth unto us, that the heart and the natural calor of the same are very feeble be cause the domicille of the heart, & the Lungs is to angustlye form: which might be the cause that if any body, being wounded in such an angust & strict breast, shall with great difficulty receive again his health, because the natural caliditye, being in these parts feeble, & languid shall not be able to surmount the Accidents which ordinarily happen unto such parts, as difficulty of respiration, through the oppression of the effuded blood in that part, which can not be digested, nor expelled, either by the Mouth, or through the wound, & that for want of natural caloure, which commonly in such a strict & anguste Breast is very small. 
Abadde form Back, or Backebone.  The like may also be said of the Back, & of the Spina Dorsi or Backebone, which being somewhat to long as those which contumeliously, & diridingly we call Elevenribbes, because they have such huge and vast long sides whereof we need not doubt, but that such a Back or Backcbone, is far more debile than others, & therefore more apt, and prone to receive any unnatural humiditye, wherefore also in such wounds there hap great fluxions between the Muscles, & the skin & betwixt the distances of the same, because of the great quantity of excrements, which have their accourse out of the Brains, & other parts of the body, whereby, betweme the Muscles & the distances of the same, there sink many superfluous humours, which by consequence of time are changed into some venoumouse humiditye, & matter, through the which we are sometimes constrained, to make some great apertione, which require a long continuance of time to the mundifying thereof, & wholly to be cured, yea & sometimes also altar & change into fistles, because of the tenderness & softness of the part, which can not be shut, neither through ligamentes reserated, or compressede, as an arm or leg. Hypocrates hath observed, & noted that betwixt feeble, 
A notable sentence.  & diseased flesh there always descendeth & sincketh a waterishe humudity, which easily can corrupt. The small, thin, 
Hips which are baddly formede  & Hern fashioned hips & legs, whereof we commonly say they go one Wayghtes, & are under, and above all most of equal crassititude and thickness, contrary to those which we say, to be hipped, & legged, or have a payere of good, & steadfast stiltes under them, which are well proportioned, where of daily experience teacheth us, & that to our great grief, and sorrow, that such persons, either being wounded in hips, in the legs or in the feet, are subject unto many, and diverse accidents, & the wounds also difficult to be cured & mundifyed, 
Legs which are of a difficult resanation.  in the which oftentimes above the ordinary fluxions therein engendereth proud flesh: & now being as it wear almost ready to be Cicatrizede, can very difficultely be brought thereunto, & being cicatrized, through any small occasion bursteth open again. And if so be the bones be offended, or broken, as then the joint most commonly consumeth, and withereth & the health very retardately can be again restored.  
Now all this which hath binn said, 
The most truest, & assuredst sign of the imbicilitye of any part  is sufficiently known, with all the diseases of all other parts. But we must generally note, that the most assuredst sign, of the imbicilitye of any part, chanceth through, the untemperatnes, and bad formation of the same: for if so be that the Temperament, had been good, and by consequence, the formative virtue had binn strong, she should as then exactly have form that part: for by the operation is the operator thereof known. Wherfofe Aristotle is of opinion, that the incomplete creation, hath her deformity, through the want of the frigid, & could nature, and the imbicility of the Sperma: 
Similitude.  for even as we see, that the Mechanical operatours, or handyecraftes men, can not make any piece of work so perfect, & so neat, of a bad piece of stuff as, they might well & easily do, of a good, and apt and tractable piece of stuff, which is not spoiled, nor corrupted.  
All which is before approved by the third rule, sect. 1. of the sixth Epidemiorun Hippocratis, & founded, on an excellent Axioma in the commentaries of Galem, where be sayeth, Imbicilla membra multum pravumque excrementum colligere consueverunt.  
Such a congregation, & excrescence of venounous excrements which chance to congregate themselves together in such deformed parts do drowned, choacke, 
Suffocation of the natural calidity.  & oftentimes corrupt the natural caloure, first of all of the diseased part, and then of the whole body, after the which must necessarily follow death, without the Chyrurgiane being able to remedy the same or with any aequitye might thereof be blamed although notwithstanding oftentimes the Princes & great Lords, which of these matters have small knowledge, without occasion do blame, & reproach their chirurgeons: yea & some times also accuse them, & require of the magistrate to have punished, & themselves also undeservedlye punish their chirurgeons. 
Accidental imbicility.   
Touching the accidentalle imbicility, which hath been from the beginning of the first creation, it is certain, that as we have said of the momorsions, or Bits, even so in like sort we may say of the diseases, that the first are very nocent, unto the last: For Quae non possunt singula, multa nocent: & a little thereafter, Gutta cavat lapidem, non vi, sed saepe cadendo. We do not through sickness a mend, & the pitcher goeth so often to the well, till that in the end he return broken home again. For all diseases are of so venoumous a nature that although they are clean cured, yet they relinquish some bad relics in the part, wherethrough they may the easier return again, wherefore of our Divine Hypocrates it is called Philostrophes, 
The one disease following the other is very troublesome.  which signifieth, no return again or at the least, such parts are as than most subjecteth to receive some nue disease: also the said Hypocrates sayeth farther, in his Book of internal diseases, that all aegritudes, which follow any other disease, are always most commonly mortal: because she findeth the natural forces debilitated: which we also must understand of the wounds, which are received in any parts of the body, which before have once binn wounded. 
An ague being cured commonly leaveth an Empirema after her.  These dispositiones are of our Physiciones called Diatheses and are esteemed to have great forces, for the generatione of diseases or for an incurable confirmation of the same: In like sort also relinquesheth an Empirema after her, where by that person is made more subicte to receive more agues, & that in such a sort as a hot oven, which hath once been heated, is more apt again to receive the heat: as in example, there be any on which hath once binn wounded, again being wounded, & especially in the same place, where before he was wounded it is impossible that the said part should have, the same force, virtue, or vigour, to repugme and to resist for the curation which before she hath had, before ever she was wounded: and that in such sort as in a Corselet or harnas, wherone hath been a shot, and having gotten a crush, or bending in, although the same be beaten, and malleated smooth again, yet it will never be beaten so smooth, neither so plain & strong as it was before it had the shot. Nether can can I here praetermit, to recite those which have itenerated, and traveled through the Sudatorye regione, and passed, through the drivelling, or sputaminouse climate, & being again ready to travel the same way, being grevouslye wounded, where there is one which is safely returned from the journey with good fortune, there are three, yea & four which by the way do faint and so die: wherefore as then we admire, why they are not cured, or why their resanation is so tardife, not considering that the wounded was half before corrupted, 
The wounded which have binn in the drivelinge climate can very difficultly be cured.  & that his humours have wholly been aultered through the venomousness of the foresaid disease: or having been cured thereof, have as yet retained any aulteratione in the Liver, or in any other internalle parts, which gathereth continually many venoumous excrements, which the foresaid part without any cessation, dischargeth into the wounded part.  
And so most commonly the occasione of death cometh through the inordinate state of life, in eating, 
Gluttony is the occasion of much evel.  and drinking without observing any rule of victitation, hauntinge also of women, and not suffering themselves to be handled, of the hands of the Chirurgeon, as the cause requireth, it be either in tenting of the wound, by inscisione, by cauterisatian, & by keeping himself quiet which all ancient chirurgeons so highly and exactly command, 
Ease is good for all wounds.  to the furtherance of the curation of the wound, following the sayings of Celsus, that Optimum Medicamentum, quies, & abstinentia, is: So that I am intended, as of a thing that is of all men known, not much in this place to speak thereof although notwithstanding, it is oftentimes the occasione of death, how lightly soever they be wounded: yea also and of great wounds, being clean out of danger through their inordinate manner of life, especially in eating, and drinking, do again fall therein, and come to a far more worse estate than ever before they wear, yea and sometimes also die thereof: for it is most certain that.  
More there are which of Gluttonye die here,  
Then of blows, or shots to death come near.  
So that we will now, handle, or treacte, 
Consideration on the time of the year.  of the times of the year. There is nothing more manifest, then that many wounded persons might of their wounds be cured, if so be the time of the year, wear such, as it wear requisite it should, that is, if so be the four seasons of the year, reserved their natural temperature & quality: It is also apparent that the intemperature of the air, the disordre of the time, the astrolicalle venoume, & other funestall influences, do make the wounds incurable, or else very difficult to be cured, and changeth the habitude, and complexione of men, through the changing of the time, & through the Astronomical constellation, which over us is praedominating. As if so be the winter, which ought indeed to be could, 
The irregulatede season of the year aultereth our bodies.  wear warm, & the summer which ought to be warm, is could: Also when it is now hot, them could, now dry, them moist, without the time of the year requiring the same to be otherwise then he ought to be: who can doubt thereof but the same must be prejudicial, to the wounded patient? because our bodies, here buy receive mervaylouse, & sudden alterations & chaunginge, wherethrough out vital spirits, & humours, are wondrouslye, & with great danger aultered, observing the saying of Hypocrates, which avoucheth that all repentine & subite permutation, how soever the same may be are unto our bodies very preiudicialle. 
All repentine, & sudden change is dangerous.  The diurnalle experience demonstrateth the same unto us, for if so be in the winter, in stead of a dry could wind, there respire a south-west wound, with warmishe showers of rain, there then commonly follow great corruptiones in our humours, wherthroughe the wounds do putrefy, and gangraenize. The infected air, may also be an occasion, of the death of many wounded persons, how little soever they sometimes are wounded: because without air we can not Live, which always such as it is we must receive, 
We can not live without air.  & that not only through the mouth, & through all the conducts of our body, & poro●tyes of our skin, & through our Arteries, which are situated under the porosityes of our skin, from whence the foresaid air doth draw towards our Lungs, somewhat to cool the heart, & refresh it & be as it wear a nurture unto the same, from whence the said air is farther spread & divided through our whole body, whereby it then chanceth, that if so be the same be corrupted, & infected, consequently also the foresaid Heart, with some other of the noble & worthiest parts are polluted, in stead of being praeserved, & maintained, in their form & virtue. 
The malignante air polluteth the heart.  Galen in the ninth of his methods, attributeth so much to the air, that he sayeth that the especiallist, & principalist demonstration to cure any disease, must be observed out of the air: because we can in no sort, be wanting or missing the community, and use thereof.  
Besides all these occasiones, there are yet certain times of the year, which are irreprehendable, & yet clean contrary to certain diseases: for who is he that doubteth that the star Canicula doth not disturb the wines, 
Virtves of the doggedayes.  & causeth the same to boil, where he lieth in the fellers? as by experience we find & in Plinio we may read, that the same also causeth our blood to boil within our veins, 
Lib. 14. Chap. 18.  that sometimes there followeth such a superfluous sangvination, that by no means it can be restaygned, by the which means the same also floweth toward the wounded part, which before was tormented with sufficient pain enough. In like sort also we perceive the Autumn, 
The Autumn is enemy to all pulmonicall wounds  or Hurvest to be an enemy to all wounds of the Lungs, as is apparent by the 10. rule, the 3. of the Aphorisms, because they oftentimes change into fistles or into pectoral Apostemationes. The penetrable could is also a sore enemy to all wounds in the Head, Aphor. 3. lib. 5. furthermore Hypocrates dissuadeth us, Lib. de aere, 
We must not purge in the dog days.  aquis & locis to administer any physic unto the patientes in the great constellation of the stars under the Solsticium, nor under the Aequinoctialles, because of the great perturbations, & alterations, which as then are in our bodies, by the which means the wounds as then are far more molestious & mortal: which must all so be understood of the great winds & thunderings, the effects whereof are so admirable, & tirrible, in inanimate things, wherbye we may the less admire at the great alterationes, which they do cause in the wounds, & diseases of men's bodies, which body is the most sensiblest, and the most dilicatest, amongst all the animate bodies.  
Besides this we have spoken of the times & saysons of the year, 
An excellent observation.  we may also add hereunto that the Carpenters, & the Architectors, do also observe a choice of the felled, & cut down wood, which at this time, or at that saysone of the moon hath been felled: esteeming the wood, to be more moist, & replete with worms, & more subject to corruption, which is felled in the full Moon, & that more durable yea & all most incorruptible, 
The inanimate things do feel the effects of the Moon.  which is felled in the decreace of the Moon, as in Palladio we may read, in his Treatise of january, & Novembre, Caesar also sayeth the same, in his commentaries, on Arat: that the Moon hath not only power over that which hath received sensibility, but that also the stones, the bones, and the Wood do perceive the effects of the Moon, which being of the Mooninfected, waxeth full of worms: wherefore the common phrase of the Lawyers, or juristes' is as yet observed, de Lignis sua Luna caesis:: which being so wherefore should not we also esteem a wound, to be more moist in a full Moon, & more subjecteth to putrefactione, then in the decreace of the Moon, seeing that man is tender of flesh & far more subjecteth under the domination, & subiectione of the Moon, & the influences thereof, than those things, 
Man is subject unto all inflvences.  which are inanimate & have neither life, nor sensation: Above all these praecedente, reasons, and experiences it is manifest, & a common axiom, that all terrestrialle corpse, are ruled, & governed by the celestial, or supernal influences.  
Through all which foresayed occasions, the humours oftentimes being so corrupted, & polluted, after death there are certain apostemations four in diverse places of the body, yea & sometimes also, in some of the worthiest parts of the body, as in the Liver, in the Brains, in the milt, in the Lungs, or in any joints, according unto the imbicillitye of any of the parts of the body, which have been debile, & apt to receive such impurity of the body, which being therewith, out of all measure charged, expelleth from him the forsayed impure humours, in any of the said feeble parts, which thereafter is changed into purulent matter, the which there possessing more place, & making more concavitye, than is requisite, do expel from them certain faetide & venoumous vapours, & participate the same unto all the other worthiest parts, out of the which ensueth, Inquietude, Agues, Convulsions, or Spasmus, Phrenesye & in the end necessarily must follow death perceiving the wounds to wax black & dry, without being able to judge thereof, or to know the occasion, whereof this might proceed, notwithstanding how erudite, 
Corrodinge matter causeth many accidents.  & expert soever the Chirurgeon be, neither being possible for him how small soever the wound be to save the Patient, having no sign wherbye he may know, whether that venoumouse matter, hath implanted itself in any of the said worthiest parts, or not. Nether.  
Can the physicione cure all those,  
Which are incurable, and without repose.  

Constitution of the wounded.  Let us therefore now consider, & search out the peculiare, constitutions of the wounded: some there are which have little blood, towards the resanation of their wounds: others have to much which notwithstanding, is neither to the curation good enough, nor pure enough.  
Hypocrates speaking of those which have to little blood, in the 24. rule of the fourth section, in the sixth Epid: sayeth that those which have their entrails hot, & as it wear burning, their flesh could & have binn badly nourished, 
Which are unhealth same people.  which commonly we call unhealthsame people, who having received in their bodies some great wound, are most commonly always very difficult to be cured, for want of materials: which also we may see to be in aged persons, when as they are any where wounded, or by chance break their legs. We have also an excellent rule in Hippocrate which is, the 6. Aphorism, of the sixth sectione where he sayeth Hydropicorum, 
A notatable sentence.  & lentiginorum on other places he addeth thereunto Vlcera non facile sanantur: of those which are troubled with the Dropsy, because their blood is to clear, & waterishe: of the lentiginouse, because their blood is to sharp, or tart, & for that occasione can make no good combinatione, or healing: & whereby this might be occasion, to wit, whether it be through nature, or by the inordinate manner of life, of eating, or drinking, it becaused, as by the drinking of strong wines, or by eating of garlic, of Onions, of Porrhy, of powdered, or saulted meat, or of spices, as the suldiours wear wont to do, that is little belonging to our purpose. Nether can I here praetermit to speak, 
Perturbation of mind.  of the perturbance of the mind wherthroughe most commonly the Martialistes are very much afflicted, which through the generosity of their courage, if so be that in any assault, battle or skirmish, they have not valiant enough born themselves, or at the least not to the contentation of their Capitayne, & have not as Caesaristes behaved themselves, & fought & are therefore blamed, of those which are their, enviours & such as hate them, wherein they do so vehemently vex, & grieve themselves, that it ircketh them, & do so melancholize themselves therein, that they do wholly neglect themselves, desiring & vociferatinge for death rather than to live so miserablelye in dishonour. Wherefore also it may happen in the same, (being greevouslye wounded) that which happened to the Lord of Aussun, which was one of the most valiant, & most magnanimous, gentlemen of all France, of whom it was commonly for a proverb said, 
Hardiness of Assun.  the hardiness, and valour d'Aussun, causeth us to adhibite credit thereunto, who, through I know not what mischance, & suddayn astonishment in the first charge of the battle at dreux, there arrived & as it wear overwhelmed him such a disgrace, for the which he so grieved himself, and sorrowed that within few days thereafter with sorrow he died: having solemnly sworn, that he would never any more eat, or drink, with which resolution hedyed. Contrarily the soldiers sometimes, do so valiantly combat, by the which they wax so courageous, & do so joy themselves therein, & thereby do so exalt themselves, that their heart of ten-times is inflamed, & puffed up with pride of their victory, & honour which they reap, & enjoy. Which causeth great alteration, & change as well in the body of the one as of the other.  
And to speak truth, 
The perturba● are of grate effect & forces in our bodies.  such motions & turbation of the mind, are of great forces, in the body of man, they cause therein either great aegritudes & diseases, or else death: for if to be the motions, and perturbations of the mind, have power to increase the natural caloure, or to diminis he the same, of causing the same to draw in wards, or to expel the same outwards & to spread itself by the whole body: & such motions of the natural calour, which do reduce with them the vital spirits, & the blood, is an occasion of all diseases, & of health: there must then certainly subseqvute, that the said motions, and perturbationes of the soul, and mind, have all power in their hands of our health.  
So that it is even as Aristotle, Lib. de motu animalis Chap. 5. sayeth, that the motions, and turbations of the mind, do cause such a remotion and alteration of the natural caloure: as Hypocrates also testifieth the same unto us sect. 5. of the 6. Epidemiorum, & Galenus Cap. 5. secundae de Symptomatum causis and Chap. 5. of the second of methods; 
Through pertubations of the mind, a man may die.  where he demonstrateth, that there are many which through motion, and perturbatione of the minds have died: Wherefore Galen also, on the 14. rule, of the 4. section, of the sixth Epidemiorum, those which internally, have a sharp corrodent caloure, (wherefore by by so much the more we must prohibit the wounded) to abstain from ire, and choler, and from all turbations of the mind, wherbye the humours might be moved. The said Galen in his book de sanitate tuenda demonstrateth, that all turbations of the soul & all motions of the mind, do ingendre great quantity of Cholera whereby are caused great inflammations & fluxions in the wounded part and per conseqvence a Gangraena, and sometimes in the end a sudden death.  
Amongst all other turbations of the spirits, joy is that which ought to cause the least accidents unto our bodies, notwithstanding was the same so immoderate, and violent in Chilonio lacedemonico, 
Sudden death of joy..  & in Diagero Rhodiano, both the which so joyed themselves, perceavinge their children victoriously to return over their enemies, that of joy they both immediately, and suddenly died: for through such immoderate joy, the blood and the vital spirits of the Heart, are with such vehemency reverted from the Heart, and diffused and disperse, through the universal body that the Heart, is whole destitute of his natural caloure, & the person must necessarily fall into syncopizatione, or faintness, out of which commonly followeth death: 
Virtues of moderate joy.  But if the joy be moderate, it fortifyeth, and strengtheneth the animale, & the natural virtues, stirreth up the vital spirits, & suggerateth the digestion, and is consequently commodious for all the constitutione of man's body, wherethrough the joynctes, are thoroughly soacked, & moistened, because of the humiditye which is disperse through the whole massa of the blood, so that by this means, the wounds are better mundified, and incarnated and those parts do increase, and pingvifye.  

Effects of Cholera.  In like sort also doth Cholera, or anger, and yet also more, than the immoderate joy: because hereby, besides all this that in the spirits & humours of the body is caused great corruption and they through their great heat, & caloure chance to inflame, and by this means consequently, the whole habitude of the body is replete with putrid agues, how little sick soever the person be, which foresayed agues, if they chance to afflict the patiented unto death as it oftentimes happeneth, we most commonly then attribute the same unto his wound, 
Accidents of sorrow.  as if of the Chyrurgiane he had not been well handled, and not to the ague. Is it not evident enough unto us, what accidents are caused through sorrow, and grief, how healthful, & sound soever the person be which is therewith entrapped? for she so reserateth, and as it wear strictly occludeth the Heart, that by no means there can engendre any vital spirits, and how few soever there are, yet they may not be dispercede with the blood through the whole body, because the same is gross, and tenebrous, by the which the vital virtues, and all their accomplices, are debilitated: so that in the end a man is in his mind vexed, & hebede, 
The melancholic do hate themselves.  the Heart omitteth all joy, & pleasure, he odiously hateth himself, falling into desperatione, and raging, having lost his lively colour in his face, consuming the body, whereby oftentimes must follow death.  
It will not also be alienate unto our purpose, to the a poroving of my sayings, that I here recite that which the father of eloquence hath written ad Atticum, the words whereof are these: It wear an excellent matter my good friend Atticus, that man could live, without meat, or drink: but yet a far more excellellenter matter if so be without any envy, and hate we could Live: because those viands which we eat, do corrupt nothing else than our humours, but the traitorous envy, and sorrow, do consume us even unto the bones: Envye, & malice consume the bones, & corrode the entrails, as we plainly may behold: for man sickeneth, through some certain envy, & malice, of the which he by continuance of time dieth. Dost thou not know by experience, that two torturors, which will deprive a man of life, that the torturer of grief, and sorrow is the most cruelest, yea then of the Gluttonye? 
Effects of stupefaction.   
Nether may we here omit to recense, and speak of the obstupescence, & fear, wherewith the cowards, & faint hearted are oftentimes touched, and taken: This stupor causeth in us, the same accidents which the sorrow causeth but somewhat greater for the time: for this foresaid stupefaction, and fear, expulseth from him, & retracteth toward the heart (but with more festination, & more raptnes, than the sorrow) the blood & the vital spirits, wherefore we may perceive, that the face in the time of stupefaction, & fear, waxeth pale, and the external parts could, with trembling of the whole body: the Belly relaxateth, & the speech faileth, with a great reverberation of the heart, because that through the great quantity of blood, & of the spirits, which suddenly do retire thitherwards, being almost suffocated can very difficultly move itself, but greatly desireth to be refreshed, and discharged of such a sarcinatione, so that oftentimes there followeth death, because the blood being drawn towards the Heart, suffocateth itself there, & by that means the natural calor and the vital spirits being extingvished, 
Error of the vulgar, & common people.  without the which the life of man can not be preserved.  
If so be that any body being wounded, through perturbations of the mind do chance to die, the vulgar & common people, will not attribute the occasion of death unto chose precedent, or praenominated occasions, but far more to the negligence, and ignorance, of the Chirurgeon, which hath not intreacted him, as it wear convenient he had done, 
Fear and niceness do impeach health.  although that those which have a more sownder judgement of such occasions, will judge clane contrary thereunto, and others. The like also may be said of those, which will not allow of the will, and intent of the Chirurgeon, neither of any other remedies which wear commodious, and profitable for his health, being either to timorous, or delicate, to suffer any apertion, which for his disease had been necessary, to administre issue, & passage to some corrodent matter, or parcels of bones, that lie there praepared & ready to be taken out, which by their remansione in that place, do also corrupt the finitimate parts, do alter & permutate the remanent part of bone, and corrupt the Marrow, whereby the health, can not suddenly follow, as the Chyrurgiane is exoptatinge, & wishinge for the same, yea also & by this means oftentimes remain incurable, by which occasione the Chyrurgiane, 
The History of Duke d'Aumalle afterwards Duke of Guise.  with his Patient must hope for that which his Patient will not suffer, and yet notwithstanding is required of his disease. And to this end Du Bellay, reciteth in his memories, that the Duke d'Aumall, son to the Duke a Gvyse, being mortally wounded, with a splinter of a lance, which pierced his Eye, said to the chirurgeons, entreat, or handle not my son as a Prince, or mighty Lord, but as a Pioneer, or servant: which was also an occasione of his resanation, because he suffered, 
Contemplation of instruments.  that the tronchone of the Lance, which stuck clean through his head, to be with force, and violence drawn thereout.  
And if therefore we desire to enter into the contemplation of the diversityes of instrumementes wherewith the wounds are made, we shall then find sufficient occasion, to establish the unexpected death considering only the matter whereof the wounds are received, as well of the small, as great wounds. Those which have written of Agriculture, 
Wherewith the wound is made must be considered  or tillage, & Gardening, as Cato Plinius, & Columella say, that theris great difference, whether a tree be with an Iron knife engrafted, or with a knife of Bone. And we make little or no difference, whether our bodies are wounded with Lead, Iron or Brass, seeing that brass being mixed with the matter of our wounds resolveth itself into viriditye, which corrodeth the flesh, and causeth sometimes such an inflammation, that death thereafter followeth. Nether is it sufficient, that in short time, we have accommodated this mettle unto our ruin, but now by little and little we make it four cornered, which is far more dangerous, than if it wear round, because through the quadrangulatenes thereof, it rescindeth, cutteth & breaketh in pieces all that whereon it glanceth, without any small hope of resanatione: as also sometimes the bullets are fastened together with copperwyer by which means they cut a sunder all flesh, veins, arteries and Synnues, which are in that part.  
And because that those men, which commonly we must give account of our cures, 
A notable History of the daughter of Nerio.  are far more stirred up through examples than with any reason, what example is it of the daughter of Nerio which is described in the fift book of Epidem: Hippocratis, which being but of the age of 20. years, and being smitten jestingly, of one of her playfellows, and friends, with the palm of the hand, on her forehead, 
Note the circumstances of the blow & the death will seem more admirable.  is thereof grown mute, asthmaticke, or short of respiration and fallen into a convulsion, and trembling, and so the ninth day thereafter died. True will the backbiter or slanderer say that chanced through the commotion of the brains: what answer? of such a little blow, which with the palm of the hand was done, and of a maiden, friend and playfellowe, iestinglye striking a maid of twenty years? why should not then the same commotion of a varice, or bursted vain, not only in the Brains, but in the Breast also, which happeneth to a souldioure, who hath ridden the space of ten, or twelve hours long on a hard trotting Horse, and who before hath taken great pains, and travail, & hath led an inordinate manner of victitatione, the veins of the Lungs, & the Heart spanned, & extended, or swollen, with wine which is as it wear a corselet unto them, 
Wine is necessary for soldiers, and combatates.  wherwithe they adorn, & arm themselves, when as they assault their enemies, and especially in Battle, where they do straygne themselves with loud clamours and scritchinges, & with fighting, and furiously assaulting, not dallying, or playing with their enemies, but boldly encountering them with Lances, on their bodies, and thwacking the on the other with courtelasses, and with Pistols, and Muskettes, shooting each, at other, by that means to murdre on another, yea and they also which are completely harnessed, being lifted out of their saddles lie one the earth for the other Horses, 
Discommodities of wars  to trample one which not only one or two days have binn in great trouble but the whole before winter have suffered in tolerable could, and marched through, rain, wound hail, and Snow, or else have travailed the whole summer, through extreme heat of the sun, and have received all the injuries of time have been hardly lodged yea and sometimes under the resplendent stars, living on his prey which he hath gotten, sometimes half dressed, or raw, hot or could not tarrying the time, of the meals sometimes being replete with, filthy, stinking and corrupt viands, and for his drink harsh, naughty & tappinges of wine, or else foul and impure puddle, yea & stinking water, having consumed most of his time with nocturnal vigilations, labour, fear, stupor, anger, & melancholy.  

Many there are which for want of succour do die.  Others die because in time they are not dressed and succoured, which as yet not long a go is happened, unto our great sorrow, & lamentatione, to Capitayne Roux, who was shot in his cheek, & rising, to avoid a clistery, which was administered unto him, had such a fluxion of blood out of his wound, during the space of eight hours, without finding any Chyrurgiane which could restrain the blood, so that in the end he was constrained to yield his spirit, my partakers, or companion's, Ponget, le Gendre, and Hubert, and I, being charged to tarry with the King that night in the trenches: therefore the chirurgeons ought no more to be blamed, then when the disease is so deeplye rooted, that there is no more remedy or cure for the same, for as we say by the common proverb, or old adagye.  
To serotine doth Doctor then begin,  
When the disease to deep is rooted in.  

Many things are oftentimes wanting unto the wounded.  There are otherwise many things wanting by the wounded, wherewith we might succour them, & solace them as it is requisite we should. We see oftentimes great Lords lodged in an apart place where the winds blow on all sides, being destitute of old linen to dress them with, & have very small store of victuals, and drink, I here omit the poor soldiers, who being wounded must lodge on the earth.  

Objection.  Thereto may now be answered: I confess that sometimes of the year are intemperate, & unordinate, that the air also is infected, & corrupted & that the wounded also have want, & are destitute of many things, & briefly to conclude, that many of the above rehearsed things do fail: notwithstanding there are many cured without any accidents chauncinge to their wounds, and for whose sake take little pains, & have no great expenses, although they are very sorely wounded & contrarily, other of little & shallow wounds do die. 
Answer.  To this object I answer, that all wounds which seem to be large & ample, are not therefore mortal or perilous, as are the great carnal or fleshy dissolutions or wounds, wherein none of the worthiest parts are touched which are necessary to the life of man, wherein are neither hurt great Veins, Arteries or synnues, but which are only great, & cut in the flesh, as in the Buttock, in the calf of the Legs or in an Arm and yet notwithstanding be called a great wound, not being so dangerous, as the least punction of a synnue is, or the hurt of a great Vain or Arterye, or else a little fissure of the Cranium, or any small thrust in the Breast, or the inferior part of the Belly, piercing into the concavitye of the same. 
dangerous wounds  And if so be there wear any which of such wounds wear cured, being great wounds, not considering the apertione, but because of the wounded part they ought to be well disposed, to buste & strong, to resist such an evil, & impeach the accidents which happen thereunto, that they must also be rightly disposed& tempered without any of the worthy parts, or those which are necessary unto life being therwithe polluted or corrupted, and such may easily be cured: 
Necessary things a good curatione.  So that those which are not whole sound of body having received such a wound, are in great danger of death, as others considering the difference of the time and of the difference of the body, and body, and of parts thereof: there are some, which are of so good a temperature, that they with great facility are cured of such wounds, the which in others bodies wear mortal: Contrarily there are some persons, which have received a wound in some abject and not necessary part or joyncte, without profoundly penetrating the same, whereof notwithstanding they died, either through the constitution of the time or through the disposition of the body, the humours where of have their defluences towards the wounded part or else through any other occasions, here before alleged: but the vulgar people, can not compraehend all these circumstances, and considirations, as the chirurgeons do in such persons.  
For to speak truth we look on the time, 
The vulgar, and common people, can not so deeplye judge & consider any thing as the Chyrurgiane.  one the year, & day, numbered of people, all which have been the one as sorely hurt, or woundede as the other, yet for all that, those which we esteem most dangerously woundede, & we judge to be out of all hope, are sometimes first of all cured: Where of we do not so much admire, after we have after death anotomizede the dead corpses: for besides their wound we find, an other apparent occasione of death.  
As it is as yet in fresh memory happened to the Lord of Bellay Barron of Tovarce, 
History of my lord of of Bellay.  King at d'Ivetot, who having received a shot before Roven, or Roan in his left Arm, where of the focille of the Elbow was broken & the wound being in good suppu●ation, & yielding good matter, and the flesh very rubicund, & grained as we would desire, & the Arm remaining in his natural dispositione, as well above, as beneath, without any pain, or inflammatione, very few, or no agues at all adjoining thereunto, notwithstanding all which being brought to his house, twenty days after his wound received, is he fallen into a hot, venoumous, or furious ague, which accompagniede him unto the thirtieth day, in which day he died, how great pains, and labour soever the expertest Doctors of Physic, & chirurgeons and amongst other the right worshipful Mr. Amboyse Dr. of Physic, an ordinary Physicione to the King, have therein taken, whose experience is sufficiently known, the foresaid Arm with the wound always remaining is his former estate, 
The occasions of the death of the King of d'Iveror.  & disposition. Now the corpse being Anotomized, we perceived his Lungs to be clean corrupt, and replete with obdurate schirrouse ulcerations, his right Kidney also wholly polluted & much matter in his blather: which was the occasione of his death, & not the wound it is a thing therefore most certain, that if so be his entrails had binn sound without doubt he might have been cured of his wound, because the same neither of itself, nor of any other accidents was mortal.  

another History of my Lord of Gyuri.  The contrary hereof chanced, to the great contentation of all the Nobility, to my Lord of Gyuri who having received, a terrible shot, in his sinister shoulder, the entrance whereof was right in the jointure, the bullet having touched a great part of the apophysis of the bone of the Arm, piercing a long the Omoplate, & remaining, in the inferiore angle of the foresayed Omoplate, which bullet was happily extracted & drawn out by Mr. Lavenot, sworen Chyrurgiane to the King, which very excellently hath dressed him the first time: notwithstanding, he is of this great wound (I say great wound considering that part of the body) wholly cured, without perceiving therein any bad accidents.  

Nature cureth all diseases.  The which we must attribute, partly to the good Temperature compositione, and nature, (which must cure all diseases,) when as she is evil entreated of expert, and learned Physicians, and chirurgeons, and thereof aided, as very excellently hath done amongst others, the right worshipful Mr. Portaile, Counsellor, & chief Chirurgeon to the King, which as now is chief amongst us: & of Mr. Gillis des Rus, his Chyrurgiane, which dressed him: and we are here farther to note, and observe, that there may be an other which being wounded in the same place of his body, & shallbe treacted of the self same chirurgeons, and shall yet for all that die.  
And for the confirmatione, of all that which is before rehearsed, I will conclude this my Apology, through my Lords heereunder nominated, beginning with my Lord de Hallot de Montmorency, who being on horseback by the City of Rovan, received a shot of a canon, of the which his Horse died, & he being prostrated on the earth, his Leg being in dives pieces broken right under the joint of the Knee, notwithstanding all which, with his good disposition & nature hath combated against all the malice of time, & magnitude of the wound, being very successively cured of the right worshipful Mr. Martel, Chyrurgiane to the King, 
A●o the History.  who is very expert in all the operations of Chyrurgerye. contrarily, my Lord the Baron of Salignac, being wounded only with a simple shot of a handgunn, without any fracture of bones, in the end died thereof, all though notwithstanding he was assisted by the right worshipful Mr. Pouget, also one of the Kings chirurgeons and chief in Montpelliers having seen the hour, in the which the Gangraena chanced to his wound, many fluxions oppressed him, by which means he very difficultly could be cured: Which we must only attribute unto his temperature, which was not so good as in deed it wear to be exoptated it had.  
The most happy cure which Mr. des Hayes hath effected, 
Another History.  one also of the Kings chirurgeons, which is a very wise man in the art of Chyrurgerye on my Lord de Vic, gouvernoure for the King in St. Denis, who with diverse wounds was wounded, & especially in his head by the crown of the head, and one the sagittalle suture which was rescided clean overthwarte, & is thereof very ominously cured whereby is demonstrated unto us, what the good dispositione of the body can do, which combated against the injuries, and malice of time, and many other more, inquietudes, wear clean contrary unto him: wherein the foresaid Mr. des Hayes, hath used great consideration, to his perfect resanatione.  
The same also happened, in my Lord the Duke of espernon, 
another History.  who being wounded with a greateshott, which dilaniated a part of his inferior lip, had deprived him of certain of his teeth, and a part of his chawbone, penetrating, & taking his issue close by the vain jugularis, was cured of Mons t. le Gendre, & Surlin, chirurgeons to the foresaid Duke: out of the which we may plainly note, that not only the iunioritye, or youth and good temperature, are not only profitable unto the resanatione of wounds, but also the good constitutione of the time: For a little before (which was about the besieging of Chartres) them died most of all the wounded, 
The constitutione of the time is commodious to resanatione  how sound notwithstanding soever they wear, & how little soever they wear wounded: which partly we must attribute to the bad constitution of the time, as in deed at that time it was a disordered weather: because in a short time thereafter, all the wounded wear of their wounds cured: & amongst others my Lord the Earl of Flex, 
another History.  who in the end of the besieging, received a short of a Canon in the inferior part of his Belly, whereof it was whole plettered even unto the Peritoneum, the wound being almost the length of a foot, in longitude, of half a foot, in latitude, as Mr. Portayle & Samboyse can witness, which a long time administered help unto them. 
another History.  On the same time, my Lord of Favolle was cured, of a shot, which broke both the focilles of his Leg, a little above the ankle, which also was cured of the right worshipfulle Mr. Portaile, & d'Amboyse, & of the most ominous, & dextrous hand of Mr. Billarde, ordinary Chyrurgiane to the King, and of Mr. Byron.  
And for an invention, or practice, which we might say to be wholly against reason, amongst many others more which chanced at Chartres: there was the Chamberlain of my Lord the Earl of Chiverny, 
another History.  called the Pietmontois, who was wounded, on his head with a raper, whereby his Parietale was clean rescided through, yea & clean through the Dura, & Pia matter also, piercing the depth of ones finger into the substance of the Brains: whereof in the second dressing, clean through the dissolutione of the Cranium, there issued out as much of his Brains, as the quantity of the little finger in longitude, & crassitude thereof: notwithstanding all this is he in the presence of the right worshipful Mr. Le Febure, & Duret, sworn Physicians to the King, & other Doctors of this profession out of Paris, which are very expert in Chyrurgerye, which wear also assistants in this disease, & was of me completely cured, without having retained any accident, or impediment thereof: Divers chirurgeons of the city of Chartres stood hereby, & amongst the rest was Mr. Fransoys Cheaureau, & Michael Fauveau.  
At the same time trepanede M Gabriel du Tertre, 
another History.  a very expert Chyrurgiane in all his operationes, a certain woman which was threescore year of age, or more, who had a fracture in her occipitalle parts of the head: he had beside her a little page, or lackye in hands, who had his Os Petrosum brokene & split, and some part of the Parietale. In like sort also trepaned Mr. Gillis Pillier, a most expert Chyrurgiane, a Tripeseller, called Mr. Laurence, who had his membrane Dura matter cleft a sunder: all which foresayed patientes have received their complete resanatione: we must here also farther note, that within the space of two months therbefore all those which wear wounded in the Head died, notwithstanding all the secourse we could do them yet for all that they died suddenly.  
All which being noted, we must attribute the deaths of so many valiant Captains, 
Conclusione of the apology.  & worthy Lords, and brave soldiers, on such occasions, and disorders, and not on the fault as if they wear inconveniently treacted, & solicited, whether either it wear through young, or old chirurgeons. Or else we will conclude it rightly, with the Aphorism, & common proverb, it is always good Luck, as long as a man falleth not and breaketh his Neck.  
As Hesiodus said, sometimes is the day our mother, and sometimes our stepmother.  
End of the apology for the chirurgeons.   

THE INDEX OF THE MOST ESPECIAL, and notablest things contained in this work of Chyrurgerye, wherein the F denotateth the lease.  

A  

A Bullet sometimes, carrieth somethings with it into the body. Fol. 7.  
A bullet sometimes pierceth through the grissles. Fol. 8  
A bullet through his ponderousness sinketh downwards. Fol. 8  
A Chirurgeon may easily in searching a broken skull be deceived. Fol. 9  
A certain Ligature. Fol. 39  
A Chyrurgiane is the servant of Nature. Fol. 8  
A double inscisione in a double Hernia. Fol. 22  
A disease being cured, most commonly leaveth some relic behind it. Fol. 51  
A fingercase of Lattinne. Fol. 39  
A great wound is taken three manner of ways. Fol. 2  
A history of the daughter of Nerius. Fol. 20  
A head noughtilye formede. Fol. 50. & 53  
A monstruose Child. Fol. 36  
A notable history. Fol. 7  
A notable sentence. Fol. 50  
A remedy against the corrupting of the gums. Fol. 24  
A suture, or commissure what they be. Fol. 9  
A thumb being whole mutilate. Fol. 39  
A tryede remedy, for sinckinge of the palate. Fol. 25  
A true sign of the imbicillitye of any part. Fol. 50  
Accidents of a departed swelling. Fol. 2  
Accidents of the dropsy. Fol. 20  
Accidents which may ensue through cutting to high of the palate. Fol. 25  
Accidents proceeding out of bad phlebotomy. Fol. 27  
Accidentalle imbicillitye. Fol. 51  
Accidents of sorrow. Fol. 52  
Actualle Cauterye. Fol. 39  
Admonition concerning all great Apostemations. Fol. 18  
Admonitione for the letting of water or matter go from the Breast. Fol. 29  
Admonitione for the Chyrurgiane concerning the Polipum. Fol. 22  
Admonitione for the Chyrurgiane, concerning the extraction of young Children out of their mother's body. Fol. 35  
Admonitione in the applicatione of the actual Cauteryes. Fol. 42  
Admonitione concerning the bloody flux. Fol. 49  
Advice of Celsus. Fol. 5  
After what sort we ought to list out the trepanede bone. Fol. 12  
After what manner we must in sowing collocate the patient. Fol. 16  
After what sort we must thrust in again the Net. Fol. 16  
After what sort we ought to tie the teeth. Fol. 27  
Against rotten, hollow, and stinking teeth. Fol. 26  
Agreement of Mr. Gourmelin and Mr. Pare. Fol. 38  
All great wounds are dangerous. Fol. 51  
An excellent similitude. Fol. 5  
An other fashion of sowing of the belly, according to some men's sayings. Fol. 17  
An other condition, whereon we must consider, in the opening of a swelling. Fol. 18  
An excellent consideration to be had of the Paracentese. (20  
An other means to cure the Polipum. Fol. 22  
An instrument called Staphilagres. Fol. 25  
Antiades. Fol. 25  
Aneurisma is dangerous. Fol. 30  
An artery which of the Author was tied above the Aneurisma. Fol. 30  
An other practise concerning the Fistles of the Fundament. Fol. 35  
An astringent plaster on a fracture. Fol. 46  
An excellent observatione. Fol. 47  
Anglewyse figure the natural situation of the arm. (47  
An ague being cured, commonly leaveth and Empiema after her. Fol. 51  
Applicatione of diverse corrosives. Fol. 20  
Applicatione of Boxes. Fol. 32  
Applicatione of the superioure Ligature, in a broken Leg. Fol. 46  
Apertione in the Scrotum, by the thrusting through of a silk thread. Fol. 22  
Apertione in the Veins, and arteries, of the temples of the head. Fol. 29  
Apostemations found in the worthyeste parts of the body. Fol. 52  
Archigenes. Fol. 20  
Ascites is subject to Paracentese. Fol. 20  
Astringentia. Fol. 49  
Attractive ligature. Fol. 45  
Ancient chirurgeons cauterized the Varices. Fol. 31  
Autumn enemy to all pulmonicalle wounds. Fol. 51    


B  
Back badly formede. Fol. 50  
Bad signs. Fol. 3  
Basilica. Fol. 29  
Basilica is dangerous to be phlebotomized. Fol. 30  
Black vain. Fol. 29  
Bloodyeflixe. Fol. 47  
Bones of young Childrenes are bend inwardly. Fol. 12  
Bones subjecteth to all manner of diseases. Fol. 33  
Boxes may be applyede on all places of the body. Fol. 32  
Breast baddelye formede. Fol. 50  
broad, and narrow lancets. Fol. 28    


C  
Canckerous almonds, may not be tyede, nor cut of. Fol. 26  
Cauterizatione of the carries must be reiterated. Fol. 34  
Cauteryes to cauterize deeply. Fol. 40  
Cauteryes for those which are troubled with the lazarye. Fol. 40  
Cauteryes of Mr. Cheval. Fol. 41  
Cauterye of Mr. jaqves de Ville neufue. ibidem  
Cauterye of Mr. Rasse d'esneux ibidem.  
Cauterye which in all haste can be made. Fol. 41  
Cauterye in the Fibra. Fol. 42  
Celsus. 9 his manner of sowing of the Belly. Fol. 17  
Cephalica. 29 opened without danger. Fol. 30  
chirurgery is ancienter than Physic. Fol. 1  
Chyrurgerye must not rashly be effected. Fol. 8  
Choice of the place where we should extirpate any joincte. Fol. 37  
Circumiacent part in all ulcerations in cauterizing must be freed. Fol. 34  
Cleavinge of the Ears, and nostrils. Fol. 23  
Clisteryes made in diverse fashions. Fol. 49  
Coloboma, curtum. Fol. 23  
Columella. Fol. 24  
Comparison. Fol. 50  
Conclusione of the apology. Fol. 54  
Consideratione for the wounds of the head. Fol. 3  
Consideration to be had before the giving of report. Fol. 4  
Consideration, of Bullets. Fol. 6  
Consideratione in fastening of the Ligature. Fol. 45  
Consideratione on the time of the year. Fol. 51  
Constitutione of the wound. Fol. 52  
Constitutione of the time, is commodious to resanatione. Fol. 54  
Contemplatione of instruments. Fol. 53  
Continuamce of the manner rightly to phlebotomise. Fol. 28  
Continuance of raspinge of the carries of bones. Fol. 33  
Continuance of keeping open an ulceration. Fol. 43  
Convulsione in wounds is very dangerous. Fol. 2  
Corrosive with an inscisione in an Escara. Fol. 20  
Council of Hypocrates to draw of the water. Fol. 21  
Council of ancient professors, for the curing of the Varices. Fol. 31  
Corrodinge matter causeth many bad accidents. Fol. 52  
Cure of the tongue tying. Fol. 24  
Cure of Ranula, and reversion thereof. Fol. 24  
Cure of Aneurisma. Fol. 30  
Cure of a Varice. Fol. 31  
Cure of the putrefacted bones. Fol. 33  
Cure of the Panaris. Fol. 39  
Cure of a croockede finger. ibidem  
Cure of the Dysenteria. Fol. 48    


D  
dangerous wounds. Fol. 52  
Descriptione of Physic. Fol. 1  
Descriptione of the signs, of a dilaniated Cranium. Fol. 8  
Descriptione of sowing. Fol. 23  
Descriptione of the dropsy. Fol. 20  
Descriptione of Aneurisma. Fol. 30  
Descriptione of a Varice. Fol. 31  
Descriptione of horseleeches. Fol. 31  
Descriptione of horn boxes. Fol. 32  
Descriptione of natural bones. Fol. 33  
decently to wind. Fol. 45  
Descriptione of the bloodyeflixe. Fol. 47  
Difference between these three ulcerations Ateroma, Steatoma, and Meliceres. Fol. 18  
Difference of Boxes. Fol. 32  
Differences of the Cauteryes not properly taken. Fol. 93  
Differences of the Cauteryes simpletye taken. Fol. 40  
Differences of Cauteryes concerning their figure. 40 concerning their actione. ibidem  
Numbered. ibid. & manner of applicatione. ibidem  
Divers miscostruinges of this word Chyrurgerye. Fol. 1  
Divers accidents of the wounds of the head. Fol. 9  
Diploe what it is. Fol. 12 & 10  
Divers forms of future according to the diversity of the wound. Fol. 14  
discommodity of having the leg croockede. Fol. 47  
Discommodities of wars. Fol. 53  
Divers v operations. Fol. 26  
Divers considerations of cauteryes. Fol. 42  
Divers fictions. Fol. 50  
dressing of an extirpated member the blood being stenchede. Fol. 38  
dropsy of the breast and her tokens. Fol. 19  
Double band in phlebotomye. Fol. 28  
Dysenteria improperly taken. Fol. 47  
Dysenteria properly taken. Fol. 48    


E  
Ear vain. Fol. 29  
Ease good for all wounds. Fol. 51  
Effects of Cholera. Fol. 52  
Effects of stupefaction. Fol. 52  
Elevatorium. Fol. 7  
Elevatorium what it is. Fol. 13  
Entrance of the stomach being hurt. Fol. 4  
entrails being out of the Belly, must every one be again restored into his former place, and natural station, if it be possible. Fol. 16  
Error of common people Fol. 53  
Example. Fol. 8  
Example of Hypocrates. Fol. 8  
Example of Albucrasis. Fol. 8  
Example of the situatione of any disseasede part. Fol. 47  
excellenty of Chyrurgerye. Fol. 5  
Experience of the Author in extirpatione. Fol. 37  
Expulsive ligament. Fol. 44  
Extirpation of a joincte is very dangerous. Fol. 37  
Eye vain. Fol. 29  
Eye vain in the hand. Fol. 29    


F  
Fear and niceness do impeach health. Fol. 53  
Fifth incarnative suture. Fol. 15  
First way to cure the sinckinge of the palate. Fol. 25  
First kind of ligament. Fol. 44  
Fissures recollect themselves sometimes. Fol. 10  
Fistles of the fundament are either occult, or apart. Fol. 24  
Fitly to apply the Cauterye on the arm. Fol. 42  
Flesh, with flesh uniteth far sooner than skin, with skin. Fol. 14  
Fluxus Hepaticus. Fol. 48  
Foolish persuasione. Fol. 52  
For what occasione we ought to trepane. Fol. 10  
For great pain, and dolour in the teeth. Fol. 27  
For simple fractures. Fol. 45  
For reiterated cauteryes. Fol. 42  
Fourth incarnative suture. Fol. 15  
Four especialle conditions, which the Chyrurgiane must consider, before he open any tumour. Fol. 18  
Form and figure of ligamentes. Fol. 44  
From whence we must take our indication of the greatness of a wound. Fol. 18  
Furriers suture. Fol. 16  
Fire, the surest remedy for corruption of bones, (33    


G  
Gastroraphia. Fol. 16  
Gluttonye the occasione of much evil. Fol. 51  
Gross blood in phlebotomy doth nothing else then drop. Fol. 40  
Good doctrine for a Chyrurgiane. Fol. 8  
Gurgulio. Fol. 2    

H  

Hand, an instrument of instruments, Fol. 39  
Hardiness of Aussun. Fol. 52  
Hepatica. Fol. 29  
Hemorrhoidalle vain. Fol. 30  
High situatione of a broken member. Fol. 46  
Hindrance of the sanatione of the tongue tying. Fol. 24  
Hypocrates in his Porthet. Fol. 2  
Hypocrates hath been deceived. Fol. 9  
Hypocrates in prognosticis, and third book of diseases. Fol. 19  
Hypocrates concerning the carries of bones. Fol. 33  
Hips baddelye formede. Fol. 50  
History of Albucasis. Fol. 26  
History of Messalinus. Fol. 31  
History of Albucasis concerning the corruption of bones. Fol. 34  
History of Duke d'Aumalle, afterwards Duke of Guise. Fol. 53  
History of my lord of Bellay. Fol. 34  
History of my lord Gyuri. ibidem.  
Horseleeches are enemies to all pingueditye. Fol. 32  
How we shall espy the hayrye fissure. Fol. 9  
How great the apertione must be for trepanation. Fol. 11  
How to sow a wound conveniently. Fol. 14  
How we ought to make the apertione in the Empiema, with a lancet, or with a corrosive, Fol. 19  
How we ought to effect the opening of the dropsy. Fol. 20  
How we ought to make the apertion in the Hernia. Fol. 21  
How we ought to cure the Polypum. Fol. 22  
How we ought to cure the cloven lips. Fol. 23  
How we ought to cut the tongue tying in young child. Fol. 24  
How we ought to draw a tooth. Fol. 27  
How we should conveniently phlebotomize. Fol. 28  
How we should stench blood. Fol. 29  
How we should open the veins of the hands. and feet. Fol. 29  
How we should open an Arterye. Fol. 30  
How to cut away a bursten vain. Fol. 31  
How we should cause a horseleech to fall of. Fol. 32  
How we should restrain the blood after the horseleech hath sucked. Fol. 32  
How we should bind a patent fistle of the fundament. Fol. 34  
How we should situate the woman in dravinge a child out of her body. Fol. 36  
How we should conveniently extirpate a joincte. (38  
How we should tie the ligature to stop blood. Fol. 28  
How we should gentlelye take of a ligament from a fracture. Fol. 45  
hurts of the blather. Fol. 4  
Hydrocele. Fol. 22    


I  
Inanimate things feel effects of the moon. Fol. 51  
Incarnative suture and her fie manner of ways. Fol. 15  
Incarnative ligature. Fol. 44  
Indication how we may easily, or difficultly attain to the bloody flux. Fol. 48  
Infusione of Rhubarbe. Fol. 49  
Inscisione must be done, before inflammatione. Fol. 11  
Instructione how to work wisely. Fol. 7  
Incision of the Scrotum. Fol. 21  
Instructione to know whether the extirpated member must be stenchede or let bleed. Fol. 38  
Intent of the Author. Fol. 5  
Intention of the Author concerning the fistles of the fundament. Fol. 24  
Intent of the Author of Phlebotomye. Fol. 27  
Inventione of sciences. Fol. 1  
Inventione of the Cauteryes is through nature shewede unto us. Fol. 40  
In phlebotomising of those which are phrensye, we ought to make but a small apertione. Fol. 28  
In what persons the drawing of water must be used, and in what it must be left. Fol. 20  
In what places the scarifications may be made. Fol. 21  
In what persons the operatione of the haremouthes is dangerous. Fol. 23  
In what parts the Cauteryes must be applyede. Fol. 40  
In what parts we ought to apply the Seton. Fol. 43  
Irregulated season of the year, aultereth our bodies. Fol. 51  
It is surer to make an incision, in the fistles of the fundament then to tie them. Fol. 35  
judgement must be providently given. Fol. 4  
jugularis vena. Fol. 29    


K  
Knowledge by sight of a corrupted bone. Fol. 33  
Knowledge through tacture. ibidem  
Knowledge by the matter. Fol. 33    


L  
Legs of a difficult resanatione. Fol. 50  
Ligament must be broader than the disease. Fol. 44  
Ligament for the disease. Fol. 44  
Ligament for the part. Fol. 45  
Ligamentes for shot wounds, with crushing of bones. Fol. 46  
Ligatione of Epoulis, is more certain than incision. Fol. 23  
Ligature, or inscisione in the Almonds. Fol. 26  
Ligatione of the Elbow, after Phlebotomye. Fol. 29  
Lips which are cleft in two places. Fol. 23  
Lip vain. Fol. 29  
Liqvefactinge fire. Fol. 41  
Liver being hurt. Fol. 3    


M  
Magnitude of the putrefactione in bones. Fol. 33  
Malignant air polluteth the heart. Fol. 51  
Man is subject to all influences. Fol. 51  
Manner to cure Epoulis. Fol. 23  
Manner how to trepane unto the membrane. Fol. 13  
Manner of applicatione of the Cauterye on the corrupted bone. Fol. 35  
Manner to draw forth a dead Child. Fol. 36  
Mamner to draw out the aqvosity out of a dead Child's body. ibidem.  
Manner to elevate again the sunk, and descended Matrice. Fol. 37  
Manner to praeserve the Cauteryes. Fol. 42  
Manner to apply the transforatione in the neck. Fol. 43  
Manner of dressing of all broken legs, which may be compared, with the manner of all ancient chirurgeons. Fol. 46  
Many men praeserve their lives against the opinion of the Chyrurgiane. Fol. 6  
Many there are which for want of succour do die. (53  
Many things are oftentimes wanting unto the woundede. ibidem  
Master Dvione an expert Physitione. Fol. 49  
Matter of the Vlceratione Ateroma lieth enclosed in a little blather. Fol. 19  
Matter of the Potentialle Cauteryes which are now adays in use. Fol. 41  
Master Paré of Cauteryes, ibidem  
Matter of the Ligamentes. Fol. 44  
Means how to know whether the bullet have taken any thing with him. Fol. 7  
Means to draw out the head of a dead child, as yet remaining in the womb. Fol. 36  
Means to find the place in the head to cauterize. Fol. 42  
Means to keep open a Fontanelle. Fol. 43  
Means to make the expulsive Ligament. Fol. 44  
Mediana. Fol. 29  
Medicamentes to be eschuede in the bloodyflixe. Fol. 49  
Membranouse Ligament, or tungeryinge. Fol. 24  
Method how to trepane. Fol. 12  
Mideler eefe being hurt. Fol. 4  
milt being hurt. Ibidem    


N  
Natural situation, which of the ancient professors is called the right situatione. Fol. 47  
Nature cureth all diseases. Fol. 54  
Nail which heaveth up itself may be pricked through. Fol. 21  
Necessary things to a good curatione. Fol. 53  
No Polypus can through Chirurgery be cured. Fol. 22  
Nose vain. Fol. 29  
Note your form of your trepane in the skull. Fol. 12  
Note the circumstances of the blow, and the death will seem more admittable. Fol. 53  
Nue invented trepanes. Fol. 13    


O  
Observatione of the Author. Fol. 9  
Observatione in seething of the sault to the Cauterye. Fol. 41  
occasion of corruption of Bones. Fol. 33  
occasion of the death of the king d'Ivetot. Fol. 54  
Occasione of the Dysenteria. Fol. 28  
On what manner in drawing forth a bullet we must collocate the patiented. Fol. 6  
On what sort we must draw a bullet out of a joincte. Fol. 7  
On what sort the Author tied the arterye on the Aneurisma. Fol. 31  
One disease following an other is very dangerous. Fol. 51  
Opinion of Paulus Aegineta. Fol. 5  
Opinion of ancient professors touching incision. Fol. 9  
Opinion of Hippoc. touching the curing of fractures. Fol. 10  
Opinion of Hippoc. concerning trepanatione. Fol. 10  
Opinion of Avicenna touching trepanatione. Fol. 11  
Opinion of Celsus concreninge the apertiove of apostemations. Fol. 17  
Opinion of Hypocrates concerning Empiema. Fol. 29  
Opinion of Gvido concerning the fistles of the fundament. Fol. 35  
Organicke parts which are cut of can not be cured again. Fol. 2  
Other considerations to be had in prognostication. Fol. 3    


P  
Paroulis and the means how to cure it. Fol. 23  
Parts of Physic. Fol. 1  
Parts of Therapeutica. ibidem  
Patesyede fistles of the fundament. Fol. 34  
Patient lying on his back can very well suffer phlebotomve. Fol. 29  
Paulus Aegineta. Fol. 8  
Penned suture. Fol. 15  
Perturbations of mind. Fol. 52  
Perturbationes are of great effect in our bodies ibidem.  
Phlebotomye why it is difficult. Fol. 27  
Phlebotomye must be done with discretion in the bloodyeflixe. Fol. 49  
Place of the apertione in the ulceration Empiema. Fol. 19  
Place where we may cut the Varices. Fol. 31  
Places whereon we apply the Cauteryes. Fol. 42  
Plain, and smooth situation of a broken member. Fol. 45  
Potential Cauteryes and matter thereof. Fol. 41  
Practice of the Author. Fol. 13  
Practice of the Mr. Floris Philips. Fol. 20  
Practice, of the Author concerning teeth. Fol. 26    


Q  
Qvantitye of Ligamentes. Fol. 44    


R  
Ranularis vena. Fol. 29  
Raw fruit causeth the bloodyeflixe. Fol. 48  
Reason why a member must be extirpated in the joincte. Fol. 37  
Reason for those which extirpate a member, above, or below the joincte. ibidem.  
Reason of Aristot: concerning the bloodyeflixe. Fol. 47  
receit of the Velvet Cauterye. Fol. 41  
Redivisione of the first kind of Ligament. Fol. 44  
remedies against the bleeding of the descidede palate. Fol. 25  
remedies against the tumefactione Antiades. Fol. 25  
remedies for a wounded arterye. Fol. 30  
remedies against putrefaction in an Aneurisma. Fol. 31  
remedies against the carries. Fol. 24  
remedies to consolidate the ulcerations. Fol. 49  
renewing of Phlebotomye. Fol. 29  
Root, and original of the Polypus. Fol. 22    


S  
Salvatella. Fol. 29  
Saphena. Fol. 30  
Sciatica vena. ibidem  
second incarnative suture. Fol. 15  
second genetalle suture. ibidem  
second means to cure the sinckinge of the palate. Fol. 25  
second Kind of Ligament. Fol. 44  
second kind of attractive Ligament. Fol. 45  
Seton properly taken. Fol. 43  
Seton improperly taken. ibidem  
Seton with the use thereof ibidem. ibidem  
Signs contrary to prognostication. Fol. 3  
Signs of a deadly fracture of the skull. Fol. 3  
Signs when the brains are hurt. ibidem  
Signs when the backbone is hurt. Fol. 3  
Signs when the heart is wounded. ibidem  
Signs to know when the Trepane is entered into the Diploe. Fol. 12  
Signs when matter is fully ripened. Fol. 17  
Signs to know the ulcerations Ateromata, Steatomata, and Melicerides. Fol. 18  
Signs of the matter which is retained in the Breast. (19  
Signs of a waterburste. Fol. 21  
Signs of a venoumouse Polypus. Fol. 22  
Signs of a tractable Polypus. ibidem  
Signs of a counterfissure. Fol. 9  
Signs to know when the swollen almonds exulcerate, with their remedies. Fol. 26  
Signs of an Aneurisma. Fol. 30  
Signs of a venoumouse horseleech. Fol. 31  
Signs of a good horseleech. ibidem.  
Signs wherbye the Chirurgeon is hindered, to draw forth the Child out of his mother's body. Fol. 35  
Signs of a dead Child in his mother's body. Fol. 36  
Signs of suppuratione. Fol. 17  
Signs when the small guts are hurt. Fol. 48  
Signs when the great intestines are hurt. Fol. 48  
Similitude. Fol. 50  
Situatione of the patiented, in the extirpation of a joincte. Fol. 37  
Situatione of a joincte must be naturalle, & accustomede. Fol. 46  
Six things which in sowing must be considered. Fol. 13  
small guts being cut a sunder, are incurable. Fol. 16  
Some men die of a small wound. Fol. 4  
Some men are cured containing the bullet in their body. Fol. 5  
Some wounds are esteemed small, which indeed are great, and dangerous. Fol. 51  
Sowinge may not with any violence be done in the lips of a wound. Fol. 14  
Sowinge of the haremouth. Fol. 15  
Sowinge of the belly must not be done as the other sutures. Fol. 16  
Staphilocauston what it is. Fol. 25  
Stomach, and guts being hurt. Fol. 4  
Subdivisione of the second inferior ligature in a broken leg. Fol. 46  
Substance of actual Cauteryes. Fol. 46  
Substance of the Cauteryes which the ancient professors used. ibidem  
Sudden death proceeding of joy. Fol. 52  
Suffocatione of the natural caliditye. Fol. 50  
Superfluous comestione, & bibacitye, are not so oppugnant unto us, as is Melancholy, or sorrow. Fol. 52  
Supernaturalle teeth. Fol. 27  
Sutures of the head variable. Fol. 9  
Suture in a separated place is needless. Fol. 13    


T  
Teeth which grow forth with an acuitye. Fol. 27  
Teeth which stand forth out of their order, are broken, and wherein as yet remaineth some little piece ibidem.  
Temporal vain. Fol. 29  
Tendones are dangerous to sow, and why. Fol. 13  
The apertione of a wound must always be recurvatede downwards, if it be possible. Fol. 46  
The apertione in the Hernia, is better to be done above then under. Fol. 22  
The Cauterye maketh a greater escara, than the hole of the plaster. Fol. 42  
The Child must with the head be drawn out of his mother's body, if it be possible. Fol. 36  
The Chyrurgiane can not cure all men. Fol. 50  
The Chyrurgiane is sometimes to late sent for. Fol. 10  
The disease of a shortened tongue. Fol. 24  
The disease of the tongue after a callice ulceratione. ibidem.  
The figure, or form of wounds. Fol. 2  
The forms of inscisione in phlebotomye. Fol. 28  
The hand must be shut. Fol. 47  
The head may not to strictlye be bound, and the reason why. Fol. 20  
The hip must be stirrede. ibidem  
The joincte being extirpated, we must dissolve the ligature. Fol. 38  
The leg must be kept right. Fol. 47  
The manner of making an apertione. Fol. 29  
The means to draw out the Polypus. Fol. 22  
The means to cure the palate. Fol. 24  
The Melancholic do hate themselves. Fol. 52  
The operatione to cure these three ulcerations, Ateroma, Steatoma, and Meliceres is nothing different. Fol. 19  
The place where, in the Paracentese the apertion must be made. Fol. 20  
The skull is the natural opercle to the brains. Fol. 22  
The second instruction in drawing out of bullets. Fol. 6  
The second kind of dropsy. Fol. 20  
The sutures, & temples of the head may sometimes be trepaned. Fol. 11  
The third instruction. Fol. 6  
The tumour Empiema externally sometimes demonstrateth itself. Fol. 19  
The vain in Phlebotomye must be inscided in her middle. Fol. 28  
The vain being well opened, yet through the affrightednes of the patiented she droppeth. Fol. 29  
The wounded feeleth not his wound at the first dressing. Fol. 6  
The wounded which have been in the drivelinge climate, can very difficultly be cured. Fol. 51  
Theridamas may not be any flesh on the bone when we intend to saw it of. Fol. 38  
Theridamas is but one expette Chirurgeon in all France. Fol. 50  
They which are of most experience may judge of the points, concerning the bloodyflixe. Fol. 48  
Third incarnative suture. Fol. 15  
third general stitching. Fol. 15  
Those bullets which stick fast in the bones, are very difficult to be drawn out. Fol. 7  
Those who are deprived of any joincte are very subject unto the bloodyeflixe. Fol. 47  
Three sorts of sowing by the ancient professors. Fol. 15  
Three sorts of dropsy. Fol. 20  
Three things to be considered in the collocatione of a broken member. Fol. 46  
Threfoulde means to cure the fistles of the fundament. Fol. 34  
Three things which make Childebirthe difficult. Fol. 35  
Through perturbatione of mind a man may die. Fol. 52  
Thrusts in the synnues are dangerous. Fol. 2  
To apply the Cauteryes on the Legs. Fol. 42  
To apply the potential Cauteryes. Fol. 42  
To make a horseleech violently to suck. Fol. 32  
To know whether the Hernia be on both sides. Fol. 21  
To know an imbicille part. Fol. 52  
To mollify the skin in Phlebotomye. Fol. 28  
To restrain blood through ligature. Fol. 38  
To remove superfluous fingers. Fol. 39  
To regenerate any substance is the work of Nature and not of the Chyrurgiane. Fol. 23  
To stench blood by Cauteryes. Fol. 38  
Tractatione of the returned Epoulis. Fol. 23  
Transforaiion with an actual Cauterye. Fol. 43  
Transforatione in the Scrotum. Fol. 43  
trepaning of the Breast bone. Fol. 29  
Two sorts of applicatione of the Seton. Fol. 43  
Two sorts of Ligamentes in generally. Fol. 44  
Two things to be considered in dressiinge of a wound. Fol. 45  
Two sorts of inferior ligamentes. Fol. 46  
tying, and third means to cure the palate. Fol. 25    


V  
Veins which burst within the brains. Fol. 9  
Vain of the forehead. Fol. 29  
Vena pupis. Fol. 29  
Vena illiaca. Fol. 30  
Vena poplitis ibidem  
Velvet Cauteryes. Fol. 41  
Virtues of the actual Cauterye. Fol. 38  
Virtues of the doggedayes. Fol. 51  
Virtues of moderate joy. Fol. 52  
Vlceratione Ranula, and original thereof. Fol. 24  
Vnhealthsame people. Fol. 52  
Use of judgement. Fol. 1  
Use, and inventione of sowing. Fol. 12  
Use of the pipe in the dropsy. Fol. 20  
Use of the palate. Fol. 25  
Use, situatione, & compositione of the Almonds. Fol. 25  
Use of these times concerning the Varices. Fol. 31  
Use of the horselaeches. Fol. 32  
Use of small Boxes. Fol. 32  
Use of the actual Cauteryes. Fol. 41  
Use of the potential Cauteryes. Fol. 41  
Vtilitye of Inscione. Fol. 7  
Vtilitye of the Cauteryes. Fol. 40  
Vtilitye in constitutione of a broken part. Fol. 46  
Wa. Fol. 24  
Vulgar, & common people, can not so deeply judge, & consider of any thing, as the Chyrurgiane. Fol. 53    


W  
We can not live without air. Fol. 51  
We may not trepane that bone above the Eyebrows: Fol. 11  
we may not sow the lips of an inflamed wound. Fol. 14  
we may not provoacke the canckerouse excrescence of the gums, Fol. 23  
we may not trepane the sides of the head. Fol. 11  
we may right well trepane, on the sides of the sutures. ibidem  
we must endevoure to draw forth the bullet at the first dressing. Fol. 6  
we must not at any time leave our patientes. Fol. 6  
we must dilate the wound if the bone be dilacerated. Fol. 7  
we must in operatione diligently consider, that we do not chance to break any Veins, Synnues, Arteries, or Tendones. Fol. 19 & 2  
we must let the cloven Lip, after the operatione is done somewhat bleed. Fol. 23  
we must nip of the Needles ends sticking in the cloven Lips. Fol. 23  
we must not purge in the doggedayes. Fol. 51  
we oftentimes find hard matter in the ulcerations Ateromata, Steatomata, and Melicerides. Fol. 19  
we ought not all times to trepane. Fol. 20  
what a Chyrurgiane ought to know, in giving of his judgement. Fol. 2  
what astringent medicamentes, the patient must use in the bloody flux. Fol. 48  
what Apostemations will be opened before their complete ripeness. Fol. 17  
what form the searching iron must be of. Fol. 9  
what form a Needle must have. Fol. 14  
what form the thread in sowing of a wound must have. ibidem  
what his meats, & drinckes must be. Fol. 48  
what manner of thread and needle we must have in sowing of the belly. Fol. 17  
what Ligamentes are. Fol. 43  
what is reqvired to the resanatione of wounds. Fol. 52  
what is to be understood by the left lip of a wound. Fol. 17  
what places may bear trepanatione. Fol. 11  
what qvantitye of bone we ought to trepane. Fol. 12  
what sometimes deceaveth the Chyrurgiane. Fol. 7  
what this word operatione signifieth. Fol. 1  
what we ought to judge out of the accidents of wounds. Fol. 2  
what we ought to do the Dura matter being crushed. Fol. 13  
what we ought to do when the discendede & swollen gut can not be again restored into his place. Fol. 16  
what we ought to consider before we make the apertione in an Apostematione. Fol. 17  
what we ought to esteem of the bleeding of the gums. Fol. 27  
what we ought to do when we perceive the fainting to approach the phlebotomised patiented. Fol. 29  
what we ought to do before we use the horse leeches. Fol. 32  
what when aught to do in a deep Carie. Fol. 34  
what wounds of the hip are. Fol. 2  
when, and why the external parts must be extirpated. Fol. 37  
when that the report must be done. Fol. 4  
when the Apostemation must be opened with a Cauterye. Fol. 17  
when we ought only to use the exfoliative trepane. Fol. 12  
when we ought to open an Apostematione. Fol. 17  
when we ought to cut away the palate. Fol. 24  
whereby we may know the windy-hernia. Fol. 21  
wherein consisteth the danger of drawing forth of bullets, Fol. 5  
whereon we ought to consider before phlebotomy. Fol. 27  
whereon we ought to consider in the applicatione of the Cauteryes. Fol. 42  
whereon in ligatione we ought to consider. Fol. 44  
wherewith the wound is made must be considered. Fol. 53  
which are strange things. Fol. 5  
why the wound in extracting of a bullet mus● be dilated. Fol. 6  
why we may not in the resowing of a wound draw the lips close together.  
why the thread in sowing of a wound may not be dyede. Fol. 14  
why we file teeth. Fol. 2●  
why we must give a staff to them in their hands which we Phlebotomize. Fol. 28  
wine is necessary for all combattantes. Fol. 53  
womb being hurt. Fol. 4●  
wounds of the Lungs. Fol. 3  
wounds of the Kidneys. Fol. ●  
wounds that are dangerous. Fol. 2  
wounds that be difficult to cure. ibidem  
wounds which are esteemed incurable. ibidem   
FINIS.    

IMPRINTED At Dort by Isaac Canin. M.D.xcviij.